SV1P1 Service

RS3t
Service Manual
Volume 1
August 1998
U.S. Manual PN: 10P56980201

A-4 Size Manual PN: 10P56980211
10P56985101
10P56985111
EFisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc., 1987--1998.

All rights reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Components of the RS3 distributed process control system may be protected by U.S. patent Nos. 4,243,931; 4,370,257; 4,581,734. Other
Patents Pending.
RS3 is a mark of one or more of the Fisher-Rosemount group of companies. All other marks are property of their respective owners. The
contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy,
they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their
use or applicability. We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products without notice.
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.

12000 Portland Avenue South
Burnsville, Minnesota 55337 U.S.A.
Telephone:
TWX/Telex:
FAX:
(612) 895-2000
192177
(612) 895-2044
Comment Form
RS3t Manuals
Service Manual
10P569802x1
Please give us your feedback to help improve this manual.

Never
Rarely
Sometimes
Usually
Always
configuring
making changes or enhancements
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
operating the system
______
______
______
______
______
troubleshooting
other __________________________
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
1. Do you actually use this manual when

you are:
D
2. Does this manual answer your questions?
3. What could be changed in this manual to make it more useful?
Errors and Problems: Please note errors or problems in this manual, including chapter and page number
of affected information, if applicable; or send a marked-up copy of the affected page(s).
May we contact you about your comments?
j Yes
j No
Name
______________________________________________
Company
______________________________________________
Phone
______________________________________________
Date
______________________________________________
Fisher-Rosemount FAX #: (612) 895-2044
Thank you!
Name
Place
stamp
here
Company
Address
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.

RS3 User Documentation
Mail Station G30
12000 Portland Avenue South
Burnsville, MN 55337
U.S.A.
Seal with tape.
SV: v
RS3t
Service Manual
About This Manual
The Service Manual provides information on service, calibration,
maintenance, and troubleshooting RS3 hardware. The Service Manual
provides a brief idea of the function of each device, along with details of
cabling, LEDs, jumpers, and fuses. Installation planning data is covered
in the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP).
Devices are arranged in functional groups within the Service Manual. To
quickly find specific information, use the Index. You can look up a
device by name, part number, or the legend printed on the silkscreen.
An abstract of the service data appears in the Service Quick Reference
Guide (SQ), which is small enough to be readily portable.
Factory Repair Items

Parts of devices that are listed as replacement parts are permitted to be
replaced in the field with the stated replacement part as designated in
the user documentation. Any part of a device that is not listed as a
replacement part is not to be replaced in the field, but must be
returned to the factory for repair.
Changes for This Release

D
RS3: Service Manual
Numerous corrections and minor revisions have been made

throughout the manual.
Information on the RS3 Millennium Package (RMP), the System
Power Supply Unit, and the MPC5 Controller Processor with
4 Meg NV Memory has been incorporated into the manual.
Information of the MAI16 and Loop Power Module has also been
incorporated.
About This Manual
SV: vi
Revision Level for This Manual

RS3 Service Manual releases are independent of software releases.
New equipment and information is added to the Service Manual in each
release, and older material is updated. You should always use the latest
version of the Service Manual.
Refer to This Document:
For This
Software
Version:
All
Title
Service Manual
Date
Part Number
August 1999
10P569802x1
NOTE: The x in the part number is 0 for US size (8-1/2 x 11 inches) or

1 for A-4 size.
References to Other Manuals

References to other RS3 user manuals list the manual, chapter, and
sometimes the section, as shown below.
Sample Entries:
For ..., see CC: 3.
Manual Title
Chapter
For ..., see CC: 1-1.

Manual Title
Chapter-Section
Abbreviations of Manual Titles

AL = Alarm Messages
BA= ABC Batch
CB= ControlBlock Configuration
CC= Console Configuration
DT = Disk and Tape Functions
IO = I/O Block Configuration
OP= Operators Guide
OV= System Overview and Glossary
PW= PeerWay Interfaces
RB= Rosemount Basic Language
RI = RNI Installation Guide
RR= RNI Release Notes
RP = RNI Programmers Reference Manual
SP = Site Preparation and Installation
SV = Service
RS3: Service Manual
About This Manual
SV: vii
Reference Documents
Prerequisite Documents
You should be familiar with the information in the following documents
before using this manual:
NOTE: The x in the part number is 0 for US size (8-1/2 x 11 inches)
and 1 to 9 for A-4 size.
System Overview Manual and Glossary
Software Release Notes, Performance Series 1
1984-2640-21x0
10P56870106
Related Documents
You may find the following documents helpful when using this manual:
ABC Batch Software Manual
1984-2654-21x0
Alarm Messages Manual
1984-2657-19x1
ABC Batch Quick Reference Guide
1984-2818-1103
Configuration Quick Reference Guide
1984-2812-0808
Console Configuration Manual
1984-2643-21x0
ControlBlock Configuration Manual
1984-2646-21x0
I/O Block Configuration Manual
1984-2645-21x0
Operators Guide
1984-2647-19x1
PeerWay Interfaces Manual
1984-2650-21x0
Rosemount Basic Language Manual
1984-2653-21x0
RNI Programmers Reference Manual
1984-3356-03x1
RNI Installation Guide
1984-3357-02x5
RNI Release Notes
10P574830x1
Site Preparation and Installation Manual
10P569902x1
Service Quick Reference Guide
10P57000201
Software Discrepancies for Performance Series 1
10P56870304
Software Loading and Upgrade Procedure,

Including Batch, Performance Series 1
10P56870206
User Manual Master Index
RS3: Service Manual
1984-2641-21x0
About This Manual
SV: viii
RS3: Service Manual
About This Manual
Contents of Volume 1
Chapter 1:
Power
Section 1:
AC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-1-5
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) LEDs and Controls . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charger Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charger Card Jumpers and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charger Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Measuring Output Current .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) LEDs and Fuses . . . . . . . . .
MTCC Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTCC Remote Power Supply Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Remote Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 for I/O Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Operator Interface Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 for Operator Interface Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2
1-2-6
1-2-7
1-2-8
1-2-9
1-2-11
1-2-12
1-2-12
1-2-13
1-2-15
1-2-16
1-2-16
1-2-18
1-2-18
1-2-19
1-2-20
1-2-22
1-2-23
1-2-25
1-2-26
1-2-27
1-2-28
1-2-30
1-2-31
1-2-31
1-2-31
1-2-31
1-2-32
1-2-33
1-2-34
Section 2:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: x
Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution Block Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-34
1-2-34
1-2-34
1-2-35
1-2-36
1-2-37
1-2-37
System Power Supply Units
..............................
1-3-1
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet and AC Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet DC Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Housing in a Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Power Supply in a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a Power Supply Housing from a System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a Power Supply from a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1
1-3-3
1-3-5
1-3-6
1-3-7
1-3-7
1-3-8
1-3-11
1-3-12
1-3-13
1-3-13
1-3-13
1-3-14
1-3-15
1-3-16
1-3-16
1-3-16
1-3-18
1-3-18
1-3-19
1-3-20
1-3-21
1-3-21
DC Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1
DC Power Distribution Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Output Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Output Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant DC Power Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Distribution System Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3
1-4-5
1-4-6
1-4-7
1-4-7
1-4-8
1-4-10
Section 5:
Redundant Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1
Chapter 2:
PeerWay
Section 1:
Electrical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1
Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xi
Section 2:
Section 3:
Chapter 3:
PeerWay Tap Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PeerWay Tap Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding an Electrical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax PeerWay Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax PeerWay Cable Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Twinaxial Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-6
2-1-6
2-1-7
2-1-9
2-1-11
2-1-12
Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1
Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Repeater/Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Repeater/Attenuator Jumpers and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Star Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding an Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Fiber Optic Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3
2-2-5
2-2-6
2-2-8
2-2-8
2-2-9
2-2-10
2-2-13
2-2-13
Hybrid PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1
PeerWay Extender (PX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PX System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drop Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the PX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal/Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2
2-3-5
2-3-6
2-3-6
2-3-6
2-3-7
2-3-7
2-3-7
2-3-8
2-3-8
2-3-8
2-3-9
Consoles
Section 1:
Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles
and System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multitube Command Console Keyboard Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Keyboard and Enhanced Engineering Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball Keyboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touchpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4
3-1-5
3-1-6
3-1-6
3-1-7
3-1-8
3-1-9
3-1-10
3-1-11
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xii
Section 2:
Section 3:
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keyboard Electronics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P50840004
1984--3222--0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--2889--0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--1978--000x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--3222--1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--2889--1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: IIYAMA Vision Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: ViewSonic 17GS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Mag Innovision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Sony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Conrac 7122 and 7241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Black Video or Black Bars on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Power-up Diagnostics Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Barco CD 551 and ICD 551 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-17
3-1-18
3-1-19
3-1-20
3-1-20
3-1-22
3-1-23
3-1-24
3-1-24
3-1-25
3-1-26
3-1-26
3-1-26
3-1-26
3-1-27
3-1-27
3-1-30
3-1-32
3-1-33
3-1-34
3-1-34
3-1-35
Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console .
3-2-1
Pedestal Command Console Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pedestal Command Console Loop Callup Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Command Entry Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Configuration Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Trackball Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Rotating (Alphanumeric) Keyboard . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Keyswitch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Disk Interface Card (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Command Console Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Printer Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-5
3-2-5
3-2-6
3-2-8
3-2-11
3-2-11
3-2-11
MiniConsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1
MiniConsole Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-4
RS3: Service Manual
3-1-12
3-1-12
3-1-13
3-1-13
3-1-14
3-1-15
3-1-16
Contents
SV: xiii
Section 4:
Section 5:
MiniConsole Power Regulator Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MiniConsole PeerWay Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole OI Processor Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator Raster Test Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Printer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Floppy Interface (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Floppy Interface (SCSI) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote MiniConsole Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-6
3-3-6
3-3-6
3-3-7
3-3-9
3-3-9
3-3-10
3-3-11
3-3-11
3-3-11
3-3-12
3-3-13
3-3-14
3-3-16
3-3-16
RS3 Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1
RS3 Operator Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ROS CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: Iiyama Vision Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board (10P56910001) . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS3 Network Interface (RNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TP/8 Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS II Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS II Network Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transceiver Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPS Software Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2
3-4-3
3-4-3
3-4-3
3-4-4
3-4-6
3-4-7
3-4-8
3-4-9
3-4-11
3-4-11
3-4-12
3-4-13
3-4-13
3-4-14
3-4-14
3-4-15
3-4-16
3-4-17
Disk and Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1
Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quantum QM32100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum Thunderbolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM Deskstar 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDrive LPS 270S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDriver LPS 105S 3.5-Inch 102 Meg Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDriver 80S 3.5-Inch 100 MB Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDriver Q280 5.25-Inch 100 MB Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2
3-5-5
3-5-6
3-5-7
3-5-8
3-5-9
3-5-10
3-5-11
3-5-13
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xiv
Section 6:
Section 7:

Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Drive Cabling and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Drive Jumper and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-15
3-5-16
3-5-16
3-5-18
3-5-20
3-5-23
3-5-24
3-5-25
Printers
.................................................
3-6-1
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Vertical Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Error Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Jumpers and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Modification for 30.5 Cm Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Modification for Lowercase Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Printing Half Page of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2
3-6-2
3-6-5
3-6-6
3-6-6
3-6-9
3-6-9
3-6-10
3-6-11
3-6-13
3-6-14
3-6-15
3-6-16
3-6-16
3-6-17
3-6-17
3-6-18
3-6-18
3-6-20
3-6-20
3-6-21
3-6-22
3-6-23
3-6-23
OI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-1
Electronics Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Output Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Output Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage 10P52820001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage 1984--0660--0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Interface LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Interface Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-2
3-7-4
3-7-5
3-7-5
3-7-7
3-7-10
3-7-14
3-7-15
3-7-17
3-7-18
3-7-20
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xv
OI Power Supply LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply Jumpers for a System Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68020 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pixel Graphics Video Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphics Video Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Interface LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Interface Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--3301--000x SCSI Board 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--1140--0001 OI SCSI Host Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Nonvolatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS3: Service Manual
3-7-22
3-7-23
3-7-23
3-7-24
3-7-25
3-7-27
3-7-29
3-7-29
3-7-29
3-7-30
3-7-32
3-7-33
3-7-33
3-7-34
3-7-36
3-7-37
3-7-38
3-7-39
3-7-41
3-7-42
3-7-44
3-7-45
3-7-46
3-7-49
3-7-51
3-7-52
3-7-55
3-7-56
3-7-56
3-7-58
3-7-60
3-7-62
3-7-65
3-7-66
3-7-67
3-7-69
3-7-74
3-7-77
3-7-78
3-7-81
Contents
SV: xvi
Chapter 4:
ControlFiles
Section 1:
ControlFile Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
ControlFile Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Data Bus Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Terminator II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Terminator Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3
4-1-5
4-1-5
4-1-7
ControlFile Support Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1
PeerWay Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Buffer LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Buffer Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Buffer Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test Points . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coordinator Processor (CP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-IV Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-I and CP-II Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP (Coordinator Processor) Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP LEDs, Test Points, and Enable/Disable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-IV+ (10P50870004 and 1984--4164--0004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-IV (1984--4064--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-II (1984--1594--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-I (1984--1448--0001 or 1984--1240--0001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NV (Nonvolatile) Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NV Memory and Powering Down the ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory: LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2
4-2-4
4-2-5
4-2-6
4-2-7
4-2-9
4-2-11
4-2-12
4-2-13
4-2-16
4-2-18
4-2-19
4-2-20
4-2-21
4-2-24
4-2-27
4-2-29
4-2-31
4-2-34
4-2-34
4-2-35
4-2-36
4-2-37
4-2-38
4-2-39
4-2-41
4-2-44
4-2-46
4-2-48
4-2-49
4-2-49
4-2-49
4-2-50
4-2-52
4-2-53
4-2-53
Section 2:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xvii
Section 3:
Controller Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1
MPC (MultiPurpose Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MPC5 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC II Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC I Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC5 Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC I Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC (MultiLoop Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC (Single Strategy Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC (Contact Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX (Multiplexer Controller Processor)
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX and PLC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX and PLC Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor LED Sequence on Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC, CC, MUX, and PLC Controller Processor LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor Enable/Disable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2
4-3-5
4-3-7
4-3-10
4-3-12
4-3-12
4-3-15
4-3-18
4-3-19
4-3-20
4-3-21
4-3-24
4-3-24
4-3-24
4-3-25
4-3-26
4-3-26
4-3-27
4-3-28
4-3-29
4-3-29
RS3: Service Manual
4-3-30
4-3-30
4-3-31
4-3-32
4-3-32
4-3-33
4-3-35
4-3-36
4-3-37
4-3-39
Contents
SV: xviii
Contents of Volume 2
Chapter 5:
Serial and Analog I/O
Section 1:
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog Card Cage Address Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Communication Wiring . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Transfer Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Transfer Card LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Transfer Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card (OBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Card Cage Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2
5-1-3
5-1-4
5-1-6
5-1-7
5-1-8
5-1-10
5-1-10
5-1-13
5-1-16
5-1-17
5-1-18
5-1-21
5-1-21
5-1-22
5-1-23
5-1-24
5-1-28
5-1-30
5-1-31
5-1-34
5-1-35
5-1-36
5-1-37
5-1-37
5-1-37
5-1-38
5-1-40
5-1-41
5-1-43
5-1-44
5-1-45
5-1-46
5-1-51
5-1-52
5-1-53
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xix
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
Analog Extender Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Junction Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-53
5-1-54
5-1-57
5-1-57
Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage FIC Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm FIC Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Termination Board Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Termination Board Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Extender Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
5-2-4
5-2-5
5-2-6
5-2-7
5-2-8
5-2-8
5-2-10
5-2-12
5-2-13
5-2-14
5-2-15
5-2-16
5-2-17
5-2-19
5-2-20
5-2-22
5-2-23
5-2-25
5-2-26
5-2-27
5-2-28
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1
MUX FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Power Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Power Regulator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Communication Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Front End Modules (FEMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple and Voltage FEM and Universal Voltage FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2
5-3-4
5-3-5
5-3-5
5-3-7
5-3-7
5-3-9
5-3-10
5-3-14
5-3-16
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1
PLC FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC FlexTerm Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Controller Processor Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Port I/O Card Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2
5-4-8
5-4-9
5-4-10
5-4-11
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xx
Section 5:
Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card RS-232 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card RS-422 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-13
5-4-13
5-4-15
5-4-16
5-4-17
5-4-19
5-4-20
5-4-22
5-4-22
5-4-23
5-4-24
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware . . . . . . . . .
5-5-1
MultiLoop FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Strategy FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Strategy FlexTerm Analog Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Strategy FlexTerm Contact Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Strategy FlexTerm Contact Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Extender Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Unit (OBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-2
5-5-4
5-5-5
5-5-5
5-5-6
5-5-7
5-5-8
5-5-10
5-5-11
5-5-12
5-5-13
5-5-13
5-5-14
5-5-14
5-5-15
5-5-16
5-5-17
5-5-18
5-5-19
5-5-20
5-5-21
5-5-24
5-5-25
5-5-26
5-5-27
5-5-29
5-5-30
5-5-32
5-5-33
5-5-34
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxi
Chapter 6:
Multipoint I/O
Section 1:
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1
Multipoint I/O Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Scanning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy and Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel FIM Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring:
Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundancy . .
6-1-4
6-1-4
6-1-5
6-1-6
6-1-6
6-1-6
6-1-8
6-1-8
6-1-8
6-1-10
Communication Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1
Remote Communications Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote Communications Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Communications Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Fiber Optic Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2
6-2-4
6-2-6
6-2-6
6-2-8
6-2-9
6-2-9
6-2-9
6-2-10
6-2-11
6-2-14
6-2-15
6-2-15
6-2-16
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1
Direct Discrete Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Direct Discrete Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3
6-3-4
6-3-8
6-3-9
6-3-10
6-3-13
6-3-14
6-3-16
6-3-16
6-3-21
6-3-22
6-3-23
Section 2:
Section 3:
RS3: Service Manual
6-1-10
6-1-11
Contents
SV: xxii
Section 4:
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Output Points . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Input Points . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays . . . . . .
Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM LED Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-25
6-3-26
6-3-28
6-3-31
6-3-33
6-3-36
6-3-37
6-3-38
6-3-39
6-3-40
6-3-41
6-3-43
6-3-43
6-3-44
6-3-45
6-3-46
6-3-48
6-3-48
6-3-49
6-3-50
6-3-51
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1
Multipoint Analog I/O Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAIO16 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shield Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Point Type Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at Termination Panel .
Marshaling Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring -- Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring -- Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2
6-4-4
6-4-7
6-4-7
6-4-7
6-4-9
6-4-9
6-4-10
6-4-10
6-4-11
6-4-12
6-4-13
6-4-14
6-4-15
6-4-15
6-4-16
6-4-16
6-4-17
6-4-19
6-4-19
6-4-20
6-4-21
6-4-22
6-4-25
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxiii
Section 5:
Section 6:
MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAIO Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Module (LPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Module Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO FIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIM Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-Point Input FIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-Point Output FIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-Point Input FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO FIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO FIM LED Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single FIM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant FIM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Failed FIM Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-27
6-4-28
6-4-29
6-4-32
6-4-32
6-4-33
6-4-33
6-4-35
6-4-38
6-4-39
6-4-41
6-4-41
6-4-42
6-4-43
6-4-44
6-4-46
6-4-48
6-4-49
6-4-50
6-4-50
6-4-50
6-4-51
Multipoint I/O Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1
Standard Remote Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2
Intrinsic Safety (IS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-1
Elcon Series 1000 IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Elcon Panel for Discrete Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel Discrete Cross Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Discrete IS Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel for Analog Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel Analog Cross Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Analog IS Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL IS Termination Panel for Discrete Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping I/O points to MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-3
6-6-6
6-6-7
6-6-8
6-6-9
6-6-10
6-6-10
6-6-11
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-13
6-6-14
6-6-18
6-6-19
6-6-19
6-6-19
6-6-19
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxiv
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Fault Detection (LFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel A Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel B Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL IS Termination Panel for Analog Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Analog Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-19
6-6-20
6-6-20
6-6-21
6-6-23
6-6-24
6-6-25
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-29
6-6-29
Chapter 7:
PeerWay Interface Devices
Section 1:
System Resource Unit (SRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1
Section 2:
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1
RS-232C Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS-422 Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 Asynchronous Protocol Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3
7-2-6
7-2-8
7-2-9
7-2-11
7-2-12
7-2-13
7-2-14
7-2-15
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1
HIA Direct Connection of PeerWays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HIA Connection of PeerWays Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for the HIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Connection Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure HIA Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIA Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3
7-3-5
7-3-7
7-3-7
7-3-7
7-3-8
7-3-9
7-3-11
VAX/PeerWay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1
QBI Hardware Kit for the MicroVAX II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QBI Hardware Kit for the VAX 3xxx and VAX 4xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-3
7-4-4
7-4-5
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxv
Section 5:
Section 6:
VAX 3xxx/VAX 4xxx -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 (CPU Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-6
7-4-7
7-4-8
7-4-10
7-4-13
7-4-15
Diogenes Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1
OI NV Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Interface Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Interface TI Communications Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Communication Convertor Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-4
7-5-5
7-5-6
7-5-7
RS3 Network Interface (RNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-1
RNI PeerWay Node Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RNI System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crash Dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI LEDs and Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-3
7-6-4
7-6-6
7-6-6
7-6-6
7-6-7
7-6-8
7-6-9
7-6-10
Chapter 8:
Calibration
Section 1:
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1
Serial I/O Analog Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking Calibration of Serial I/O Analog Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Serial I/O Analog Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial I/O Analog Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Serial I/O Analog Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Serial I/O Analog Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-2
8-1-3
8-1-4
8-1-5
8-1-6
8-1-7
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1
Temperature Input FIC Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thermocouple Sensor Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple Sensor Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-2
8-2-6
8-2-7
Calibrating Pulse Input FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1
Pulse Input FICs Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-2
Calibrating MUX FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1
Entering Calibration Constants for Multiplexer FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMs . . . . . . . . .
8-4-2
8-4-3
8-4-5
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxvi
Section 5:
Section 6:
Calibrating 4--20 mA FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and Calibrating the 4--20 mA FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of RTD FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking RTD FEM Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-7
8-4-8
8-4-9
8-4-10
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-1
Analog I/O Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking Calibration of Analog I/O Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Non-Isolated Analog I/O Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Isolated Output FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points Setup Using Current Input . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points Setup Using Voltage Input . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-3
8-5-4
8-5-6
8-5-7
8-5-8
8-5-9
8-5-10
8-5-10
8-5-11
8-5-12
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output and

Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-1
Checking and Calibrating MAIO Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and Calibrating MAIO Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-1
8-6-4
Chapter 9:
Maintenance
Section 1:
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-1
Cleaning Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning Floppy Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Console Fan Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Console Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Cabinet Filters and Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet Door Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet Fan Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage, HIA, SCI, and SRU Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Cabinet Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Active Hardware Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining the CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Glare Filter on a Command Console CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Degaussing a Command Console CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Diagnostic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Off-Line Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-4
9-1-4
9-1-5
9-1-6
9-1-6
9-1-8
9-1-9
9-1-9
9-1-9
9-1-10
9-1-11
9-1-12
9-1-13
9-1-14
9-1-14
9-1-15
9-1-16
9-1-17
9-1-18
9-1-19
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxvii
Section 2:
Section 3:
ControlFile Power Regulator Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ControlFile Power Regulator Card Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Interface (OI) Power Regulator Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the AC/DC Power Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the AC/DC Power Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Backup Cards in Redundant Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Redundant Coordinator Processor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Redundant Controller Processor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Installing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling Fan (System Power Supply Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-19
9-1-21
9-1-24
9-1-26
9-1-27
9-1-28
9-1-29
9-1-29
9-1-30
9-1-31
9-1-32
9-1-32
9-1-32
Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-1
AC/DC Power Supply Battery and Charger Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OI NV RAM Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command and Basic Command Console Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Console Hard Disk Drive Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Console Keyboard, Tape, or Floppy Disk Removal . . . . . . . . . . . .
FlexTerm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-2
9-2-4
9-2-5
9-2-6
9-2-9
9-2-11
9-2-11
9-2-13
Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1
Hand Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1
9-3-2
9-3-2
9-3-3
9-3-3
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting

Section 1:
Troubleshooting the Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-1
Section 2:
Troubleshooting a PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-1
PeerWay Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plant Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen General Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Interval Controller (TIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIC Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-1
10-2-2
10-2-3
10-2-9
10-2-12
10-2-13
10-2-13
10-2-13
10-2-14
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxviii
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broadcast Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point-To-Point Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Column 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Columns 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Lower Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample PeerWay Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Fault Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detecting a PeerWay Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the PeerWay Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Fault Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosing a Console or SCI PeerWay Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosing a ControlFile PeerWay Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With One ControlFile on the PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With Multiple ControlFiles on the PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Cable Fault Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Twinax PeerWay Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Fiber Optic PeerWay Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-15
10-2-15
10-2-15
10-2-19
10-2-21
10-2-23
10-2-25
10-2-29
10-2-30
10-2-31
10-2-33
10-2-35
10-2-36
10-2-37
10-2-37
10-2-39
10-2-40
10-2-41
10-2-42
Troubleshooting Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-1
General Console Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Console Power-Up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Off-Line Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Controller Memory Dump Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Memory Dump Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Node Dump Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Confidence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting OI Card Cage Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-2
10-3-3
10-3-8
10-3-12
10-3-12
10-3-14
10-3-15
10-3-16
10-3-19
10-3-20
10-3-21
10-3-22
10-3-24
Troubleshooting ControlFiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4-1
ControlFile Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wipe Bubble Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4-7
10-4-9
Troubleshooting Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-1
Restoring Redundant FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting Procedures for Serial Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Procedures for Analog Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-2
10-5-3
10-5-8
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxix
Field I/O Status Screen (FIC Status Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIC Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBL Controller and Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-13
10-5-18
10-5-21
Troubleshooting PeerWay Interface Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6-1
OI Bubble Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6-1
Appendix A:
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Appendix B:
IEC and ISO Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Appendix C:
Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Section 6:
Appendixes
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxx
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
10P56987101
10P56987111
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 1:
Power
Section 1:
Section 2:
RS3: Power
AC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-1-5
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) LEDs and Controls . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charger Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charger Card Jumpers and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charger Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Measuring Output Current .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) LEDs and Fuses . . . . . . . . .
MTCC Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTCC Remote Power Supply Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Remote Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 for I/O Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Operator Interface Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2
1-2-6
1-2-7
1-2-8
1-2-9
1-2-11
1-2-12
1-2-12
1-2-13
1-2-15
1-2-16
1-2-16
1-2-18
1-2-18
1-2-19
1-2-20
1-2-22
1-2-23
1-2-25
1-2-26
1-2-27
1-2-28
1-2-30
1-2-31
1-2-31
1-2-31
1-2-31
1-2-32
1-2-33
Contents
SV: ii
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
RS3: Power

Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution Block Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-34
1-2-34
1-2-34
1-2-34
1-2-35
1-2-36
1-2-37
1-2-37
..............................
1-3-1
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet and AC Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet DC Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a Power Supply Housing from a System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a Power Supply from a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1
1-3-3
1-3-5
1-3-6
1-3-7
1-3-7
1-3-8
1-3-11
1-3-12
1-3-13
1-3-13
1-3-13
1-3-14
1-3-15
1-3-16
1-3-16
1-3-16
1-3-18
1-3-18
1-3-19
1-3-20
1-3-21
1-3-21
DC Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1
DC Power Distribution Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Output Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Output Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant DC Power Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Distribution System Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3
1-4-5
1-4-6
1-4-7
1-4-7
1-4-8
1-4-10
Redundant Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1
Contents
SV: iii
List of Figures
Figure
RS3: Power
Page
1.1.1
AC Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2
1.1.2
Single Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-3
1.1.3
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-4
1.2.1
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Front Panel . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3
1.2.2
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Functional Diagram . . . .
1-2-5
1.2.3
Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-7
1.2.4
Accessing the Battery Charger Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-10
1.2.5
Battery Charger Board Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-11
1.2.6
Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-13
1.2.7
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Functional Diagram .
1-2-15
1.2.8
Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Panel Indicators . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-17
1.2.9
10P5645000x and 1984--3023--000x MTCC Remote Power Supply . .
1-2-18
1.2.10
OI Remote Power Supply Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-21
1.2.11
DC/DC Power Supply Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-23
1.2.12
Redundant DC/DC Power Supply Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-24
1.2.13
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-26
1.2.14
Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-29
1.2.15
10P5503 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-30
1.2.16
10P5409 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-33
1.2.17
10P5701 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-35
1.2.18
10P5756 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-36
1.3.1
System Power Supply Unit with Two Power Modules Installed . . . . . .
1-3-2
1.3.2
System Power Supply Unit (Housing Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-3
1.3.3
DC Output and Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-3
1.3.4
Input and Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers . .
1-3-4
1.3.5
Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-5
1.3.6
System Cabinet DC Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-8
1.3.7
Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units . . . .
1-3-10
1.3.8
Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power

Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-11
1.3.9
Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-11
1.3.10
Alarm Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-12
1.3.11
Input and Auxiliary Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-15
Contents
SV: iv
RS3: Power
1.3.12
Power Supply Housing AC Input and Auxiliary AC Output

Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-16
1.3.13
Replacing the Fan and Grill in a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-17
1.4.1
Standard DC Power Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1
1.4.2
Redundant DC Power Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2
1.4.3
DC Power Distribution Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-4
1.4.4
DC Distribution Bus and DC Output Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-5
1.4.5
Non-redundant DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-7
1.4.6
Redundant DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-8
1.4.7
Dual DC Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-9
1.5.1
Examples of Redundant System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1
1.5.2
Redundant AC Power and Load Sharing DC Power Supplies . . . . . . .
1-5-2
1.5.3
Redundant AC Power, Load Sharing DC Power Supplies, and

Redundant Power Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2
Contents
SV: v
List of Tables
Table
RS3: Power
Page
1.1.1
AC Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
1.1.2
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-5
1.2.1
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Parts Replacement . . . .
1-2-4
1.2.2.
Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Indicators and Controls . . . . . . .
1-2-8
1.2.3
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-8
1.2.4
Battery Charger Board Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-11
1.2.5
Battery Charger Card Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-12
1.2.6
Battery Charger Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-12
1.2.7
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Parts Replacement .
1-2-14
1.2.8
Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-17
1.2.9
10P5664000x AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Fuse .
1-2-17
1.2.10
MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-19
1.2.11
OI Remote Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-22
1.2.12
DC/DC Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-24
1.2.13
DC/DC Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-25
1.2.14
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-26
1.2.15
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-27
1.2.16
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out
..............
1-2-31
1.2.17
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-31
1.2.18
..............
1-2-34
1.2.19
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-34
1.2.20
Distribution Block Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-37
1.3.1
System Power Supply Unit Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-21
1.4.1
DC Output Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-6
1.4.2
Power Cable Plugs and Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-8
1.4.3
Standard Color Codes for Wiring and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-10
Contents
SV: vi
RS3: Power
Contents
SV: 1-1-1
Section 1:
AC Input
This section describes the AC power distribution system.
AC Entrance Panel
The AC Entrance Panel (10P5662000x and 1984--0303--000x) supplies
AC power to the DC power supplies and distributes AC power to the
fans in the cabinets. The AC entrance panel is designed as a single or
dual feed entrance to use with one or two AC input power sources.
NOTE: The System Power Supply Unit does not require an AC entrance
panel.
Table 1.1.1 shows the AC input wire connections. Figure 1.1.1 shows a
functional diagram for the AC distribution system through the AC
entrance panel.
Table 1.1.1. AC Input Wiring
Terminal
115 VAC Wiring
230 VAC Wiring
L1
Hot
Line 1
L2/N
Neutral
Line 2
Ground
Ground
CAUTION
If the caution symbol shown on the left is present on the
cabinet door (near the handle), then multiple mains supply
circuits are located within the cabinet. Disconnect all
mains supplies prior to servicing.
CAUTION
Use supply wires suitable for 115C above surrounding
ambient if input current exceeds 20 amperes.
RS3: Power
AC Input
SV: 1-1-2
Output Lamp
Input Lamp
AC Line
Filter
Primary AC
F1
F2
0.5 A
0.5 A
Control
Alarm
Relay
Contacts
Secondary AC
This section only on Dual AC Entrance Panels
AC Lines to
AC/DC
Supplies
and Fans
Figure 1.1.1. AC Distribution System
RS3: Power
AC Input
SV: 1-1-3
Single Feed AC Entrance Panel

Power distribution for a single AC input panel includes an internal filter
to reduce the incoming AC line noise. Three output breakers protect up
to three AC/DC power supplies. The output breakers can also be used
for AC cooling fans.
Figure 1.1.2 shows a Single Feed AC Entrance Panel. The lamp labeled
INPUT indicates AC input to the system. The lamps labeled
OUTPUT indicate AC out of each of the three circuit breakers (10-amp
for 230 VAC and 15-amp for 115 VAC).
WARNING
For personal safety, use a circuit breaker lockout device to
ensure that an opened breaker is not accidentally closed
while you are working on the line.
Input Lamp

AC
Input
Plastic Guard

ON
ON
L1
AC Breaker
Output Lamp
ON
L2/N
Input Terminal Block

AC Output
AC Output
AC Output
Figure 1.1.2. Single Feed AC Entrance Panel
RS3: Power
AC Input
SV: 1-1-4
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel

A Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel accepts AC from two independent
sources. If the primary (upper) AC line drops out, the secondary (lower)
AC line automatically switches in within 500 milliseconds. The 500
millisecond delay prevents arcing during switching if the two AC lines
are out of phase. If primary AC power is restored, the relay switches
back automatically from the secondary AC source to the primary AC
source. Alarm output relay contacts indicate which AC line is being
used. Note that this provides dual power sources but no duplication of
circuit breakers, etc. Figure 1.1.3 shows a dual feed AC entrance panel.
If fuse F1 or F2 is blown the associated INPUT lamp goes out, which
indicates that power cannot be switched over from one AC line to the
other.
WARNING
Dangerous AC voltage may be present even if the AC IN
indicator is not lit. If the input fuse is blown, AC may still
be present at the input terminal block.
The lamps labeled OUTPUT indicate AC out of each of the three
circuit breakers (10-amp for 230 VAC and 15-amp for 115 VAC).
WARNING
For personal safety, use a circuit breaker lockout device to
ensure that an opened breaker is not accidentally closed
while you working on the line.
AC Input
Terminal Block
Primary
AC Input
Secondary
AC Input
Input Lamps

ON
Input Fuses
AC Output
Plastic
Guard
Output Lamp
Alarm Output
Terminal Block

ON
ON
AC Breaker
Common
Normally
Closed
Normally
Open
Figure 1.1.3. Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel
RS3: Power
AC Input
SV: 1-1-5
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses

The state of the Alarm Output is determined by which power input is
being applied. The state of the Alarm Output under primary or
secondary power is:
Power
Normally Open Contacts
Normally Closed Contacts
Primary
closed
open
Secondary
open
closed
Table 1.1.2 gives fuse data for the Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel.
Table 1.1.2. Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Characteristics
F1
F2
C09140--0017
MDQ 1/2
-- --
0.5 A 250 V Slow Blow
RS3: Power
AC Input
SV: 1-1-6
RS3: Power
AC Input
SV: 1-2-1
Section 2:
Power Supplies
This section gives the hardware descriptions and functional diagrams
for these power supplies:
D
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup)
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup)
Multitube Command Console (MTCC) Remote Power Supply
OI Remote Power Supply
DC/DC Power Supply
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply
Remote I/O Power Supply
Remote Power Supply
Distribution Blocks
NOTE: Information on System Power Supply Units is in Section 3.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-2
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup)

The AC/DC Power Supply (with battery backup) (10P5658000x,
1984--2298--000x and 1984--0298--000x) provide 30 volts DC to the DC
bus. AC/DC power supplies are rack mounted in the console cabinet.
The --2298 supply is an internal redesign of the --0298 supply; they are
completely interchangeable.
CAUTION
The power supply unit is heavy, approximately 32 kg (70 lb).
CAUTION
The top surface of the power supply may be hot.
Figure 1.2.1 shows the power supply front panel. Table 1.2.1 gives parts
replacement data.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-3
OUTPUT
CURRENT
TEST
BATT
30
FAULT
NORM
PS
FAULT
BATT
ON
BATT
FAULT
OFF
PS
FAULT
LINE
RTN
NEUT
AC IN
POS
GND
PS OUTPUT
Figure 1.2.1. AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Front Panel
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-4
CAUTION
Use only the following rechargeable sealed lead-acid
batteries in the power supply. Always replace batteries in
pairs. Do not mix batteries from different manufacturers.
D
Portalac
PE 7.0--12R
Panasonic LCR 12V6.5BP
Table 1.2.1. AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
10P5658000x
1984--0298--000x
1984--2298--000x
1984--0390--000x
The 10P5658000x supply is CE-compliant
1984--2298--000x
1984--0298--000x
Supplies are fully interchangeable with same voltage

and frequency
1984--0298--000x
1984--2298--000x
Supplies are fully interchangeable with same voltage

and frequency
1984--2298--000x
or
1984--0298--000x
1984--0390--000x
Comment
Either supply may replace a --0390 AC/DC Power

Supply (Without Battery Backup) but the BATT
switch must be turned OFF.
NOTE: The PS FAULT alarm jumper (HD1) must be
set to 2--3 because the --0390 contacts are Normally
Closed (N.C.).
Figure 1.2.2 shows the functional diagram. The AC/DC power supply
uses a ferroresonant core transformer for partial regulation. The primary
and secondary of the transformer have selectable taps for 50 or 60 Hz
line frequency. The primary also has taps for 115 or 220 volts AC input.
The third winding on the primary side is isolated and has a parallel
capacitor. This provides transformer output voltage regulation by
providing extra voltage to the circuit from the power stored in the
resonant circuit. The third winding also inherently limits current.
NOTE: Because the transformer is self-regulating, no other power
conditioning should be necessary. Do not use an isolation transformer,
voltage regulating power source, or uninterruptible power supply with a
ferroresonant transformer as its output device unless it is rated at least
3 kVA for each standard AC/DC power supply it powers. Use of a
smaller ferroresonant transformer can result in oscillations.
An optional Battery Charger card in the power supply slowly charges
the backup batteries, protects against momentary AC voltage drops,
and contains contacts for external alarms if the output voltage drops
below 26 volts DC. The Battery Charger card and batteries are not
required for DC output from the power supply.
A 10 segment LED display shows the current output of the power
supply in 3-amp increments.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-5
30 VDC 22 A
176,000
UF
60 Cycle
F2 30 A
Output
Current
LEDs
25
Ohm
Current
Sense
Turns ON
Below 2
Amps
50 Cycle
115 V
or
220 V
Battery
OFF
Switch
Control
Circuits
Control
Circuitry
24 Hour
Automatic
Test
+
--
30
27
24
21
18
15
9
6
3
Battery &
DC Fail
Alarm
Contacts
Battery
Charger
16 A
Battery
Test
Resistor
DC Out
Manual
Test
Pushbutton
F1 50 A
12 V Battery
12 V Battery
Battery Charger
Card
Figure 1.2.2. AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Functional Diagram
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-6
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts

The front panel provides two sets of terminals for battery fault and
power supply fault alarm contacts. The cards are shipped with the
contacts set to be normally open (N.O.). They may be changed to
normally closed (N.C.) by changing jumper positions on the Battery
Charger Card (1984--1283--000x). The appropriate contact will be
closed (or opened) if the red BATT FAULT or PS FAULT LED is lighted.
The supply will continue delivering power while the alarm condition is
present. Figure 1.2.3 shows the alarm contacts.
The alarm contacts are rated for switching a resistive load:
RS3: Power
Maximum switching voltage:
100 VDC
Maximum switching current:
250 mA
Maximum current:
500 mA
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-7
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) LEDs and Controls

The AC/DC power supply has power indicators and controls on the front
panel. Figure 1.2.3 shows the location of the LEDs and controls.
Table 1.2.3 shows the significance of each.
CAUTION
Under certain failure conditions, 30VDC can be present
even though both LED indicators are off.
Check all AC/DC power supplies for both red LED fault indications and
equal output current indication. All the supplies on the same DC
distribution system should show approximately the same current flow
indications within 3 to 6 amps (1 to 2 segments on the LED indicator).
Check each DC distribution system individually.
OUTPUT
TEST
CURRENT
30
BATT
Battery Fault (Red LED)

Battery Test Pushbutton
FAULT
NORM
FAULT
PS
Power Supply Normal Indicator

(Green LED)
3
BATT
ON
BATT
FAULT
OFF
PS
FAULT
Output Current
Indicator
(LED Bar Graph)
Power Supply Fault Indicator

(Red LED)
Battery ON/OFF Toggle Switch
LINE
RTN
POS
NEUT
AC IN
PS OUTPUT
GND
AC Input Indicator
(Orange)
Figure 1.2.3. Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Panel Features
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-8
Table 1.2.2. Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Indicators and Controls
Function
Item
BATT
ON/OFF Toggle Switch
Removes the battery backup circuit from the system when in OFF position.
The Battery Test Pushbutton is used to manually enable the 16 amp, 5
second battery test. If battery voltage falls below 20 V during the test, the
BATT FAULT LED lights and the battery alarm activates.
BATT TEST
Pushbutton
NOTE: The battery cannot be tested until the system has been running for at
least five minutes or until five minutes after the last battery test.
AC IN
Indicator (Orange)
OUTPUT CURRENT
(Bar Graph LED)
(Red)
PS FAULT
LED (DS1) (Red)
PS NORM
LED (DS2) (Green)
BATT FAULT
LED (DS3) (Red)
Indicates that AC input is present.

This is a series of LEDs indicating the relative current being delivered to the
DC distribution system by the AC/DC power supply. It indicates the load
share provided by the power supply with a readout in 3 amp intervals. Power
supplies should be within 1 to 2 LEDs of the others on the DC distribution
system for proper load sharing.
The 30 volt DC output dropped below 26 volts. The power supply alarm is
actuated when this LED is on.
The DC output voltage and battery status (if the battery is used with the
header jumper enabled) is in normal working condition.
The battery has failed the periodic load test. Approximately once every 24
hours the unit automatically tests the batteries under a 16 amp load for five
seconds. If battery voltage drops below 20 volts DC (24 volts nominal), the
BATT FAULT LED will light, the PS NORM LED will go out, and the battery
fault alarm will activate. The battery fault alarm will also activate if the battery
test fails.
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Fuses

The 10P5658000x power supply has two fuses (F1 and F2), and the
1984--0298--000x and 1984--2298--000x power supplies each have one
fuse (F1) between the battery charger card and the batteries.
Figure 1.2.4 shows the location of the fuse(s). Table 1.2.3 gives fuse
data. There are additional fuses on the Battery Charger Card
(1984--1283--000x).
Table 1.2.3. AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50527--0004
----
SLC50
50 A 300 V Time Delay
F2
50P03980007
SC-30
----
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-9
Battery Charger Card

The Battery Charger card (1984--1283--000x) contains a battery charging
circuit, a battery test circuit, and a board current sense circuit. The card is
marked BATTERY CHARGER AND DISPLAY DRIVER/ALARM on the
printed wiring assembly (PWA). The battery charging circuit charges two
12 volt gel-cell batteries in series. Charge current is limited to 1/2 amp
(average) with a nominal charge voltage of 27.6 volts. To prevent
complete discharge and possible damage to the batteries, the Battery
Charger card contains control circuitry to disconnect the battery if the
battery voltage drops below 18 volts. If, during testing, the power supply
voltage drops to 26.4 volts, the control circuitry turns on a red LED and
Activates an alarm relay. The battery backup circuit can maintain the
output load for approximately 30 seconds. The power supply output circuit
and battery backup circuits are diode isolated from each other to prevent
loading in case either circuit fails.
The battery test circuit consists of a 100 Hz oscillator divided down to
24 hours and 5.12 seconds. Five minutes after power is applied, a test
is performed on the batteries under a 16-amp load for 5.12 seconds.
The test is automatically repeated every 24 hours. The test may also be
initiated manually. If the battery voltage drops below 20 volts, a red LED
lights and the alarm relay is activated.
NOTE: A manually initiated battery test will not be permitted until
approximately five minutes after power-up or after a previous manual
test.
-
To Access the Battery Charger card (refer to Figure 1.2.4):

1. Remove the four screws securing cover A and remove cover A.
2. Remove the single screw securing cover B and open cover B.
3. Disconnect the batteries (plug G).
4. Push the upper edge of the Battery Charger circuit card C toward
the rear of the power supply just enough to free it from the
standoff.
5. Pull up the card slightly to free it from the card connector.
6. Disconnect cable D from connector J193.
7. Lift the card out of the power supply far enough to note the
orientation of connectors J0 and J192 (E). On connector J0 the
orange wire is nearest the large heat sink; on connector J192 the
yellow wire is nearest T1.
8. Disconnect the cables.
9. Separate the two cards (F).
10. Position the jumpers as desired.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-10
CAUTION
Use caution in removing and replacing boards in the power
supply. Some boards are not keyed to prevent improper
insertions.
11. Replace the card in the power supply by performing the above
steps in reverse order.
Jumpers
J0
J192
T1
Battery Charger
Circuit Card
Battery
F1 F2
Figure 1.2.4. Accessing the Battery Charger Card
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-11
Battery Charger Card Jumpers and Test Points

The Battery Charger card in the AC/DC power supply has three jumpers
and three test points. Figure 1.2.5 shows the jumper and test point
locations.
HD3
TP1
TP2
TP3
R1
F1
R2
F2
HD1
HD2
Figure 1.2.5. Battery Charger Board Fuse and Jumper Locations
Jumpers HD1 and HD2 determine the alarm contact condition for power
supply and battery fault alarms. If the jumpers are in the normally
open position, the contacts will be open for no alarm and closed for an
alarm.
Jumper HD3 controls use of the battery check circuitry and the BATT
FAULT alarm contacts. When HD3 is in the 1--2 position, the battery is
tested every 24 hours and the BATT FAULT alarm contacts are active.
When HD3 is in the 2--3 position, no testing of the battery occurs, the
BATT FAULT alarm contacts are not used, and the battery test
pushbutton is inactive.
Table 1.2.4 shows the jumper positions.
Table 1.2.4. Battery Charger Board Jumper Positions
Jumper
Purpose
HD1
Alarm contact for power supply fault
1--2 N.O. -- Contact is normally open

2--3 N.C. -- Contact is normally closed
HD2
Alarm contact for battery fault
1--2 N.O. -- Contact is normally open

2--3 N.C. -- Contact is normally closed
HD3
Battery connection
RS3: Power
Position
1--2 W BAT -- Test Battery every 24 hours

2--3 W/O BATT -- Do not test Battery
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-12
NOTE: Any adjustments to the battery voltage must be made with the
BATT switch in the OFF position.
Table 1.2.5. Battery Charger Card Test Points
Test Point
Function
TP1
Reference to ground
TP2
Reference voltage 2.35 volts

(adjusted by variable resistor R1)
TP3
Battery voltage 27.6 volts

(adjusted by variable resistor R2)
Battery Charger Card Fuses

Figure 1.2.4 shows the fuse locations. Table 1.2.6 gives fuse data for
the Battery Charger card.
Table 1.2.6. Battery Charger Card Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
F1
G09140--0016
AGC 1/2
312.500
.5 A 250 V Quick Acting
F2
G09140--0030
AGC 2
312002
2 A 250 V Quick Acting
Characteristics
Battery Replacement
To replace the batteries on the Battery Charger card,
1. Turn the BATT switch to the OFF position
2. Remove the battery box
3. Install new batteries
4. Reinstall the battery box
5. Turn the BATT switch to the ON position.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-13
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup)

The AC/DC Power Supply without battery backup (10P5664000x and
1984--0390--000x) provides 30 volts DC to the DC bus. It is intended for
systems that do not require battery backup.
CAUTION
The power supply unit is heavy, approximately 25 kg
(55 pounds).
CAUTION
The top surface of the power supply may be hot.
Figure 1.2.6 shows the power supply front panel.
MEASURED
VOLTAGE
(Volts)
POWER
OUTPUT
CURRENT
(Amps)
.01
.02
.03
.04
12
.05
15
.06
18
.07
21
+
MEASURED
VOLTAGE
--
PS
FAULT
LINE
RTN
NEUT
AC IN
POS
GND
Cable From AC
Distribution
System
PS OUTPUT
DC Output Cables
(Orange and Brown)
Figure 1.2.6. Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Front Panel
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-14
Table 1.2.7 gives parts replacement data. This power supply can be
used with a battery-backed power supply, provided the BATT switches
are turned OFF. This power supply can replace a battery-backed supply
ONLY if the battery is not being used, the BATT switch is turned off, and
the PS FAULT alarm contacts (if used) are jumpered as Normally
Closed (N.C.).
Table 1.2.7. AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Parts Replacement
Part No.
10P5664000x
1984--0390--000x
Replaces
Comment
10P5658000x
1984--0390--000x
Power supplies are interchangeable only

in systems that do not use batteries. The
BATT switch on the replaced unit must be
turned OFF. The PS FAULT contact (if
used) must be jumpered as Normally
Closed (N.C.).
1984--0298--000x
or
1984--2298--000x
Power supplies are interchangeable only

in systems that do not use batteries. The
BATT switch on the replaced unit must be
turned OFF. The PS FAULT contact (if
used) must be jumpered as Normally
Closed (N.C.).
NOTE: The 1984--0390--000x and 10P5664000x power supplies are

rated at 20 amps, and the 1984--x298--000x and 10P5658000x power
supplies are rated at 22 amps. If you replace a 22-amp supply with a
20-amp supply, make sure that the DC load does not exceed the rating
of the replacement power supply.
Figure 1.2.7 shows the functional diagram. The AC/DC power supply
uses a ferroresonant core transformer for partial regulation. The
transformer primary and secondary have selectable taps for 50 or 60 Hz
line frequency. The primary also has taps for 115 or 220 volts AC input.
The third winding on the primary side is isolated and has a parallel
capacitor. This regulates transformer output voltage by providing extra
voltage to the circuit from power stored in the resonant circuit. The third
winding also inherently limits current.
NOTE: Because the transformer is self-regulating, no other power
conditioning is necessary. Do not use an isolation transformer, voltage
regulating power source, or uninterruptible power supply with a
ferroresonant transformer as its output device unless it is rated at least
3 kVA for each standard AC/DC power supply it powers. Use of a
smaller ferroresonant transformer can result in oscillations.
Output current is measured by measuring the voltage drop across a
.0033 ohm precision resistor that is in series with the output.
The POWER LED and the PS FAULT relay are on a replaceable board
(1984--3442--0003) marked POWER SUPPLY DISPLAY III on the
PWA.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-15
DC Out +
F1 30 A
12.5 W
60 Cycle
12.5 W
170,000 UF
50 Cycle
115 V
or
220 V
J2--2
TB2--3
POWER LED
Display Board
1984--3442--0003
PS FAULT
Alarm Contacts
TB2--4
.0033 W
TB2--2
DC Return
-TB2--1
J2--1
MEASURED
VOLTAGE
Contacts
60 Cycle
50
Cycle
Figure 1.2.7. AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Functional Diagram
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Measuring Output Current

Output current is measured by reading the voltage drop across a
.0033 ohm precision resistor in series with the output. TB2 contacts 1
and 2 provide access to the resistor. A table is provided on the front
panel to assist in converting the measured voltage drop to output
current. Steps in the table correspond to LED segments on the --2298,
--0298, and 10P5658000x power supplies.
The precise current output can be calculated from Ohms Law:
E = I*R
I = E/R = (Volts)/(Resistance) = (Volts)/ 0.0033 = 303 x Volts
I = 303 x Voltage Reading
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-16
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts

The front panel provides a set of terminals for power supply fault alarm
contacts (PS FAULT). These are normally closed (N.C.). The contact
will be opened if the green PS NORM LED goes out. The supply
continues to supply power when the alarm condition is active. The
contacts are rated for switching a resistive load.
Rating for 1984--0390--000x:
D
200 Volts DC
500 mA
10 Watts
Rating for 10P5664000x:

D
100 Volts DC
500 mA
10 Watts
NOTE: The PS FAULT contacts of the 1984--0390--000x and

10P5664000x power supplies are normally closed (N.C.).
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) LEDs and Fuses

The AC/DC power supply (without battery backup) has two indicators on
the front to indicate status. Figure 1.2.8 shows the location of the lights.
Table 1.2.8 shows the meaning of each light.
Table 1.2.9 shows the power supply fuse.
CAUTION
Under certain failure conditions, 30 VDC may be present
even though both LED indicators are off.
Check all AC/DC power supplies for green LED normal indications and
equal output current. All supplies on the same DC distribution system
supply approximately the same current within 3 to 6 amps. Check each
DC distribution system individually.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-17
MEASURED
VOLTAGE
(Volts)
POWER
OUTPUT
CURRENT
(Amps)
.01
.02
.03
.04
12
.05
15
.06
18
.07
21
Power Supply
Normal Indicator
(Green LED)
+
MEASURED
VOLTAGE
--
PS
FAULT
LINE
RTN
NEUT
AC IN
POS
AC Input Indicator
(Orange)
GND
PS OUTPUT
Figure 1.2.8. Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Panel Indicators

Table 1.2.8. Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Indicators
Function
Item
AC IN
(Orange)
Indicates that AC input is present.
POWER
(Green)
Indicates that the DC output voltage is in normal working range. The power
supply alarm is activated when this LED is off.
Table 1.2.9. 10P5664000x AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Fuse
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
50P03980007
SC-30
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-18
MTCC Remote Power Supply

The Multitube Command Console (MTCC) Remote Power Supply
(10P5645000x and 1984--3023--000x) is used when powering a MTCC
from a remote location. A remote location is defined as being more than
200 feet from the AC/DC distribution panel. The MTCC Remote Power
Supply is mounted inside the electronics cabinet of a MTCC. It receives
AC power from an AC distribution switch assembly (1984--3004--000x)
also mounted in the electronics cabinet.
This power supply assembly consists of an electronics box and two
attached cables. There are no batteries associated with this supply.
Figure 1.2.9 shows the assembly.
L1
Fuse F1
P803 with 1984--3023

P847 with 10P5645
L2/N
Jumper
110/220 Volts
(1984--3023 only)
GND
Figure 1.2.9. 10P5645000x and 1984--3023--000x MTCC Remote Power Supply
MTCC Remote Power Supply Jumper

On the 1984--3023--000x power supply, an internal jumper wire changes
the input voltage from 110 volts to 220 volts. The jumper wire is in place
for 110 volt input (--0001) and removed for 220 volt input (--0002).
NOTE: The 10P5645000x power supply is autosensing for AC input
voltage, and does not require a jumper.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-19
MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuse

There is an internal fuse on the AC input. Table 1.2.10 gives fuse data.
Table 1.2.10. MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1 power supply:
1984--3023--000x
G09140--0064
GMC5
----
5 A 250 V Miniature
F1 power supply:
10P5645000x
G09140--0041
MTH5
312005
5 A 250 V 1-1/4 in.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-20
OI Remote Power Supply

The OI (Operator Interface) Remote Power Supply (1984--1046--000x)
is used when powering a Multitube Command Console, Command
Console, or MiniConsole from a remote location. A remote location is
defined as being more than 200 feet from the system. The OI remote
power supply is either mounted inside the electronics cabinet of a
Multitube Command Console, inside a Command Console pedestal, or
standing alone when used with a MiniConsole.
The OI Remote AC/DC power supply operates similarly to the system
AC/DC power supply. Figure 1.2.10 shows a functional diagram of the
power supply. The OI Remote AC/DC supply does not use an AC
distribution panel, so a fan, filter, fuse, and circuit breaker have been
added to the power supply itself. A 10 amp thermal type circuit breaker
is used at the input.
An optional Battery Charger card in the power supply slowly charges
the backup batteries, protects against momentary AC voltage drops,
and contains contacts for external alarms if a voltage drop occurs. The
Battery Charger card and batteries are not required for DC output from
the power supply.
The Battery Charger card contains a battery charging circuit and a
battery test circuit. The battery charging circuit charges two 12 volt
gel-cell batteries in series. Charge current is limited to 1/2 amp
(average) with a nominal charge voltage of 27.6 volts. To prevent
complete discharge and possible damage to the batteries, the Battery
Charger card contains control circuitry to disconnect the battery if the
battery voltage drops below 18 volts. If, during testing, the power supply
voltage drops to 26.4 volts, the control circuitry turns on a red LED and
activates an alarm relay. The battery backup circuit can maintain the
output load for approximately 30 seconds. The power supply output
circuit and battery backup circuits are diode isolated from each other to
prevent loading in case either circuit fails.
The battery test circuit consists of a 100 Hz oscillator divided down to
24 hours and 5.12 seconds. Five minutes after power is applied, a test
is performed on the batteries under a 16 amp load for 5.12 seconds.
The test is automatically repeated every 24 hours or can be initiated
manually. If the battery voltage drops below 20 volts, a red LED lights
and the alarm relay is activated.
NOTE: A manually initiated battery test will not be permitted until
approximately five minutes after power-up or after a previous manual
test.
The OI Remote Power Supply is essentially identical to the AC/DC
Power Supply (1984--2298--000x, 1984--0298--000x, or 10P5658000x)
covered earlier in this section.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-21
115 OR 220
Volts,
50 or 60 HZ
>
>
>
28VDC
L1
DC Out
AC/DC
Power
Supply
L2/N
Ground
+
--
Circuit Breaker
Switch
Battery
OFF
Switch
Control
Circuitry
Battery
& DC Fail
Alarm
Contacts
Battery
Charger
16 A
Battery
Test
Resistor
Control
Circuitry
24 Hour
Automatic
Test
Manual
Test
Pushbutton
F1
12 V Battery
12 V Battery
Battery Charger Card
Figure 1.2.10. OI Remote Power Supply Functional Diagram
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-22
OI Remote Power Supply Fuse

The OI Remote Power Supply has a fuse between the battery charger
card and the batteries. It is located on the partition panel, in front of the
printed circuit board. Table 1.2.11 shows fuse data.
Table 1.2.11. OI Remote Power Supply Fuse
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50527--0004
----
SLC50
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-23
DC/DC Power Supply

The DC/DC Power Supply (1984--0393--000x) supplies power to
remotely powered devices. The DC/DC supply receives 30 volts DC
from the system power supplies and uses a 25 K Hz switching regulator
to provide a 24 volts DC or 15 volts DC volt output to external devices.
The output of the DC/DC power supply is preset at the factory. The
output of the DC/DC power supply is wired in parallel to five pairs of
terminal blocks. Each terminal block has positive and negative
terminals. The positive terminal of each output is fused at 3 amps. Do
not exceed the rated output current of the supply.
Figure 1.2.11 shows a functional diagram for connecting a single DC/DC
power supply.
Output Terminal Block
30 VDC
System
Power
RTN
DC/DC
Power
Supply
24 or 15VDC
RTN
3 Amps
3 Amps
3 Amps
3 Amps
3 Amps
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 1.2.11. DC/DC Power Supply Functional Diagram
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-24
An optional power switching box can be used to create a redundant DC

power supply. Figure 1.2.12 shows a functional diagram for connecting
redundant DC/DC power supplies.
Output Terminal Block
30 VDC
System
Power
DC/DC
Power
Supply #1
RTN
30 VDC
System
Power
RTN
24 VDC or 15 VDC
Power
Switch
Box
3 Amps
RTN
3 Amps
3 Amps
DC/DC
Power
Supply #2
3 Amps
3 Amps
24 or 15 VDC
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 1.2.12. Redundant DC/DC Power Supply Functional Diagram
Table 1.2.12 gives specifications for the DC/DC Power Supplies.

Table 1.2.12. DC/DC Power Supply Specifications
Parameter
Specification
Power supply type
Switching regulator
Temperature range
0o C to 50o C
Input voltage
30 volts DC
Input voltage range
10 volts DC to 60 volts DC
Line regulation
.5% with input voltage >15 volts
Output voltage
1984--0393--0001: set @ 24 volts DC

1984--0393--0002: set @ 24 volts DC
1984--0393--0003: set @ 15 volts DC
RS3: Power
Output voltage range
4.4 volts DC to 30 volts DC
Output current
0 to 12 amps
Output ripple
50 millivolts (0--25K Hz)

150 millivolts (total)
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-25
DC/DC Power Supply Fuses

Table 1.2.13 shows fuse data for the DC/DC Power Supply.
Table 1.2.13. DC/DC Power Supply Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
All
G09140--0036
MDL 3
313003
3 A 250 V Slow Blow
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-26
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply

The 1984--1089--000x AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply supplies
power to a remote MiniConsole positioned more than 200 feet from the
system 30 volt DC bus. Figure 1.2.13 shows a functional diagram for
the AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply.
The power supply input is protected by a 15 amp circuit breaker. The
output of the power supply is fused at 10 amps.
An overvoltage protection circuit in the AC/DC supply activates at
voltages greater than 40 volts DC.
Table 1.2.14 has specifications for the AC/DC unregulated power
supply.
10 Amp Fuse
AC
IN
Line
Neutral
Gnd
15 Amp
Breaker
Switch
Line
Neutral
AC/DC
Supply
Over Voltage
Protection
Circuit
27.5 VDC
Return
Figure 1.2.13. AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Functional Diagram

Table 1.2.14. AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Specifications
Parameter
Voltage
Input Voltage Range
Frequency Range
Output Source
RS3: Power
Specification
1984--1089--0001: 115 volts AC
1984--1089--0002: 220 volts AC
1984--1089--0001: 104 to 127 volts AC
1984--1089--0002: 198 to 242 volts AC
47 to 63 Hz
Nominal: 27.5 volts, 7.5 amps
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-27
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuses

Table 1.2.15 shows fuse data for the AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply.
Table 1.2.15. AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuse
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G01940--0046
AGC 10
311010
10 A 32 V Regular
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-28

The DIN rail mounted Remote I/O Power Supply can be used to supply
DC power to distributed I/O termination panels mounted in I/O cabinets.
The supply is assembled as required from these components:
D
10P55030001
230 VAC
10P55030002
115 VAC
1984--4302--0001
110 VAC
1984--4302--0002
220 VAC
AC Distribution Block
1984--4329--0001
(2 circuits)
DC Distribution Block
1984--4329--0002
(10 circuits)
1984--4329--0003
(1 circuit)
AC/DC Distribution Block
1984--4329--0004
(2 AC
10 DC circuits)
DC I/O Power Cable(s)
1984--4337--xxxx
(Bus A cable)
1984--4433--xxxx
(Bus B cable)
Fuse Label
1984--4350--000x
DIN Rail (optional)
1984--4309--0004
Figure 1.2.14 shows a typical assembly.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-29
DC Distribution Block
AC Distribution Block
Power Supply
Figure 1.2.14. Typical Remote I/O Power Supply Assembly
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-30
10P5503 for I/O Applications

This configuration supplies power to I/O panels located away from the
main system DC bus. Figure 1.2.15 shows the unit.
P837
P838
U1
P835
+ --
P834
P836
No.
Description
No.
Description
Front view
Top view
Green LED
DC output: P837 (Orange)

P838 (Brown)
Test socket for output voltage measurement
Potentiometer for output voltage adjustment
AC input:
P834 (Black)
P835 (White)
P836 (Green)
+24 v
Return
L1
L2/N
Ground
Figure 1.2.15. 10P5503 Power Supply
NOTE: A cooling fan assembly is required for the cabinet holding the
power supply.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-31

A connector is used to mount the cables on the power supply. The
pin-out of the connector is shown in Table 1.2.16.
Table 1.2.16. 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out
Description
Pin
6
DC + output
14
DC return
16
Jumper to pin 32 (connects DC return to AC safety ground)
28
L1 AC line 1
30
L2/N AC line 2 (230 V) or neutral (115 V)
32
AC safety ground
10P5503 Remote Power Supply LEDs

The power supply has one green LED that lights when the unit is
operating normally.
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output
Adjustment should not be required. Attach a voltmeter to the test jack to
monitor the output voltage. Adjust the voltage ( 1 Volt) with the
adjustment potentiometer (U1).
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuses
Table 1.2.17 shows fuse data for the Remote Power Supply.
Table 1.2.17. 10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Wickman
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
----
19372K
Series MST 250
3.15 A, 250 V
Slow Blow, Plug-In
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-32
Remote Operator Interface Power Supply

The Remote Power Supply is available in these versions:
D
RS3: Power
For Operator Interface products:
230 VAC input
10P54090001, 3
115 VAC input
10P54090002, 4
110--230 VAC input
10P57010001
110--230 VAC input
10P57560001
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-33
10P5409 for Operator Interface Applications

This configuration supplies power to OI card cages located away from the
main system DC bus. Figure 1.2.16 shows the 10P54090003 and 4.
1
7
5
U1
P846--1
+ --
P846--2
P846--3
No.
Description
No.
Description
Front view
Top view
Green LED
Connector
Test socket for output voltage measurement
DC output cable (connector P981 goes to

J907 PWRA on the OI Card Cage)
Potentiometer for output voltage adjustment
AC input:
P846--1 (Black)
L1
P846--2 (White) L2/N
P846--3 (Green)Ground
The power supply can be mounted in a Suspended Cabinet (7U), a

11U, or a 13U enclosure using the Power Supply Mounting Bracket
(10P53760001) which is part of the assembly. The bracket attaches to
the drive mounting bracket.
NOTE: A cooling fan assembly is required under the slot that holds the
power supply.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-34

A connector is used to mount the cables on the power supply. The
pin-out of the connector is shown in Table 1.2.18.
Table 1.2.18. 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out
Description
Pin
6
DC + output
14
DC return
16
Jumper to pin 32 (connects DC return to AC safety ground)
28
L1 AC line 1
30
L2/N AC line 2 (230 V) or neutral (115 V)
32
AC safety ground
10P5409 Remote Power Supply LEDs

The power supply has one green LED that lights when the unit is
operating normally.
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output
Adjustment should not be required. Attach a voltmeter to the test jack to
monitor the output voltage. Adjust the voltage ( 1 Volt) with the
adjustment potentiometer (U1).
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Fuses
Table 1.2.19 shows fuse data for the Remote Power Supply.
Table 1.2.19. 10P5409 Remote Power Supply Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Wickman
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
----
19372K
Series MST 250
3.15 A, 250 V
Slow Blow, Plug-In
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-35

This configuration supplies power to OI card cages located away from
the main system DC bus. Figure 1.2.17 shows the unit.
No.
1
Description
DC output
(Orange)
(Brown)
+24 v
Return
No.
2
Description
AC input:
(Black)
(White)
(Green)
L1
L2/N
Ground
NOTE: A cooling fan assembly is required for the cabinet holding the
power supply.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-36

This configuration supplies power to OI card cages located away from
the main system DC bus. Figure 1.2.18 shows the unit.
No.
1
Description
DC output cable (connector P981 goes to
J907 PWRA on the OI Card Cage)
No.
2
Description
AC input:
P850--1 (Black)
P850--2 (White)
P850--3 (Green)
L1
L2/N
Ground
The power supply can be mounted in a Suspended Cabinet (7U), a

11U, or a 13U enclosure using the power supply mounting bracket,
which is part of the assembly. The bracket attaches to the drive
mounting bracket.
NOTE: A cooling fan assembly is required under the slot that holds the
power supply.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-37
Distribution Blocks
The AC and DC distribution blocks have all like terminals jumpered
together on the input side. Jumper the neutrals with an internal bar. The
active terminals are jumpered with an external bridging jumper which
must not be removed. The input side is marked with an I.
CAUTION
Input power must be connected to the input side of the
distribution block. All circuits will be controlled by a single
fuse if this is not done.
Distribution Block Fuses

Distribution block fuses are mounted inside the black fuse module at the
top of the block. Each fuse module has a bulb that lights if the fuse is
blown. The fuse module also acts as a disconnect switch, remove the
fuse module to open the circuit. The fuse is reached by prying the fuse
module cover open. Table 1.2.20 shows the factory installed fuse
values.
Table 1.2.20. Distribution Block Fuses
Block
Wickman P/N
Littelfuse P/N
FRSI P/N
Characteristics
AC Distribution
Series 19197
Series 235
G53394--3000--1
3.0 amp
250 V
CSA approved
DC Distribution
10 Circuits
Series 19197
Series 235
G53394--1000--1
1.0 amp
250 V
CSA approved
DC Distribution
1 Circuit
Series 19197
Series 235
G53394--3000--1
3.0 amp
250 V
CSA approved
A label (1984--4350--000x) is provided to record the actual fuse sizes

installed in the AC and DC distribution blocks. The label should be
installed inside the I/O cabinet door or as close to the power supply as
practical. Standard fuse sizes are listed on the label; be sure to record
any changes from the standard.
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-2-38
RS3: Power
Power Supplies
SV: 1-3-1
Section 3:

The RS3 System Power Supply Unit is standard equipment in an RS3
Millennium Package (RMP). It is also standard equipment in most
newer RS3 system cabinets. The RS3 System Power Supply Unit
normally consists of two power supply modules (12P0238X012) and a
housing (12P0236X012).
This section describes physical and electrical descriptions of the System
Power Supply Unit along with installation instructions and specifications.
NOTE: The 12P0238X012 power supplies cannot be mixed with
10P5658-XXXX, 1984-2298-XXXX, 1984-0298-XXXX, 10P5664-XXXX,
or 1984-0390-XXXX AC/DC power supplies on the same DC bus.
Physical Description
The RS3 System Power Supply Unit is installed in an RS3 system
cabinet or an RMP cabinet, providing regulated DC power for
equipment installed in the cabinets.
The System Power Supply Unit does not require an AC entrance panel.
The System Power Supply Unit with two power supply modules has a
2400-watt output capacity, with 74 amperes available, at 80% loading. A
housing can contain either one or two 1200-watt power supply modules
that provide DC power. If a housing contains only one power supply
module, it should be installed in the right side of the housing (PS1
position).
The housing contains input and output connectors, alarm connectors,
and circuit breakers for the auxiliary outputs. All connections are on the
front of the housing. Rear and side access to the housing are not
required.
Figure 1.3.1 shows a housing with two power supply modules installed.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-2
Blind-Mate
Connector
446 mm
(17.55 in.)
Power
Supply
Housing
343 mm
(13.50 in.)
38.1 mm.
(1.5 in.)
(Max)
Current
Monitor Test
Points
DC Outputs
483 mm
(19.00 in.)
Power Supply
Fan Connector
Fan
AC Input
(PS1)
AUX AC
Output 1
5.22 in.
(133 mm)
AC Input
(PS2)
Interlock and
Alarm Contact
Outputs
Lock
Power
Supply 2
Auxiliary
Power
Power
Output
Supply
1
Switch
Circuit
LED
Breaker
Indicators and
Current
Monitor Test
Points
AUX AC
Output 2
Figure 1.3.1. System Power Supply Unit with Two Power Modules Installed
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-3
Housing
Figure 1.3.2 shows the System Power Supply Unit housing
(12P0236X012). The housing mounts on standard 483 mm (19-in.) EIA
rails in an RS3 system cabinet. Rack height is 133 mm (5.25 in.) with a
depth of 343 mm (13.5 in.) from the mounting flange. The housing
supports two power supply modules and contains separate DC output
terminals for each power supply.
DC Output and
Alarm Connections
Blind-Mate Connectors Guide Rails
AC Input and Auxiliary AC

Output Connectors, Auxiliary
AC Output Circuit Breakers
Figure 1.3.2. System Power Supply Unit (Housing Only)
Figure 1.3.3 shows the DC output block on the housing. The housing
contains separate DC output terminals for each power supply module.
The figure also shows the alarm connections on the housing. The alarm
connections do not require wire terminating lugs.
DC Output Block
PS1
(RIGHT)
+
26 VDC
OUTPUT
--
+
26 VDC
OUTPUT
-PS2
(LEFT)
Alarm Connections
PS2
PS1
Figure 1.3.3. DC Output and Alarm Connections
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-4
Figure 1.3.4 shows the AC input connectors and the auxiliary AC output
connectors and circuit breakers.
CAUTION
European installations require external switches or circuit
breakers that break both the line and neutral connections
of the AC inputs. (The circuit breakers provided for the
auxiliary AC outputs are single-pole and break only the line
side.)
The housing includes terminal blocks for two AC input sources. This
enables each power supply in a housing to be connected to a separate
AC source. The chassis of the power supply housing is internally
bonded to the ground terminal of each AC input terminal block.
INPUT 1 is routed directly to PS1 (the power supply module on the right
side of the housing), and is routed to AUXILIARY OUTPUT 1 through
the AUX OUT 1 circuit breaker. INPUT 2 is routed directly to PS2 (the
power supply module on the left side of the housing), and is routed to
AUXILIARY OUTPUT 2 through the AUX OUT circuit breaker (see
Figure 1.3.1 and Figure 1.3.4).
Separate 5-position terminal blocks are provided on the front left hand
side of the housing to access the alarm relay contacts and interlock for
each power supply (see Figure 1.3.1, Figure 1.3.2, and Figure 1.3.3).
Terminal blocks, circuit breakers, and all wiring connections are on the
front of the housing. The housing does not require side or rear access.
Auxiliary
Output 1
Circuit
Breaker
Auxiliary
Output 2
Circuit
Breaker
AC Input (PS1)
AUX. OUT. 1
ON
OFF
15 AMPS
AUX. OUT. 2
ON
PS1
(RIGHT)
INPUT 1
85--264 VAC
50/60 Hz
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 1
PS2
(LEFT)
INPUT 2
85--264 VAC
50/60 Hz
L
INPUT 1
L
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 1
L
INPUT 2
L
OFF
15 AMPS
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 2
Auxiliary AC
Output 1
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 2
AC Input
(PS2)
Auxiliary AC
Output 2
Figure 1.3.4. Input and Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-5
Power Supply Modules

Each power supply module (12P0238X012) has a brushless DC fan to
provide cooling. Air flow is front to rear, and the rear of the power supply
module and the housing are slotted to exhaust heat.
Figure 1.3.5 shows a front view of a power supply module and a detail
view of the label. The upper right corner of the label shows the rated
output wattage of the power supply module. The additional information
on the label includes the part number and the serial number.
FRS
1200W
CP6103X1-CA1
12P0238X012A
S/N:1094--2327C
Power Supply
Fan Connector
Label (Typical)
Fan
FAN
LED Indicators and

Current Monitor
Test Points
Power
Switch
DC
AC
-+
1 VDC = 100% LOAD
Lock
Locking
Pawl
I
O
P
O
W
E
R
L
O
C
K
Figure 1.3.5. Power Supply Module
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-6
Electrical Description
Each power supply module converts AC line voltage to the DC voltage
required by the equipment and field instruments. The power supply
module output is rated at 1200 watts. The switching power supplies
have universal AC inputs with power factor correction and can operate
over an input range of 85--264 VAC, 47--63 Hz without reconfiguration.
However, this supply voltage will be passed through auxiliary output, so
AC voltage ranges for auxiliary devices (cabinet fans) must be properly
defined. The power supply module outputs are provided with
overvoltage, overcurrent, and short circuit protection.
A pair of isolated test jacks on the front of each power supply module
enable monitoring of output current.
Each power supply module has two front-mounted LEDs:
D
The amber LED indicates that the power supply modules AC

input is energized.
The green LED indicates that the DC output voltage is within
tolerances.
Each power supply module has an alarm relay that connects to a

terminal block on the power supply housing. Alarm relays are energized
during normal operation and de-energized if the DC output is out of
tolerance or if the cooling fan fails. The alarm relay contacts are rated to
5 amperes at 250 VAC, or 5 amperes at 30 VDC, for a resistive load. A
current-limited interlock loop (limited to 100 mA) is provided to allow
connection of other external alarm circuits. See Alarm Wiring on
page 1-3-11 for more information.
The power supply housing includes separate AC input terminal blocks
for each power supply module, enabling each power supply module in a
housing to be connected to a separate AC source.
Inputs from each terminal block are routed through a single-pole,
15-ampere circuit breaker to an auxiliary AC output terminal block that
can be used to power auxiliary equipment such as cabinet fans.
Individual power supply modules can be removed from the power
supply housing and replaced without interrupting power to equipment
that is redundantly powered.
You must power up multiple power supply modules connected to the
same DC Distribution Bus consecutively, all within approximately 2--3
seconds. If too much time elapses between the power-up of the first and
last power supply modules, one or more of the modules may go into
over-current mode, until together they are able to supply the load.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-7
Planning
The system power supply housing fits on standard 483 mm (19 in.) EIA
rails in front-access system cabinet assemblies and occupies three
units of vertical rack space. Outline dimensions of the housing are
shown in Figure 1.3.1.
This section provides information on using System Power Supply Units
in a typical RS3 system cabinet installation.
System Cabinet and AC Wiring

You will need to provide AC power to the system cabinets from an
external circuit breaker panel, and wire the power leads to the AC input
terminal blocks on the power supply housing. Use wire with insulation
rated at least twice the working voltage of the circuit.
Fisher-Rosemount Systems recommends that each 1200-watt power
supply module be powered from a 30-ampere circuit breaker. In no case
should a power supply module be powered from a circuit breaker larger
than 30 amperes.
Each power supply housing contains one or two power supply modules
as shown in Figure 1.3.6. Terminal blocks are provided for two AC input
sources. This enables each power supply module in the housing to be
connected to a separate AC source. The chassis of the power supply
housing is internally bonded to the ground terminal of each AC input
terminal block.
Inputs from each terminal block are routed through a single-pole,
15-ampere circuit breaker to a terminal block for use by auxiliary
equipment such as fans.
NOTE: The cabinet fans used with the RS3 System Power Supply Units
are not autosensing. Depending on the AC input (110 VAC or 220 VAC),
the correct fan must be specified according to the input voltage. AC
power is supplied to the AC fan in the RS3 system cabinet from the
auxiliary outputs on the RS3 System Power Supply Unit. (System
cabinets use an AC fan. RMP cabinets use a DC fan.)
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-8
2
Input 1
L
+
-- 26 VDC (PS1 Output)
AUX
Output 1
AUX
Output 2
+
-- 26 VDC (PS2 Output)
Input 2
Notes:
1
2
Rocker ON/OFF switch/circuit breaker for auxiliary AC outputs

Input 1 and Input 2 shall be supplied from separate dedicated circuit breakers
Figure 1.3.6. System Cabinet DC Output Terminals
System Cabinet DC Power Configurations

System Power Supply Units are intended to operate in an N+1
redundancy configuration. There should always be one extra power
supply module connected to a DC bus to provide redundancy. Separate
DC output terminals are provided for each power supply module on the
front of the housing, as shown in Figure 1.3.6.
Standard RS3 system cabinets are available with cable entry openings
in both the top and bottom panels. The System Power Supply Unit and
DC Distribution Bus can be mounted as appropriate for bottom cable
entry or top cable entry.
A typical system might have three cabinets, with three primary supplies
and one redundant supply. The redundant supply is normally load
sharing with the primary supplies. If a primary or redundant supply fails,
there will be no power loss at the load. No. 8 AWG insulated wire,
orange for 26V+ and brown for 26V--, is used to connect the System
Power Supply Unit DC outputs to the DC Distribution Bus. Use either
the 1-meter cable (10P58277001) or the 3-meter cable (10P58277003)
to make this connection. Do not exceed 2.15 + 0.12 NSm (19+1 lbfSin)
torque on the DC output terminals of the System Power Supply Unit.
Use separate wire channels for high-voltage (110/220 VAC) lines and
low-voltage (4--20 mA) signal lines to maintain as much separation as
possible between voltage and signal wiring. A minimum of 203 mm
(8 in.) is recommended.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-9
Jumpers on the ControlFile Power Regulator and OI Power Regulator

must be set for 24 VDC, as follows:
Regulator
Header
Position
OI Power Regulator
HD1
2--3
ControlFile Power Regulator
HD1
1--2
Refer to the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP) for more
information about system cabinet configurations, dimensions,
grounding, etc.
The DC power distribution system consists of a DC Distribution Bus
(installed in the system cabinet), DC Output card (attached to the DC
Distribution Bus), and various cables.
Each DC Distribution Bus assembly within a system cabinet consists of
three copper bus bars with a current-carrying capacity of 200 amperes.
DC Distribution Bus assemblies can be daisy chained as required, using
a Jumper Cable DC bus to DC bus (1984--0373--xxxx). Bus A is
normally jumpered to bus B, giving a bus A/B.
A standard, non-redundant, DC power distribution system consists of
one or more System Power Supply Units feeding one or more DC
Distribution Bus assemblies. Figure 1.3.7 shows a standard bus A/B
operation.
A DC Distribution Bus should have no more than two System Power
Supply Units (four DC outputs) wired to it, redundant power supplies
included. This applies to both redundant and non-redundant buses.
NOTE: If a single System Power Supply Unit is used, the configuration
should be the standard A/B distribution as shown in Figure 1.3.7.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-10
Bus A/B Power Supplies (up to 4)

System Power
Supply Unit 2
PS2
--
System Power
Supply Unit 1
PS1
--
PS2
--
Bus A
Return Bus
Bus B
DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper
PS1
--
Bus A
Return Bus
Bus B
Figure 1.3.7. Standard DC Power Distribution for System Power Supply Units
Figure 1.3.8 represents a redundant DC power distribution configuration

consisting of one System Power Supply Unit feeding bus A and another
System Power Supply Unit feeding bus B. Buses A and B are not
connected.
Each bus (A and B) needs to have a separate redundant power supply
module, so a total of two redundant power supply modules are needed
for a redundant DC power distribution. (This would be a redundant
bus/redundant power supply configuration, which meets the N+1
redundancy requirement.)
The redundant bus configuration must have the same number of power
supply modules on each bus. Four power supply modules (two Power
Supply Units) is the maximum allowed for both buses.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-11
Bus A/B Power Supplies (up to 4)

System Power
Supply Unit 2
PS2
--
System Power
Supply Unit 1
PS1
--
PS2
--
DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper
PS1
--
Bus A
Bus A
Return Bus
Return Bus
Bus B
Bus B
Figure 1.3.8. Redundant DC Power Distribution System for System Power Supply Units
Alarm Wiring
Figure 1.3.9 shows the alarm connections on the housing. The housing
contains separate alarm connections for each power supply module.
The alarm and interlock terminal blocks connect to alarm relay contacts
and interlocks in the power supply modules. The alarm terminal blocks
do not require wire terminating lugs.
ALARM
DC output block
PS1
(RIGHT)
INTL.
+
26 VDC
OUTPUT
--
+
26 VDC
OUTPUT
--
Alarm connections
N.O.
COM.
N.C.
PS2
PS1
PS2
(LEFT)
ALARM
INTL.
PS2
PS1
N.O.
COM.
N.C.
Alarm connection detail

Note: The connections
marked INTL are for
alarm interlocks
Figure 1.3.9. Alarm Connections
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-12
To cause either power supply module relay to function as a combined

alarms relay, connect any number of external alarm contacts that are
closed during normal equipment operation in series and wire them
across the interlock terminal connection of the power supply module.
Refer to Figure 1.3.10 for an example.
Internal to Power Supply
INTL
External to Power Supply
Ext. Alm. 1
Ext. Alm. 2
+26V
N.O.
Connection made with

no external alarms
Com.
N.C.
To Alarm Contacts/
Power Circuits
Alarm Relay Contacts

Figure 1.3.10. Alarm Connection Example
If the interlock connections of an installed power supply module are not

connected to external alarm contacts, jumper the connections to enable
the power supply module alarm relay to operate properly.
To use only one combined alarm for a cabinet, wire the output alarm
contacts for one power supply module into the interlock circuit of the
other power supply module.
Alarm relay contacts are rated to 250 VAC. Use wiring with insulation
rated at least 300 Volts or twice the working voltage used for these
circuits, whichever is higher. Use 2.07 mm@ (14 AWG) to 0.812 mm@
(18 AWG) wire for the connection.
Special Conditions
Ensure that all other devices are mounted above the Operator Interface
(OI) electronics to ensure compliance with temperature requirements.
The OI must be the lowest device mounted in a system cabinet.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-13
Installation
The typical factory-prepared cabinet installation is shipped with the
System Power Supply Unit mounted. However, this section provides
installation procedures in the event you need to install a System Power
Supply Unit.
Physical Installation
This subsection explains how to:
D
Install a power supply housing in a cabinet
D
Install a power supply module in a housing.
Installing a Housing in a Cabinet
Fisher-Rosemount Systems recommends that you install the housing
first, without power supply modules; then install the power supply
modules in the housing.
NOTE: The System Power Supply Unit can weigh as much
as 13.29 kg (29.3 lb) if two power supply modules are
installed.
The following procedure describes installation of a power supply
housing in a system cabinet.
1. Place all external circuit breakers that control AC power inputs to
the power supply housing in the OFF position.
CAUTION
The DC Distribution Bus and associated power
cables may have DC power still applied if the load is
backed up by a redundant power source located
elsewhere. Personal injury and equipment damage
can occur if a DC Distribution Bus or cable is
accidentally shorted. Turn off any backup power
sources.
2. Position the power supply housing on the EIA rails. Provide
sufficient support to hold the housing in place until the flange-lock
screws are installed and tightened.
3. Install the four M6 Phillips Screws with nylon splash
(G12215-2006-0116) and M6 cage nuts (G53426-0601-0716)
and tighten them until the housing is securely attached to the
cabinet rails.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-14
4. Connect DC output and alarm wiring as required for your

installation.
5. Connect the AC inputs to the input terminal blocks on the right
side of the housing front panel.
6. Install power supply modules in the housing (see Installing a
Power Supply in a Housing, following).
7. After following appropriate procedures for energizing circuits,
place all circuit breakers that control cabinet AC power in the ON
position.
NOTE: Be sure to place the startup voltage jumpers on the OI and
ControlFile power regulators in the 24 Volt position when using a
System Power Supply Unit.
Installing a Power Supply in a Housing
The following procedure describes installation of a power supply module
in the housing.
1. Ensure that the AC power switch on the front of the power supply
module is in the off (O) position and that the locking pawl is in the
horizontal position.
2. Align the power supply module with the guide rails in the housing.
3. Slide the power supply module into the housing, making sure that
the bottom right edge of the power supply module engages the
plastic guide rail in the housing.
NOTE: If you are installing only one power supply module in
a housing, install it in the right side of the housing.
4. Continue inserting the power supply module until the locking pawl
reaches the stop.
5. Using a screwdriver, slowly turn the locking screw
counterclockwise one quarter turn while observing the pawl to
ensure that it freely rotates 90 degrees to the vertical position
and engages the slot in the bottom of the housing.
If the pawl does not rotate to the vertical position, move the
power supply module in or out of the housing slightly to align the
pawl with the slot in the housing.
6. Turn the locking screw approximately 10 additional turns
counterclockwise until it stops, to fully seat the blind-mate
connector. The remaining turns draw the power supply module
into the housing and seat the blind-mate electrical connector.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the power supply module until
the blind-mate connector is fully seated. Failure to
fully seat the connector may result in damage to the
power supply module and power supply housing.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-15
Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs

The power supply housing includes two auxiliary AC outputs that are
independent of the power supply modules. Figure 1.3.11 shows the
layout of the AC input and auxiliary output terminal blocks and circuit
breakers.
AC Input (PS1)
Auxiliary
Output 1
Circuit
Breaker
AUX. OUT. 1
ON
OFF
15 AMPS
Auxiliary
Output 2
Circuit
Breaker
AUX. OUT. 2
ON
PS1
(RIGHT)
INPUT 1
85--264 VAC
50/60 Hz
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 1
PS2
(LEFT)
INPUT 2
85--264 VAC
50/60 Hz
L
INPUT 1
Auxiliary AC
Output 1
L
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 1
AC Input
(PS2)
INPUT 2
L
OFF
15 AMPS
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 2
AUXILIARY
OUTPUT 2
Auxiliary AC
Output 2
Figure 1.3.11. Input and Auxiliary Output Connectors and Auxiliary Output Circuit Breakers
Figure 1.3.12 shows a schematic diagram for one set of AC inputs and
auxiliary AC outputs. Each housing has two identical circuits, one for
each power supply module. Note that the circuit breakers on the
housing control only the auxiliary AC outputs and do not control power
to the power supply modules. Use wire with insulation rated for a
minimum of twice the rated mains supply voltage that feeds the auxiliary
circuit.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-16
To Power
Supply
Note: Each Housing Contains Two Circuits.
Auxiliary
AC Circuit
Breaker
15A
Terminal Block
L
N
AC
Input
L
N
Auxiliary
AC
Output
Figure 1.3.12. Power Supply Housing AC Input and Auxiliary AC Output Schematic Diagram
Maintenance
Maintenance requirements for the System Power Supply Unit are
described in the following subsections.
General Maintenance
Each power supply module has test points for monitoring the current
output. The test point voltages serve as an indicator and are not an
absolute measure of a power supply modules output.
Replacing a Cooling Fan

The only regular maintenance required for the System Power Supply
Unit is replacing the cooling fans on the power supply modules. The
recommended maintenance interval for replacing the fan is 3.5 years
(42 months). For fan replacement, you will need a replacement fan kit
(12P0239X012).
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-17
CAUTION
Fan replacement at recommended intervals is necessary
because a fan failure causes the power supply module to
shut down which may cause critical control equipment to
lose power.
To replace a cooling fan (see Figure 1.3.13):
1. Remove the power supply module from the housing to gain
access to the plastic rivets that connect the fan to the power
supply module. (See Removing a Power Supply from a
Housing.)
2. Disconnect the fan power connector from the power supply
module.
3. Using a small screwdriver or other suitable tool, pry the pin out of
the plastic rivets at each corner of the fan and remove the fan.
There are two sets of rivets: four that hold the fan to the power
supply module and four that hold the fan grill to the fan. Because
the fan and grill are removed as a unit, only the rivets that hold
the fan to the power supply module must be removed.
Power
Supply
Collar
Pin
Rivet
(Typical
4 places)
Fan power
connector
Fan Mounting
Flange
Rivet
(Typical
4 places)
Figure 1.3.13. Replacing the Fan and Grill in a Power Supply
4. Remove the fan from the power supply module.

5. Position the new fan on the power supply module.
6. At each fan mounting hole, insert a plastic collar until the lip of
the collar seats on the fan. Use a new collar from the
replacement fan kit.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-18
7. Press a plastic pin into the collar until it seats on the collar flange.
This expands the collar to hold the fan to the power supply
module.
8. Position the new grill from the replacement fan kit on the fan.
9. At each grill mounting hole, insert a plastic collar until the lip of
the collar seats on the grill. Use a new collar from the
replacement fan kit.
10. Press a plastic pin into the collar until it seats on the collar flange.
This expands the collar to hold the grill to the fan.
11. Connect the fan power connector to the power supply module.
12. Install the power supply module in the housing following the
steps in Installing a Power Supply in a Housing.
Replacing a Power Supply

To remove and replace a power supply module, follow the procedures
below.
The housing and power supply modules can be removed from a cabinet
as a unit; however, removing the power supply modules from the
housing first makes the housing lighter and easier to handle.
NOTE: System Power Supply Units cannot be used in a
redundant bus scheme with AC/DC power supplies.
NOTE: Because of the wide variety of existing installations, it
is not possible to include procedures for replacing an AC/DC
power supply and AC entrance panel with a System Power
Supply Unit. If your installation requires such a change,
consult with your Fisher-Rosemount Systems representative
or sales office for assistance.
Removing a Power Supply Housing from a System Cabinet
To remove a power supply housing from a system cabinet:
2. After initiating an approved lockout procedure, disconnect the AC
input or inputs from the terminal blocks on the right side of the
housing and disconnect any wiring to auxiliary outputs.
3. Disconnect the DC outputs and alarm wiring from the terminals
on the left side of the housing. Note that the DC power cables
and associated cabinet bus bars could still be powered if the load
is backed up by a redundant power source located elsewhere.
The alarm wiring could also be powered by an external source. If
in doubt, measure all terminals before disconnecting wiring.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-19
4. Remove the power supply modules from the housing, if desired:

a. Make sure the AC power switch on the front of the power
supply module is in the off (O) position.
b. Using a screwdriver, turn the locking screw clockwise until the
locking pawl rotates to the horizontal position.
c. Using the handle on the front of the power supply module,
pull the power supply module out of the housing.
5. Provide sufficient support for the housing to prevent it from
dropping. (If the two power supply modules have not been
removed from the housing, the System Power Supply Unit can
weigh as much as 13.29 kg (29.3 lb).)
6. Remove the four M6 Phillips Screws and M6 cage nuts securing
the power supply housing to the rails of the cabinet. Retain the
screws and nuts for reinstallation of the power supply housing.
CAUTION
The DC Distribution Bus and associated power cables
may have DC power still applied if the load is backed
up by a redundant power source located elsewhere.
Personal injury and equipment damage can occur if a
DC Distribution Bus or cable is accidentally shorted.
Turn off any backup power sources.
Installing a Housing in a Cabinet
Fisher-Rosemount Systems recommends that you install the housing
first, without power supply modules, then install the power supply
modules in the housing. The System Power Supply Unit can weigh as
much as 13.29 kg (29.3 lb) if two power supply modules are installed.
To install a power supply housing in a system cabinet:
CAUTION
The DC Distribution Bus and associated power cables
may have DC power still applied if the load is backed
up by a redundant power source located elsewhere.
Personal injury and equipment damage can occur if a
DC Distribution Bus or cable is accidentally shorted.
Turn off any backup power sources.
2. Position the power supply housing on the EIA rails. Provide
sufficient support to hold the housing in place until the flange-lock
screws are installed and tightened.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-20
3. Install the four M6 Phillips Screws and M6 cage nuts and tighten
them until the housing is securely attached to the cabinet rails.
4. Connect DC output and alarm wiring as required for your
installation.
5. Connect the AC inputs to the input terminal blocks on the right
side of the housing front panel.
6. Install power supply modules in the housing if they are not
already installed. (See Installing a Power Supply in a Housing,
following.)
7. After following appropriate procedures for energizing circuits,
place all circuit breakers that control cabinet AC power in the ON
position .
Installing a Power Supply in a Housing
To install a power supply module in the housing:
1. Ensure that the AC power switch on the front of the power supply
module is in the off (O) position and that the locking pawl is in the
horizontal position.
2. Align the power supply module with the guide rails in the housing.
3. Slide the power supply module into the housing, making sure that
the bottom right edge of the power supply module engages the
plastic guide rail in the housing.
NOTE: If you are installing only one power supply module in
a housing, install it in the right side of the housing.
4. Continue inserting the power supply module until the locking pawl
reaches the stop.
5. Using a screwdriver, slowly turn the locking screw
counterclockwise one quarter turn while observing the pawl to
ensure that it freely rotates 90 degrees to the vertical position
and engages the slot in the bottom of the housing.
If the pawl does not rotate to the vertical position, move the
power supply module in or out of the housing slightly to align the
pawl with the slot in the housing.
6. Turn the locking screw approximately 10 additional turns
counterclockwise until it stops, to fully seat the blind-mate
connector. The remaining turns draw the power supply module
into the housing and seat the blind-mate electrical connector.
CAUTION
Do not apply power to the power supply module until
the blind-mate connector is fully seated. Failure to
fully seat the connector may result in damage to the
power supply module and power supply housing.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-21
Removing a Power Supply from a Housing

Individual power supply modules can be removed from a housing while
the housing is installed in a cabinet or after the housing has been
removed from a cabinet.
To remove a power supply module from the housing:
1. Make sure the AC power switch on the front of the power supply
module is in the off (O) position.
2. Using a screwdriver, turn the locking screw clockwise until the
locking pawl rotates to the horizontal position.
3. Using the handle on the front of the power supply module, pull
the power supply module out of the housing.
Specifications
Table 1.3.1 contains the specifications for the System Power Supply Unit.
Table 1.3.1. System Power Supply Unit Specification
Item
Specification
Input Voltage
85 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz, single phase line-to-neutral. Internally fused.

Undervoltage protected. Input power indicators.
Output Voltage
26.00 +/-- 1.00 VDC, isolated from chassis, internal OR-ing diodes.
Output Power
1200 watts (46 amperes @ 26 VDC) at 60_C (140_F).
Auxiliary Output
Terminal blocks and circuit breakers for auxiliary AC output.
Leakage Current
3.5 mA maximum at 240 VAC, 60 Hz input.
Inrush
Soft start, 50 A peak maximum for one cycle or less at 240 VAC.
Power Factor
0.98 minimum at full load (meets EN 60555--2 harmonics limit).
EMC Compliance
Emissions: EN 50081--2
Immunity: EN 50082--2
Radiated Radio Frequency (RF), continuous wave, 20 to 1000 MHz at 35 V/m
Radiated RF, 80% amplitude modulation of a 1 kHz sinewave, 20 to 1000
MHz at 35 V/m
Radiated RF, pulsed with a 1 Hz square wave, 20 to 1000 MHz at 35 V/m
Surge: Withstand ANSI/IEEE C62.41--1991 Category B3 transients (with
output to remain within specified tolerance).
RS3: Power
SV: 1-3-22
Table 1.3.1. System Power Supply Unit Specification (continued)
Item
Specification
Applicable Safety
Standards
CSA--C22.2 No. 234--M90

CSA--C22.2 No. 142--M1987
CSA--C22.2 No. 1010.1--92
EN 60950 including Clause 2.3
EN 61010--1
UL 1950
Agency Approvals
NRTL/C certified, CE
Alarm Relay
Contacts rated at 5 A @ 30 VDC and 5 A @ 250 VAC.
Test Jacks
Monitor output current 0 to 100% of full load (0 to 1 VDC).
Holdup Time
20 ms minimum, output to remain within 5% of nominal at full load.
Parallel Operation
Up to 4 power supply modules, current share within 10%.
Overload Protection
Overload and short circuit protection, automatic recovery.
Thermal Protection
Shutdown on overtemp, automatic reset.
Overvoltage Protection
Output protected at 105 to 110%.
Reverse Voltage Protection
Protected to load rating.
Operating Temperature
0 to 70_C (32 to 158_F), rated wattage to 60_C (140_F), derating of 2.5%/_C

above 60_C.
Storage Temperature
--67 to 185_F (--55 to 85_C).
Relative Humidity
5% to 95% non-condensing.
Airborne Contaminants
Designed for operation in environmental conditions per ISA-S71.04-1985

gaseous corrosion level G2.
Altitude
Sea level to 2440 meters (8000 feet) without derating.
Cooling Fan
Brushless, DC.
Reliability
200,000 hours MTBF minimum at 25_C (77_F).
Mounting
Rack mountable power supply housing with blind-mate connectors for power
supply modules.
Dimensions
Overall housing: 483 mm (19 in.) wide x 133.4 mm (5.25 in.) high x 343 mm
(13.5 in.) deep (from mounting flange).
Weight
Housing: 5.66 kg (12.5 lb).

Power Supply Module: 3.81 kg (8.4 lb).
RS3: Power
SV: 1-4-1
Section 4:
DC Power Distribution
This section describes the DC power distribution system and the DC
Output card.
A standard, non-redundant, DC power distribution system consists of
one or more AC/DC Power Supplies feeding one or more DC
Distribution Bus assemblies as shown in Figure 1.4.1. Each DC
Distribution Bus assembly consists of three 1 x 14 inch copper bus bars
with a current carrying capacity of 200 amps. DC Distribution Bus
assemblies may be daisy chained as required using DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper cables. Bus A is frequently jumpered to bus B giving bus A/B.
2
--
Bus A
1 x 14
Copper Bus
Bars (200
Amp Max)
DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper
Bus A/B Power Supplies

(Up to Six)
Bus A
Return Bus
Return Bus
Bus B
Bus B
Figure 1.4.1. Standard DC Power Distribution System
RS3: Power
SV: 1-4-2
A redundant DC power distribution system consists of one set of AC/DC

Power Supplies feeding the bus A and another set of AC/DC Power
Supplies feeding the bus B as shown in Figure 1.4.2. Buses A and B are
not connected.
A3
Bus A Power Supplies

(Up to six)
A1
A2
--
DC Bus to DC Bus
Jumper
Bus A
Bus A
Return Bus
Return Bus
Bus B
Bus B
-B3
B2
+
B1
Bus B Power Supplies

(Up to six)
Figure 1.4.2. Redundant DC Power Distribution System
RS3: Power
SV: 1-4-3
DC Power Distribution Bus

The DC Power Distribution Bus (1984--1144--000x) distributes power to
consoles, ControlFiles, FlexTerms, card cages, and some field devices.
Figure 1.4.3 shows a functional diagram of the DC Power Distribution
Bus.
Each AC/DC Power Supply is connected to the DC Power Distribution
Bus by the AC/DC Power Supply to DC Bus Cable (1984--0283--00xx).
The DC Power Distribution Bus consists of heavy copper terminals
mounted directly on three bus bars, bus A, bus B, and the return bus.
bus A, bus B, and the return bus run parallel to each other in a plastic
channel. Bus B is intended for use with an optional redundant DC
distribution system. The return bus is used to connect the DC return
system to the chassis with a large wire connected from the bus bar to
the chassis ground lug. This is the only connection point of the DC
return system to ground.
DC Power Distribution Bus assemblies may be daisy chained using the
DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper Cable (1984--0373--00xx) or 2-gauge wire.
The current limit is 180 amps.
Each DC Power Distribution Bus assembly may hold up to six DC
Output cards, which are used to supply power to individual card cages
and devices.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-4-4
A3
A2
A1
--
+
-+
--
Bus A
Power Supplies
A
Power
B
Power
Connector to
Card Cage
+
DC OUTPUT CARD
DC OUTPUT CARD
Bus A
F1
F1
DS1
DS1
Return Bus
F2
F2
DS2
DS2
Bus B
FUSE F1
FUSE F2
-B3
B2
10A
X
X
15A
20A
FUSE F1
FUSE F2
10A
X
X
15A
20A
+
B1
Bus B
Power Supplies
Figure 1.4.3. DC Power Distribution Bus
RS3: Power
SV: 1-4-5
DC Output Card
Power for system devices is tapped from the bus bars by mounting DC
Output cards (1984--1264--000x) on the bus bars as shown in
Figure 1.4.4. The card is marked DC OUTPUT on the PWA.
Each DC Output card has a fuse and terminal for both bus A and bus B.
An LED in parallel with each fuse lights to indicate a blown fuse. A fuse
reference chart at the bottom of each output card indicates the proper
size of fuse to be used in each position.
A standard DC distribution system has buses A and B jumpered
together to give bus A/B. Devices may take power from either the bus A
or the bus B portion of the DC Output card. Up to 12 devices may be
connected to a single DC Distribution Bus in standard configuration.
A redundant DC distribution system has separate buses A and B. Up to
six devices may be powered from a single DC Distribution Bus in the
redundant configuration. Each device draws power from the bus A and
the bus B portion of the DC Output card. Bus A and bus B fuses must
be identical.
DC Distribution Bus
From
DC Power Supplies
Fuse 1
(Bus A)
To Additional DC
Distribution Buses
PWA 01984--1264--0001
Bus A
Bus A Return
Bus A Power
Bus B Power
Bus B Return
Fuse 2
(Bus B)
Bus B
DC Output Card
Figure 1.4.4. DC Distribution Bus and DC Output Card
RS3: Power
SV: 1-4-6
DC Output Card Fuses

Table 1.4.1 shows the DC Output card fuses for various hardware
devices.
Table 1.4.1. DC Output Card Fuses
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
Multitube Command ConsoleL

1 Tube
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15 A 32 V Regular

2 Tubes
G09140--0061
ABC 20
314020
20 A 250 V Regular

3 Tubes
G09140--0061
ABC 20
314020
20 A 250 V Regular
Command Console
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15 A 32 V Regular
MiniConsole
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15 A 32 V Regular
ControlFile
G09140--0061
ABC 20
314020
20 A 250 V Regular
ControlFile Fan
G09140--0046
AGC 10
311010
10 A 32 V Regular
I/O Card Cage
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15 A 32 V Regular
FlexTerm
G09140--0046
AGC 10
311010
10 A 32 V Regular
Highway Interface Adapter

(HIA)
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15 A 32 V Regular
Supervisory Computer Interface

(SCI)
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15 A 32 V Regular
System Manager Station (SMS)
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15 A 32 V Regular
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
G09140--0046
AGC 10
311010
10 A 32 V Regular
Multipoint I/O Term Panels
G09140--0046
AGC 10
311010
10 A 32 V Regular
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
G09140--0046
AGC 10
311010
10 A 32 V Regular
Device
RS3: Power
SV: 1-4-7
DC Distribution Cabling
The DC power distribution system may be:
D
Standard, with bus A jumpered to bus B.
Redundant, with bus A and bus B independently powered.
Standard DC Distribution Cabling

The Bus A/B DC Power Distribution Cable (1984--0158--20xx) is used
on the Analog Card Cage, and on the Analog, Contact, MUX, and PLC
FlexTerms. This cable allows upgrade to redundant DC power without
adding another cable.
When using the Bus A/B DC Power Distribution Cable with a standard
DC power system, attach it to the DC Output card as shown in
Figure 1.4.5. Connection may be made to either the bus A or bus B
portion of the card. The other portion of the card may be used for
another device.
NOTE: The Pxxx tags on the cable will not match the Jxxx tags on the
DC Output card.
A/B DC Distribution Power Cable
Brown
To Device Power
Connectors A & B
B
U
S
A
Orange
Orange-Black
B
U
S
B
Figure 1.4.5. Non-redundant DC Power Cable
RS3: Power
SV: 1-4-8
Redundant DC Power Distribution Cabling

When using bus A/B DC Power Distribution Cable with a redundant DC
power system, attach it to the DC Output card as shown in Figure 1.4.6.
This applies to all devices in which a single power cable can carry the
load.
NOTE: The fuses in the sides of the output card of buses A and B must
be identical.
B
U
S
Brown
To Device
Power
Connector
B
U
S
ORANGE
Orange-Black
Figure 1.4.6. Redundant DC Power Cable
NOTE: The Pxxx tags on the cable will not all match the Jxxx tags on
the DC Output card. See Table 1.4.2
Table 1.4.2. Power Cable Plugs and Jacks
RS3: Power
Cable Plug
Jack
P233/4
J234
P235/6
J236
P237/8
J237
P239/40
J240
SV: 1-4-9
Bus A DC Power Distribution Cable (1984--0158--00xx) and bus B DC

Power Distribution Cable (1984--0158--10xx) are used as dual power
cables for the ControlFile, and the Multitube because a single redundant
power cable (as in Figure 1.4.6.) cannot carry the load.
They are connected to the DC Output card as shown in Figure 1.4.7.
NOTE: The Pxxx tags on the cable will match the Jxxx tags on the DC
Output card.
To Device
Power
Connector A
Brown
Bus A Cable
Orange
B
U
S
A
B
U
S
B
Orange-Black
To Device
Power
Connector B
Bus B Cable
Brown
Figure 1.4.7. Dual DC Power Cables
NOTE: The fuses in the sides of the output card of buses A and B must
be identical.
RS3: Power
SV: 1-4-10
DC Power Distribution System Color Codes

Table 1.4.3 shows the standard color codes used for DC wiring
throughout the system.
Table 1.4.3. Standard Color Codes for Wiring and Test Points
Color
Voltage
Orange
+30 VDC
Brown
Ground Return
Red
+12 VDC
Blue
--12 VDC
Yellow
+5 VDC
Purple
RS3: Power
+9 VDC (Unregulated)
NOTE: Violet is used for test points on
the --2494 Analog Transfer Card
White
+5 V Relative Current Indication
Green
+12 V Relative Current Indication
Gray
Isolated Ground Return
SV: 1-5-1
Section 5:
Redundant Power
This section shows different ways in which system power can be made
redundant. Figure 1.5.1 shows examples of single and redundant
system power. With single-source AC Power (no redundancy), if the AC
power source fails, the system fails. With redundant AC Power, if one
AC power source fails, the system relies on the second AC power
source.
Redundant AC Power
Sources
Single AC Power Source

AC Input
Panel
AC Input
Panel
DC Power
Supply
DC Power
Supply
Bus A
Return
Bus A
Return
Bus B
Bus B
System
Device
System
Device
Single-Source AC Power
Redundant AC Power
Figure 1.5.1. Examples of Redundant System Power
RS3: Power
Redundant Power
SV: 1-5-2
Figure 1.5.2 adds redundant power supplies. The DC power supplies

share the load. If one DC power supply fails, the other DC supply
assumes the load.
Redundant AC Power
Sources
AC Input
Panel
DC Power
Supply
DC Power
Supply
Load Sharing DC Power

Supplies
Bus A
Return
Bus B
System
Device
Figure 1.5.2. Redundant AC Power and Load Sharing DC Power Supplies
Figure 1.5.3 adds redundant power supply buses in addition to giving

redundant AC power, load sharing DC power supplies, and redundant
power buses. Redundant AC power is fed to each AC input panel. Load
sharing DC power supplies provide power to bus A and bus B. The
system device is connected to redundant buses A and B.
Redundant
AC Power Sources
AC Input
Panel
AC Input
Panel
DC Power
Supply
DC Power
Supply
DC Power
Supply
DC Power
Supply
Load Sharing
DC Power Supplies
Bus A
Return
Bus B
Redundant Buses A and B
System
Device
Figure 1.5.3. Redundant AC Power, Load Sharing DC Power Supplies, and Redundant Power Buses
RS3: Power
Redundant Power
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 2:
PeerWay
Section 1:
Section 2:
Section 3:
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
.....................................
2-1-1
Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes

.........................................
PeerWay Tap Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Tap Fuses
..............................................
Grounding an Electrical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax PeerWay Cable
..............................................
Twinax PeerWay Cable Termination
................................
Installing Twinaxial Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3
2-1-6
2-1-6
2-1-7
2-1-9
2-1-11
2-1-12
Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1
Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Repeater/Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Repeater/Attenuator Jumpers and LEDs
....................
Star Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding an Optical PeerWay
.......................................
Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Fiber Optic Connectors
...................................
2-2-3
2-2-5
2-2-6
2-2-8
2-2-8
2-2-9
2-2-10
2-2-13
2-2-13
Hybrid PeerWay
.........................................
2-3-1
PeerWay Extender (PX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PX System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drop Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the PX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal/Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2
2-3-5
2-3-6
2-3-6
2-3-6
2-3-7
2-3-7
2-3-7
2-3-8
2-3-8
2-3-8
2-3-9
Contents
SV: ii
List of Figures
Figure
RS3: PeerWay
Page
2.1.1
PeerWay Tap Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1
2.1.2
Electrical PeerWay (A or B Side Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2
2.1.3
PeerWay Tap Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-4
2.1.4
PeerWay Tap Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-6
2.1.5
Tap Boxes 10P52760001 and 10P52790001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-7
2.1.6
PeerWay Tap Ground Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-8
2.1.7
PeerWay Tap Box Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-10
2.1.8
Electrical PeerWay Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-11
2.1.9
Crimp-type Twinaxial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-12
2.1.1
0Solder-type Twinaxial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-14
2.2.1
Optical PeerWay (A or B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1
2.2.2
Optical PeerWay Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2
2.2.3
Optical PeerWay Tap and Cable Tie Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3
2.2.4
Optical Tap Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-4
2.2.5
Cable Connection to Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-5
2.2.6
Electrical Tap Box Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-6
2.2.7
Electrical Tap Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-7
2.2.8
Optical Repeater/Attenuator LED and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-8
2.2.9
Star Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-9
2.2.10
Optical PeerWay Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-10
2.2.11
Grounding the Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-12
2.2.12
Fiber Optic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-13
2.3.1
Sample Hybrid PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1
2.3.2
PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2
2.3.3
PeerWay Extender (PX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-4
2.3.4
PX System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-5
Contents
SV: iii
List of Tables
Table
RS3: PeerWay
Page
2.1.1
PeerWay Tap Box Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3
2.2.1
Optical Tap Box Replacement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-4
2.2.2
Electrical Tap Box Replacement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-7
2.2.3
Optical Repeater/Attenuator Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-8
2.3.1
PX Parts Replacement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3
2.3.2
PX System Cabling Components
..............................
2-3-6
2.3.3
PX LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-7
2.3.4
Normal/Test Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-8
2.3.5
PX Fuses
2-3-9
..................................................
Contents
SV: iv
RS3: PeerWay
Contents
SV: 2-1-1
Section 1:
Electrical PeerWay
This section describes hardware and shows functional diagrams for the
electrical PeerWay. The electrical PeerWay includes twinax PeerWay
cables and PeerWay taps.
The PeerWay is fully redundant. Each PeerWay carries half the traffic
and either one can carry the full load if the other fails. Two sets of twinax
PeerWay cables and PeerWay Tap Boxes provide independent
communication paths between the nodes. Figure 2.1.1 shows a
PeerWay with two Tap Boxes and five nodes. Each node is attached to
PeerWay A and PeerWay B through the Tap Box.
If there are four or fewer nodes, twinax PeerWay cables are not
required. All connections can be made at a single PeerWay Tap, as
shown on the right hand side of Figure 2.1.1.
PeerWay A Twinax Cable
PeerWay B Twinax Cable

A
PeerWay Tap Box
PeerWay Drop Cable

Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Figure 2.1.1. PeerWay Tap Box Connection
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-2
Figure 2.1.2 shows one side (A or B) of a typical electrical PeerWay. Up

to 32 nodes may be attached to a PeerWay. Highway Interface Adaptors
(HIA) may be used to connect multiple PeerWays.
Console ControlFile
PeerWay
Tap
Card Cages
Console ControlFile Card Cages
Twinax Cable
Console
PeerWay Tap
Console ControlFile Card Cages
Twinax Cable
PeerWay Tap
Figure 2.1.2. Electrical PeerWay (A or B Side Only)
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-3
Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes

The PeerWay Tap Box is the connection between the electrical
PeerWay and drop cables to ControlFiles, consoles, or other devices.
These tap boxes are availible:
D
PeerWay A Tap Box
10P52760001
CE Approved
1984--0488--0001
PeerWay B Tap Box
10P52790001
CE Approved
1984--0489--0001
Mounting Plate
1984--0484--0002
One A and one B Tap Box are normally mounted on the mounting plate
to make an assembly. They are marked DATAWAY TAP A and
DATAWAY TAP B on the printed wiring assembly (PWA).
Table 2.1.1. PeerWay Tap Box Parts Replacement
Part
Part No.
Replaces
Tap A
10P52760001
1984--0488--0001
1984--0488--0001
10P52760001
10P52790001
1984--0489--0001
1984--0489--0001
10P52790001
Tap B
Comment
All installations.
Only in non-CE installations.
All installations.
Only in non-CE installations.
Figure 2.1.3 shows a functional diagram of a PeerWay Tap Box.
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-4
PeerWay Tap Box A

5V
REG
PEERWAY A TWINAX CABLE
Unreg.
+9 V ISO.
100 or 124 Ohm

Terminator
(4 Places)
Local Loop
Back
Ready to
Send (RTS)
Watch
dog
Timer
Transmit
Data
Receive
Data
Status
F1
Section 1
Section 2
(Same as Section 1)
Male
Connector
4 Places
PEERWAY B TWINAX CABLE
Cable to
Card Cage
Section 3
(Same as Section 1)
Section 4
(Same as Section 1)
F2
GND
Jumper
HOLD
1 Meg
Ohm
PeerWay Tap Box B

F1
Female
Connector
4 Places
F2
GND
Jumper
HOLD
1 Meg
Ohm
Figure 2.1.3. PeerWay Tap Functional Diagram
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-5
Each PeerWay Tap Box has four identical circuits that connect to four
different nodes (system devices). The four circuits are isolated from
each other so that if one node fails, other nodes will not be affected.
There are four connections from the tap boxes to system device drop
cables. The A tap box uses male connectors; the B tap box uses female
connectors.
Each tap box has two fuses, F1 and F2. The fuses are in line with the
PeerWay so a problem with either box is indicated by a communication
failure on one line but not on the other.
The PeerWay Tap is considered to be one drop on the PeerWay.
Connections are made between two A tap boxes and two B tap boxes
with twinax cable and a T connector. Buffers transmit and receive data
to the different nodes. For power, an onboard 5 volt regulator is provided
for each of the four nodes, with the unregulated 9 volts brought to each
tap circuit from the originating node. Thus, each tap receives power
from the node to which it is cabled.
The PeerWay Tap connects to a PeerWay Buffer Card (in a ControlFile)
or a PeerWay Interface Card (in a console) through a PeerWay Drop
Cable. The Loopback circuit on the PeerWay Tap drives the local
loopback relay. When the loopback relay is de-energized, data is not
transmitted to the PeerWay. A transmit circuit on the tap takes the data
transmitted from the node and changes it to transistor to transistor logic
(TTL) and then to RS-422 for transmission on the PeerWay. The Ready
To Send (RTS) circuit drives the RTS signal to enable the transmitter
output. This circuit has a watchdog timer on its output to disable the
loopback relay. This prevents a problem on the node from tying up the
PeerWay. A feedback transmitter is used to tell the node that a time-out
is in progress. The Receive circuit in the tap buffers data from the
PeerWay to the node. Communications with the node are in RS-422
format.
In a system with four nodes or less and in which a twinax is not needed
for long communication distance, all connections can be made through
the PeerWay Tap with 100 ohm terminators installed on all of the twinax
connectors.
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-6
PeerWay Tap Test Points

To access the PeerWay Tap test points, loosen the four captive screws
on the tap and turn the tap cover so that the board is visible. There are
four sets of brown and yellow test points on each board. Each point is a
5 volt DC (4.75 -- 5.25) voltage regulator with power drawn from the
node to which it is connected. Figure 2.1.4 shows the test point
locations.
TP3, 4
TP1, 2
TP5, 6
TP7, 8
Figure 2.1.4. PeerWay Tap Test Points
PeerWay Tap Fuses

The PeerWay Tap has two special fuses (F1, F2) soldered into the
board. These fuses are not field replaceable.
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-7
Grounding an Electrical PeerWay

Each tap box assembly must be grounded by having the metal case
connected to ground. The twinax PeerWay shield must be connected to
ground at only one tap box set. The shield is grounded by having the
screw at the GROUND position or the jumper at GND on the A and B
boxes of the set. The tap nearest to the system ground point should be
used to ground the PeerWay shield.
-
To ground the Twinax PeerWay Shield on Tap Boxes

10P52760001 and 10P52790001:
GROUND Position
PEERWAY
DROP 1
PEERWAY
DROP 2
PEERWAY
DROP 3
OPEN Position
PEERWAY
DROP 4
Figure 2.1.5. Tap Boxes 10P52760001 and 10P52790001
1. Move the grounding screw from the OPEN to the GROUND

position on tap boxes A and B.
2. To prevent a multiple ground of the Twinax PeerWay shield,
check all other taps on the PeerWay to make sure that the
grounding screws or jumpers are in the OPEN or HOLD position.
3. Check that no connector body can touch grounded metal.
Grounding a connector body can lead to ground loops that are
very hard to locate.
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-8
To ground the Twinax PeerWay Shield on Tap Boxes 1984--0488

and 1984--0489:
Mounting
Plate
PeerWay
Tap A
PeerWay
Tap B
SHIELD
SHIELD
GND
HOLD
GND
HOLD
Figure 2.1.6. PeerWay Tap Ground Jumper
1. Remove the PeerWay Tap by loosening the four captive screws

that secure it to the mounting plate. Refer to Figure 2.1.6.
2. Turn the Tap over to expose the circuit board.
3. Place the jumper in the GND (ground) position.
4. Reinstall the Tap on the mounting plate.
5. Repeat the procedure for the adjoining PeerWay tap B.
6. To prevent a multiple ground of the Twinax PeerWay shield,
check all other taps on the PeerWay to make sure that the
grounding screws or jumpers are in the OPEN or HOLD position.
7. Check that no connector body can touch grounded metal.
Grounding a connector body can lead to ground loops that are
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-9
Twinax PeerWay Cable

Twinax PeerWay cable provides the communication connection
between electrical PeerWay nodes. The twinax PeerWay transmits
messages serially at a rate of one million bits per second. As many as
32 system devices such as ControlFiles and consoles can be connected
to the twinax PeerWay.
The twinax PeerWay cable consists of a twisted pair of wires within an
overall shield. The electrical specification is RS-422, a form of high
speed data communication using two lines driven differentially between
5 volts and ground. The twinax shield is used to shield the data lines
from outside electrical interference.
Twinax PeerWay cables are used in pairs, called A and B. In order to
identify the cables, the A cable should be color coded green and the B
cable should be color coded blue. The cable connectors can be marked
with a felt-tip marker. Corresponding A and B PeerWay tap boxes are
marked with green and blue labels.
T-style connectors are used to connect the twinax cable to the bulkhead
connector on the PeerWay tap. Figure 2.1.7 shows the cable
connections to a Tap Box.
CAUTION
The connector must have an insulating sleeve to prevent
accidental grounding of the Twinax PeerWay shield.
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-10
PeerWay A
PeerWay B
PeerWay A
PeerWay B
PEERWAY
PEERWAY
TAP
TAP
To Next
PeerWay
Tap
Drop Cables
Figure 2.1.7. PeerWay Tap Box Connection
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-11
Twinax PeerWay Cable Termination

Both ends of each standard (100 ohm) twinax PeerWay cable are
equipped with a 100 ohm impedance terminator (1984--1065--0001).
Extended length (124 ohm) cable is equipped with a 124 ohm
impedance terminator (1984--1065--0002). The terminator eliminates
noise and reflections on the cable. Figure 2.1.8 shows terminator
connections.
In a system with four nodes or less and in which a twinax cable is not
needed, all connections can be made through a single PeerWay Tap
with four 100 ohm terminators installed on the twinax connectors.
Terminators
PeerWay B
PeerWay A
PEERWAY
TAP A
PEERWAY
TAP B
Drop Cables
Figure 2.1.8. Electrical PeerWay Termination
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-12
Installing Twinaxial Connectors

Two types of connectors are available:
D
D
Crimp Type (100 ohm cable only)
1167--0016--0001
Solder Type (100 ohm cable)

(124 ohm Beldin cable)
(124 ohm Intercomm cable)
G12885--0001
G12885--0006
G12885--0008
NOTE: An insulating sleeve should be placed over the metal barrel of

the connector to prevent inadvertent grounding of the twinax shield.
-
To install a crimp-type twinaxial connector:

1. Strip the cable as shown in Figure 2.1.9.
2. Refer to the crimping instructions (AS047401) shipped with the
connector for installation instructions.
3. Put an insulating sleeve over the connector.
NOTE: A Connector Crimp Tool (1167--0016--0002) is required. A Crimp

Tool Kit (1167--0016--0007) is available. The kit has 20 connectors and a
crimp tool.
15.08 0.4 mm
(0.59 0.016 in.)
9.53 0.4 mm (0.38

0.016 in.)
4.76 0.4 mm
(0.19 0.016 in.)
7.14 0.4 mm
(0.28 0.016 in.)
24.61 mm (ref)
(0.97 in.)
Figure 2.1.9. Crimp-type Twinaxial Connector
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-13
-
To install a solder-type twinaxial connector:

1. Place the wrench crimp nut on the cable. Refer to step A of
Figure 2.1.10.
2. Strip the cable as shown and bend the braid outward to allow free
entry of cone.
3. Push the cone under the braid until bottomed (step B).
4. Bend the long conductor outward and install the shield over the
copper conductor.
5. Position the pin and solder in place.
6. Wrap the conductor between the shield ridges and solder (step
C). Do not allow the solder to extend above ridges.
7. Bring the wrench crimp nut onto the tapered portion of the cone
(step D).
8. Assemble the connector body over the cable assembly and
engage with the wrench crimp nut. Hold the cable and the
connector body stationary while tightening the nut.
9. Wrench tighten the nut to 4.5--5.5 NSm (40--50 in-lb) torque.
10. Put an insulating sleeve over the connector.
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-1-14
16.6 mm
(0.66 in.)
Wrench
Crimp Nut
6.35 mm
(0.25 in.)
A
6.35 mm
(0.25 in.)
Braid
Copper
Conductor
Shield
Cone
Pin
Solder
Cone
C
Solder
Turn
Conductor Body
Hold
Figure 2.1.10. Solder-type Twinaxial Connector
RS3: PeerWay
Electrical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-1
Section 2:
Optical PeerWay
This section gives hardware descriptions and functional diagrams for the
optical PeerWay. The optical PeerWay uses fiber optic cable and
provides complete electrical isolation between system components.
An optical PeerWay uses a passive star architecture with a star coupler
feeding up to eight optical fiber runs. Each optical fiber run terminates at
an optical tap box. The optical fiber run may include repeaters and/or
attenuators to adjust signal strength. Figure 2.2.1 shows an overview of
an optical PeerWay.
Console ControlFile
Optical
Tap
Electrical
Tap
ControlFile
Card Cages
Console
ControlFile
Card Cages
Optical
Tap
Optical Cable
Star
Coupler
Console
Card Cages
Opto/Electrical
Cable
Drop Cable
Console
ControlFile
Card Cages
Optical Cable
Optical Cable
Repeater
Optical
Tap
Attenuator
Figure 2.2.1. Optical PeerWay (A or B)
An optical tap box can support up to four directly connected devices.

Additional devices may be connected to the optical tap box by daisy
chaining up to three electrical tap boxes using special opto/electrical
cables. Each electrical tap box may support up to four devices.
Figure 2.2.2 shows one side (A or B) of an optical PeerWay.
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-2
Each side (A and B) of the optical PeerWay uses a dual fiber optic
cable, one fiber for transmission and one for reception. The fiber optic
cable carries messages serially at a rate of one million bits per second.
A maximum of 32 system devices can be connected to an optical
PeerWay. A Highway Interface Adaptor (HIA) can be used to connect
two optical PeerWays or an optical and an electrical PeerWay.
Star
Coupler
Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber Optic Cable
Optical Tap
Optical Tap
Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber Optic Cable
Optical
Repeater
Optical Tap
Attenuator
Opto/Electrical Cable
Optical Tap
Electrical Tap
Attenuator
Electrical Tap
Electrical Tap
(MAX 4 NODES)
Figure 2.2.2. Optical PeerWay Components
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-3
Optical Tap Box

The tap consists of a mounting plate and two Optical Tap Boxes:
D
PeerWay A ( 1984--3211--0001 or 1984--1191--0001)
PeerWay B ( 1984--3214--0001 or 1984--1192--0001)
The Optical PeerWay Tap should always be used with a Fiber Optic
Cable Tie Panel Assembly (1984--2231--0001) to securely dress and tie
down fiber optic cables. The cable tie assembly mounts at the top of the
Optical PeerWay Tap. Figure 2.2.3 shows the Optical PeerWay Tap and
the Fiber Optic Cable Tie Panel Assembly.
TR
TR
Fiber Optic Tap A
Fiber Optic Tap B
Optical Tap _X__

Electrical Tap____
Ground
____
Optical Tap _X__

Electrical Tap____
Ground
____
Figure 2.2.3. Optical PeerWay Tap and Cable Tie Panel Assembly
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-4
Up to three Electrical Tap Boxes may be daisy chained to an Optical Tap

Box using special Opto/Electrical cables.
Figure 2.2.4 shows the functional diagram of an Optical Tap Box.
Test Timer
PeerWay
Drop 1
LED
Watchdog
PeerWay
Drop 2
PeerWay
Drop 3
Optical/
Electrical
Interface
PeerWay
Drop 4
Fiber Optic
Transmitter
To
Fiber Optic
PeerWay
Fiber Optic
Receiver
From
Fiber Optic
PeerWay
DATA
RTS
+9V
GND
Electrical Interface
to
Other Tap Boxes
Figure 2.2.4. Optical Tap Block Diagram
The --3211 and --1191 parts are fully interchangeable. Similarly, the
--3214 and --1192 parts are fully interchangeable as shown in
Table 2.2.1.
Table 2.2.1. Optical Tap Box Replacement Data
RS3: PeerWay
Part No.
Replaces
Comment
1984--3211--0001
1984--1191--0001
PeerWay A Optical Tap Box
1984--1191--0001
1984--3211--0001
PeerWay A Optical Tap Box
1984--3214--0001
1984--1192--0001
PeerWay B Optical Tap Box
1984--1192--0001
1984--3214--0001
PeerWay B Optical Tap Box
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-5
Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap Box

Figure 2.2.4 shows the fiber optic, opto/electric cable, and PeerWay
drop cable connections to an optical tap box.
D
Optical Tap Box A to Electrical Tap Box A, use Opto/Electric

Cable (1984--1195--xxxx).
Optical Tap Box B to Electrical Tap Box B, use Opto/Electric
Cable (1984--1196--xxxx).
The Optical Tap Box can be in the middle of the daisy chain if desired.
Both electrical connectors may be used at the same time.
Devices connect to the optical tap box with normal PeerWay drop
cables.
Fiber Cable
to Star Coupler B
Fiber Cable
to Star Coupler A
to Electrical Tap Box A
to Electrical Tap Box B
TR
Fiber Optic Tap A
TR
Fiber Optic Tap B
Optical Tap _X__

Electrical Tap____
Ground
____
Optical Tap _X__

Electrical Tap____
Ground
____
Standard PeerWay Drop

Cables
Figure 2.2.5. Cable Connection to Optical Tap Box
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-6
Electrical Tap Box

The tap consists of a mounting plate and two Electrical Tap Boxes:
D
PeerWay A (1984--3211--0002 or 1984--1193--0002)
PeerWay B (1984--3214--0002 or 1984--1194--0002)
Figure 2.2.6 shows the PeerWay Electrical Tap set. Figure 2.2.7 shows
the functional diagram of an Electrical Tap Box.
Optical Tap ___

Electrical Tap__X_
Ground
____
Optical Tap ___

Electrical Tap__X_
Ground
____
Figure 2.2.6. Electrical Tap Box Set
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-7
PeerWay
Drop 1
Optical/Electrical
Interface
PeerWay
Drop 2
TXD
LLB
RTS
RXD
CPLST
+9VI
IGND
Electrical
Interface to
Optical Tap Box
DATA
RTS
+9VI
IGND
PeerWay
Drop 3
TXD = Data Transmit

LLB = Local Loop Back
RTS = Ready to Send
RXD = Data Receive
VI = Volts Isloated
IGND = Isolated Ground
PeerWay
Drop 4
Figure 2.2.7. Electrical Tap Block Diagram
Up to 3 Electrical Tap Boxes may be daisy chained to an Optical Tap

Box using special Opto/Electrical cables. The maximum allowable
length of the chain is 30 meters (100 feet). Devices are connected to the
electrical tap box with normal PeerWay drop cables.
Use Opto/Electric Cable (1984--1195--9999) to connect Electrical Tap
Boxes A.
Use Opto/Electric Cable (1984--1196--9999) to connect Electrical Tap
Boxes B.
The --3211 and --1193 parts are fully interchangeable. Similarly, the
--3124 and --1194 parts are fully interchangeable as shown in
Table 2.2.2
Table 2.2.2. Electrical Tap Box Replacement Data
RS3: PeerWay
Part No.
Replaces
Comment
1984--3211--0002
1984--1193--0001
PeerWay A Electrical Tap Box
1984--1193--0001
1984--3211--0002
PeerWay A Electrical Tap Box
1984--3214--0002
1984--1194--0001
PeerWay B Electrical Tap Box
1984--1194--0001
1984--3214--0002
PeerWay B Electrical Tap Box
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-8
Optical Repeater/Attenuator
The Optical Repeater/Attenuator (1984--2350--0002) is used to adjust
signal levels in an optical PeerWay.
It is marked FIBER OPTIC REPEATER on the PWA
(1984--0514--000x).
Optical Repeater/Attenuator Jumpers and LEDs

Figure 2.2.8 shows the jumper and LED locations on the card within the
Optical Repeater/Attenuator. Table 2.2.3 gives the jumper settings for
normal and test operation.
1
2
3
HD1
T1
R1
LEDs
DS7
1
2
3
LEDs DS1 -- DS6
HD2
T2
DS1
Hardware Good
DS2
Hardware Bad
DS3
+30V Fuse Blown
DS4
FO TX1 Failed*
DS5
FO TX2 Failed*
DS6
Data 1
DS7
Data 2
R2
* FO = Fiber Optic
Figure 2.2.8. Optical Repeater/Attenuator LED and Jumper Locations

Table 2.2.3. Optical Repeater/Attenuator Jumper Settings
RS3: PeerWay
Jumper
Normal Position
Test Position
HD1
1--2
2--3
HD2
1--2
2--3
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-9
Star Coupler
The Star Coupler (1984--1198--000x) provides optical connection for up
to eight fiber optic cable pairs (transmit and receive). The coupler is a
passive device that connects the optical fibers to provide circuit
continuity. Figure 2.2.9 shows the Star Coupler label and the eight fiber
optic connectors.
There are no serviceable parts in a Star Coupler.
PEERWAY
STAR A
ROSEMOUNT INC. P/N 1984--1198--0002

Made in USA
REV ___ SER ___
Front View (with cover in place)
Front View (with cover removed)

Figure 2.2.9. Star Coupler
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-10
Grounding an Optical PeerWay

Each fiber optic run from the star coupler must be grounded at one and
only one tap box (optical or electrical). The tap should have low
resistance to earth ground (preferably less than one ohm). Both tap box
A and tap box B must be grounded. As an example, Figure 2.2.10
shows a fiber optic PeerWay. All of the shaded tap boxes are grounded.
Star Coupler
Shaded Taps Are
Grounded
Optical Tap
Optical Tap
Max 4 Nodes
Optical Tap
Electrical Tap
Electrical Tap
Electrical Tap
Figure 2.2.10. Optical PeerWay Grounding
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-11
-
To ground an optical or electrical tap box:

1. Free the fiber optic tap A by loosening the four captive screws
that secure it to the mounting plate. Refer to Figure 2.2.11.
NOTE: Perform this procedure before connecting the fiber optic cables
to the tap boxes. However, if the fiber optic cables are attached to the
tap, do not turn the tap over. Move the tap away from the mounting plate
just enough to move or check the jumper position.
2. Turn the tap over to expose the circuit board.
3. Place the jumper in the GND (ground) position.
4. Reinstall the tap on the mounting plate.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other PeerWay tap at this location.
6. To prevent multiple grounds, remove and check all other taps on
the fiber optic connection to make sure that the jumpers are in
the HOLD position.
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-12
TR
Fiber Optic Tap A
TR
Fiber Optic Tap B
Optical Tap ___

Electrical Tap__X_
Ground
____
Optical Tap ___

Electrical Tap__X_
Ground
____
Mounting
Plate
CAUTION: Do not turn the tap box over if
the fiber optic cables are attached.
Back side of Tap A
HD 3
HD 3
HOLD
NOTE: Set the jumpers in Tap

A and Tap B the same way.
GND
Figure 2.2.11. Grounding the Optical Tap Box
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-13
Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories

Each fiber optic cable has two separate fibers. One fiber is used to
transmit data and one fiber is used to receive data. Fiber optic cables
are used in pairs, called A and B. The A cable should be color coded
green and the B cable should be color coded blue. The cable
connectors can be marked with a felt-tip marker. Corresponding A and B
tap boxes are marked with green and blue labels.
The fiber optic cable is terminated with ST connectors that have less
than 0.7 dB loss per connector.
See the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP) for procedures to
install fiber optic connectors.
WARNING
Use care when handling optical cables. The ends are
subject to damage from chipping, dust, and dirt. The cable
may be damaged if it is bent at too small a radius.
Installing Fiber Optic Connectors

A kit (1984--1189--0001) is available for splicing fiber optic cables. Refer
to the instructions received with the kit for installing the fiber optic
connector. Figure 2.2.12 shows the connector components.
Straight Coupling
Straight In Line Plug
Plastic Cap
Key
Key Way
Figure 2.2.12. Fiber Optic Connector
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-2-14
RS3: PeerWay
Optical PeerWay
SV: 2-3-1
Section 3:
Hybrid PeerWay
A hybrid PeerWay has electrical (twinax) segments and fiber optic
segments. The PeerWay Extender (PX) allows creation of a hybrid
PeerWay with both twinax and fiber optic segments. The PX transfers
information between the twinax and the fiber optic segments and acts
as a regenerative repeater. It also provides two standard PeerWay
drops, which directly connect to the twinax segment. The PX is
designed to be fully compatible with both twinax PeerWay products and
fiber optic PeerWay products.
A pair of Highway Interface Adapters (HIA) can be used to allow
communications between a twinax and a fiber optic PeerWay, but the
two PeerWays each retain their individual set of node numbers.
Figure 2.3.1 shows insertion of a fiber optic link in a twinax PeerWay.
The PXs are shown at the physical end of the twinax segments. Actually
they can be located anywhere along the twinax run.
No.
Description
No.
Description
Twinax PeerWay cable
DC power cable (18--36 VDC)
PeerWay Extender (PX)
Fiber Optic PeerWay cable
DC power cable (18--36 VDC)
Peerway Drop Cables to devices
Peerway Drop Cables to devices
Twinax PeerWay cable

Figure 2.3.1. Sample Hybrid PeerWay
RS3: PeerWay
Hybrid PeerWay
SV: 2-3-2

A PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly consists of a PeerWay A PX
(10P50930001), a PeerWay B PX (10P50960001), and a mounting
plate (1984--0484--0002). FRSI recommends using a Fiber Optic Cable
Tie Assembly (1984--2231--0001). A typical unit is shown in
Figure 2.3.2.
1
S1 S2
XMT
STATUS
S1 S2
S3
HIGH
LOW
POWER POWER
RECV
S1 S2
STATUS
S1 S2
NORMAL
GROUND OPEN
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
XMT TEST
GND A B
18-- 36 VDC
BARCODE
PEERWAY
DROP 1
PEERWAY
DROP 2
GND A B
RECV XMT
S3
HIGH
LOW
POWER POWER
RECV
NORMAL
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
XMT TEST
PEERWAY A
XMT
18-- 36 VDC
GROUND OPEN
BARCODE
PEERWAY B
PEERWAY
DROP 1
PEERWAY
DROP 2
RCV
XMT
No.
Description
No.
Description
Mounting Plate
PX for PeerWay B
PX for PeerWay A
Fiber Optic Cable Tie Assembly
Figure 2.3.2. PeerWay Extender Tap Box Assembly
RS3: PeerWay
Hybrid PeerWay
SV: 2-3-3
Table 2.3.1. PX Parts Replacement Data
Part No.
Replaces
Name
Tap A
10P52760001
Twinax Tap Box A
Provides only two PeerWay drops.
10P50930001
1984--0488--0001
Twinax Tap Box A
1984--3211--0001
Optical Tap Box A

Cannot connect to Electrical Tap
Boxes.
1984--1191--0001
Optical Tap Box A

Boxes.
Tap B
10P52760002
Twinax Tap Box B
10P50960002
1984--0488--0002
Twinax Tap Box B
1984--3211--0002
Optical Tap Box B

Boxes.
1984--1191--0002
Optical Tap Box B

Boxes.
RS3: PeerWay
Comment
Hybrid PeerWay
SV: 2-3-4
The parts of a PX are shown in Figure 2.3.3.

1
S1
S2
STATUS
S1
S3
XMT
RECV
HIGH
POWER
S2
LOW
POWER
NORMAL
GROUND
OPEN
F.O.
DISABLE
PEERWAY A
F.O.
DISABLE
BARCODE LABEL
F.O.
XMT TEST
GND
1 2
A B
3 4
18-- 36 VDC
PEERWAY
DROP 1
Description
No.
PEERWAY
DROP 2
RECV
11
10
XMT
12
No.
Description
Twinax Peerway Connector
Label showing effect of Normal/Test switches
Normal/Test switches S1 and S2
DC power connector
LEDs
PeerWay Drop 1 connector
Fiber Optic output power switch (S3)
10
PeerWay Drop 2 connector
Tap Box grounding screw position
11
Fiber Optic receiver
Tap Box non-grounded screw position
12
Fiber Optic transmitter
Figure 2.3.3. PeerWay Extender (PX)
RS3: PeerWay
Hybrid PeerWay
SV: 2-3-5
PX System Cabling
The PeerWay Extender is cabled as shown in Figure 2.3.4. Table 2.3.2
identifies the parts.
5
1
S1 S2
XMT
STATUS
S1 S2
S1 S2
GND A B
18-- 36 VDC
GROUND OPEN
BARCODE
PEERWAY
DROP 2
GND A B
RECV XMT
S3
HIGH
LOW
POWER POWER
RECV
NORMAL
GROUND OPEN
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
XMT TEST
PEERWAY A
PEERWAY
DROP 1
XMT
STATUS
S1 S2
NORMAL
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
DISABLE
F.O.
XMT TEST
S3
HIGH
LOW
POWER POWER
RECV
18-- 36 VDC
BARCODE
PEERWAY B
PEERWAY
DROP 1
PEERWAY
DROP 2
RECV XMT
7
9
Figure 2.3.4. PX System Cabling
RS3: PeerWay
Hybrid PeerWay
SV: 2-3-6
Table 2.3.2. PX System Cabling Components
Description
No.
No.
Description
Peerway A Twinax connector and cable
PeerWay B fiber optic cables and connectors
Peerway B Twinax connector and cable
PeerWay A Drop Cable to device
DC power cable for PX A
PeerWay B Drop Cable to device
DC power cable for PX B
Device connected to the PeerWay
Peerway A fiber optic cables and connectors
Twinax Cables
Twinax cables are attached to the top of the unit by a T connector. Use
a terminator if this tap box is at the end of the twinax run. If there are no
twinax cables attached, you must put a terminator on the single twinax
connector at the top of the unit. Use only one terminator.
CAUTION
The barrel of each twinax connector and terminator must
be covered with an insulating sleeve to prevent inadvertent
grounding of the twinax cable to the mounting plate.
Fiber Optic Cables
Fiber optic cables require strain relief near the connector. It is
customary to leave about 3 meters (10 feet) of cable to allow
replacement of the connector. FRSI recommends using Fiber Optic
Cable Tie Assembly (1984--2231--0001).
DC Power Cable
A standard DC Bus to System Device cable (1984--0158--xxxx) can be
used to connect system DC power to the tap box. Any other reliable
source of DC in the range of 18 to 36 V can be used. A Mate N LockT
connector (G11262--1004) is used.
CAUTION
The PX must be supplied with a reliable source of DC
power. If the PX loses power, the PeerWay is broken into
separate twinax segments at that point.
RS3: PeerWay
Hybrid PeerWay
SV: 2-3-7
Drop Cables
Sandard PeerWay Drop Cables (1984--0473--xxxx) are used to connect
devices to the tap box. Tighten the connector captive screws at both
ends of the cable run.
NOTE: The PX can be powered through the Drop Cables but only if
turning the devices off will not break the PeerWay by removing power
from the PX.
Grounding the PX
Each tap box assembly must be grounded. Mounting the assembly in a
properly grounded system cabinet grounds the assembly. If the
assembly is mounted on a non-conducting surface, a ground wire must
be run to the nearest system grounding point.
One tap box set (and only one tap box set) in each twinax PeerWay
segment must have the twinax shield connected to chassis ground. To
make the connection at the PX tap box set, move the screw from the
OPEN position to the GROUND position. Move the screws on both tap
boxes A and B. To make the connection at another tap box set, set the
SHIELD jumper to GND on both tap boxes A and B.
A zero length twinax segment (a PX with no twinax attached) must have
the screw set at GROUND on both A and B tap boxes.
PX LEDs
There are three LEDs as shown in Table 2.3.3.
Table 2.3.3. PX LEDs
LED
RS3: PeerWay
Meaning
STATUS
(Yellow)
The PX is running and has adequate power applied.
XMT
(Yellow)
Fiber Optic Transmit -- ON (flickering) when messages

are being transmitted on the fiber optic channel. ON
continuously indicates a stuck transmitter or
transmitter in test mode.
RECV
(Yellow)
Fiber Optic Receive -- ON (flickering) when messages

are being received on the fiber optic channel. ON
continuously indicates a stuck transmitter at the other
end of the fiber or transmitter in test mode.
Hybrid PeerWay
SV: 2-3-8
PX Switches
There are two sets of switches: S1 and S2 control the Normal/Test
mode of operation; S3 controls the output power of the fiber optic
transmitter. The switches are reached through holes in the faceplate.
Fiber Optic Power Switch
Switch S3 controls the power output of the fiber optic transmitter. At the
HIGH POWER setting full transmitter power is output. At the LOW
POWER setting the output is about 7 to 10 dB lower. This is used in
place of an external attenuator.
Normal/Test Switches
The PeerWay Extender has three operating modes: normal, disabled,

and test. The modes are controlled by switches S1 and S2. You must
force PeerWay traffic to the other PeerWay before using either disable
or test mode.
Normal Mode: When S1 and S2 are both thrown to the right, normal
operation results.
Disabled Mode: When S1 and S2 differ, the twinax to fiber optic
connection is turned off.
Test Mode: When S1 and S2 are both thrown to the left, the fiber optic
transmitter sends a 50% duty cycle signal on the fiber. The Receive
LED on all tap boxes connected to this fiber should be ON. This verifies
that both transmitter and receiver are functioning within specification.
Table 2.3.4 shows all cases.
Table 2.3.4. Normal/Test Switch Settings
RS3: PeerWay
S1 Position
S2 Position
Effect
Right
Right
Normal Mode
Right
Left
Disabled
Left
Right
Disabled
Left
Left
Fiber Optic Transmitter Test Mode
Hybrid PeerWay
SV: 2-3-9
PX Fuses
Table 2.3.5 gives fuse data for the PX.
Table 2.3.5. PX Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
F1, F2
G50382--0009
273.125
MSF 034.4210
1/8 A 125 V Plug-In
F3
G50382--0019
273.001
MSF 034.4221
1 A 125 V Plug-In
RS3: PeerWay
Hybrid PeerWay
SV: 2-3-10
RS3: PeerWay
Hybrid PeerWay
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 3:
Consoles
Section 1:

and System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Keyboard and Enhanced Engineering Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball Keyboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touchpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Electronics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P50840004
1984--3222--0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--2889--0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--1978--000x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--3222--1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--2889--1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: IIYAMA Vision Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: ViewSonic 17GS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Mag Innovision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Sony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Conrac 7122 and 7241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS3: Consoles
3-1-1
3-1-4
3-1-5
3-1-6
3-1-6
3-1-7
3-1-8
3-1-9
3-1-10
3-1-11
3-1-12
3-1-12
3-1-13
3-1-13
3-1-14
3-1-15
3-1-16
3-1-17
3-1-18
3-1-19
3-1-20
3-1-20
3-1-22
3-1-23
3-1-24
3-1-24
3-1-25
3-1-26
3-1-26
3-1-26
3-1-26
3-1-27
3-1-27
3-1-30
Contents
SV: ii
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: Consoles
Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Black Video or Black Bars on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Power-up Diagnostics Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Barco CD 551 and ICD 551 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-32
3-1-33
3-1-34
3-1-34
3-1-35
Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console .
3-2-1
Pedestal Command Console Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pedestal Command Console Loop Callup Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Command Entry Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Configuration Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Trackball Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Rotating (Alphanumeric) Keyboard . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Keyswitch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Disk Interface Card (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Command Console Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Printer Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-5
3-2-5
3-2-6
3-2-8
3-2-11
3-2-11
3-2-11
MiniConsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1
MiniConsole Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Power Regulator Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole PeerWay Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole OI Processor Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator Raster Test Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Printer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Floppy Interface (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Floppy Interface (SCSI) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote MiniConsole Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-4
3-3-6
3-3-6
3-3-6
3-3-7
3-3-9
3-3-9
3-3-10
3-3-11
3-3-11
3-3-11
3-3-12
3-3-13
3-3-14
3-3-16
3-3-16
RS3 Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1
RS3 Operator Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ROS CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: Iiyama Vision Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board (10P56910001) . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2
3-4-3
3-4-3
3-4-3
3-4-4
3-4-6
3-4-7
3-4-8
Contents
SV: iii
Section 5:
Section 6:
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Network Interface (RNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ethernet Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TP/8 Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS II Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS II Network Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transceiver Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPS Software Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-9
3-4-11
3-4-11
3-4-12
3-4-13
3-4-13
3-4-14
3-4-14
3-4-15
3-4-16
3-4-17
Disk and Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1
Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quantum QM32100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum Thunderbolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM Deskstar 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDriver LPS 105S 3.5-Inch 102 Meg Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDriver 80S 3.5-Inch 100 MB Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Drive Cabling and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Drive Jumper and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2
3-5-5
3-5-6
3-5-7
3-5-8
3-5-9
3-5-10
3-5-11
3-5-13
3-5-15
3-5-16
3-5-16
3-5-18
3-5-20
3-5-23
3-5-24
3-5-25
Printers
.................................................
3-6-1

Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2
3-6-2
3-6-5
3-6-6
3-6-6
3-6-9
3-6-9
3-6-10
3-6-11
3-6-13
3-6-14
3-6-15
3-6-16
3-6-16
3-6-17
Contents
SV: iv
Section 7:
RS3: Consoles
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Vertical Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Error Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Jumpers and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Modification for 30.5 Cm Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Modification for Lowercase Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Printing Half Page of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-17
3-6-18
3-6-18
3-6-20
3-6-20
3-6-21
3-6-22
3-6-23
3-6-23
OI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-1
Electronics Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Output Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Output Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage 10P52820001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage 1984--0660--0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Interface LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Interface Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply Jumpers for a System Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pixel Graphics Video Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphics Video Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Interface LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Interface Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-2
3-7-4
3-7-5
3-7-5
3-7-7
3-7-10
3-7-14
3-7-15
3-7-17
3-7-18
3-7-20
3-7-22
3-7-23
3-7-23
3-7-24
3-7-25
3-7-27
3-7-29
3-7-29
3-7-29
3-7-30
3-7-32
3-7-33
3-7-33
3-7-34
3-7-36
3-7-37
3-7-38
3-7-39
3-7-41
3-7-42
3-7-44
3-7-45
3-7-46
3-7-49
3-7-51
Contents
SV: v
SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--3301--000x SCSI Board 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--1140--0001 OI SCSI Host Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Nonvolatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS3: Consoles
3-7-52
3-7-55
3-7-56
3-7-56
3-7-58
3-7-60
3-7-62
3-7-65
3-7-66
3-7-67
3-7-69
3-7-74
3-7-77
3-7-78
3-7-81
Contents
SV: vi
List of Figures
Figure
RS3: Consoles
Page
3.1.1
Multitube Command Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1
3.1.2
System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2
3.1.3
Hardened Command Console (Doors Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3
3.1.4
Typical 10P50842004 and 1984--3222--2004 Keyboard Interface

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-15
3.1.5
Typical 10P50840004 and 1984--3222--0004 Keyboard Interface

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-17
3.1.6
Typical 1984--2889--0004 Keyboard Interface Connections . . . . . . . . .
3-1-18
3.1.7
Typical 1984--1978--000x Keyboard Interface (Without Video Isolation)

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-19
3.1.8
Typical 1984--3222--1004 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-20
3.1.9
Typical 1984--3222--1004 Replacing 1984--2889--1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-21
3.1.10
Typical 1984--2889--1004 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-22
3.1.11
Removing the Console Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-23
3.1.12
Cable Routing for 14-Inch Sony Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-28
3.1.13
14-Inch Sony Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-29
3.1.14
Conrac 7241 CRT Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-30
3.1.15
Conrac 7241 CRT (Back View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-31
3.1.16
Conrac 7241 Scan Board Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-34
3.1.17
Barco CD 551 CRT Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-35
3.1.18
Barco CD 551 CRT (Back View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-36
3.1.19
Barco CD 551 CRT (Input Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-37
3.1.20
Barco CD 551 CRT Deflection Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-38
3.1.21
Barco CRT RGB Input/Output Amplifier and Remote Control . . . . . . .
3-1-39
3.1.22
Barco CRT Switched Mode and EHT Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-40
3.2.1
Pedestal Command Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1
3.2.2
Pedestal Command Console (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2
3.2.3
Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3
3.2.4
Basic and Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface

(1984--1921--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-7
3.2.5
Conrac 7211 CRT Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-8
3.2.6
Conrac 7211 CRT (Back View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-9
3.3.1
MiniConsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2
Contents
SV: vii
RS3: Consoles
3.3.2
MiniConsole Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3
3.3.3
MiniConsole Front Panel Keyboard Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-5
3.3.4
Monochrome Video Generator Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-8
3.3.5
Monochrome Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-9
3.3.6
Monochrome Video Generator Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-10
3.3.7
Floppy Interface (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-12
3.3.8
Floppy Interface (SCSI) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-13
3.3.9
MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drives (With 1984--1017--0001 Power

Regulator Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-14
3.3.10
Floppy Disk Power Supply Block Diagram

(With 1984--1017--0001 Power Regulator Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-15
3.3.11
Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-16
3.4.1
RS3 Operator Station PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2
3.4.2
Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . .
3-4-4
3.4.3
Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-5
3.4.4
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-6
3.4.5
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-7
3.4.6
RS3 Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-9
3.4.7
RNI Write-on Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-10
3.5.1
Hard Disk Drive (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-4
3.5.2
1984--2780--000x ProDrive 80S Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-11
3.5.3
1984--2780--000x ProDrive 80S Drive Jumpers and Terminators . . . .
3-5-12
3.5.4
1984--2307--000x Quantum Q280 Drive Jumpers and Terminators . . .
3-5-14
3.5.5
1984--1928--000x 40 Meg Hard Drive Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-15
3.5.6
1984--2837--000x 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Dip Switch Positions . . .
3-5-17
3.5.7
MiniConsole 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drives (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-19
3.5.8
Pansonic JU475--4AEG 5.25-Inch Floppy Drive Jumper Positions . . .
3-5-20
3.5.9
3-5-21
3.5.10
3-5-22
3.5.11
Magnetic Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-24
3.5.12
Tandberg 5623 or 9245 (10P5685000x) Configuration Jumpers . . . . .
3-5-25
3.5.13
Viper 2150S (1984--3389--000x) and 2060S Tape Drive

(1984--3289--000x) Jumper Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-25
3.5.14
Scorpion 5945S Tape Drive (1984--1989--000x) Dip Switch Positions
3-5-25
3.5.15
Scorpion 5945C Tape Drive (1984--1927--000x) Dip Switch Positions
3-5-25
3.6.1
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-9
3.6.2
TI 810 Jumper Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-22
3.7.1
Standard Electronics Cabinet (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-2
3.7.2
Standard (non-EMC) Electronics Cabinet (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-3
Contents
SV: viii
RS3: Consoles
3.7.3
System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-4
3.7.4
Alarm Output Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-5
3.7.5
Alarm Output Board Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-6
3.7.6
OI Card Cage (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-7
3.7.7
Rear View of EMC OI Card Cage 10P52820001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-10
3.7.8
Alarm Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-13
3.7.9
OI Card Cage 1984--0660--0001 (Back View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-14
3.7.10
PeerWay Interface Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-15
3.7.11
PeerWay Interface LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-17
3.7.12
PeerWay Interface Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-18
3.7.13
Setting the Node Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-19
3.7.14
OI Power Supply Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-20
3.7.15
OI Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-22
3.7.16
1984--1137--000x OI Power Supply Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . .
3-7-23
3.7.17
OI Processor 68040 Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-27
3.7.18
OI Processor 68040 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-29
3.7.19
3-7-30
3.7.20
3-7-32
3.7.21
OI Processor 68020 Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-33
3.7.22
3-7-35
3.7.23
3-7-36
3.7.24
OI Processor 68000 Fuse and Jumper Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-37
3.7.25
Pixel Graphics Video Generator Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-39
3.7.26
Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-41
3.7.27
Character Graphics Video Generator Card Functional Diagram . . . . .
3-7-42
3.7.28
Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-44
3.7.29
Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-45
3.7.30
Printer Interface Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-47
3.7.31
Printer Interface Card --0001, --0002 (Without RS-422 Interface) LEDs
3-7-49
3.7.32
Printer Interface Card --0003, --0004 (With RS-422 interface) LEDs . .
3-7-50
3.7.33
Printer Interface Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-51
3.7.34
SCSI Board 2 Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-53
3.7.35
OI SCSI Host Adapter Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-53
3.7.36
SCSI Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-55
3.7.37
SCSI Board 2 (1984--3301--000x) Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-56
3.7.38
OI SCSI Host Adapter (1984--1140--0001) Jumper Locations . . . . . . .
3-7-58
3.7.39
OI Bubble Memory Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-63
Contents
SV: ix
RS3: Consoles
3.7.40
OI Bubble NV Memory LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-65
3.7.41
OI Bubble Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-67
3.7.42
OI NV RAM Memory Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-70
3.7.43
RAM NV Memory Battery Control Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-72
3.7.44
OI NV RAM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-74
3.7.45
OI NV RAM Memory Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-75
3.7.46
OI NV RAM Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-78
Contents
SV: x
List of Tables
Table
RS3: Consoles
Page
3.1.1
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-5
3.1.2
Main Keyboard Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-7
3.1.3
Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions for Use in Main

Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-7
3.1.4
Trackball Keyboard Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-8
3.1.5
Option Keyboard Electronics Board Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-9
3.1.6
Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-9
3.1.7
Touchpad Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-10
3.1.8
Joystick Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-11
3.1.9
Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-12
3.1.10
Keyboard Electronics Board Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-12
3.1.11
Trackball Electronics Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-13
3.1.12
Keyboard Interface Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-14
3.1.13
Keyboard Interface LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-24
3.1.14
Keyboard Interface Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-24
3.1.15
Keyboard Interface Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-25
3.1.16
Adaptor Cables for Sony CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-27
3.1.17
Sony Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-29
3.1.18
Conrac 7241 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-31
3.1.19
Conrac 7241 Low Voltage Regulator Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-32
3.1.20
Conrac 7241 Scan Board Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-33
3.2.1
Command Console Key Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-6
3.2.2
Keyboard Interface Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-7
3.2.3
Conrac 7211 CRT Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-10
3.3.1
Monochrome Video Generator Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-10
3.3.2
Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-16
3.4.1
Hub Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-14
3.4.2
Typical Power Consumption Examples
.........................
3-4-16
3.5.1
Hard Disk Drive Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-3
3.5.2
Hard Disk Drive DC Power Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-4
3.5.3
Cable 10P56840001 Inline Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-4
3.5.4
10P58570001 Quantum Thunderbolt Drive Address Jumpers . . . . . . .
3-5-5
3.5.5
10P58050001 Quantum Thunderbolt Drive Address Jumpers . . . . . . .
3-5-6
Contents
SV: xi
RS3: Consoles
3.5.6
10P5665000x IBM Deskstar 540 Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-7
3.5.7
10P5280000x ProDrive LPS 270S Drive Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . .
3-5-8
3.5.8
1984--3100--000x ProDrive LPS 170S Drive Address Jumpers . . . . . .
3-5-9
3.5.9
1984--3100--000x Productive LPS 105S Drive Option Jumpers . . . . . .
3-5-10
3.5.10
1984--3100--000x ProDrive LPS 105S Drive Address Jumpers . . . . . .
3-5-10
3.5.11
1984--2780--000x ProDrive 80S Drive Option Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-11
3.5.12
1984--2780--000x Productive 80s Drive Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-11
3.5.13
1984--2307--000x Q280 Version 1 Drive Option Jumpers . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-13
3.5.14
1984--2307--000x Q280 Version 2 Drive Option Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-13
3.5.15
1984--2307--000x Q280 Drive Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-14
3.5.16
1984--1928--000x 40 Meg Drive Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-15
3.5.17
1984--2837--000x 8-Bit Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-16
3.5.18
1984--2837--000x 4-Bit Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-17
3.5.19
5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-18
3.5.20
Magnetic Tape Drive Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-23
3.6.1
Printer Types
...............................................
3-6-1
3.6.2
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer MENU1 and MENU2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-4
3.6.3
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer HARDWARE Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-5
3.6.4
Fujitsu DL4600 Printer Setup: Menu 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-7
3.6.5.
jitsu DL 4600 Printer Setup: Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-7
3.6.6
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-10
3.6.7
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-11
3.6.8
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-12
3.6.9
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-16
3.6.10
TI 810 Processor Board Jumpers
..............................
3-6-20
3.6.11
TI 810 Printer Motherboard Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-20
3.6.12
T1 810 Printer Baud Rate (Pencil) Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-21
3.6.13
TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-21
3.7.1
Alarm Output Board Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-6
3.7.2
OI Card Cage Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-7
3.7.3
EMC OI Card Cage 10P52820001 Connectors and Fuses . . . . . . . . .
3-7-11
3.7.4
CE-Compliant Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-12
3.7.5
OI Card Cage 10P5282000x Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-13
3.7.6
PeerWay Interface Jumper Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-18
3.7.7
OI Power Supply Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-21
3.7.8
1984--1137--000x OI Power Supply Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-23
3.7.9
OI Jumper Settings for a System Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-23
Contents
SV: xii
RS3: Consoles
3.7.10
OI Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-24
3.7.11
OI Processor Replacement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-26
3.7.12
OI Processor 68040 Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-29
3.7.13
3-7-33
3.7.14
3-7-37
3.7.15
OI Processor 68000 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-38
3.7.16
Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-45
3.7.17
Printer Interface Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-46
3.7.18
Printer Interface Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-51
3.7.19
SCSI Card Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-52
3.7.20
SCSI Board 2 (1984--3301--000x) ID Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-56
3.7.21
SCSI Board 2 (1984--3301--000x) Bus Terminator Jumper Setting . . .
3-7-57
3.7.22
OI SCSI Host Adapter (1984--1140--000x) Device ID Jumper . . . . . . .
3-7-59
3.7.23
OI SCSI Host Adapter (1984--1140--000x) Address Jumpers . . . . . . . .
3-7-59
3.7.24
OI NV Memory Replacement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-61
3.7.25
OI Bubble LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-66
3.7.26
OI Bubble Jumper Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-68
3.7.27
OI NV RAM Memory Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-76
3.7.28
OI NV RAM LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-77
3.7.29
OI NV RAM Jumper Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-79
Contents
SV: 3-1-1
Section 1:

and System Manager Station
This section covers the free standing operator interface portion of the
Multitube Console, including the keyboards and CRT. The operator
interface portion of the Hardened Command Console and System
Manager Station is also covered here. The Hardened Command
Console uses many of the same assemblies as the Multitube Console.
The Operator Interface (console) Card Cage and electronics are
covered in Section 6 of this chapter. Peripheral devices (disk, tape, and
printer) are covered in Sections 4 and 5 of this chapter. Maintenance
and troubleshooting of the console is covered in chapters 9 and 10.
Figure 3.1.1 shows the Multitube Command Console operator interface.
Figure 3.1.2 shows the System Manager Station. Figure 3.1.3 shows the
interior of a Hardened Command Console.
CRTs
Keyswitch
Operator
Keyboard
Keyboard
Interface
Option
Keyboard
Figure 3.1.1. Multitube Command Console
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-2
3
1
2
4
Front Door Removed
No.
Description
Panels Removed
No.
Description
PeerWay Tap
Keyboard/Video Interface (if internal mount)
Tape Drive
Power Supply (if present)
Disk Drive
OI Card Cage (door closed)
Figure 3.1.2. System Manager Station
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-3
Monitor
CRT Power, Brightness,
and Degauss Assembly
Base
Console Keyboard Interface
Callup Button
Keyboards
(Optional)
Operator
Keyboard
To Configuration
Keyboard
Joystick or
Resistive
Touch Pad
Hard Disk Drive (Rear)

Tape Drive or Floppy
Disk (Front)
AC/DC Power Supply With Battery

Backup (optional)
PeerWay Taps A & B

Alarm Output Board
Card Cage
AC/DC Distribution Box *

(optional)
*
The AC distribution box for the optional air conditioner must be supplied separately by the customer and
must be on a different circuit than the circuit powering the CRT and card dage electronics.
Figure 3.1.3. Hardened Command Console (Doors Open)
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-4
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Assemblies

The Multitube Console may have these keyboard assemblies:
D
D
D
Alphanumeric keyboard (PC or QWERTY style):
Configuration Keyboard or Engineering Keyboard
Enhanced Engineering Keyboard (Combines Operator and

Engineering Keyboard functions)
Operator Keyboard Assembly (also called the Main Keyboard)

Option Keyboard Assembly (with up to 3 units of 32 configurable
keys each)
Trackball Assembly
Touchpad Assembly (Hardened Command Console only)
Joystick (Hardened Command Console only)
The Keyboard Interface card connects these keyboard assemblies to

the console electronics.
The Alarm Output Board provides console alarm signals as contact
closures. See Section 5 of this chapter for details.
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-5
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Error Reporting

If a key is shorted or held down for more than 20 seconds, hardware
alarm 090 will be issued. The message indicates the problem area by
keyboard number (p) and key number (kkk):
Board: Key <p:kkk> is bad
Table 3.1.1 shows the keyboard number assignments for Multitube
Command Console keyboards.
Table 3.1.1. Multitube Command Console Keyboard Numbers
RS3: Consoles
Keyboard Number
Keyboard
Configuration Keyboard
(Alphanumeric Keyboard)
Trackball Keyboard
Operator Keyboard
Callup Option Keyboard 1 (Left)
Callup Option Keyboard 2 (Middle)
Callup Option Keyboard 3 (Right)

SV: 3-1-6
Configuration Keyboard and Enhanced Engineering Keyboard

The Configuration Keyboard (1984--1654--000x), also known as the
Engineering Keyboard, is a PC compatible alphanumeric keyboard.
The Enhanced Engineering Keyboard (1984--2386--000x) combines the
functions of the Configuration Keyboard and the Operator Keyboard.
NOTE: The Enhanced Engineering Keyboard requires software Version
15 or higher.
There are no field replaceable parts in either keyboard.
Upgrade kits are available to change --1654 keycaps to --2386 format. A
Keycap Puller (1984--3017--000x) is available to assist in the keycap
change operation. A new Keyboard Interface microprocessor or a new
Keyboard Interface board may also be required for the upgrade.
Operator Keyboard
The Operator Keyboard comes in two versions:
D
Main Keyboard/Trackball
(1984--1634--000x)
Main Keyboard/Trackball/Option
(1984--2372--000x)
Subassemblies are available to replace the keyboard tops for each of

the three component keyboards. The subassemblies are without base
or cable. Keyboard Electronics boards are also available. See the
individual keyboard assemblies listed below for details.
A single elevated base is standard issue. Separate bases for each
subassembly are available for the Main, Trackball, and Option
Keyboards.
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-7
Main Keyboard
The Main Keyboard is the flat panel, membrane key part of the Operator
Keyboard assembly. The keyboard top may be replaced with the Main
Keyboard Replacement Subassembly (1984--1695--000x). The
subassembly has no base or cable.
The Main Keyboard uses the Keyboard Electronics board
(1984--2871--000x or 1984--1970--000x). They are completely
interchangeable.
NOTE: The same Keyboard Electronics board (with different jumper
settings) is also used in the Option Keyboard.
Table 3.1.2 gives parts replacement data.
Table 3.1.2. Main Keyboard Parts Replacement
Part
Part No.
Replaces
Characteristics
Keyboard
Electronics
68HC05
1984--2871--000x
1984--1970--000x
Keyboard Electronics boards are

completely interchangeable
Keyboard
Electronics
1984--1970--000x
1984--2871--000x

Main Keyboard
Replacement
Subassembly
1984--1695--000x
Keyboard top
Without base or cable
Jumpers HD1 through HD4 (or J1 through J4) on the Keyboard

Electronics board must be set to indicate that the board is being used
with the Main Keyboard. Jumper positions are shown in Table 3.1.3.
NOTE: The table printed on some boards refers to HD1--HD4 as J1--J4.
Table 3.1.3. Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions for Use in Main Keyboard
Board use
HD1
(J1)
HD2
(J2)
HD3
(J3)
HD4
(J4)
Main Keyboard
1--2
1--2
2--3
2--3
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-8
Trackball Keyboard Assembly

The Trackball Assembly (1984--1631--000x) is a part of the Operator
Keyboard or of a free standing trackball keyboard. The Trackball top may
be replaced with the Trackball Keyboard Replacement Subassembly. The
subassembly is without base or cable. Two versions exist:
D
10P5324000x
CE compliant. For all consoles.
1984--1693--000x
For all except CE-compliant consoles.
NOTE: For a CE-compliant console, be sure to replace CE-compliant

parts only with CE-compliant parts.
The Trackball Keyboard Replacement Subassembly includes a
Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board.
The trackball is contained in a small black box (1984--1653--000x). Two
versions are available: --0003 for normal use and --0004 for severe
environments.
NOTE: Most trackball problems can be cured by cleaning the trackball.
See Chapter 9, Maintenance, for instructions.
Table 3.1.4. Trackball Keyboard Parts Replacement
Part No.
Name
Replaces
10P5324000x
Trackball Keyboard
Replacement
Subassembly
1984--1693--000x
CE compliant. Useable in any console.

Replaces the keyboard top only. Has no
base or cable
1984--1693--000x
Trackball Keyboard
Replacement
Subassembly
10P5324000x
Not for a CE-compliant console.

Replaces the keyboard top only. Has no
base or cable
10P5285000x
Keyboard
Electronics Board
68HCC05
1984--1975--000x
1984--2662--000x
CE compliant. Can replace any other

keyboard electronics board
1984--2662--000x
Keyboard
Electronics Board
68HCC05
10P5285000x
1984--1975--000x
Keyboard electronics boards are

Interchangeable except for CE
compliance
1984--1975--000x6
Keyboard
Electronics Board
10P5285000x
1984--2662--000x
Keyboard electronics boards are

Interchangeable except for CE
compliance
1984--1653--0003
Normal Trackball
Trackball
Trackball
Replaces the black box containing the

trackball
1984--1653--0004
Teflon Sealed
Trackball
Trackball
--
The entire 1984--1631--0006 Keyboard

Assembly must be replaced if the sealed
trackball fails
RS3: Consoles
Characteristics

SV: 3-1-9
Option Keyboard
The Option Keyboard (1984--1632--000x), with 32 Callup Buttons, is a
part of the Operator Keyboard or a free standing keyboard. The
keyboard top may be replaced with the Option Keyboard Replacement
Subassembly (1984--1694--000x). The subassembly is without base or
cable.
The Option Keyboard uses Keyboard Electronics board
1984--2871--000x or 1984--1970--000x. They are completely
interchangeable. The same board (with different jumper settings) is also
used in the Main Keyboard. Table 3.1.5 provides parts replacement
data.
NOTE: To maintain CE compliance, replace subassemblies only with
subassemblies bearing the CE mark.
Table 3.1.5. Option Keyboard Electronics Board Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
Name on PWA
Characteristics
1984--2871--000x
1984--1970--000x
KEYBOARD ELECTRONICS

1984--1970--000x
1984--2871--000x
KEYBOARD ELECTRONICS

Jumpers on the Keyboard Electronics board must be set to indicate that

the board is being used with Option Keyboard 1, 2, or 3. Jumper
positions are shown in Table 3.1.6.
Table 3.1.6. Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions
Usage
HD1
(J1)
HD2
(J2)
HD3
(J3)
HD4
(J4)
Option Keyboard 1
1--2
1--2
1--2
2--3
Option Keyboard 2
1--2
1--2
2--3
1--2
Option Keyboard 3
1--2
1--2
1--2
1--2
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-10
Touchpad
The Touchpad (1984--2844--000x or 1984--2321--000x) is used with the
Hardened Command Console. It is marked TOUCH PANEL on the
printed wiring assembly (PWA). The touchpad is sometimes called a
Scratchpad.
The touchpad is used in conjunction with a membrane keyboard
(1984--2335--000x) and the Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board
(1984--1981--000x).
NOTE: The touchpad is obsolete and should be replaced with a
Joystick.
Table 3.1.7 provides replacement data.
Table 3.1.7. Touchpad Replacement
Item
Part No.
Characteristics
Touchpad
1984--2321--000x
A Touchpad should be replaced with a Joystick upgrade kit.
Touchpad
1984--2844--000x
A Touchpad should be replaced with a Joystick upgrade kit.
Touchpad
Keyboard
Electronics Board
1984--1981--000x
A Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board should be replaced

with a Joystick upgrade kit.
Keyboard, Cursor
Control (Modified)
1984--2335--000x
The membrane keyboard may be replaced with any dash

number (--000x) keyboard assembly or with a Joystick
upgrade kit.
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-11
Joystick
The Joystick (1984--3038--000x) is used with the Hardened Command
Console. It replaces the Touchpad. Replacement requires use of a
Joystick Upgrade Kit (1984--3040--000x). The upgrade kit contains a
joystick, a new membrane keyboard, a Trackball Electronics Board, and
miscellaneous hardware. The Trackball Electronics Board replaces the
Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board.
The Joystick uses either the Trackball 68HC05 (10P5285000x or
1984--2662--000x) or the Trackball Keyboard (1984--1975--000x)
keyboard electronics boards. They are completely interchangeable. The
Joystick cannot be used in a CE-compliant console.
The Joystick is used in conjunction with a membrane keyboard
(1984--2335--000x). The keyboard dash number must be --0003 or
higher.
NOTE: The Joystick is sensitive to radio frequency interference in the
400--500 MHz range. For example, a walkie-talkie operated within one
foot of the Joystick may cause the cursor to move across the screen.
Table 3.1.8. Joystick Parts Replacement
Item
Part No.
Replaces
Joystick
1984--3038--000x
Itself
Joystick Upgrade Kit
1984--3040--000x
1984--2844--000x
1984--2321--000x
Replaces the touchpad
Trackball 68HC05
Keyboard
Electronics Board
10P5285000x
1984--2662--000x
1984--1975--000x
Keyboard electronics board

CE compliant
Trackball 68HC05
Keyboard
Electronics Board
1984--2662--000x
10P5285000x
1984--1975--000x
Trackball Keyboard
Electronics Board
1984--1975--000x
1984--2662--000x
RS3: Consoles
Characteristics

SV: 3-1-12
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Electronics

The keyboard assemblies use these electronics boards:
D
Keyboard Electronics Board
Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board
Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board
Keyboard Electronics Board

The Keyboard Electronics board (1984--2871--000x or
1984--1970--000x) is used in both the Main Keyboard and the Option
Keyboard. Both are marked KEYBOARD ELECTRONICS on the PWA.
They differ in the microprocessor used but they are completely
interchangeable.
Jumpers on the Keyboard Electronics board must be set to indicate
whether the board is being used with the Main Keyboard or with Option
Keyboard 1, 2, or 3. Jumper positions are shown in Table 3.1.9.
The jumpers on 1984--1970--000x are concealed. The board must be
removed for access to the jumpers.
Table 3.1.9. Keyboard Electronics Board Jumper Positions
Usage
HD1
(J1)
HD2
(J2)
HD3
(J3)
HD4
(J4)
Main Keyboard
1--2
1--2
2--3
2--3
Option Keyboard 1
1--2
1--2
1--2
2--3
Option Keyboard 2
1--2
1--2
2--3
1--2
Option Keyboard 3
1--2
1--2
1--2
1--2

Table 3.1.10. Keyboard Electronics Board Parts Replacement
Item
Part No.
Replaces
Characteristics
Keyboard Electronics board
1984--2871--000x
1984--1970--000x
Completely interchangeable
Keyboard Electronics board
1984--1970--000x
1984--2871--000x
Completely interchangeable
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-13
Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board

The Trackball Assembly and the Joystick use either:
D
10P5285000x marked TRACKBALL 68HC05 on the PWA
1984--2662--000x marked TRACKBALL 68HC05 on the PWA
1984--1975--000x marked TRACKBALL KEYBOARD on the

PWA.
The boards are fully interchangeable except that only the 10P5285000x
can be used in a CE-compliant console. Table 3.1.11 gives parts
replacement data.
Table 3.1.11. Trackball Electronics Board Replacement
Name on PWA
Part No.
Replaces
Characteristics
TRACKBALL 68HC05
10P5285000x
1984--2662--000x
1984--1975--000x
Boards are interchangeable

except in CE-Complaint consoles
TRACKBALL 68HC05
1984--2662--000x
10P5285000x
1984--1975--000x

TRACKBALL KEYBOARD
1984--1975--000x
10P5285000x
1984--2662--000x

Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board

The Touchpad Keyboard Electronics board (1984--1981--000x) is
mounted behind the touchpad. It is marked TOUCHPAD KEYBOARD
on the PWA.
NOTE: If the Touchpad Keyboard Electronics board requires
replacement, the touchpad should be replaced with a joystick.
When a Touchpad is replaced by a Joystick, the Touchpad Keyboard
Electronics board must be replaced with a Trackball Keyboard
Electronics board. The replacement board is part of the Joystick
upgrade kit (1984--3040--000x).
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-14
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Interface

The Keyboard Interface connects the keyboard assemblies to the
console electronics.
D
Password Security Software:
10P50842004
(CE-Compliant Console)
1984--3222--2004
Standard Keyswitch:
10P50840004
(CE-Compliant Console)
1984--3222--0004 (also supports dual keyswitch option)
1984--2889--0004
1984--1978--000x (without video isolation)
Remote Keyswitch
1984--3222--1004
1984--2889--1004
Table 3.1.12 shows parts replacement for the Keyboard Interface. Only
CE-compliant boards can be used in CE-compliant consoles.
Table 3.1.12. Keyboard Interface Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
10P50842004
1984--3222--2004
CE-compliant console
Password Security Software
1984--3222--2004
None
Password Security Software
1984--3222--1004
1984--2889--1004
Remote Keyswitch
(Uses 1984--3267--xxxx Remote Keyswitch Cable)
10P50840004
1984--3222--0004
CE-compliant console
Standard Keyswitch only
1984--3222--0004
1984--2889--0004
1984--1978--000x
Standard Keyswitch or Dual Keyswitch

(Uses 1984--3223--xxx Dual Keyswitch Cable)
1984--2889--0004
1984--1978--000x
Standard Keyswitch or Dual Keyswitch
1984--1978--000x
None
Standard Keyswitch No video isolation
1984--2889--1004
None
Remote Keyswitch (with pigtail cable)
RS3: Consoles
Characteristics

SV: 3-1-15
Password Keyboard Interface

Keyboard Interfaces used with password security software have no
keyswitch or connector for keyswitches.
Keyboard Interface 10P50842004 is used with password security
software in the Console.
D
10P50842004 marked KEYBD INT./ VIDEO ISOLATOR on the

PWA, this card is CE Compliant
1984--3222--2004 marked KEYBD INTERFACE/VIDEO
ISOLATOR on the PWA
Figure 3.1.4 shows connections for these cards.

RS-422
Video Input
Keyboard
RGB Cables
Communications
(Coaxial)
Keyboard Power Cable Ground
Cable
Wire
J942
Isolated Video Isolated Video

Output
Output
RGB Cable
RGB Cables
(Twisted Pairs)
(Coaxial)
J494
J407
J495 J496 J497
J491 J492 J493

HD2
F1
DS3
DS1
DS2
J408 J409
J410
Trackball
Keyboard
Configuror Keyboard
Operator Keyboard
Figure 3.1.4. Typical 10P50842004 and 1984--3222--2004 Keyboard Interface Connections
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-16
Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface

The standard keyswitch function is provided with video isolation by:
D
10P50840004
(CE compliant)
1984--3222--0004
The dual keyswitch option is provided with video isolation by:

D
1984--3222--0004
The standard keyswitch function is provided with video isolation by:

D
1984--2889--0004
The standard keyswitch function is provided without video isolation by:

D
RS3: Consoles
1984--1978--000x

SV: 3-1-17
10P50840004
1984--3222--0004
Keyboard Interface 10P50840004 is CE compliant. It does not support
the dual keyswitch option.
Keyboard Interface 1984--3222--0004 is used for standard keyswitch
applications and for the dual keyswitch option. In the standard keyswitch
application, there is a jumper wire in J414. In the dual keyswitch option,
a 1984--3223--xxxx Cable, Keyboard Interface to Dual Keyswitch, is
plugged into J414. This cable provides the dual keyswitch.
Figure 3.1.5 shows the card and connections.
Output
Output
RGB Cable
RGB Cables
(Twisted Pairs)
(Coaxial)
RS-422
Video Input
Keyboard
RGB Cables
Communications
(Coaxial)
Cable
Wire
J942
J494
J407
J495 J496 J497
J491 J492 J493

HD2
F1
DS3
DS1
J408 J409
J410
Keyswitch
DS2
J411
J414
Trackball
Keyboard
Configuror Keyboard
1984--3223--xxxx
Cable and
Remote Keylock
(--3222 only)
Operator Keyboard
Figure 3.1.5. Typical 10P50840004 and 1984--3222--0004 Keyboard Interface Connections
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-18
1984--2889--0004
applications. The card provides video isolation.
Figure 3.1.6 shows typical connections.
Output
Output
RGB Cable
RGB Cables
(Twisted Pairs)
(Coaxial)
RS-422
Video Input
Keyboard
RGB Cables
Communications
(Coaxial)
Cable
Wire
J942
J494
J407
J495 J496 J497
J491 J492 J493

HD2
F1
DS3
DS1
J408 J409
J410
Keyswitch
DS2
J411
Trackball
Keyboard
Configuror Keyboard
Operator Keyboard
Figure 3.1.6. Typical 1984--2889--0004 Keyboard Interface Connections
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-19
1984--1978--000x
applications. The card does not provide video isolation.
Figure 3.1.7 shows typical connections.
Keyboard Power Cable
J412
F2
Keyboard
Communications Cable
Ground
Wire
J942
J407
DS2
HD2
DS1
GND
F1
DS3
Keyswitch
J408 J409
J411
J410
Option
Keyboard
Top View
Operator Keyboard
Figure 3.1.7. Typical 1984--1978--000x Keyboard Interface (Without Video Isolation) Connections
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-20
Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface

The remote keyswitch option is supported by:
D
1984--3222--1004
1984--2889--1004
1984--3222--1004
Keyboard Interface 1984--3222--1004 is used with the remote keyswitch
option. No keyswitch is mounted on the card. A 1984--3267--xxxx,
Cable, Keyboard Interface to Remote Keylock, plugs into J415 to
provide the remote keyswitch. A wire jumper must be in J414.
Figure 3.1.8 shows the normal connections.
RS-422
Video Input
Keyboard
RGB Cables
(Coaxial)
Keyboard Communications
Cable
Power Cable
Ground
Wire
J942

Output
Output
RGB Cable
RGB Cables
(Twisted Pairs)
(Coaxial)
J494
J407
J495 J496 J497
J491 J492 J493

HD2
F1
DS3
DS1
DS2
J408 J409
J415
J414
J410
Configuror Keyboard
Trackball
Keyboard
1984--3267--xxxx
Cable and
Remote Keylock
Operator Keyboard
Figure 3.1.8. Typical 1984--3222--1004 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface Connections
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-21
NOTE: When this card replaces 1984--2889--0004, a 1984--3297--xxxx

Cable, Keyboard Interface to Keyswitch Cable Assembly is required.
The adaptor cable plugs into J415 to replace the short cable soldered
onto the --2889. The original 1984--3067--xxxx cable with keylock is
plugged into the adaptor cable as shown in Figure 3.1.9.
Keyswitch
J408 J409
J410
J415
J411
Trackball
Keyboard
Configuror Keyboard
Operator Keyboard
1984--3297--xxxx
Adaptor Cable and
1984--3067--xxxx
Remote Keylock
Cable
Figure 3.1.9. Typical 1984--3222--1004 Replacing 1984--2889--1004
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-22
1984--2889--1004
Keyboard Interface 1984--2889--1004 provides the remote keyswitch
function with the aid of a short cable soldered into the J411 (keyswitch)
position. A 1984--3067--xxxx Cable, Keyboard Interface to Remote
Keylock is plugged into the socket on the short cable.
Figure 3.1.10 shows this use.
RS-422
Video Input
Keyboard
RGB Cables
(Coaxial)
Keyboard Communications
Cable Ground
Power Cable
Wire
J942

Output
Output
RGB Cable
RGB Cables
(Twisted Pairs)
(Coaxial)
J494
J407
J495 J496 J497
J491 J492 J493

HD2
F1
DS3
DS1
J410
DS2
J408 J409
Cable soldered
to J411 position
Trackball
Keyboard
Configuror Keyboard
1984--3067--xxxx
Cable and
Remote Keylock
Operator Keyboard
Figure 3.1.10. Typical 1984--2889--1004 Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface Connections
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-23
Keyboard Interface Access

-
To access the Keyboard Interface card:

1. A portion of the connection cabling is typically routed through the
legs of the Multitube Command Console table. To access the
interior of the table legs, you must remove the table side panels.
To remove a side panel, lift the panel up an inch or two, and then
pull out.
CAUTION
The console Keyboard Interface contains electrostatic
sensitive devices. Use a grounding wrist strap while
working with the card.
2. Remove the console Keyboard Interface card from the monitor
base by removing the two screws at the front of the console base
and pulling out the assembly. Figure 3.1.11 shows the screw
locations.
Tabletop
Remove screws and pull out

Keyboard Interface Card
Figure 3.1.11. Removing the Console Keyboard Interface
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-24
Keyboard Interface LEDs

The 10P5084x00x, 1984--3222--x00x and 1984--2889--000x Keyboard
Interface cards have three LEDs. Table 3.1.13 shows their meanings.
Table 3.1.13. Keyboard Interface LEDs
LED
Color
Meaning
DS1
Yellow
Flashes when receiving data from the printer interface
DS2
Yellow
Flashes when sending data to the printer interface
DS3
Red
Fuse F1 is blown
Keyboard Interface Jumper

The 10P5084x00x, 1984--3222--x00x and 1984--2889--000x Keyboard
Interface cards have one jumper that indicates the software revision
level loaded in the console.
1984--3222--x00x also has a jumper wire in J414 unless the --0004 dual
keyswitch option is installed. Table 3.1.14 gives the jumper settings.
Table 3.1.14. Keyboard Interface Jumper Setting
Jumper Position
HD2 1--2
12.86
HD2 2--3
12.90
J414
Jumper wire
J414
Dual keyswitch cable
RS3: Consoles
Function
Console software is at revision 12.86 or lower
Console software is at revision 12.90 or higher
1984--3222--0004 only
Standard keyswitch application
1984--3222--0004 only
Dual keyswitch application

SV: 3-1-25
Keyboard Interface Fuses

Table 3.1.15 provides fuse data for the Keyboard Interface cards.
Table 3.1.15. Keyboard Interface Fuses
Part No.
Name on PWA
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
10P5084x00x
1984--3222--000x
1984--2889--000x
Keybd Interface/
Video Isolator
F1
G50382--0021
MSF
034.4224
273002
2 A 125 V
Plug-In
1984--1978--000x
Console/
Keyboard
Interface
G50382--0021
MSF
034.4224
273002
2 A 125 V
Plug-In
RS3: Consoles
F1
F2

SV: 3-1-26
Console CRTs
The color CRT monitors that can be used with the Multitube Command
Console include:
D
17-inch IIYAMA Vision Master CRT
D
21-inch Hitachi HM--4721--D CRT
D
17-inch ViewSonic 17GS CRT
D
15-inch Mag Innovision CRT
D
14-inch Sony CRT
D
19-inch Conrac 7241 CRT (Conrac 7122 in 220 volt version)
D
20-inch Barco CD 551 and ICD 551 CRT
ROS CRT: IIYAMA Vision Master

The IIYAMA Vision Master CRT (55P0144x022) is a 17-inch color unit.
The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz (108--132 /
198--264 VAC auto selecting).
Setup and controls are described in the user manual that accompanies
the unit.
Multitube Command Console CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D

The Hitachi HM--4721--D CRT (12P0373x032) is a 21-inch color unit
that connects to the Keyboard Interface. This CRT requires video
isolation provided by the keyboard interface card.
The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC (100--120 / 200--240 VAC auto
selecting). Setup and controls are described in the user manual that
accompanies the unit.
Multitube Command Console CRT: ViewSonic 17GS

The ViewSonic 17GS CRT (10P56120001) is a 17-inch color unit that
connects to the Keyboard Interface via a D-Sub connector and twisted
pairs of wires. This CRT requires video isolation provided by the
keyboard interface card.
The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC (100--240 VAC auto selecting).
the unit.
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-27
Multitube Command Console CRT: Mag Innovision

The Mag Innovision CRT (10P50660002) is a 15-inch color unit that
connects to the Keyboard Interface via a D-Sub connector and twisted
pairs of wires. This CRT requires video isolation provided by the
keyboard interface card. This unit can replace any 14-inch Sony unit.
The adapter cable is part of the assembly.
The unit runs on either 115 or 220 VAC. Setup and controls are
described in the user manual that accompanies the unit.
If the unit goes out of adjustment, first try the Brightness and Contrast
dials at the front. If this fails, you can restore the default settings by:
1. Open the hinged door in front. Check that the User-Preset switch
is set to Preset.
2. Press the Recall/Program button.
Multitube Command Console CRT: Sony

The Sony CRT (1984--3286--000x, 1984--3246--000x, or
1984--2633--000x) is a 14-inch color unit that connects to the Keyboard
Interface via a D-Sub connector and twisted pairs of wires. This CRT
requires video isolation provided by the keyboard interface card.
These models have been used. Each requires the use of an adapter
cable, as shown in Table 3.1.16. All are interchangeable.
Table 3.1.16. Adaptor Cables for Sony CRTs
RS3: Consoles
Part No.
Model No.
Adaptor Cable
1984--3286--000x
CPD--1430
1984--3287--9500
1984--3246--000x
CPD--1304S
C--1404S
1984--3245--0001
1984--2633--000x
CPD--1304
1984--3005--9030

SV: 3-1-28
Figure 3.1.12 shows typical wiring for the Sony CRT.
Monitor (Rear)
RGB Video
Cable
AC Power
Connector
Base
AC IN
IN
RGB
Monitor To 30 VDC
AC Power Distribution
Box
Source
RS-422 Keyboard
Communications
Interface Cable
from Operator
Interface Card Cage
Red, Green, and Blue

Input Cables
from Operator Interface
Card Cage
Figure 3.1.12. Cable Routing for 14-Inch Sony Monitor
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-29
The adjustments available on the side of the Sony CRT are shown in
Figure 3.1.13 and in Table 3.1.17.
Auto Size
H Size
H Shift
V Size
V Cent
Figure 3.1.13. 14-Inch Sony Monitor Adjustments
Table 3.1.17. Sony Monitor Adjustments
Control
AUTO SIZE
Must be set to ADJ to enable use of the other controls.
H Size
(horizontal size)
Used to adjust the horizontal size of the display.
H Shift
(horizontal shift)
Used to adjust the center of the display horizontally.
V Size
(vertical size)
V Cent
(vertical center)
RS3: Consoles
Function
Used to adjust the vertical size of the display.

Used to adjust the center of the display vertically.

SV: 3-1-30
Multitube Command Console CRT: Conrac 7122 and 7241

The model 7241 and 7122 19-inch color CRT (1984--1651--0027) is
manufactured by Conrac Inc. 220 volt applications use model 7122.
Figure 3.1.14 shows a block diagram of the CRT circuitry. See the
Conrac 7241 User Guide (1984--1651--0013) and the Conrac 7241
Installation and Operation Manual (1984--1651--0006) for detailed
information.
The Conrac monitor has internal video isolation so that you can cable it
directly from the OI Card Cage. The 7241 monitor uses RGB video
signals with the Vertical and Horizontal sync superimposed on the
Green video signal. The Video Processor removes the sync signals from
the Green signal and passes them to the Scan Board. The Scan Board
generates the Vertical and Horizontal drive signals to the CRT yokes.
The High Voltage Module is monitored and controlled from the Scan
Board. Control of High Voltage Shutdown is on the Scan Board. All the
power that is needed by the complete CRT is developed and controlled
by the Power Transformer and the Low Voltage Regulator Board. A
separate 120 VAC input is required for the Conrac Monitor.
Red Video
Red
Grn
Blu
BNC
Board
Inp Pwr
Sel Blk
Power
Transformer
Power
Power
CRT
Blu Video
Horz & Vert Sync
Control
Board
AC
Power
Grn Video
Video
Processor
Horz and Vert Coils

Scan
Board
HV
Shutdown
ABL
HV
G2
Low
Voltage
Regulator
Board
HV
Module
Power
G3 Focus
2nd Anode
Power
Figure 3.1.14. Conrac 7241 CRT Block Diagram
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-31
Figure 3.1.15 shows the switches and connections at the rear of the
monitor. Switch settings S1, S2, and S3 set up the input impedance for
the RGB coaxial input. S4 and S5 are set up to use internal Vertical and
Horizontal sync. S6 selects the raster size and S7 Lo, Hi or Med
frequency.
NOTE: This assumes use of Pixel Graphics.
Switches S4
and S5
should be
set to
INTERNAL
Switches
S1, S2, and
S3 should
be set to 75
Ohm
Switch S7
should be
set to HI
Switch S6
should be
set to
position 2
ON/OFF
switch
MODEL
RFI/EM
R
SN
AC power
Figure 3.1.15. Conrac 7241 CRT (Back View)
Table 3.1.18 lists the FRSI part number for Conrac 7241 components.
Table 3.1.18. Conrac 7241 Components
Component
FRSI Part Number
Conrac Part Number
Scan Board (Selectable)
1984--1651--0018
162885--77
BNC (Selectable)
1984--1651--0033
162938--74A
Video Processor Board
1984--1651--0004
162838--72
High Voltage Module
1166--0524--0010
106513--6
Low Voltage Regulator Board
1984--1651--0007
162931--71
CRT Socket Board
1984--1651--0019
162921--72
Control Board
1984--1651--0020
162951--71
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-32
Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Failures

In certain cases, a failure of the Scan board (1984--1651--0018) also
causes a failure of the Low Voltage Regulator board (1984--1651--0007).
NOTE: If you suspect that the Scan board is bad, always check the Low
Voltage Regulator board before you replace the Scan board. Failure to
do this can result in damage to the new Scan board.
Table 3.1.19 shows the nominal voltages on the Low Voltage Regulator
board. If any voltages are missing or are far from nominal, replace the
Low Voltage Regulator board before you replace the Scan board. Also
check for AC ripple.
Table 3.1.19. Conrac 7241 Low Voltage Regulator Test Points
RS3: Consoles
Test Point
Nominal Voltage
01
Ground
6.3 VDC
5.3--6.6
14.0 VDC
138--142
84 VDC
82.3--88.2
35 VDC
34.95--35.05
24 VDC
23.9--24.1
Range

SV: 3-1-33
Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Adjustments

Horizontal or vertical adjustments require the use of different pots on the
Scan board (1984--1651--0018). Table 3.1.20 lists the adjustments on
the Scan board and Figure 3.1.16 shows the pot location.
Table 3.1.20. Conrac 7241 Scan Board Adjustments
RS3: Consoles
Adjustment
Label
Vertical Hold
R195
Vertical Center
R29
Vertical Height
R190
Vertical Linearity
R11
Horizontal Hold (Pixel Board)
R168
Horizontal Hold (Character Board)
R154
Horizontal Center
R83
Horizontal Width (Pixel Board)
R171
Horizontal Width (Character Board)
R157
Side Pincushion
R132
Static Phase
R188

SV: 3-1-34
R190
R195
R29
R154
R157
R11
R168
R132
R83
R171
R188
Figure 3.1.16. Conrac 7241 Scan Board Adjustment Locations
Conrac 7241 CRT Black Video or Black Bars on Screen

If there are black bars across the screen or the top half of the screen is
green and the bottom is black, adjust the synch gain pot.
The synch gain pot (R301) is on the Video Processor board
(1984--1651--0004). Turn the pot to a higher gain (clockwise) until the
screen returns to normal. If this does not work, replace the Video
Processor board.
Conrac 7241 CRT Power-up Diagnostics Failures
Failure of the Video Generator Color Test or the Synch Test during
boot-up of a pixel graphics console is often due to a floating DC bus. It
can also be caused by the switches on the BNC card not being set to 75
ohms.
Prior to March 1988, remotely powered devices (such as MTCC, CC,
and OI Electronics) were shipped without a ground wire to the DC RTN
terminal of the AC/DC Remote Power Supply (1984--1046--000x).
Install 12 gauge green insulated wire between the DC RTN lug of the
power supply and the designated chassis ground connection on all
remotely powered devices.
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-35
Multitube Command Console CRT: Barco CD 551 and

ICD 551
The Barco CD 551 CRT (1984--3065--000x) is a 20-inch color unit that
connects to the Keyboard Interface via the RGB coaxial cables
(1984--1691--0003). This CRT requires the video isolation provided by
the 1984--2889--000x Keyboard Interface.
Kits are available to allow replacement of a CONRAC monitor with a
Barco monitor.
Barco technical documentation is available:
D
CD 551 User Manual
1984--3065--0032
CD 551 Service Manual
1984--3065--0034
Figure 3.1.17 shows the block diagram of the Barco CD 551 or 651
CRT.
Control Panel
Adj.
Voltages
R
G
B
LED Drive
Voltages
RGB IN/OUT
+
Remote Control
G1 G2 G3
CRT Socket
UF
VG3 VG2 VG1

HV
26 kV
H/CS Pulse
H&V
+
SYNC
VS Pulse
EHT EN
Degauss Control Voltage
CRT
H.Pulse
V.Pulse
Switched Mode
&
EHT Power Supply
Degauss Coils
FIL HI
+7 V
+ 17 V
+ 28 V
+ 88 V
+ 160 V
-- 10 V
+E
+B
Figure 3.1.17. Barco CD 551 CRT Block Diagram
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-36
Figure 3.1.18 and Figure 3.1.19 show the rear view of the monitor with
switches and connections for the input cables. SYNC must be set to
INTERNAL.
The three switches on the R, G, and B panels select the input
impedance for the RGB coaxial cable (1984--1691--0003). These must
be set to 75 ohms.
NOTE: If two or three monitors are daisy chained on the line, the
switches of the last monitor on the line must be set to 75 ohms. The
others must be set to a high impedance.
Connect the cables to the right-hand set of coaxial connectors on the
input panel. The left-hand set of connectors can be used to daisy chain
additional monitors.
Brightness and contrast adjustments are also on the input panel.
Label
Label
AC
POWER
Figure 3.1.18. Barco CD 551 CRT (Back View)
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-37
REMOTE
ON
OFF
CAL
EXTERNAL
SYNC
HS/CS
75E
INTERNAL
VS
75E
75E
75E
Figure 3.1.19. Barco CD 551 CRT (Input Panel)
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-38
Figure 3.1.20 shows the Deflection board. Adjustments on this board

include:
D
horizontal
D
vertical
D
blanking
D
skew
D
clamping
D
scan selection
Clamp
Position
J7
o o o o o
J6J5 J4J3
L2
J13
.
Horizontal
Shift
P15
Horizontal
Linearity
Scan Selection
Shift
S.T.CL
P6 P8
R
Horizontal
Blanking
B.P.CL
J12
High Short
High Long
Low Short
Low Long
TP1
P9 Phase
Fail LED indicates
incorrect selection
of deflection range
P5
J11
Skew
Vertical
Clamp
Width
Horizontal
Frequency
P10 P11
P7 Vertical
Blanking
Factory adjusted for +7.5 Vu at
pin 7 of U9
45--65 Hz 65--85 Hz
P13
P4 P3
Horizontal
P16
S1
Vertical
Trapezium
Amplitude
Vertical
P2 P1
Horizontal
Shift
Parabola
P14 P12
Vertical
Vertical
Linearity
Frequency
Horizontal
Amplitude
TP2
Figure 3.1.20. Barco CD 551 CRT Deflection Board
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-39
Figure 3.1.21 shows the Input/Output Amplifier and Remote Control

board.
P307
BLUE
LOWLIGHTS
TP303
P207
P107
GREEN
RED
LOWLIGHTS
LOWLIGHTS
TP203
TP302
TP103
TP202
S4
TP401
TP2
PICTURE BACKGROUND
TP3
TP102
P1
P305
BLUE BIAS
P205
GREEN BIAS
P303
C211 P203
P204
BLUE
GAIN
BLUE
FREQ.
COMP.
GREEN
GREEN FREQ. RED
GAIN
COMP. GAIN
C305
P301
TP301
P2
P105
RED BIAS
C111 P103
P104
C311
P304
P302
C205
TP1
P202
C105
RED
FREQ.
COMP.
S1
P102
POS. NEG.
P101
P201
GREEN
RED
BLUE
TRACKING
TRACKING
TRACKING
TP201
TP101
Figure 3.1.21. Barco CRT RGB Input/Output Amplifier and Remote Control
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-1-40
Figure 3.1.22 shows the power supply board.

High long
High short
Low long
Low short
........
..........
J7 J6 J5 J4
+A adj
P1
P2
+E adj
115V 230V
WARNING
Sealed preset potentiometers!
Do not adjust!
Follow the adjustment procedure
of the technical manual for service
or repair!
Beam
Current
Limiter
P4
FUSE
EHT limit
P5
Overload
o
P3
EHT adj
P6
Figure 3.1.22. Barco CRT Switched Mode and EHT Power Supply
RS3: Consoles

SV: 3-2-1
Section 2:
Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command

Console
This section covers the free standing operator interface portion of the
Pedestal Command Console, and the Basic Command Console.
The console card cage and electronics are covered in Section 6 of this
chapter. Peripheral devices (disk, tape, and printer) are covered in
Sections 4 and 5 of this chapter. Maintenance and troubleshooting of
the console are covered in chapters 9 and 10.
Figure 3.2.1 shows front and side views of the Pedestal Command
Console. Figure 3.2.2 shows the back of the console with access covers
removed.
Front View
Side View
Figure 3.2.1. Pedestal Command Console
RS3: Consoles
Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console
SV: 3-2-2
Hard Disk Drive

30 VDC
Card Cage
Power
Circuit Breaker
(AC outlets only)
Pedestal Cover
(removed)
RS-232 Printer Output

J346
PeerWay Tap A
J349 (A)
PeerWay Tap B
J348 (B)
30 VDC Input
J932 (A)
Hardware
Alarm
30 VDC Input
J931 (B)
Process
Alarm
Alarm Output
Board
AC Outlets
Rear Column Panel
(removed)
Access
Panel
Cable Tray
Cover
Cable
Tray
Access
Panel
Access
Panel
Figure 3.2.2. Pedestal Command Console (Rear View)
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-2-3
Pedestal Command Console Keyboards

The Pedestal Command Console keyboards are arranged as shown in
Figure 3.2.3
They are:
D
Loop Callup Keyboard
Command Entry Keyboard
Trackball Keyboard
Rotating (Alphanumeric) Keyboard
Keyswitch Assembly
Command Entry
Keyboard
Tape/Disk and
Loop Callup
Configuration
Keyboard
Trackball
Keyboard
Rotating
Keyboard
Figure 3.2.3. Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Layout
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-2-4
Pedestal Command Console Loop Callup Keyboard

The Command Console Loop Callup Keyboard (1984--1915--000x) is
marked LOOP CALLUP (32 SWITCHES) on the printed wiring
assembly (PWA).
There are no field replaceable parts.
Pedestal Command Console Command Entry Keyboard

The Command Console Command Entry Keyboard (1984--1731--000x
or 1984--1934--000x) is marked COMMAND ENTRY SWITCH MATRIX
on the PWA.
Pedestal Command Console Configuration Keyboard

The Command Console Configuration Keyboard (1984--1776--000x) is
marked BLOCK CONFIGURATOR SWITCH MATRIX on the PWA.
Pedestal Command Console Trackball Keyboard

The Command Console Trackball Keyboard (1984--1779--000x) is
marked TRACKBALL SW MATRIX on the PWA.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-2-5
Pedestal Command Console Rotating (Alphanumeric) Keyboard

The Command Console Rotating (Alphanumeric) Keyboard
(1984--1825--000x) is a single assembly, which includes the keyboard
and brackets.
Pedestal Command Console Keyswitch Assembly

The Command Console Keyswitch Assembly (1984--0657--000x) is a
single assembly which includes the cable.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-2-6
Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface

The Keyboard Interface (1984--1782--000x and 1984--1921--000x) is
used in the Basic Command Console and the Pedestal Command
Console to connect the keyboards with the console electronics.
1984--1782--000x is marked OI KEYBOARD INTERFACE on the PWA.
1984--1921--000x is marked OS KEYBOARD INTERFACE on the
PWA.
The Keyboard Interface is used to combine signals from all of the
keyboard assemblies into one cable to the OI Processor Board. All
communications to the OI Processor Board are in the RS-422 format.
The console will report bad keys (shorted or excessive length
keystroke) by the message Keyboard Error X:YY where X represents
the keyboard number (always 1 on Pedestal Command Consoles) and
YY represents the key. The alphanumeric keyboard is not reported.
Table 3.2.1 shows the map of key numbers to keyboard.
Table 3.2.1. Command Console Key Map
Key Number
Keyboard
Part Number
1--26
32--63
Command Console Entry Keyboard
1984--1731--000x
64--68
Trackball and Cursor Control
1984--1779--000x
72--87
Block Configuration
1984--1776--000x
27--31
69--71
Not Used
----
NOTE: It is extremely important to verify proper connector orientation

before applying power to the Command Console. Failure to do so may
result in permanent damage to the Keyboard Interface circuitry.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-2-7
Be sure to line up the colored stripe on the ribbon cable with the
embossed triangle on the Keyboard Interface connector.
Figure 3.2.4 shows the 1984--1921--000x Keyboard Interface and
connections.
Loop
Callup
Keyboard
Trackball
Keyboard
Keyboard Interface Card

J335
J344
Configuration
Keyboard
J336
J333 J339
J338
J334
J337
Cable installed
with 1/2 twist
Card Cage
Motherboard
Rotating
Keyboard
Command Entry
Keyboard
Figure 3.2.4. Basic and Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface (1984--1921--000x)

Table 3.2.2. Keyboard Interface Parts Replacement
RS3: Consoles
Part No.
Part Name on PWA
Replaces
1984--1921--000x
OS KEYBOARD INTERFACE
1984--1782--000x
1984--1782--000x
OI KEYBOARD INTERFACE
SV: 3-2-8
Pedestal Command Console CRT

The model 7211 19-Inch color CRT (1984--1872--000x) is a character
based CRT manufactured by Conrac, Inc. It is used on both the
Pedestal Command and the Basic Command Consoles. Figure 3.2.5
shows a block diagram of the CRT circuitry. See Section 7 of the
Conrac 7211 maintenance manual (7900--0317--0023) for a complete
diagram.
Red Video
RED
GRN
BLU
BNC
Board
Video
Processor
15.5 KHz
Horizontal
Scan
Blu Video
Horz & Vert

Sync
Power
Transformer
Power
CRT
(Character
Based)
Grn Video
Horz And Vert Scan

Scan
Board
Power
H V Shutdown
ABL
Power
G2
Rect
and
Filter
Board
Power
Power
Low Voltage
Regulator
Board
High
Voltage
Module
G3 Focus
2ND Anode
Power
Figure 3.2.5. Conrac 7211 CRT Block Diagram
The 7211 monitor uses RGB video signals. The Vertical and Horizontal
sync are superimposed on the Green video signal. The Video Processor
removes the sync signals from the Green signal and passes them to the
Scan Board. The Video Processor conditions the color video and
passes them to the CRT Guns. The Scan Board generates the Vert and
Horz drive signals to the CRT yokes. Control of High Voltage Shutdown
is on the Scan Board. The High Voltage Module is monitored and
controlled from the Scan Board. All the power that is needed by the
complete CRT is developed and controlled by the Rectifier/Filter Board,
and the Low Voltage Regulator Board. A separate 120 VAC input is
required for the Conrac 7211 Monitor.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-2-9
Figure 3.2.6 shows the connections to the CRT. Terminator switches

must be in the 75-ohm position.
Ground Wire
C
H
A
N
N
E
L
OUT
IN
G
OUT
IN
RGB Video Cables
AC Power
OUT
IN
Figure 3.2.6. Conrac 7211 CRT (Back View)
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-2-10
Table 3.2.3 lists the FRSI part numbers for components of the Conrac
7211 CRT.
Table 3.2.3. Conrac 7211 CRT Components
RS3: Consoles
Component
FRSI
Part Number
Scan Board (15.75 kHz)
1166--0524--0016
BNC (Differential)
1166--0524--0044
Video Processor Board (Differential)
1166--0524--0045
BNC (Single Ended)
1166--0524--0011
Replaced by
1166--0524--0044
Video Processor Board (Single Ended)
1166--0524--0012
Replaced by
1166--0524--0045
High Voltage Module
1166--0524--0010
Low Voltage Regulator Board
1166--0524--0015
CRT Socket Board
1166--0524--0013
Rectifier and Filter Board
1166--0524--0014
Control Board
1166--0524--0017
Comment
SV: 3-2-11
Pedestal Command Console Disk Interface Card (SCSI)

The Pedestal Command Console uses the same Disk Interface card
(1984--1140--000x) as the Multitube Console. See the discussion in this
chapter, Section 6 (OI Card Cage) for details.
Remote Command Console Power Supply

The Remote Command Console Power Supply (1984--1046--000x) is
described in Chapter 1, Section 2 (Power Supplies).
Pedestal Command Console Printer Interface Card

The Pedestal Command Console uses the same Printer Interface card
(1984--1011--000x) as the Multitube Console. See the discussion in this
chapter, Section 6 (OI Card Cage) for details.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-2-12
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-3-1
Section 3:
MiniConsole
This section covers the operator interface and electronics of the
MiniConsole. Many cards of the MiniConsole are identical to those used
in the Pedestal Command Console and Multitube Command Console.
These will be described in Section 6 of this chapter OI Card Cage.
This section covers the MiniConsole:
D
Block Diagram
Keyboards
Power Regulator card (see Section 6)
PeerWay Interface card (see Section 6)
OI Processor card 68000 (see Section 6)
Monochrome Video Generator card
Monochrome CRT
SCSI card (see Section 6)
Floppy Interface (I/F) Connect card
5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive (Section 4, Disk and Tape Drives)
Floppy Disk Power Supply (Section 4, Disk and Tape Drives)
Remote Power Supply (see Chapter 1, Section 2, Power

Supplies)
Maintenance and troubleshooting are covered in chapters 9 and 10.

Figure 3.3.1 shows front and rear views of the MiniConsole.
Figure 3.3.2 gives a block diagram of the MiniConsole.
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-2
Floppy Disk Drive
CRT
Processor
Floppy Interface
Printer Interface
PeerWay Interface
Video Generator Board
Power Regulator
Motherboard
Keyboard
Power Regulator, Floppy Disk
Power Cable,
Floppy Disk
Remote Power Supply

DC Floppy Power
CRT Cable Connector

Figure 3.3.1. MiniConsole
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-3
68000 Processor
mP
RS-422 Data
RAM
RAM
Callup
Panel
5V
Power
Switch
30 V (A)
>
30 V (B)
>
Return
>
Power Regulator
Fan
+12
Address
12 V
Data
Entry
Keyboard
5V
+9
(ISO)
+5
Control
5V
Data
Disk Drive Interface
Video Generator
Upper
RAM
Buffer
RAM
Lower
RAM
5V
PeerWay Interface
12 V 5 V
CRT
Buffer
RAM
30 V (A)
30 V (B)
Printer Interface
+12
Horz
Vert
Video
5V
NVROM
RS-422
PeerWay
Tap B
5V
TTL
Disk Drive Unit
Real
Time
Clock
12 V
P.S.
Printer
Port
RS-422
PeerWay
Tap A
>
>
Drive
1
Drive
2
RS-232
Printer
Figure 3.3.2. MiniConsole Block Diagram
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-4
MiniConsole Keyboards
The MiniConsole keyboards provide operator interface with the console
through the alphanumeric keyboard, loop control, loop callup keyboard,
loop alarm LEDs, speaker, and keyboard switch. Figure 3.3.3 shows a
functional diagram for a MiniConsole keyboard.
All connections to the keyboard are made through a single cable from
the console motherboard and driven by RS-422 signals from the
processor. The loop control buttons are in a configuration similar to the
Analog Panel Stations and are used to control the loop displayed on the
CRT.
The loop callup buttons are used to address any one loop in the system
for display on the CRT. Each is configurable through the main operator
keyboard. The Keyboard switch is used to limit configuration access in
the system. An audio alarm generator is used to indicate alarm status in
the system and has variable frequency and volume. The main keyboard
has the standard alphanumeric keyboard and some special keyboards
for screen control.
All control of the front panel is handled by the Console Processor card
via an extension of the bus through the cable. Bus buffers isolate the
card from the rest of the system. The 12 loop control and 32 loop callup
buttons are sensed by driving each of the 8 strobe lines low one at a
time. The sense lines are pulled up to +5 V through pullup resistors.
The strobe and sense lines form a matrix with a momentary contact
switch at each intersection point. As a button is pushed, the sense line
is pulled low. The microprocessor senses the line pulled low and knows
which strobe line is activated at that point. Each intersection point is a
different key.
Each loop has a process alarm LED associated with it and is driven by a
latch off the bus. There are 32 LEDs driven by these latches.
The alphanumeric keyboard has its own microprocessor that handles all
keyboard strobing and sensing. It outputs the ASCII character code for
the key to the front panel circuitry, through a buffer, to the console bus.
This keyboard is designed so that if any key fails closed, it will not cause
all the keys to lock up. The microcomputer in the keyboard sends a
periodic null character to indicate that it is still operating. If the console
processor does not receive this character every 100 microseconds, it
will send a reset command to the keyboard.
The speaker has a 555 timer that provides an oscillator frequency. This
output is divided through a programmable counter whose output
frequency is controlled by the console bus, whose amplitude is
controlled through several Field Effect Transistors (FETs).
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-5
The keyswitch is sensed through 5 buffer lines for a Binary-Coded

Decimal (BCD) weighted input to the processor. There are 32 different
keys that can be used with the switch.
Loop 1
Loop
Alarm
LED
Latches
through
Key
Switch
Sense
Loop 32
Typical
32 Momentary Pushbuttons
for Callup Panel
Strobe
Latch
Driver
12 Momentary Pushbuttons
for Loop Control
Strobe Sense
Buffers
Microprocessor
Driven
Operator
Keyboard
Speaker
Drive
Amp
Alpha
Keyboard
Buffer
Bus Buffers
To MC
Processors
Figure 3.3.3. MiniConsole Front Panel Keyboard Functional Diagram
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-6
MiniConsole Power Regulator Card

The Power Regulator card (1984--1137--000x or 1984--1017--000x) is
described in Section 5 of this Chapter.
MiniConsole PeerWay Interface Card

The PeerWay Interface card (1984--1045--000x) is described in Section
5 of this Chapter.
MiniConsole OI Processor Card

The OI (Operator Interface) Processor card (1984--2137--000x,
1984--2122--000x, 1984--2120--000x, 1984--2107--000x, or
1984--1061--000x) is described in Section 5 of this Chapter.
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-7
Monochrome Video Generator

The Monochrome Video Generator (1984--1002--000x) is used in the
MiniConsole to generate the signals necessary to drive the 9-inch
monochrome CRT. It is marked MC VIDEO GENERATOR on the
printed wiring assembly (PWA). Figure 3.3.4 shows the functional
diagram of a Monochrome Video Generator.
The Video Generator can drive the CRT at varying brightness levels.
The remote intensity can be controlled character by character or on a
whole screen basis. This is done by data attributes stored along with
each character and converted from digital to an analog bias in the video
drive. The drives to the CRT are transistor to transistor logic (TTL)
signals for the horizontal and vertical synch and analog signals for the
video.
The monochrome CRT screen is 80 characters wide and 24 lines high.
There is a possible total of 1920 character spaces on one screen. The
ASCII character designation and the attributes are stored in one of two
memories on the Video Generator card. The CRT Controller reads data
for two consecutive characters from the upper memory while the
processor is writing data to the lower memory. Each character occupies
two addresses in RAM memory. The first address contains the attributes
for the character. Character attributes include normal or inverted video,
blink, underline, and gray scale (brightness).
A full screen update takes place 30 times a second.
The CRT controller handles all CRT interface timing functions. The card
also buffers the data to the microprocessor, and another circuit
arbitrates access to RAM by the microprocessor and the CRT controller.
The LED latch driver is driven from the processor card. It also enables
the cursor from screen to screen; CRT display enable; and two DC relay
drivers driven from software. These are to be used as alarm relay
contacts. Fusing for the CRT is on the card, along with failed fuse LED
indicators.
NOTE: You can install the card in a cage, along with a Coordinator
Processor, and a Power Regulator to determine if the card is good.
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-8
Timer
Horizontal SYNC
To
CRT
Vertical SYNC
CRT
Control
+12 V
Test Button
(Momentary
Contact Switch)
Blink +5 V
Upper
RAM
Normal
or
Inverted
Video
Select
Character
ROM
Memory
Arbitration
Lower
RAM
Buffer
Analog
Video
Driver
Video
Out
Alarm
Output
Latch
To Processor Bus
Parallel
to Serial
Shift
Register
Board
Good
Alarm
Output
Board
Fault
Figure 3.3.4. Monochrome Video Generator Functional Diagram
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-9
Monochrome Video Generator LEDs

The monochrome Video Generator card has LEDs to determine the
card status. Figure 3.3.5 shows the LEDs for the Monochrome Video
Generator card.
LED
G
(DS1)
Card good. No faults are detected on the video generator

card. Controller processor lights DS1 when power up
diagnostics are completed.
(DS2)
Card fault. DS2 lights if the video generator card does not
pass power up diagnostics.
(DS3)
Indicates that fuse F1 is bad. F1 supplies 12 volts to the CRT

MONITOR.
R
R
Meaning
Raster test button
Figure 3.3.5. Monochrome Video Generator LEDs
Monochrome Video Generator Raster Test Button

A momentary ON pushbutton, called the Raster Test Button, forces a
raster on the screen to help distinguish between a failed Video
Generator card or a failed CRT. Figure 3.3.5 shows the location of the
test button.
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-10
Monochrome Video Generator Fuse

The monochrome Video Generator card has a fuse in the 12 volt line to
the CRT. Figure 3.3.6 shows the location of the fuse. Table 3.3.1 gives
fuse data.
F1
Figure 3.3.6. Monochrome Video Generator Fuse Location

Table 3.3.1. Monochrome Video Generator Fuse Data
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G09140--0032
MDL 2
313002
2 A 250 V Slow Blow
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-11
MiniConsole CRT
The MiniConsole CRT (1984--0672--000x) is a green phosphor, 9-inch
monitor. It requires 12 volts DC for power and TTL level signals for the
horizontal and vertical signals. The video drive is analog and the
intensity is remotely controlled by increasing or decreasing the drive
amplitude to change the CRT brightness. The CRT will not accept
composite video.
There is one circuit card that has all components mounted except the
CRT and yoke.
MiniConsole Printer Interface

The Printer Interface card (1984--1011--000x) is described in section 5
of this chapter.
MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drive

The MiniConsole 5.25-inch Floppy Disk Drive is described in this
chapter, Section 5, Disk and Tape Drives.
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-12
MiniConsole Floppy Interface (SCSI)

The Floppy Interface (SCSI) (1984--1053--000x) is marked OI MINI
FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER on the PWA. The board controls the
5.25-iinch floppy disk drives used with the MiniConsole.
The interface card provides interface and data buffering between the
Processor and the Floppy Disk Drives. Figure 3.3.7 shows a block
diagram of the card.
This is an intelligent controller used to transfer data to and from the disk
drives. The Processor tells the interface which drive, track and sector to
use, whether to read or write, and the interface does the rest. Data to
and from the drives is in the Non-Return to Zero (NRZ) format.
The disk drives need +5 VDC and +12 VDC to operate. Both voltages
are supplied from the console Power Regulator board. Older
MiniConsoles that use the 1984--1017--000x Power Regulator also use
the 1984--1050--000x Floppy Disk Power Supply for +12 VDC power.
To 5.25-Inch Disk Drives
+5
LED
Latch
To
Motherboard
Bus
Buffers
Bidirection
Data BUS
Buffers
8K x 8
Buffer
Ram
DMAC
Disk Drive
Controller
NRZ Serial
Data
NRZ Data
Read
Control
Lines
Buffers
System
Clock
Divider
16
MHz
OSC
Disk
Drive
Controller
Support
Logic
Figure 3.3.7. Floppy Interface (SCSI)
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-13
MiniConsole Floppy Interface (SCSI) LEDs

Figure 3.3.8 shows the LEDs on the Floppy Interface board.
DS1
Card Good. No faults are detected on the card.
DS2
Card Fault. A fault has been detected on the Interface card.
DS4
DS5
Y
DS6
Write Data. The Interface card is writing to one of the Disk Drives.
DS7
Head Load. The read/write head on a disk drive is in the loaded position.
DS8
Read Data. Data is being transmitted from the disk drive to the Interface card.
DS9
Ready. The disk drive is sending a signal that it is ready for use.
DS10
Drive Sel 1. Disk drive number 1 is doing an active command.
DS11
Drive Sel 2. Disk drive number 2 is doing an active command.
DS12
CMD Request. A request for data to or from the drives is awaiting execution.
DS13
CMD Active. The system is currently sending a command for data transfer.
DS14
Retry. System is doing rereads or rewrites because of incomplete data on the first try.
Figure 3.3.8. Floppy Interface (SCSI) LEDs
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-14
Floppy Disk Power Supply

The Floppy Disk Power Supply (1984--1050--000x) provides 12 volt
power to the drives and serves to connect the various cables. The card
mounts on the top of the MiniConsole chassis and is connected to the
console via one power cable, as shown in Figure 3.3.9.
NOTE: Used only on MiniConsoles that use the 1984--1017--0001
Power Regulator card.
Floppy Disk
Power Supply
Fan
Status
LED
Disk Power
Cables
Regulator, input
power cable
Disk Data
Cable
Disk Drive
Number 1
Disk Drive
Number 2
Figure 3.3.9. MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drives (With 1984--1017--0001 Power Regulator Only)
The Floppy Disk Power Supply regulates the 30 volt bus to provide the
12 volts needed to power the two disk drives. Figure 3.3.10 shows a
block diagram of the card. No provisions are made to communicate the
power fail status bits to the Console Processor. However, a front panel
red/green LED is mounted on the disk drive assembly to indicate power
good or bad.
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-15
30 volts is provided through isolating diodes from the A and B supplies

and is fused on the card. The power regulator is a flyback switching
type that is capable of supplying 12 volts output throughout the full
power input specification of 19 to 36 volts. The voltage to the regulator
chip is pre-regulated to 14 volts through a simple zener transistor
regulator. Two operational amplifiers are used for integrating and
filtering the output voltage to the regulator for optimum voltage control.
Current is limited to 3 amps and overvoltage protection is accomplished
using an overvoltage protection chip driving an Silicon-Controlled
Rectifier (SCR).
A voltage comparator monitors the output voltage in comparison to a
stable temperature compensated reference zener. It uses a single
red/green LED to indicate if the output voltage is out of tolerance. This
circuit is powered by +5 V and is independent of +12 V changes. If the
LED goes out, the +5 V fuse has blown on the disk drive. Two power
connectors are provided for the two disk drives.
+5
From MC
>
+5 V DIsk
Red/Green
LED
Return
>
30 V (A)
>
30 V (B)
>
>
Return
Return
Voltage
Comparator
Circuit
F2
12 V Regulator
Over Voltage
Protection and
Current Limit
+12 V Drive
+5 V Disk
+12 V
+12 V Drive
F1
Fan Power
Return
>
Figure 3.3.10. Floppy Disk Power Supply Block Diagram
(With 1984--1017--0001 Power Regulator Only)
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-3-16
Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses

Figure 3.3.11 shows the location of the fuses on the Floppy Disk Power
Supply. Table 3.3.2 gives fuse data.
F1
F2
Figure 3.3.11. Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuse Location

Table 3.3.2. Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G09140--0011
MDQ 1/4
313.250
1/4 A 250 V Slow Blow
F2
G09140--0045
AGC 8
-- --
8 A 250 V Regular
Remote MiniConsole Power Supply

The Remote MiniConsole Power Supply (1984--1089--000x) is
described in Section 2 of Chapter 1.
RS3: Consoles
MiniConsole
SV: 3-4-1
Section 4:
RS3 Operator Station

This section describes the RS3 Operator Station (ROS) hardware. It
covers:
RS3: Consoles
RS3 Operator Workstation
Operator Keyboard
Ethernet Cable
Ethernet Hubs
Router
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
SV: 3-4-2
RS3 Operator Workstation

The workstation (Figure 3.4.1) consists of a computer, keyboard,
mouse, CRT, and speakers. The workstation (10P5627xxxx -- 166 MHz
and 10P5693xxxx --200 MHz) can also have a tape drive, a printer, and
an optional operator keyboard.
The workstation personal computer is shipped with installation
and service manuals provided by the PC manufacturer.
Figure 3.4.1. RS3 Operator Station PC
The workstation requires:

D
An AC power source for the PC, CRT, speakers, and printer
A hardware keylock device (supplied with the software)
A 10BaseT Ethernet cable to the hub or RNI
Uninterruptible power system (UPS)

Two suitable uninterruptible power systems are:
Liebert Power Sure PS600--60 (NRTL)
Liebert Power Sure PS600--50 (CE)
At least one workstation on the process network should have these

peripheral devices:
D
A tape drive for backup of all workstations on the process

network
A printer that can be used by any workstation on the process
network
The optional tape drive is a 3200 MB Travan. Refer to the tape drive
users manual.
The optional printer is a HP870Cxi Color Printer (10P55800004). This
printer has an auto-sensing universal Power supply for 100--240 VAC,
50/60 Hz. The software printer driver is the HP560 driver in Windows
NT. The printer cable number is 10P55800003. Refer to the printer
users manual.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-3
ROS CRTs
The color CRT monitors that can be used with the RS3 Operator Station
include:
D
21-inch Hitachi HM--4721--D CRT
17-inch Iiyama Vision Master CRT
ROS CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D

The Hitachi HM--4721--D CRT (12P0373x032) is a 21-inch color unit.
the unit.
ROS CRT: Iiyama Vision Master

The Iiyama Vision Master CRT (55P0144x022) is a 17-inch color unit.
the unit.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-4
ROS Operator Keyboard

The RS3 Operator Station has a variety of keyboard options.
Figure 3.4.2 shows the dimensions of the optional operator keyboard
with a single option button panel. Up to three option button panels may
be provided.
OPTIONS
368
(14.5)
Top View
490
(19.3)
56
(2.1)
97
(3.8)
Side View
Figure 3.4.2. Elevated Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-5
Figure 3.4.3 shows the dimensions of the operator keyboard with

trackball.
181
(7.1)
Top View
490
(19.3)
56
(2.1)
25
(1.0)
66
(2.6)
Side View
With Trackball
46
(1.8)
Side View
w/o Trackball
Figure 3.4.3. Operator Keyboard Dimensions in Millimeters (Inches)
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-6
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board (10P56910001)

CAUTION
Observe normal electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions
when handling the keyboard interface circuit board.
Observe the ESD precautions in your computer manual
when installing the board in the computer.
Interface card dip switch settings are shown in Figure 3.4.4.
SW4
SW1
SW3 SW2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
1
3
4
5
Switch SW1
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
1
2
3
4
Switch SW3
3
4
5
Switch SW2
2
3
4
Switch SW4
Figure 3.4.4. ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Card
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-7
ROS Operator Keyboard Connections

The 9-pin D-sub connector end of interface cable 10P56700015
(Figure 3.4.5) is connected to the keyboard interface card serial port on
the back of the PC.
The 8-pin connector end of the interface cable is connected to the
standard keyboard cable.
ROS PC
Interface Cable
10P56700015
Keyboard and
Standard Cable
P262: 9-Pin D-sub Connector

(Connects to serial port of
interface card on back of PC.)
P261: 8-Pin Connector
(Connects interface cable to
standard keyboard cable)
Figure 3.4.5. ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Connection
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-8
Ethernet Cable
The RS3 process network uses 10BaseT cable. 10BaseT cable uses
two pairs of 0.14 -- 0.34 mm2 (22 -- 26 AWG) wires, one pair to transmit
and one to receive data signals. The wires in each pair are twisted
together along the length of the cable. This allows segment lengths of
up to 100 meters (328 feet). There are two additional pairs of wires in
the cable that can be used for telephone or other use. The cable has an
8-pin RJ-45 connector at each end.
D
D
Category 5 cable in plenum grades must be used

Cables must be routed away from power lines or other sources of
interference
NOTE: For CE-compliant applications, shielded 10BaseT cable is

required.
Stranded-wire cable is suitable only for short runs where flexibility is
required. Cable is available with color-coded jackets, with or without
connectors.
Standard cable (for use with a hub) has the connection wired straight
through. Crossed cable is available with the transmit and receive cables
crossed over for null modem connections. Crossover cable is used
only when a workstation is connected directly to an RNI without a hub.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-9

The RS3t Network Interface (RNI) (10P53330001) provides a
connection between the PeerWay and an Ethernet Local Area Network.
It is a node on the PeerWay and a host on the Ethernet. Software in the
RNI provides a connection between PeerWay messages and Ethernet
messages.
Service issues are covered in the Service Manual (SV), Volume 2.
The RNI (Figure 3.4.6) requires:
D
A DC power source (18--36 V)
An Ethernet 10BaseT cable to the hub or workstation
PeerWay Drop cables to the PeerWay Tap Box set
All connections are made to the front of the RNI as shown below.
PW A/B
ERROR
ETHERNET
10 BASE T
HW GOOD
PEERWAY B
PEERWAY A
CONSOLE /
SERIAL 1 RESET
SWITCH
ETHERNET
18 -- 36 VDC
INPUT POWER
10 BASE 2
HW BAD
TMSTR
Item
No.
COMM
No.
Item
Ethernet 10BaseT connector
Ethernet 10Base2 connector (not used)
PeerWay B drop cable
Console/Serial connector (for field service use)
PeerWay A drop cable
DC power connector to RS3 DC power bus
Figure 3.4.6. RS3 Network Interface
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-10
The write-on label (Figure 3.4.7) provides space to record the PeerWay
Node address of the RNI, the Ethernet host name of the RNI, and which
Ethernet port is in use. The MAC Address (machine address) will be
filled out at the factory. This is the unique Ethernet address of the RNI.
PEERWAY NODE
E-NET HOST
MAC ADDRESS
E-NET 10 BASE T
NUMBER
E-NET 10 BASE 2
Figure 3.4.7. RNI Write-on Label
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-11
Ethernet Hubs
A hub provides the common connection point for devices on the
process network and a connection to the plant LAN. Fisher-Rosemount
supports use of these hubs from the 3Com LinkBuilderT series:
D
D
TP/8 8-port Unmanaged TP Hub (10P55200001 -- 115V)

FMS II 12-Port TP Hub
(10P55200002 -- Autosensing power supply)
FMS II 24-port TP Hub
(10P55200003 -- Autosensing power supply)
The hubs require a source of AC power.

NOTE: The material below has been freely adapted from 3Com product
literature.
TP/8 Hub
The LinkBuilder TP/8 (3C16180) is a basic twisted-pair hub offering
cost-effective connectivity for small process networks. It does not
support network management. The TP/8 Hub:
D
D
RS3: Consoles
Provides eight RJ-45 ports

Can be connected to another TP/8 hub to provide fourteen RJ-45
ports
Provides one thin coaxial (BNC) port for backbone connections
Provides full compliance with IEEE 802.3 10BaseT standards
Has LED status indicators which make faults easy to identify
Has bandwidth utilization LEDs to show network utilization
Is powered by an external AC power adapter
SV: 3-4-12
FMS II Hubs
The LinkBuilder FMS II (Flexible Media Stack) hub family provides the
features needed for larger process networks. Up to eight hubs can be
stacked as a single repeater. TP and fiber-optic hubs can be mixed in
the stack. Options provide network management connections to the
plant LAN. Two versions of LinkBuilder FMS II hubs are used:
D
12-Port TP
(3C16670A) 12 shielded RJ-45 TP connectors
24-Port TP
(3C16671A) 24 shielded RJ-45 TP connectors
The FMS II hubs are equipped with a standard attachment unit interface
(AUI) port and a slot for a plug-in Transceiver Interface Module. The
12-Port TP hub can use either the AUI port or the transceiver port, the
24-Port hub can use both.
Each LinkBuilder FMS II hub includes LEDs for power status, packet
reception, packet collision, network management, and hub ID. Each port
has LEDs for partition and link status.
All LinkBuilder FMS II hubs offer:
D
RS3: Consoles
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) management:

Accepts optional network management modules.
RMON Management: Standard Remote Monitoring (RMON)
automates network management to reduce network traffic and
errors.
Built-in security: Easy-to-enable security features can be used to
protect data and LAN resources.
Media choices: You can create mixed-media stack with 12-port
and 24-port RJ-45 twisted-pair hubs and 6-port ST fiber hubs.
Backbone choices: Backbone links include a standard
attachment unit interface (AUI) port, plus optional Transceiver
Interface Modules for AUI, BNC coaxial, ST fiber, and
twisted-pair connections.
SV: 3-4-13
LinkBuilder FMS II hubs are equipped with a number of simple-to-use

features that help safeguard the network against security breaches. As
part of the 3Com patented LAN Security Architecture, these security
features come standard with the hubs:
D
Need To Know: Protects sensitive data on the network by

checking destination addresses on each packet and sending
readable packets only to authorized nodes.
Disconnect Unauthorized Device: If an unauthorized device
attempts to log on, the hub automatically records and/or disables
it and logs the event at the management station.
Audit Log: Automatically tracks changes involving users and
devices on the network, giving the manager a complete record.
Multiple User Levels ensure that only authorized users have
access to critical network functions. Passwords can be used to
identify network managers.
RMON support comes standard with FMS II hubs, and allows industry
standard tracking, storing and analysis of network traffic, as well as
powerful diagnostic capabilities. The RMON agent reduces the SNMP
traffic over LAN and Wide Area network (WAN) connections, and
improves response time on the SNMP workstation and reduces costs.
SmartAgentsT enhance RMON by adding autocalibration of thresholds,
actions, and events.
Hub Accessories
Accessories for the FMS II hub family allow addition of network
management and additional connection configurations. They include:
D
FMS II Network Management Module
Transceiver Interface Modules
These modules are not available from FRSI.

FMS II Network Management Module
The FMS II Network Management Module (3C16630) provides SNMP
(Simple Network Management Protocol) capabilities for all hubs in the
stack. Smart-Agent intelligent agents automatically gather and collate
critical information and minimize network management traffic.
The module fits internally and does not use any of the slots or
connectors on the hub. The network management card has its own
Ethernet and IP address. Only one network management card is
needed in a stack of up to eight hubs. This module is not available from
FRSI.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-14
Transceiver Interface Modules

A Transceiver Interface Module can be plugged into any FMS II hub to
provide connections for fiber and coaxial cables. Available modules
include:
D
Twisted pair
(3C12063)
one RJ-45 connector
BNC coaxial
(3C1206--6) one BNC connector
ST fiber
(3C1206--5) two ST connectors
Fan-Out
(3C1206--4) one male AUI connector
AUI
(3C1206--0) one female AUI connector
These modules are not available from FRSI.

The fiber-optic transceiver can be used to provide additional fiber optic
ports on a fiber-optic hub or to provide a fiber-optic port on a twisted
pair hub.
Hub Specifications
All hubs accept 115 or 230 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz. The FMS II hubs are
autosensing. The TP/8 hub requires a power pack specified for voltage
and frequency.
They can operate over 0 to 50C (32 to 122F) with up to 90% humidity
(noncondensing) and be stored in --22 to 60C (--30 to 140F) with 10%
to 90% humidity (noncondensing). Hub specifications are listed in
Table 3.4.1
Table 3.4.1. Hub Specifications
Hub
Dimensions
Weight
Power, Heat
TP/8
20.1 x 2.7 x 11.1 cm

(8 x 1 x 4.5 in.)
0.57 kg
(1.25 lb)
6.5 W
22.2 BTU/hr
FMS II 12-port TP
44 x 30.4 x 6.6 cm
(17.5 x 9 x 1.66 in.)
2.6 kg
5.75 lb)
28 W
100 BTU/hr
FMS II 24-port TP
44 x 30.4 x 6.6 cm
(17.5 x 9 x 1.66 in.)
2.7 kg
(6 lb)
36 W
123 BTU/hr
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-15
Router
When connecting to a plant network, a router must be used to isolate
your process network. Which to chose depends heavily on the nature of
the plant network. Consult with your plant network administration or a
knowledgeable networking service to select the proper connection
mechanism for your installation.
Consult Fisher-Rosemount Systems for the recommended router.
CAUTION
The process network must be isolated from the plant
network with a router. If it is not isolated, a misbehaving
device on the plant network could cause loss of control on
the process network.
Be sure to use the routers controlled access list
functionality to provide isolation from network traffic.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-4-16
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

The workstation must be powered from an uninterruptible power supply
(UPS). Two suitable systems are the Liebert Power Sure PS600--60
(55P0566x012 -- NRTL) and the Liebert Power Sure PS600--50
(55P0567x012 -- CE).
The UPS should be able to signal when primary power fails and when
the battery is getting low. This signal is carried by cable to a dedicated
serial port on a workstation computer. The NT operating system can be
configured to warn users of power failure and to shut down the system
when the UPS batteries are low. With the Liebert Power Sure PS600--60
(NRTL) or the Liebert Power Sure PS600--50, cable 10P56820001
(WIN--NEG--48A) is connected from COM2 on the PC to the
communications port on the UPS.
The UPS should be sized to operate the equipment for at least five
minutes to allow for an orderly shutdown. The minimum volt-ampere
rating for a UPS on a single workstation is 600 VA. Table 3.4.2 lists
typical power consumption examples.
Table 3.4.2. Typical Power Consumption Examples
RS3: Consoles
Item
Typical Power Consumption (Watts)
PC
200
17-Inch CRT
130
21-Inch CRT
250
Printer
12
TP/8 Hub
10
FMS II 12-Port Hub
28
FMS II 24-Port Hub
36
SV: 3-4-17
UPS Software Setup

Windows NT (under Control Panel) provides the UPS configuration
software. In order to make changes to the UPS configuration you must
be logged in as an NT Administrator.
With the Liebert Power Sure PS600-- 60 (NRTL) or the Liebert Power
Sure PS600-- 50, the following configuration should be set:
D
Select Uninterruptible Power Supply is installed on: COM2
Under UPS Configuration:

D
Select Power failure signal (select Negative for UPS Interface

Voltages).
Select Low battery signal: at least 2 minutes (select Negative for
UPS Interface Voltages).
Select Remote UPS Shutdown (select Positive for UPS Interface
Voltages).
Under UPS Service:

D
RS3: Consoles
Set Time between power failure and initial warning message to 0

seconds.
Set Delay between warning messages to 30 seconds.
Click on OK.
SV: 3-4-18
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-1
Section 5:
Disk and Tape Drives

This section covers the disk and tape devices used with consoles and
PeerWay interface devices:
RS3: Consoles
Hard disk drive (Winchester)
Floppy disk drive
Magnetic tape drive
SV: 3-5-2
Hard Disk Drive

Hard Winchester disks used with the Multitube Command Console,
Pedestal Command Console, and System Resource Unit include:
D
10P58570001 Quantum QM32100, 2.1 Gigabyte
10P58050001 Quantum Thunderbolt, 540 Meg
10P5665000x 3.5-inch IBM Deskstar 540 (540 Meg Unformatted)
10P52800002 3.5-inch Quantum ProDriver LPS 270S (270 Meg

Unformatted)
1984--3500--000x 3.5-inch Quantum ProDriver LPS 170S (170
Meg Unformatted)
1984--3100--000x 3.5-inch Quantum ProDriver LPS 105S (102
Meg Formatted)
1984--2780--000x 3.5-inch Quantum ProDriver 80S (100 Meg
Unformatted)
1984--2307--000x 5.25-inch Quantum Q280 (100 Meg
Unformatted)
1984--1928--000x 5.25-inch Quantum Q540 (40 Meg)
NOTE: The IBM Deskstar 540 and above requires minimum boot ROM
and software versions.
Table 3.5.1 gives parts replacement data. Figure 3.5.1 shows a typical
hard disk drive.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-3
Table 3.5.1. Hard Disk Drive Parts Replacement

Part No.
RS3: Consoles
Replaces
Characteristics
10P58570001
3.5-inch disk
Quantum QM32100
2.1 Gigabyte Formatted
10P58050001
3.5-inch disk
Quantum Thunderbolt
540 Meg Formatted
10P5665000x
10P52800002
3.5-inch disk
IBM Deskstar 540
540 Meg Formatted
10P52800002
1984--3500--000x
1984--3100--000x
3.5-inch disk
Quantum ProDrive LPS 270S
270 Meg
Built-in SCSI
1984--3500--000x
1984--3100--000x
3.5-inch disk
170 Meg
Built-in SCSI
1984--3100--000x
1984--2780--000x
1984--2307--000x
1984--1928--000x
3.5-inch disk
102 Meg Formatted
1984--2780--000x
1984--2307--000x
1984--1928--000x
3.5-inch disk
Quantum ProDrive 80S
100 Meg Unformatted, 84 Meg Formatted
1984--2307--000x
1984--1928--000x
5.25-inch disk
Quantum Q280
1984--1928--000x
Itself only
5.25-inch disk
Quantum Q540
SV: 3-5-4
Figure 3.5.1. Hard Disk Drive (Front View)
Table 3.5.2 lists the DC power cable assemblies. Table 3.5.3 lists the
specifications for cable 10P56840001 inline fuses.
Table 3.5.2. Hard Disk Drive DC Power Cable Assemblies
Part No.
Replaces
Characteristics
10P56840001
1054180001
CE Compliant with inline fuses.

Required with IBM Deskstar drive
10P54180001
itself only
EMC Compliant
10P56909901
1984-1630-9901
Non-CE Multitube SCSI/KVI Power Cable
10P56909902
1984-1630-9902
Non-CE Multitube SCSI/KVI Power Cable 52
1984-1630-9901
itself only
Non-CE Multitube Mem Power Cable
1984-1630-9902
itself only
Non-CE Multitube Mem Power Cable 52
Table 3.5.3. Cable 10P56840001 Inline Fuses

Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
Cable
10P56840001
F1 & F2
G01940--0046
AGC 10
311010
10 A 32 V Regular
Rev A
F1 & F2
G01940--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250 V Regular
Rev B
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-5
Quantum QM32100
Table 3.5.4 shows values of the Quantum QM32100 jumpers.
Table 3.5.4. 10P58570001 Quantum Thunderbolt Drive Address Jumpers
Jumper
Factory Setting
A0
ON (Jumper)
A1
OFF (No Jumper)
A2
ON (Jumper)
PK
ON (Jumper)
TE
OFF (No Jumper)
+LED
ON (Jumper)
Reserved
ON (Jumper)
Warning
The metal frame of the disk drive must not make electrical
contact with the mounting frame in the console. Use either
the black coated mounting can or use mylar insulating
pads between the drive and the yellow can.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-6
Quantum Thunderbolt
Table 3.5.5 shows values of the Quantum Thunderbolt jumpers.
Table 3.5.5. 10P58050001 Quantum Thunderbolt Drive Address Jumpers
Jumper
Factory Setting
PO
ON (Jumper)
A0
ON (Jumper)
A1
OFF (No Jumper)
A2
ON (Jumper)
Warning
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-7
IBM Deskstar 540

Table 3.5.6 shows values of the IBM Deskstar 540 jumpers.
Table 3.5.6. 10P5665000x IBM Deskstar 540 Jumpers
Jumper
Factory Setting
ON (Jumper)
OFF (No Jumper)
ON (Jumper)
OFF (No Jumper)
ON (Jumper)
ON (Jumper)
ON (Jumper)
OFF (No Jumper)
OFF (No Jumper)
10
OFF (No Jumper)
11
OFF (No Jumper)
12
OFF (No Jumper)
Warning
DC power cable 10P56840001 is required with the IBM Deskstar 540
drive.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-8

Table 3.5.7 shows values of the Drive Address Jumpers. They set the
drive to address 5.
Table 3.5.7. 10P5280000x ProDrive LPS 270S Drive Address Jumpers
Jumper
Factory Setting
A0
ON (Jumper)
A1
OFF (No Jumper)
A2
ON (Jumper)
Warning
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-9

drive to address 5.
Table 3.5.8. 1984--3100--000x ProDrive LPS 170S Drive Address Jumpers
Jumper
Factory Setting
A0
ON (Jumper)
A1
OFF (No Jumper)
A2
ON (Jumper)
Warning
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-10
Quantum ProDriver LPS 105S 3.5-Inch 102 Meg Hard Disk

Table 3.5.9 shows the factory setting of the 1984--3100--0001 Quantum
ProDrive LPS 105S Drive Option jumpers. These jumpers should not be
changed.
Table 3.5.9. 1984--3100--000x Productive LPS 105S Drive Option Jumpers
Jumper
Purpose
Factory Setting
WS
Wait Spin Option
OFF
(No Jumper)
EP
Enable Parity Option
ON
(Jumper)
SS
Self Seek Test Option
OFF
drive to address 5.
Table 3.5.10. 1984--3100--000x ProDrive LPS 105S Drive Address Jumpers
Jumper
Factory Setting
A0
ON (Jumper)
A1
OFF (No Jumper)
A2
ON (Jumper)
Warning
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-11
Quantum ProDriver 80S 3.5-Inch 100 MB Hard Disk

Table 3.5.11 shows the factory setting of the 1984--2780--000x Quantum
ProDrive 80S Drive Option jumpers. These jumpers should not be
changed.
Table 3.5.11. 1984--2780--000x ProDrive 80S Drive Option Jumpers
Jumper
Purpose
Factory Setting
WS
Wait Spin Option
OFF
(No Jumper)
EP
ON
(Jumper)
SS
OFF
Table 3.5.12 shows values of the Drive Address Jumpers. These should
be set to drive address 5.
Table 3.5.12. 1984--2780--000x Productive 80s Drive Address Jumpers
Jumper
Factory Setting
A0
ON (Jumper)
A1
OFF (No Jumper)
A2
ON (Jumper)
Warning
Figure 3.5.2 shows the address jumper positions for a drive address of 5.
Drive Address Jumpers

(set to address = 5)
A0
A1
A2
WS EP
SS
Figure 3.5.2. 1984--2780--000x ProDrive 80S Jumper Positions
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-12
There are three small computer system interface (SCSI) terminating

resistors that remain in place unless the drive is not the last unit on the
SCSI bus. Figure 3.5.3 shows the location of jumpers and terminating
resistors.
CAUTION
It is possible to put the logic cable on incorrectly even
though it is keyed. The cable should be installed with pin 1
(red wire) on the end of the plug nearest to the center of
the board.
DC Power
Pin 1
(red wire)
SCSI Terminators
SCSI
Bus Cable
Jumpers
Figure 3.5.3. 1984--2780--000x ProDrive 80S Drive Jumpers and Terminators
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-13
Quantum ProDriver Q280 5.25-Inch 100 MB Hard Disk

The 1984--2307--000x Quantum ProDrive Q280 5.25-Inch 100 MB Hard
Disk is a half-height unit with built in SCSI board. When formatted it
holds 80 MB. There are two versions of the drive.
Version 1:
ProDrive Q280 Version 1 Drive Option jumpers. These jumpers should
not be changed.
Table 3.5.13. 1984--2307--000x Q280 Version 1 Drive Option
Jumpers
Jumper
Purpose
Factory Setting
WS
Wait Spin Option
OFF
(No Jumper)
EP
ON
(Jumper)
SS
OFF
R0
P1
OFF
No function
ON
Version 2:
ProDrive Q280 Version 2 Drive Option jumpers. These jumpers should
not be changed.
Table 3.5.14. 1984--2307--000x Q280 Version 2 Drive Option Jumpers
RS3: Consoles
Jumper
Purpose
Factory Setting
WS
Wait Spin Option
OFF
(No Jumper)
EP
ON
(Jumper)
SS
OFF
P1
No function
ON
P2
No function
ON
SV: 3-5-14
Table 3.5.15 shows values of the Drive Address Jumpers. Only address
5 is valid.
Table 3.5.15. 1984--2307--000x Q280 Drive Address Jumpers
Drive Address
Jumper A0
Jumper A1
Jumper A2
OFF
(No Jumper)
OFF
OFF
ON
(Jumper)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
There are three SCSI terminating resistors that remain in place unless
the drive is not the last unit on the SCSI bus. Figure 3.5.4 shows the
location of jumpers and terminating resistors.
DC Power
SCSI Bus Cable
LED
Jumpers
SCSI Terminators
Pin 1
Figure 3.5.4. 1984--2307--000x Quantum Q280 Drive Jumpers and Terminators
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-15
Quantum ProDriver Q540 5.25-Inch 40 MB Hard Disk

Table 3.5.16 shows jumper settings for the 1984--1928--000x 40 Meg
Winchester Hard Drive.
Table 3.5.16. 1984--1928--000x 40 Meg Drive Jumpers
Jumper
Setting
A--B
ON
C--D
No Jumper
E--F
No Jumper
G--H
No Jumper
J--K
ON
DG
No Jumper
PAR
ON
A4
ON
A2
No Jumper
A1
ON
Figure 3.5.5 shows the location and settings for jumpers on the 40 Meg
hard disk.
1
Red trace on
cable goes here
(Pin 1)
CAUTION
Use extreme care when
connecting the 50-pin connector.
All pins must be connected
properly.
Jumpers
5
0
Hard Disk Drive Power
SCSI Controller Power
Figure 3.5.5. 1984--1928--000x 40 Meg Hard Drive Jumpers
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-16
Floppy Disk Drive

Two sizes of floppy disk drives are used:
D
3.5-inch disk for Multitube Command Console
5.25-inch disk for MiniConsole
3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive

The 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (1984--2837--000x) is used with the
Multitube Command Console. The assembly includes the drive and a
SCSI controller board. The SCSI address of the drive is fixed, as is the
position of the drive on the SCSI bus. Therefore there is no requirement
for address changes or terminators.
The switch on the left side of the drive must be placed in the position
nearest to the rear end of the drive unit.
There are two factory set switches on the SCSI board assembly. These
must be set as indicated in Table 3.5.17 and Table 3.5.18.
Table 3.5.17. 1984--2837--000x 8-Bit Switch Setting
RS3: Consoles
Switch
Position
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SV: 3-5-17
Table 3.5.18. 1984--2837--000x 4-Bit Switch Setting

Switch
Position
ON
ON
ON
OFF
The switch settings are shown in Figure 3.5.6

This drive is always used at the same address and position on the SCSI
bus. Thus there is no requirement for changing the drive address or bus
termination.
DC Power
Connector
SCSI Bus
Cable Connector
8-Bit Switch
Red trace on cable
goes here (Pin 1)
Drive Select Jumpers

(None installed)
4-Bit Switch
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
1
8-Bit Switch
4-Bit Switch
Figure 3.5.6. 1984--2837--000x 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Dip Switch Positions
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-18
5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive

The 5.25-inch Floppy Disk Drive (1984--1803--000x) is used with the
MiniConsole. Three different drive models have been used:
D
Pansonic JU475--4AEG
Jumpering differs for different drive models. See the heading,

MiniConsole 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers, below for details.
Table 3.5.19 gives parts replacement data. The replacement kit includes
rubber U-channel spacers attached to the bottom of the drive between
the mounting holes. These spacers must be in place to give the drive
wheel clearance to turn and to insulate the drive from the mounting
plate.
Table 3.5.19. 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Parts Replacement
Part No.
Characteristics
1984--1803--000x
Kit includes drive and mounting hardware
Figure 3.5.7 shows cabling for two floppy disk drives that use the
1984--1754--000x Mini-Floppy Interface Card. The bus terminator (either
resistor pack or jumper TM) must be removed from drive 2 in a two
drive installation. The terminator must be installed in drive 1 (drive 1 is
the last drive on the cable).
The terminator must be installed for a single drive installation.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-19
30 VDC
Mini-Floppy
Interface Card
Fan
Regulator
Input Power Cable 5 VDC
Disk Power
Cables
Disk Data Cable

and 12 VDC
Disk Drive
Number 1
Disk Data
Cable
Disk Drive
Number 2
Figure 3.5.7. MiniConsole 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drives (Top View)
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-20
MiniConsole 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers

Jumpering depends on the particular drive model in hand.
Pansonic JU475--4AEG: Figure 3.5.8 shows jumper positions. The
drive select jumpers are marked DS1, DS2, DS3, and DS4.
In a two drive installation, the left drive should be jumpered as drive
DS1 and the right drive as DS2. Jumper TM must be installed in drive 1
and removed from drive 2.
Jumper TM must be installed for a single drive installation.
HS
HL1
HM
HL
DA
HA
LA
UA
DC
DO
NDO
RDY
MS
EX
GX
1E
MX
AX
BX
DD
TH
1M
TM
NH
OF
PH
DS1DS2DS3DS4
RY
ST
Figure 3.5.8. Pansonic JU475--4AEG 5.25-Inch Floppy Drive Jumper Positions
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-21
Pansonic JU475-- 3AEG: Figure 3.5.9 shows jumper positions. The

drive select jumpers are marked 1, 2, 3, and 4.
In a two drive installation, the left drive should be jumpered as drive 1
and the right drive as 2. Jumper TM must be installed in drive 1 and
removed from drive 2.
Jumper TM must be installed for a single drive installation.
If the drive shows many checksum errors, try adding a standard RS3
jumper to MDB. This changes the Drive Ready option, which may
correct the problem.
NAX
MDB
BX
MDA
DA UA HA LA
MS
MM
OP 1M
TM
MX
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-22
Pansonic JU475--2AEG: Figure 3.5.10 shows jumper positions. The

drive select jumpers are marked 1, 2, 3, and 4.
In a two drive installation, the left drive should be jumpered as drive 1
and the right drive as 2. The resistor pack must be installed in drive 1
and removed from drive 2.
The resistor pack must be installed for a single drive installation.
MS MM HA OA DA UA
DD IX SP
CX
BX
1M
DO DC LR RD
AX
AT
Resistor Pack
MX
DS
1
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-23
Magnetic Tape Drive

Magnetic Tape Drives used in the Multitube Command Console and the
Pedestal Command Console are:
D
10P5685000x Tandberg 5623
1984--3389--000x Viper 2150S
1984--3289--000x Viper 2060S
1984--1989--000x Scorpion 5945S
1984--1927--000x Scorpion 5945C
NOTE: The Viper 2150S and Tandberg 5623 can read tapes written by
any of the other drives. None of the other drives can read a tape written
by the Viper 2150S or Tandberg because they use a different,
higher-density, tape data format. The Viper 2150S, Viper 2060S and
Tandberg 5623 require minimum boot ROM and software versions.
Figure 3.5.11 shows the magnetic tape drive assembly. Table 3.5.20
shows parts replacement data.
CAUTION
Use extreme care when connecting the 50 pin connector.
All pins must be connected properly. Also be careful to
route cables as they were originally routed.
Table 3.5.20. Magnetic Tape Drive Parts Replacement
Replaces
Characteristics
10P5685000x
1984--3389--000x
Tandberg tape drive with embedded SCSI

controller. NOTE: The Tandberg can read
tapes written by any of the drives below. Of
the drives listed, only the Viper 2150S can
read tapes written by the Tandberg.
1984--3389--000x
1984--3289--000x
1984--1989--000x
1984--1927--000x
Viper 2150S tape drive with embedded

SCSI controller. NOTE: The Viper 2150S
can read tapes written by any of the drives
below. The drives below CANNOT read
tapes written by the Viper 2150S.
1984--3289--000x
1984--1989--000x
1984--1927--000x
Viper 2060S tape drive

with embedded SCSI controller
1984--1989--000x
1984--1927--000x
Scorpion 5945S tape drive

with embedded SCSI controller
1984--1927--000x
None
Part No.
RS3: Consoles
Scorpion 5945C tape drive

with SCSI controller board
SV: 3-5-24
Tape Drive (Front)
Tape Drive (Rear)

Figure 3.5.11. Magnetic Tape Drive
Magnetic Tape Drive Cabling and Grounding

In a Multitube console the magnetic tape drive must connect to one end
of the SCSI bus, with the SCSI master O/I card cage 1 (SCSI
address 0) in the middle of the bus. The SCSI address is set on the O/I
SCSI Host Adapter board (1984--1140--000x).
DC power for the tape drive comes from P981 (P956 on a Pedestal
Console). This is the SCSI master O/I card cage DC power cable. The
Scorpion 5945C SCSI board is powered from P982 (P955 on a Pedestal
Console).
NOTE: Be sure that pin 1 of the SCSI cable matches pin 1 of the tape
drive connector.
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-25
Magnetic Tape Drive Jumper and Switches

Tandberg 5623 or 9245 Tape Drive: The 10P5685000x magnetic tape
drive has a configuration jumper block. The jumpers must be set as
indicated in Figure 3.5.12.
OUT
IN
PARITY
TERMPWR
Figure 3.5.12. Tandberg 5623 or 9245 (10P5685000x) Configuration Jumpers
Viper 2150S and 2060S Tape Drive: The 1984--3389--000x and

1984--3289--000x Magnetic Tape Drives have a configuration jumper
block. The jumpers must be set as indicated in Figure 3.5.13.
BUFFER DISCONNECT
SIZE (16K)
SERIAL
DIAGNOSTIC
PARITY ENABLE
OPERATION
MODE
CF2
CF1
CF0
BUFFER
DISCONNECT
SIZE (16K)
ID2
ID1
ID0
SCSI
ID
Figure 3.5.13. Viper 2150S (1984--3389--000x) and 2060S Tape Drive (1984--3289--000x) Jumper Block
Scorpion 5945S Tape Drive: The 1984--1989--000x Magnetic Tape

Drive has no exposed jumpers or switches. A dip switch, located behind
the black front cover, is set for the console tape drive (SCSI address 4).
The switch settings should not be changed. Figure 3.5.13 shows the dip
switch settings.
ON
OFF
Figure 3.5.14. Scorpion 5945S Tape Drive (1984--1989--000x) Dip Switch Positions
Scorpion 5945C Tape Drive: The 1984--1927--000x Magnetic Tape

Drive has an exposed jumper and switch assembly. These should not
be changed from the factory settings shown in Figure 3.5.14.
NOTE: The chip at position U2 on the SCSI controller board must be at
revision level A08J or higher.
ON
OFF
Jumper in Position E--F
Figure 3.5.15. Scorpion 5945C Tape Drive (1984--1927--000x) Dip Switch Positions
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-5-26
RS3: Consoles
SV: 3-6-1
Section 6:
Printers
Several printers are used. This section will cover the following:
D
Fujitsu DL3800
Fujitsu DL4600
Fujitsu DL2600
Fujitsu DPL24
TI 810
Table 3.6.1 gives a cross-reference between the model number (located

on the back of the printer) and the printer type.
Table 3.6.1. Printer Types
RS3: Consoles
Model No
Printer Type
M3389A
Fujitsu DL3800
M3367A
Fujitsu DL4600
M3345A
DL2600
M3333C
DPL24
Printers
SV: 3-6-2
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer

The Fujitsu DL3800 color printer (1984--3318--000x) runs at 300
characters per second (cps) (draft quality), and 100 cps (letter quality).
It prints 10 characters per inch and 6 lines per inch. It should be
operated at 4800 baud.
The printer dimensions are:
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
130 mm (5.1 in.)

570 mm (22.4 in.)
330 mm (13.0 in.)
8.5 kg (18.7 lb)
For further information see the Fujitsu DL3800 Users Manual

(1984--3318--0008) and the Fujitsu DL3800 Maintenance Manual
(1984--3318--0011).
The RS-232 serial port is located under a door on the right side of the
unit. An internal cable trough is provided to lead the cable to the rear of
the unit.
The unit is delivered with the forms tractor in the rear position where it
pushes paper that is fed from the rear. The tractor can be moved to the
top position where it pulls paper that is fed from the rear or from the
bottom. See the Users Manual for the procedure on changing the forms
tractor position.
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Set Up

The set up menu parameters are displayed by printing them out and
using the print carriage position to select the desired values. There is a
red cursor line on the clear plastic print guide assembly.
-
To verify the setup:

1. Put the printer in setup mode:
Put the printer off-line (press ONLINE until the ONLINE light goes
out). Hold both the FONT and MENU buttons until the printer
beeps.
or
Turn the printer off. Hold both the FONT and MENU buttons.
Turn the printer on. The printer will beep.
2. The printer will print a header describing the setup procedure, a
Help menu, and the <<FUNCTION>> menu. The red cursor on
the print guide is positioned at the SAVE&END function.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-3
3. Press LOCK to move the cursor to the LIST function. Press

FONT to select it. The printer will print the list of options currently
in memory.
4. Verify the options against Table 3.6.2 and Table 3.6.3. If any
options require changing, use the set up procedure below.
-
To set up the Fujitsu DL3800 printer:

1. Have continuous form paper loaded. The setup procedure will
require several sheets.
2. Put the printer in set up mode:
Put the printer off-line (press ONLINE until the ONLINE light goes
out). Press both the FONT and MENU buttons until the printer
beeps.
or
Turn the printer off. Press both the FONT and MENU buttons.
Turn the printer on. The printer will beep.
3. The printer will print a header describing the setup procedure, a
Help menu, and the <<FUNCTION>> menu. The red cursor on
the print guide is positioned at the SAVE&END function.
4. Press LOCK to move the cursor to the MENU1 function. Press
FONT to select it. The printer will print the first item in the menu
and the options for the item.
5. The cursor will stop at the option currently stored in memory. This
option will have a short underline on the paper. Use LOCK to
move the cursor to the desired option.
6. Use FONT to select the option. When an option is selected it is
completely underlined. The next item in the menu is then printed.
7. Set MENU1 to the options shown in Table 3.6.2.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-4
Table 3.6.2. Fujitsu DL3800 Printer MENU1 and MENU2 Options

Item
Option
Item
Option
EMULATE
DPL24+
TOP-MRG
1 LINE
FONT
COUR10
LANGUAGE
PAGE 437
QUALITY
DRAFT
CHR-SET
SET 2
PITCH
10 characters per inch (cpi)
PRF-SKP
NO SKIP
LINE SP
6 lines per inch (lpi)
WIDTH
13.6 IN
CHAR-W
NORMAL
ZEROFNT
NO-SLSH
CHAR-H
NORMAL
DC3-CDE
ENABLE
ATTRIB
NONE
CR-CODE
CR ONLY
PAGE LG
11.0 IN
LF-CODE
LF ONLY
COLOR
AUTOSEL
RGHTEND
WRAP
LFT-END
1 COLM
8. Press ONLINE to return to the <<FUNCTION>> menu. Press

LOCK to position the cursor at MENU2. Press FONT to select
MENU2. Set the options in MENU2 as shown in Table 3.6.2.
LOCK to position the cursor at HARDWARE and press FONT to
select it. Set the options in the HARDWARE menu as shown in
Table 3.6.3.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-5
Table 3.6.3. Fujitsu DL3800 Printer HARDWARE Menu Options

Item
Option
Item
Option
PPR-OUT
CNTONLY
INTRFCE
SERIAL
PRT-DIR
BI-DIR
FORMAT
8NONE1
BUZZER
ON
BAUE-RT
4800
WORD-LG
8 BIT
PROTOCL
XON/XOFF
DSR
IGNORE
DUPLEX
FULL
BUFFER
FEEDER
8KBYTE
NOTE: Do not use a
buffer size larger than
8 kilobytes
REAR

LOCK to position the cursor at SAVE&END and press LOCK to
select it. The configuration will be saved in memory. The printer
will be in ONLINE mode, ready for use.
11. The printout serves as a record of the configuration. Selected
options have full underlines. Options that were changed have a
partial underline at the original value.
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Self Test

The self test operation prints test pages containing the printer firmware
version number, the resident emulations, and all of the characters in the
currently selected set. Printing is in seven colors.
-
To initiate the Fujitsu DL3800 Printer self test:

1. Put the printer in setup mode. Select SELF-TST from the
<<FUNCTION>> menu.
2. Pause printing by pressing FONT or MENU. Resume with FONT
or MENU.
3. Press ONLINE to exit the self test.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-6

The Fujitsu DL4600 color printer (1984--0543--000x) runs at 333 cps
(draft quality), and 111 cps (letter quality). It prints 10 characters per
inch and 6 lines per inch. It should be operated at 4800 baud.
The printer dimensions are:
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
190 mm (7.5 in.)

582 mm (22.9 in.)
386 mm (15.2 in.)
18 kg (39.7 lb)
Double and triple bin paper handling attachments are available from
Fujitsu.
For further information see the Fujitsu DL4600 User Manual
(1984--0543--0009) and the Fujitsu DL4600 Maintenance Manual
(1984--0543--0008).

-

1. Press NEXT DISPLAY until enter setup appears in the display
window. Press F1 so Menu 1 appears in the display window.
Scroll through the options and verify the settings in Table 3.6.4.
Scroll with F2. Change options with F3.
2. Press F1 so Menu 2 appears in the display window. Scroll
through the options and verify the settings. Menu 2 must be
identical to Menu 1.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-7
Table 3.6.4. Fujitsu DL4600 Printer Setup: Menu 1 and 2

Menu Item
Value
Menu Item
Value
EMULATE
DPL24C
TOP-MRG
1 LINE
FONT
COUR10
LANGUAGE
USA
QUALITY
DRAFT
CHR-SET
SET 2
PITCH
10 CPI
PRT-SKIP
NO-SKIP
LINE SP
6 LPI
WIDTH
13.6 IN
CHAR-W
NORMAL
ZEROFNT
NO-SLASH
CHAR-H
NORMAL
DC3-CDE
ENABLE
ATTRIB
NONE
CR-CODE
CR ONLY
PAGE LG
11.0 IN
LF-CODE
LF ONLY
COLOR
AUTOSEL
RGHTEND
WRAP
LFT-END
1 COLM
=END=
3. Press F1 until Hardware Features appears in the display

window. Scroll through the options and verify the settings in
Table 3.6.5. Scroll with F2. Change options with F3.
Table 3.6.5. Fujitsu DL 4600 Printer Setup: Hardware Features

Menu Item
Value
Menu Item
Value
SensePE
REAR
FORMAT
8 NONE 1
PRT-DIR
BI-DIR
BAUD-RT
4800
BUZZER
ON
PROTOCOL
XON/XOFF
WORD-LG
8 BIT
DSR
IGNORE
BUFFER
8 KBYTE
NOTE: Do not use a
buffer size larger than 8
kilobytes
DUPLEX
FULL
FEEDER
REAR
=END=
INTRFCE
SERIAL
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-8
4. Press F1 until Save appears in the display window. Press F3 to

save the configuration.
5. Press F1 until Func LIST appears. Press F3 to print the option
lists. Verify the printed lists.
6. Press F1 until Self Test appears in the display window. Press
F3 to start the test and press F2 to stop it after about 30
seconds. Press F1 to exit the self test.
7. Press the ON LINE button to resume normal operation.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-9

The Fujitsu DL2600 color printer (1984--0533--000x) runs at 288 cps
(draft quality), 96 characters per second (letter quality), and 8 inches
per second (graphics). It prints 10 characters per inch and 6 lines per
inch. It should be operated at 4800 Baud.
See the Fujitsu Maintenance Manual (1984--0533--0021) for
troubleshooting procedures and the User Manual (1984--0533--0022) for
user information.
Figure 3.6.1 shows the Fujitsu DL2600 printer Control Panel. Each key
has three legends: one above the key, one on the key, and one below
the key. Keys will be specified using the label appropriate for the action
being performed.
SETUP
POWER
EXT
FUNCTION
ONLINE
FF
SETUP
LOAD
ITEM
LF
MICRO LF
SELECT
RESET
ALT
Figure 3.6.1. Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Control Panel
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Error Messages

There are four types of error messages that may be displayed on the
printer control panel:
1. Operational
2. Paper handling
3. Serial interface
4. Memory
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-10
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Handling

-
To load the paper:

1. Pull the paper release lever towards the front of the printer.
2. Pull the paper bail lever toward the front of the printer.
3. Hold the ALT key and press LOAD.
4. Return the paper bail lever to the former position.
To adjust for paper thickness:

1. Set the paper thickness adjustment lever, located on the right
side under the front cover, as indicated in Table 3.6.6.
If the lever is set too low, the paper may be damaged at the edges, line
feeding may be off, or the ribbon may come loose.
If the lever is set too high, the printing may be light or characters may
be missing.
Table 3.6.6. Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Thickness
RS3: Consoles
Paper
Notch
Single part, 10 pound
1 or 2
Two part
Three part
Four part
Ribbon removal
Printers
SV: 3-6-11

-

1. Hold down ALT and then press SETUP. The display shows
SET-UP MODE and then FUNCTION: STYLE.
2. Press ITEM to enter the style level.
3. Press SELECT to display each of the items listed in Table 3.6.7.
When the correct item is displayed, press ITEM to enter it in
memory.
Table 3.6.7. Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Setup
Item
Value
Item
Value
EMULATE:
DPL24C
PAGE LG:
11.0 IN *
CHR SET:
SET 2 *
TOP MRG:
1 LINE *
LANGUAGE:
USA *
DC3-CDE:
ENABLE
GRPH LF:
IBM GRH *
AUTO CR:
NO
LFT END:
1 COLM *
FONT:
COUR10 *
PPR OUT:
DETECT *
COLOR:
AUTOSEL *
LF-CODE:
LF ONLY
LINE SP:
6 LPI *
BUZZER:
ON *
PRF SKP:
NO *
QUALITY:
DRAFT
OFFSET:
0*
ATTRIB:
NONE *
CR-CODE:
CR ONLY *
CHAR SP:
10 CPI *
PRT-DIR:
BI-DIR *
indicates a factory setting

4. Press FUNCTION until FUNCTION: INTERFACE is displayed.
Press ITEM to enter the function level.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-12
5. Press SELECT to display each of the items listed in Table 3.6.8.

When the correct item is displayed, press ITEM to enter it in
memory.
Table 3.6.8. Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Setup
Item
Value
Item
Value
TYPE:
SERIAL
PROTOCL:
XON/XOFF
WORD LG:
8 BIT
DUPLEX:
FULL
FORMAT:
8NONE 1
CONTROL:
3 WIRE
BAUD RT:
4800
6. Press FUNCTION until FUNCTION SAVE is displayed. Press

ITEM to have the printer save the selected options in nonvolatile
memory.
7. Press ONLINE to resume normal operation.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-13
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Self Test

During the printer self test the following items are printed:
D
The current setups
The firmware revision level
A series of complete character sets in alternating colors at the

maximum paper width.
To initiate the Fujitsu DL2600 printer self test:

Either
1. Turn the power off. Hold the FUNCTION key down and turn the
power on.
or
2. a. Hold down ALT and press SETUP.
b. Press FUNCTION until FUNCTION: SELF TEST
is displayed.
c. Press SELECT or ITEM to start the test.
To pause the test:

1. Press either ALT or SETUP. To resume, press the same button
again.
To stop the test:

Either
1. Turn the power off and then on.
or
2. Press FUNCTION.
Vertical alignment is set at the factory and should not require field
adjustment. However, if the alignment is off, use the following
procedure.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-14
To adjust Fujitsu DL2600 printer vertical alignment:

1. Load full width paper.
2. Turn the power off. Hold FF and LF and turn the power on. The
display reads VER:ALIGNMENT:0. The printer prints a series of
vertical lines.
3. If the lines are not aligned, press LF or FF until they are aligned.
The display may range from --7 to +8.
4. When the lines are aligned, press RESET. The display will read
SAVING NOW! and the alignment will be saved.
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Functional Test

The functional test checks almost all printer features. First verify the
operator interface setup and then run the functional test.
NOTE: For software Version 11, verify that PRINTER is set to
FUJITSU.
-
To run the functional test from a Command console:

1. Type CCC [ENTER] at the home position to display the
Configure Command Console screen. Cursor to the printer
entry area and verify that these settings are valid:
BAUD:
4800
FI
YES
L/PG
66
GRAPHICS
YES
To run the functional test from a MiniConsole:

1. Type CM [ENTER] to display the Configure Minicon screen.
Cursor to the printer entry area and verify that these settings are
valid:
RS3: Consoles
BAUD:
4800
FI
YES
L/PG
66
Printers
SV: 3-6-15
To perform a Fujitsu DL2600 printer functional test:

1. Take the printer off-line by pressing ONLINE. Press LF. The
paper should advance one line. Hold LF. The paper should
advance continuously.
2. Press FF. The paper should advance to the head of form.
3. Move the paper bail to the released position. Press RESET and
FF together. The paper should unload. Pressing RESET and FF
together should cause the paper to reload.
4. Press RESET and FF together. Release them and press LF. The
paper should advance in a microstep for each depression of LF.
5. Return the printer to online status by pressing ONLINE.
6. Operate the printer from the system console.
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Operation

-
To operate the printer from a Command Console:

1. Place the cursor at home. Type [C] [C] [P] [ENTER] or use [NEXT
OPTION] to scroll through options to CONFIG COLOR
PALETTE. Press [ENTER].
2. With the cursor at home, type [S] [G] and [ENTER]. The printer
should print the CONFIG COLOR PALETTE screen.
3. Verify that the printed output is in color, that all characters are
visible, and that the paper advanced one page.
To operate the printer from a MiniConsole:

1. Select the main menu screen by typing [M] [M] [ENTER]. Press
[PRINT].
2. Press [PRINT]. The printer should print the main menu screen.
3. Verify that the printout has all characters visible, and that the
paper advanced one page.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-16
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer

The Fujitsu DPL24C color printer (1984--0510--000x) has graphics
resolution of .001 x .001 inch with an 8-bit image mode. It prints at 240
characters per second (cps) (draft quality) and 80 cps (letter quality).
Character spacing is 10 characters per inch, 136 characters per line.
Line spacing is 6 lines per inch. See the Fujitsu DPL24C User Manual
(1984--0510--0022) for user details. See the Fujitsu DPL24C
Maintenance Manual (1984--0510--0021) for hardware details.
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings

The printer should be set to operate at 4800 Baud and 6 lines per inch.
Table 3.6.9 shows the settings of the dip switches on the Printer Control
Panel. Dont care indicates switches that can be in either position.
Table 3.6.9. Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings
Dip
Switch
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
(Dont
care)
(Dont
care)
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
The Form Length switches should be set to 66 for 27.9 cm (U.S.

11-inch) paper and to 72 for 30.5 cm (12-inch) paper.
NOTE: New switch settings will take effect after printer power has been
cycled or the Reset button is pressed.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-17
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Self Test

The self test prints the character set for each type style and each
language, followed by a vertical line in each column. There are eight
type styles and eight languages on the standard printer.
-
To initiate the printer self test:

1. Turn the power off.
2. Hold the self test (FF) switch down.
3. Turn the power on. The self test will begin.
4. Release the self test switch.
5. The self test will stop if:
a. The reset button is pressed.
b. The power is turned off
c. The top cover is opened
d. The printer runs out of paper.
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Vertical Alignment

The Adjust switch is used to adjust the vertical alignment of the print
columns. Due to mechanical inaccuracies of the carriage movement
across the paper, an electrical adjustment is used to ensure that a
character will print in exactly the same spot whether the printhead is
moving left or right.
The vertical alignment is factory set and should not require field
adjustment. It can be modified by this procedure:
-
To check and modify the vertical alignment:

1. Initiate the printer self-test. When all character sets have been
printed, a vertical line will be printed in each column.
2. Observe the vertical alignment and make adjustments as
required with the Adjust switch.
3. Stop the self test by pressing the reset button, turning off the
power, or opening the top cover.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-18
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Error Signals

The error lamp lights and the buzzer sounds if the printer detects a
communications problem or a circuit malfunction.
1. Communications Error
A ? is substituted for any character received with an error.
2. Circuit Malfunction
Refer to the Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Maintenance Manual
(1984--0510--0021), for troubleshooting procedures.
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Paper Handling

The printer functions best with 20 pound, standard perforation paper.
Micro perforation paper will often burst the perforations before the paper
feeds through the printer, causing paper jams. Standard perforation
paper of 15 pound weight should not be used. This paper lacks the
body to reliably feed through the printer tractor mechanism.
The paper thickness lever adjusts the spacing between the printhead
and the platen to compensate for various paper thickness. It is located
at the extreme right side, under the printer cover. It is marked from 1 to
9. Each graduation moves the printhead about .05 mm (.002 in.). One
graduation corresponds roughly to one sheet of paper.
NOTE: The lever should NOT be set to 1 for one thickness of paper.
Follow the procedure below to adjust the paper thickness level properly.
If the lever is set too low:
D
Paper may be damaged at the left and right margins.
Printing may smear as the paper is advanced.
Line feeding may be inaccurate.
The ribbon may come off of the guides or come loose during
printing.
If the setting is too high:

D
RS3: Consoles
Printing may be light and/or characters may be missing.
Printers
SV: 3-6-19
To adjust the paper thickness lever:

1. Move the lever to position 9 to move the printhead as far as
possible from the platen.
2. Initiate the self test. Move the lever to a lower number until the
print quality is as desired.
3. Stop the self test by pressing the reset button or turning off the
power.
Paper jams may be caused by:
D
Poor paper quality or improper thickness.
Improper adjustment of the paper thickness lever.
Scraps of paper in the feed path.
Misalignment of the box of paper that is feeding the printer. The

box should sit directly beneath the printer infeed slot.
Improper alignment of the paper catch basket.
To clear a paper jam:

1. Turn off the power and open the front cover.
2. Note the setting of the paper thickness lever. Set the lever to 9 to
give the maximum clearance between printhead and platen.
3. Place the printhead at either end of the line.
4. Carefully pull the jammed paper out of the printer. Rotate the
platen knob to remove all scraps from beneath the platen.
5. Center the printhead and insert paper into the form tractors.
Rotate the platen knob to feed the paper.
6. If the paper does not feed freely, use 4 or 5 sheets of paper
(folded together) to push out any scraps remaining in the paper
path.
7. When the paper feeds normally, return the paper release lever to
the original setting and close the front cover. Turn the power on
and operate.
8. If this does not clear the jam, remove the platen to access the
feed mechanism. See the Fujitsu Maintenance Manual
(1984--0510--0021), for the platen removal procedure.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-20
TI 810 Printer
The Texas Instruments 810 (1984--0317--000x) is a basic printer. See
the Operator Manual (1984--0317--0005) for details.
TI 810 Printer Jumpers and Switches

Jumpers on the TI 810 Processor Board are set as shown in
Table 3.6.10.
Table 3.6.10. TI 810 Processor Board Jumpers
Jumpers
Setting
E1--E2--E3
E2--E3
E4--E5--E6
E5--E6
E7--E8--E9
E8--E9
E10--E11--E12
E11--E12
E13--E14--E15
E13--E14
E16--E17--E18
E17--E18
E19--E20--E21
OPEN
E22--E23--E24
OPEN
Jumpers on the TI 810 Motherboard are set as shown in Table 3.6.11.

Table 3.6.11. TI 810 Printer Motherboard Jumpers
RS3: Consoles
Jumpers
Setting
E1--E2
JUMPERED
E3--E4
JUMPERED
E11--E12--E13
E11--E12
Printers
SV: 3-6-21
The seven dip switches (pencil switches) located under the access door
are set as shown in Table 3.6.12. This sets the printer up for:
D
4800 Baud
No Parity
No Automatic Linefeed
No Automatic Top of Form.
NOTE: Printer power must be cycled on and off after you change any
switches.
Table 3.6.12. T1 810 Printer Baud Rate (Pencil) Switches
Switch
Setting
Switch
Setting
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks

The test points and proper voltages are listed in Table 3.6.13.
Table 3.6.13. TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks
RS3: Consoles
Test Point
Voltage
Tolerance
E4
+ 12 VDC
.6 VDC
E5
-- 12 VDC
.6 VDC
E6
+ 8 VDC
1 VDC
E7
-- 75 VDC
15 VDC
E8
-- 5 VDC
.25 VDC
E9
+30 VDC
10 VDC
E10
+ 5 VDC
.05 VDC
Printers
SV: 3-6-22
TI 810 Printer Modification for 30.5 Cm Paper

The TI 810 Printer is designed to work with standard U.S. paper which
is 11 inches long. It can be modified to use standard European 30.5 cm
(12-inch) paper with the following procedure.
NOTE: A special jumper wire is required. Order it from your normal
FRSI parts source.
-
To modify the TI 810 Printer for 30.5 cm paper:

1. Turn the power off.
2. Remove the plastic paper cover and the access door.
3. Remove the five screws that hold the cover down: three in front
and two in back.
4. Locate connector J7 (it may be marked as J16 on the
motherboard), which is just behind and to the left of the paper
drive motor. The cable connects the motherboard to the Auxiliary
Control Panel.
5. Pull the cable off of the motherboard pins.
6. Insert the special jumper wire into the cable connector, as shown
in Figure 3.6.2.
7. Reinsert the cable connector on the motherboard pins.
8. Replace the cover, paper cover, and access door. Turn the power
on.
24
13
12
Figure 3.6.2. TI 810 Jumper Wire
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-23
TI 810 Printer Modification for Lowercase Printing

The TI 810 printer can be modified to print lowercase characters while
connected to the system. The modification does not affect operation of
the printer with VDS-25 systems.
A ROM (TI part number 1166--0505--0021) must be inserted at U67
(located at the top left hand side of the Printer Processor Board). The
part may be obtained from Texas Instruments.
TI 810 Printer Printing Half Page of Data

If only about half a page is printed at a time, check to be sure that
DNB is enabled on the Printer Processor Board. This Data Terminal
Not Busy enables the terminal buffer control to stop data transfer from
the console until the buffer is empty and ready for more data. TI service
personnel may change the jumper or replace the Printer Processor
Board with the jumper in the wrong location for operation with RS3.
-
To enable DNB:
1. Set jumpers E4-E5-E6 to E5-E6.
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-6-24
RS3: Consoles
Printers
SV: 3-7-1
Section 7:
OI Card Cage
This section covers the OI (Operator Interface) Card Cage (also called
the Console Card Cage). The major components covered in this section
are the:
D
Electronics Cabinet
Alarm Output Panel
OI Card Cage
PeerWay Interface
Power Regulator
OI Processor
Video Generator (Character Graphics)
Video Generator (Pixel Graphics)
Printer Interface
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI)
OI Nonvolatile Memory
Bubble
RAM
The OI Card Cage is used with the:

D
Multitube Command Console (MTCC)
System Manager Station (SMS)
Command Console (CC)
Basic Command Console (BCC)
Hardened Command Console (HCC)
System Resource Unit (SRU)
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
Diogenes Interface
The operator interface portions of the console (keyboard, CRT, tape

drive, and floppy disk drive) are covered in earlier sections of this
chapter.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-2
Electronics Cabinet
The Electronics Cabinet houses one or more OI Card Cages, disks, and
tape drives. The Tower and System Manager Station (SMS) versions
house a single OI Card Cage. The standard version houses up to three
OI Card Cages and power supplies. Figure 3.7.1 and Figure 3.7.2 show
the front and rear view of a standard Electronics Cabinet.
Configurations vary.
Card Cage C
Tape Drive
or Floppy Disk
Card Cage B
Card Cage A
Figure 3.7.1. Standard Electronics Cabinet (Front View)
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-3
3
2
1
Alarm Output
Panel
Alarm
Output
Board 0
Alarm
Output
Board 1
Alarm
Output
Board 2
RGB Video
Cable
Connections
Card Cage
C
Hard Disk Drive(s)

Card Cage B
Card Cage A
ON
DC Distribution
OFF
Figure 3.7.2. Standard (non-EMC) Electronics Cabinet (Rear View)
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-4
System Manager Station

The System Manager Station is a stand-alone, upright arrangement of
the RS3 Operator Interface Console. The System Manager Station
(SMS) is EMC-compliant. The SMS is shown in Figure 3.7.3.
3
1
2
4
Front Door Removed
Description
No.
Panels Removed
No.
Description
PeerWay Tap
Keyboard/Video Interface (if internal mount)
Tape Drive
Power Supply (if present)
Disk Drive
OI Card Cage (door closed)
Figure 3.7.3. System Manager Station
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-5
Alarm Output Panel

The Alarm Output Panel supports up to three Alarm Output Boards and
has an optional marshaling panel for up to three sets of RGB (red,
green, blue) video cables between OI Card Cages and CRTs.
Figure 3.7.4 shows the Alarm Output Panel.
T1
P140
P141
P142
RED
GREEN
BLUE
+
OPTO 1
F1 1.5A
-+
OPTO 2
F2 1.5A
1 2 3 4 J289
--
Alarm signals from OI Interface Card Cage

Figure 3.7.4. Alarm Output Panel
NOTE: The Alarm Output Panel is optional with the 10P52820001 OI

Card Cage.
Alarm Output Board

The 1984--0744--0005 Alarm Output Board mounts on the Alarm Output
Panel. It is connected to the OI Card Cage alarm outputs and has
optical isolation for two sets of alarm contacts. Figure 3.7.5 shows
wiring for the Alarm Output Board.
The optically isolated alarm circuits are rated for 5--40 VDC and up to
1 Amp. The alarm contacts are fused as shown in Table 3.7.1.
CAUTION
Do not power the alarm circuit with AC. Use of AC and AC
rated optical isolators can result in problems that are very
hard to locate.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-6
ROSEMOUNT INC.
ALARM OUTPUT BOARD
TB1
+
-OPTO 2 PROCESS ALARM
--
External
Enunciator/
Alarm Relay
OUTPUT
External
Enunciator/
Alarm Relay
OUTPUT
--
--
OPTO 1 HARDWARE ALARM F1 1.5A
DC Power
Supply
--
F2 1.5A
1 2 3 4 J289
Alarm signals from OI Interface Card Cage

Figure 3.7.5. Alarm Output Board Wiring
Table 3.7.1. Alarm Output Board Fuses
RS3: Consoles
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman Part No.
Characteristics
F1
F2
G09140--0029
MDQ--1-1/2
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-7
OI Card Cage
The OI (Operator Interface) Card Cage is also called the Console Card
Cage. Figure 3.7.6 shows the front of the OI Card Cage. Table 3.7.2
shows parts replacement data.
Video Generator
PeerWay Interface
Printer Interface
SCSI Card
Power Regulator
Power Switch and Cable
OI Processor
Figure 3.7.6. OI Card Cage (Front)
These versions are available:

D
OI Card Cage (EMC-compliant)
10P52820001
OI Card Cage
1984--0660--000x
Table 3.7.2. OI Card Cage Parts Replacement

Part Number
Replaces
10P52820001
1984--0660--000X
1984--0660--000X
10P52820001
Comments
All installations except MiniConsole, Enhanced Command
Console (ECC), and BCC. Supports single tube only.
Only where EMC-compliance is not a requirement.
The OI Card Cage motherboard is the central signal distribution point

for all console lines. There are no active components or fuses on the
motherboard.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-8
The following are routed through the motherboard:
RS3: Consoles
DC distribution bus
DC power switch
Dual PeerWay interface
Fan
CRT screen
Keyboards
Printer
Magnetic storage media (floppy disk or hard disk and tape)
Power Regulator
Video Generator
PeerWay Interface
Printer Interface
Nonvolatile Memory
Disk Drive or SCSI Interface
OI Processor
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-9
Circuit card components face to the left. The bottom 20 pins

(component and solder side) are assigned individual functions
according to the card slot. Pin numbering begins at the bottom and goes
up. Because of this, cards are not interchangeable and are keyed to
prevent incorrect slot insertion. Pins 21 through 60 (solder and
component side) are common across the bus. They are:
D
+30 V A and B
30 V return
+5
+5 return
+12 V
+12 V return
Isolated 9 V A and B
Isolated 9 V return lines
Address bus (A0 through A15)
Data bus (D0 through D16)
RS3: Consoles
Control bus
-- Interrupt 1 through 6
-- Data Transfer Acknowledge (DTACK)
-- Upper and Lower Data Strobe
-- Read/Write
-- System Clock
-- Reset
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-10
OI Card Cage 10P52820001

The EMC-compliant OI Card Cage is built in a shielded enclosure with a
door in front and a special filterboard (10P50450001) at the rear.
Figure 3.7.7 shows the connectors and fuses on the rear of the OI Card
Cage. Table 3.7.3 lists the OI Card Cage connectors and fuses.
8
10
KEYBOARD/SCSI POWER
11
12
13
5
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
21
Figure 3.7.7. Rear View of EMC OI Card Cage 10P52820001
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-11
Table 3.7.3. EMC OI Card Cage 10P52820001 Connectors and Fuses
No.
Description
No.
Description
RS-422 Keyboard Interface cable connection

(J086)
12
DC power A cable connection (J907)
SCSI cable (J088)
13
SCSI power cable connection (J933)
RS-232 printer cable connection (J085)
14
Power Switch cable connection (J906)
Process Alarm cable connection (TB2)
15
PeerWay A Drop Cable connection (J084)
Hardware Alarm cable connection (TB1)
16
Video BNC Output RED (J646)
Alarm Circuit fuses (F1, F2) 1.5 A max
17
Video Output cable connection to the BNC

Breakout Panel (replacement use only)
(J082)
Process Alarm Opto-2 (RL2)
18
Video BNC Output GRN (J647)
Hardware Alarm Opto-1 (RL1)
19
Video BNC Output BLU (J648)
Alarm Output cable connection to Alarm

Output Panel (replacement use only) (J284)
20
PeerWay B Drop Cable connection (J083)
10
Keyboard/SCSI power cable connection

(J920)
21
Fan cable connection (J919)
11
DC power B cable connection (optional)

(J908)
NOTE: The Alarm Output Panel is optional with the 10P52820001 OI

Card Cage.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-12
Follow these rules to ensure EMC (CE) compliance:

1. Use cables listed in Table 3.7.4, as required.
2. The Keyboard/Video Interface-to-CRT coaxial cable
(1984--1691--0003) is approximately 1 meter (39 in.) long. Do not
use a longer cable between the KVI and the CRT.
3. Use Keyboard/Video Interface 10P50840004 or 2004.
4. Use keyboards, trackball, printer, and CRT bearing the CE mark
and install them in a control room environment.
5. Power the cage from a CE-approved power supply such as the
system DC bus or a MARK I Remote Power Supply
(10P5409000x).
6. The door at the front of the OI Card Cage must be closed for the
unit to meet EMC specifications.
Table 3.7.4. CE-Compliant Cables
Cable
Part Number
Maximum Length
PeerWay Drop Cable
1984--0473--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, bus to product
1984--0158--0xxx
61 meters (200 feet)
DC Power Cable, remote power supply to product
1984--1083--00xx
DC Power Cable, local power supply to product
10P54100001
Standard
Fan Power Cable (for use with remote power supply)
1984--1605--0009
Standard
Fan Power Y Cable (for use with local power supply)
10P54190001
Standard
Power Cable, disk and tape drive
10P56840001
Standard
I/O Cable, disk and tape drive
1984--1895--9901
Standard
Keyboard/Video Interface (KVI) Power Cable
1984--1628--0xxx
RGB Video Cable, coaxial, console to KVI
1984--1691--0xxx
RGB Video Cable, shielded, KVI to CRT
1984--1691--0003
1 meters (3 feet)
KVI Communication Cable, shielded, OI Card Cage to KVI
10P52890xxx
Printer Communication Cable, shielded
10P530800xx
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-13
The filterboard includes both Alarm Panel and Alarm Output Board
functions. RGB video output is provided by J646--J648.
The filterboard provides optical isolation for two sets of alarm contacts
that connect to TB1 and TB2. Figure 3.7.8 shows wiring for the alarm
circuits. The optical isolators are rated for 5 to 40 VDC maximum and
up to 1.0 amp. The isolators are fused as shown in Table 3.7.1.
DC Power
Supply
TB1
TB2
--
External
Enunciator/
Alarm Relay 1
--
--
--
--
Output 1
Output 2
External
Enunciator/
Alarm Relay 2
Figure 3.7.8. Alarm Circuit Wiring
CAUTION
Do not power the alarm circuit with AC. Use of AC and
AC-rated optical isolators can result in problems that are
Table 3.7.5. OI Card Cage 10P5282000x Fuses
RS3: Consoles
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman Part No.
Characteristics
F1
F2
G09140--0029
MDQ--1-1/2
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-14
OI Card Cage 1984--0660--0001

The 1984--0660--0001 OI Card Cage has an open chassis. Figure 3.7.9
shows the connector layout on the back of this OI Card Cage.
15
8
12
14
No.
13
Description
10
10
11
11
No.
Description
RS-422 Keyboard Cable MTCC
30 VDC Fan Power

red and black wires on older units.
Peerway A
10
CRT Color
Power
11
CRT Mono
Redundant 30 V Power Optional Bus B
12
PeerWay B
30 V Power (Bus A)
13
RS-232C Printer Cable
Connection for On/Off Switch
14
Tape, Disk or Floppy Drive on SCSI Bus
DC Power for Disk, Floppy and Tape Drives
15
Keyboard Cable (old units only)
5 VDC Power for Disk Drive, 30 VDC for

Keyboard Interface
Figure 3.7.9. OI Card Cage 1984--0660--0001 (Back View)
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-15
PeerWay Interface
The PeerWay Interface (1984--1045--0003) transforms parallel data
from the processor bus into synchronous serial data for transmission on
the PeerWay. The PeerWay Interface also determines the PeerWay
node address of the console and associated OI card cage. It is marked
MC PEERWAY on the printed wiring assembly (PWA). Figure 3.7.10
shows a block diagram.
Unregulated +9 V
A Return
Watch
Dog
Timer
WD Status
+5 V
+5 V
ADLC
RTS
XMT
RCV
Manchester
Encoder/
Decoder
A
Bus
Select
Bus
Arbitration
Optical Isolation
Coupler Status
Transmit A
Receive A
Status A
DMAC
Optical Isolation
+5 V
RAM
RS-422
Local
Loop Back A
RTS A
LED
Latch
RS-422
Local
Loop Back B
RTS B
Transmit B
Receive B
Status B
+5 V
Node
Address
Jumpers
Buffer
Unregulated +9 V
B Return
RTN
+9 V To Motherboard Bus
RTN
+9 V
Figure 3.7.10. PeerWay Interface Functional Diagram
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-16
NOTE: The PeerWay node address must be an even number. The

PeerWay node address is independent of SCSI device addresses used
in the Card Cage.
Bus buffers on the PeerWay Interface isolate the board synchronous
bus for the Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC), Advanced Data
Link Controller (ADLC), Programmable Timer Module (PTM), write
buffer, read buffer, RAM (2K X 8), and a software-driven LED latch.
The RAM buffers transmissions for the PeerWay. The DMAC transfers
data from buffer memory to and from the ADLC. The ADLC changes
data from parallel to serial for transmission and from serial to parallel
data for receiving. The PTM runs the bus access scheme, controlling
timeout functions to allow other devices to access the bus at given
times.
The Manchester Encoder/Decoder (HD6409) encodes data for
transmitting to Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) format. NRZ format encodes
data and a synchronous clock in the same signal. Rising and falling
edges of the transmitter signal keep the phase-lock loop oscillator in the
receivers locked onto the transmitter clock frequency.
Serial data is presented to the transmitter section of the card. The
transmit and receive sections are connected to the PeerWay Tap by a
cable that carries the following signals:
D
9 volts unregulated DC
Transmit signal (RS-422) to PeerWay
RTS signal (RS-422) enables PeerWay Tap transmitter
Local Loop Back Signal (RS-422) enables online relay
Status (RS-422) returns status of the local loop back (LLB) relay
and watchdog timer
Receive signal (RS-422) from PeerWay
An analog watchdog timer monitors the RTS signal and disables the
transmitter if the length of the transmission exceeds 67 milliseconds. A
backup watchdog timer on the PeerWay Tap has the same function.
Signals are isolated from chassis ground by special isolated voltages
and optical isolators on the PeerWay Interface. TIL 155 OPTOs handle
DC signals (RTS, LLB and STATUS), and high speed 6N137s OPTOs
manage the transmit and receive signals.
All signals are transmitted in RS-422 format, a differential signal
transmission at TTL voltage levels. The two output lines of the transmitter
are driven 180 degrees out of phase and a voltage comparator at the
receive end changes the signal back to a single TTL line.
Two 3-terminal voltage regulators are included to regulate the +9 V from
the Power Regulator card down to +5 V. The 5 volt sources supply
voltage to the A and B PeerWay isolated circuits.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-17
PeerWay Interface LEDs and Test Points

LEDs on the PeerWay Interface card indicate different status conditions.
Figure 3.7.11 shows the LEDs.
The test points are:
D
TP1
+5V Isolated DC for Tap A (Yellow)
TP2
A Return (Gray)
TP3
+5V Isolated DC for Tap B (Yellow)
TP4
B Return (Gray)
DS1 Card Good
No faults are detected on the card.
DS2 Card Fault
A fault is detected in the communication link.
DS4 PW Tap ST A
The timer in tap A has timed out.
DS5 PW Tap ST B
The timer in Tap B has timed out.
DS6 RTS
Ready to send generated from PeerWay Interface.
DS7 Bus Active
The PeerWay Interface is receiving data.
DS8 A Active
The Interface is using the A PeerWay.
DS9 B Active
The Interface is using the B PeerWay.
DS10 CMD Active.
Command active. The software is actively

executing a command on the Interface Board.
Figure 3.7.11. PeerWay Interface LEDs
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-18
PeerWay Interface Jumpers

Four jumpers on the PeerWay Interface set the node address of the
Console and the OI Card Cage. The sum of the jumper values plus 2
determines the node address, which can only be an even number.
Figure 3.7.12 shows the PeerWay Interface jumper locations.
Table 3.7.6 shows the jumper values.
Figure 3.7.13 shows the jumper setting for a PeerWay node address of
16. The name of each jumper is marked at the right of the jumper. The
least significant (LS) jumper is at the top and the most significant (MS)
is at the bottom. A jumper has the listed value in the (1--2) position and
a 0 value in the 2--3 position. Total the values and add 2 to get the node
address.
HD1
HD2
HD3
HD4
Figure 3.7.12. PeerWay Interface Jumper Locations

Table 3.7.6. PeerWay Interface Jumper Values
RS3: Consoles
Jumper
Value at 1--2
Value at 2--3
HD1
HD2
HD3
HD4
16
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-19
HD
PeerWay
Address
Jumpers
1
LS
HD1 at 1--2 = 2
HD2 at 1--2 = 4
1
HD3 at 1--2 = 8
1
Sum of Jumpers
4
MS
HD4 at 2--3 = 0
Node Address
= 14+2
= 16
Figure 3.7.13. Setting the Node Address Jumpers
NOTE: Setting the jumper for use on a PeerWay other than PeerWay
number 1 requires that you calculate the jumper setting:
Jumper Setting = HN -- (P#--1)*32
Where:
HN is the node number as shown on the CCC screen.
P# is the PeerWay number.
The result is the desired jumper setting value.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-20
OI Power Supply
The OI POWER SUPPLY (1984--1137--0001) regulates the incoming
30 VDC bus to +5 volts for the OI Card Cage circuitry, and to +12 volts
for the CRT and the isolated supplies on the Printer Interface. See
Figure 3.7.14 for an OI Power Supply functional diagram. The 1984-1017--000x MINICON POWER REGULATOR is replaced by the
1984--1137--0001 OI Power Supply.
To Fan
F2
9 V Unreg. A
30 V (A)
F1
30 V (B)
5V
Regulator
with current
limit and
overvoltage
protection
9 V Unreg. B
12 V
Regulator
with current
limit and
overvoltage
protection
30 V (A)
RTN
30 V (B)
RTN
Voltage
Comparators
+5 V
+12 V
30 V (A)
30 V (B)
Power
Status
Buffers
+5 V
RTN
+12 V
To Address
and Data
Bus
Figure 3.7.14. OI Power Supply Functional Diagram
Input power from power buses A and B is diode isolated and fed
through two fuses, F1 and F2. F1 feeds the regulators and F2 feeds
power to the DC fan. Each fuse has a red LED indicator.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-21
The 30 VDC supply is applied to the 5 volt switching regulator circuit.

This circuit supplies regulated 5 volts and unregulated 9 volts. A voltage
sensing and integration network regulates the supply by referencing the
oscillations of the 5 volt switching regulator. The regulator chip limits
current. The circuit has an overvoltage protection circuit. If voltage goes
above a set level, an SCR is turned on, the output is shorted, and fuse
F1 is blown.
The 12 volt regulator controls the state of the pass transistor as the
buffer/integrator senses voltage changes. The regulator output is filtered
and protected from over-voltage conditions. LEDs indicate supply
status.
Voltage comparators give a stable voltage source with a zener diode. If
the output voltage of the supply goes above or below tolerance levels,
the failure LED lights and the status bit to the processor card is set.
LEDs indicate output voltage status.
Table 3.7.7 shows parts replacement data. Model 1984--1137--0001 is
used in any console. You can jumper the card for 30 VDC input or
24 VDC input. This card has higher current ratings for added current
requirements. It has two unregulated +9 volt outputs (500 mA each) that
are run to the PeerWay Interface for the isolated +5 volt regulators.
When jumpered for 30 volt input, startup voltage is 26 volts and
shutdown voltage is 14 volts. When jumpered for 24 volt input, startup
voltage is 20 volts and shutdown voltage is 11.4 volts.
Model 1984--1017--000x is an earlier version used in the MiniConsoles,
Basic Command Consoles, and SCIs.
Table 3.7.7. OI Power Supply Parts Replacement
Part Number
1984--1137--0001
1984--1017--000x
RS3: Consoles
Replaces
Characteristics
Comment
1984--1017--0001
24 VDC or 30 VDC
Input
12 V Output 3 Amps
5 V Output 20 Amps
Replaces any
1984--1017--000x
30 VDC Input
12 V Output 2 Amps
5 V Output 11 Amps
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-22
OI Power Supply LEDs and Test Points

The OI Power Supply has LEDs to monitor the voltages as shown in
Figure 3.7.15. Power from power buses A and B is diode isolated and
fed through fuses F1 and F2. An LED indicates if a fuse has opened.
There are test points for the +5 volt (yellow-brown) and +12 volt
(Red-Brown) supplies.
Model 1984--1137--0001 has two sets of purple and gray test points for
the 9-volt unregulated supplies that power the PeerWay Tap Boxes.
NOTE: Read voltages at the PeerWay Tap Box; not at the card itself.
To determine the cards condition, install the card alone in the card cage
and observe the LEDs.
DS1
DS1=Card Good. Comparators are within tolerance.
DS2
DS2=Card Fault. +5 V or +12 V comparator has sensed voltage out of

tolerance.
DS3
DS3=Fuse F1 is bad. (Regulator)
DS4
DS4=Fuse F2 is bad. (Fan)
DS6
DS6=+5 V Good. The +5 V comparator is within tolerance.
DS7
DS7=+12 V Good. The +12 V comparator is within tolerance.
DS8
DS8=+30 V Bus A Good. The 30 VDC power bus A is within tolerance.
DS9
DS9=+30 V Bus B Good. The 30 VDC power bus B is within tolerance.
G
R
Figure 3.7.15. OI Power Supply LEDs
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-23
OI Power Supply Jumpers

The 1984--1137--0001 OI Power Supply may be jumpered for 30 VDC or
24 VDC input. Figure 3.7.16 shows jumper locations. Table 3.7.8 gives
jumper positions for the two input voltages.
F2
3
2
1
HD1
F1
Figure 3.7.16. 1984--1137--000x OI Power Supply Fuse and Jumper Locations

Table 3.7.8. 1984--1137--000x OI Power Supply Jumper Settings
Jumper HD1 Position
Input Voltage
1--2
30 VDC
2--3
24 VDC
OI Power Supply Jumpers for a System Power Supply Unit

The power regulators for the ControlFile and OI card cage must be set
to use 24 VDC. Jumpers on the ControlFile Power Regulator and OI
Power Regulator must be set for 24 VDC as shown in Table 3.7.9.
Table 3.7.9. OI Jumper Settings for a System Power Supply Unit
Regulator
RS3: Consoles
Header
Position
OI Power Regulator (01984--1137--000x)
HD1
2--3
ControlFile Power Regulator (01984--3505--000x)
HD1
1--2
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-24
OI Power Supply Fuses

Figure 3.7.16 shows the locations of the OI Power Supply fuses.
Table 3.7.10 shows fuse data.
Table 3.7.10. OI Power Supply Fuses
Card
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
1984--1137--000x
F1
G09140--0047
AGC 15
311015
15 A 32 V Regular
F2
G09140--0023
MDQ 1
313001
1 A 250 V Slow Blow
F1
G09140--0044
AGC 7-1/2
31107.5
7.5 A 32 V Regular
F2
G09140--0023
MDQ 1
313001
1 A 250 V Slow Blow
1984--1017--000x
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-25
OI Processor
The OI Processor family is offered in these groups:
D
OI 68040
10P5527001x marked OI PROCESSOR V
1984--3202--00xx marked OI PROCESSOR V
OI 68020
1984--1540--000x marked OI PROCESSOR 68020 W/ASIC
1984--1161--0008 marked OI PROCESSOR 68020
OI 68000
10P57140008 and 1984--2759--0008

marked OI PROCESSOR III
1984--2137--0008 marked OI PROCESSOR 1 MEG
1984--2122--0007 marked OI PROCESSOR 1 MEG
1984--2120--0008 marked OI PROCESSOR
Each group is described individually in this section.

The OI Processor family is used in the:
D
Multitube Command Console (MTCC)
Command Console (CC)
MiniConsole (MC)
Basic Command Console (BCC)
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
System Resource Unit (SRU)
Diogenes Interface.
Table 3.7.11 lists the models, the RAM size, and the equipment when
the part is applicable.
NOTE: Some software versions require at least 1 Meg of memory. The
OI Processor 68020 (1984--1540--000x or 1984--1161--000x) may
replace any of the OI Processor cards listed below them, but new
software and pixel graphics are required.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-26
Table 3.7.11. OI Processor Replacement Data

Part Number
Replaces
RAM
Used In
PWA Marked
10P55270011
--
16 Meg
SMS
OI PROCESSOR V
10P55270010
1984--3202--0010
16 Meg
MTCC
OI PROCESSOR V
1984--3202--0010
1984--1540--0009
1984--1161--000x
16 Meg
MTCC
OI PROCESSOR V
1984--1540--0009
1984--1161--000x
All below
NOTE: Use of this
processor requires
pixel graphics and
may require changing
of software.
4 Meg
MTCC
OI PROCESSOR 68020 W/ASIC

OI PROCESSOR 68020
2 Meg
MC
CC
MTCC
HIA
SCI
OI PROCESSOR III
2 Meg
MC
CC
MTCC
HIA
SCI
OI PROCESSOR III
OI PROCESSOR 1 MEG
10P57140008
1984--2759--0008
1984--2759--0008
All below
1984--2137--0008
All below
1 Meg
MC
BCC
CC
MTCC
HIA
SCI
1984--2122--0007
All below
1 Meg
BCC
CC
OI PROCESSOR 1 MEG
1/2 Meg
MC
BCC
OI PROCESSOR
1/2 Meg
MC
BCC
OI PROCESSOR
1/2 Meg
MC
BCC
OI PROCESSOR
1984--2120--0008
1984--2107--0005
1984--1061--0005
RS3: Consoles
1984--2107--0005
1984--1061--0005
1984--1061--0005
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-27
OI Processor 68040
OI Processor 68040 (1984--3202--0010, 10P55270010, and
10P55270011) is marked OI PROCESSOR V on the printed wiring
assembly (PWA). It performs 68020 or 68000 OI processor functions
but has more memory and is enhanced for increased performance.
Replacing an older OI Processor with this card requires pixel graphics
and may require new software.
The major functional blocks of the card are the:
D
68040 microprocessor
D
Clock, Watch Dog, and Interrupt Encoder
D
Main Memory Interface (MMI) Application Specific Integrated
Circuit (ASIC)
D
Dynamic RAM (16 MB)
D
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM) for the
boot program (128KB)
D
Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) (512KB Zero Wait State)
D
Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (DUART)
(Optional, for software debugging)
D
Buffered Motherboard Interface (BMI) for the 68000 motherboard
bus
D
Hardware read and write latches
Figure 3.7.17 shows the functional diagram for an OI Processor 68040.
Clock and
Watch Dog
Interrupts
EPROM
128KB
SRAM
512KB
DUART
32 Bit Address
68040
MicroProcessor
32 Bit Data
Buffered
Motherboard
Interface
Control
DRAM
16MB
MMI
ASIC
Read and Write

Latches
68000
Motherboard
Bus
Figure 3.7.17. OI Processor 68040 Functional Diagram
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-28
The OI Processor 68040 runs at a clock rate of 50 and 25 MHz. The

68040 microprocessor runs internally at 50 MHz, and all external bus
operations are timed by the 25 MHz clock. There are internal 2KB
instruction and data caches. It has a full 32-bit data bus and address
bus. Because the 68040 does not have dynamic bus sizing, the
buffered motherboard interface communicates with the 16-bit
Motherboard Bus.
In the 68040 support circuitry, the watchdog timer generates a reset to
the processor if the processor hangs up.
The 68040 has 128KB of EPROM to store the boot program, the power
up diagnostics, the PeerWay Boot program, and a debugging program.
The Main Memory Interface (MMI) ASIC controls the Dynamic Random
Access Memory (DRAM) and performs the Error Detection and
Correction (EDAC) function.
The dynamic RAM is 16 megabytes, arranged as 4 Meg x 32 plus 4
Meg x 7 for EDAC syndrome bits. The EDAC generates a 7-bit check
word from a 32-bit data word to detect and correct all DRAM signal bit
errors.
A 512KB Fast Static RAM is used for code that must run faster than
normal, such as interrupt routines.
The 68040 uses the same motherboard as the 68000-based OI
Processor Card. The Buffered Motherboard Interface (BMI) generates
the 68000 compatible signals.
The 68040 does not have the keyboard buffers found on the 68000 OI
Processor cards. Keyboard communications are handled by the printer
interface board.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-29
OI Processor 68040 LEDs

Figure 3.7.18 shows the OI Processor 68040 LEDs.
DS1
DS2
Card Fault. A fault has been detected on the Processor Card.
DS6
Display Active. Processor is updating Video Generator RAM.
DS7
Keyboard Active. Processor is operating on an instruction from a keyboard.
DS8
Controller I/O. Processor is working on a data update from a Controller.
Figure 3.7.18. OI Processor 68040 LEDs
OI Processor 68040 Jumpers

Table 3.7.12 shows the jumper settings.
Table 3.7.12. OI Processor 68040 Jumper Positions
Jumper
Position 1--2
Position 2--3
HD1
Not used
Hard wired
HD2
Not used
Hard wired
HD3
PeerWay Boot
Disk Boot (Normal)
HD4
Not used
Hard wired
HD5
Not used
Hard wired
HD6
Not used
Hard wired
OI Processor 68040 Fuses

The OI Processor 68040 has no fuses.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-30
OI Processor 68020
The OI Processor 68020 (1984--1540--0009 and 1984--1161--0009) is
used in consoles and System Resource Units (SRUs) requiring larger
memory and faster processing than that provided by the 68000-based
OI Processor.
1984--1540--0009 is marked OI PROCESSOR 68020 W/ASIC on the
PWA. The daughterboard circuitry is contained in Application Specific
Integrated Circuit (ASIC) chips.
1984--1161--0009 is marked OI PROCESSOR 68020 on the PWA.
This card has an attached daughterboard.
The OI Processor 68020 performs 68000-based OI Processor functions,
but has more memory and is enhanced for increased performance.
Replacing an OI Processor with this card requires new software and
pixel graphics. Figure 3.7.19 shows the functional diagram for an OI
Processor 68020.
Watch
Dog
Timer
Reset
LED
Latch
Bus
Cont
ASIC
Cache
Memory
16KB
Fast
Static
RAM
112KB
Address
Data
68020
Microprocessor
68000
Buffers
Control
RAM
Cont
ASIC
EDAC
32 BIT
Dynamic
RAM
4MB
EPROM
64KB
To
Motherboard
Bus
Buffer
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-31
The major functional blocks of the card are:

D
68020 microprocessor and support circuitry
EPROM for the boot program
Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) Bus Controller and

ASIC RAM Controller
Dynamic RAM with error detection and correction circuitry
External cache memory
Fast Static RAM (zero wait-state memory)
Interface for the 68000 motherboard
The OI Processor 68020 runs at a clock rate of 16 MHz. It has a full

32-bit data bus and address bus. The 68020 microprocessor has
dynamic bus sizing, which allows the processor to interface to devices
of any size from 8 to 32 bits, in 8-bit increments.
The OI Processor 68020 has an internal 256 byte instruction cache
memory to speed processing of tight loops. Also, to reduce the time to
execute an instruction, the processor decouples the instruction
execution portion from the instruction fetch portion, which enables the
processor to execute an instruction while pre-fetching the next
instruction.
As part of the 68020 support circuitry, the watchdog timer generates a
reset to the processor should the processor hang. LEDs are driven on
the card by a latch to indicate card status.
The OI Processor 68020 has 128K bytes of EPROM memory that is
used to store the boot program, the power up diagnostics, the PeerWay
Boot program, and a debugging program.
The Bus Controller ASIC generates the control signals for the external
cache memory, the Fast Static RAM memory, and the 68000
motherboard interface. The Bus Controller ASIC also generates the
signals that are used by the processor to determine external bus size
and transfer status of the current bus cycle.
The RAM Controller ASIC generates all control signals for the EDAC
(error detection and correction) circuitry and the dynamic RAM memory,
and it multiplexes the addresses for the dynamic RAM memory.
The dynamic RAM memory array is 1 megabyte by 32 bits, or 4
megabytes. The OI Processor Card 68020 uses 1 megabit by 1 bit
dynamic RAM devices. The memory array requires a total of 39 parts:
32 parts for data and 7 parts for the check bits used in the EDAC.
The error detection and correction (EDAC) circuitry contains a 32-bit
EDAC. The EDAC generates a 7-bit check word from a 32-bit data word
to detect and correct all signal bit errors in the dynamic RAM memory.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-32
In addition to the internal cache memory on the 68020 processor, there

is a 16K byte external cache memory and a 112K byte Fast Static RAM
memory. The Fast Static RAM contains code that is required to run
faster than normal, such as interrupt routines.
The OI Processor 68020 uses the same motherboard as the
68000-based OI Processor Card. The required 68000 compatible
signals are generated by the Bus Controller ASIC.
The OI Processor 68020 does not have the keyboard buffers found on
the 68000 OI Processor cards. Keyboard communications are handled
through the printer interface board.

DS1
DS2
Card Fault. A fault has been detected on the Processor Card.
DS6
Display Active. Processor is updating Video Generator RAM.
DS7
Keyboard Active. Processor is operating on an instruction from a keyboard.
DS8
Controller I/O. Processor is working on a data update from a Controller.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-33

Figure 3.7.21 shows the location of the movable jumpers on the 68020.
Table 3.7.13 gives jumper positions. Jumpers HD1, HD2, and HD6 are
hardwired.
NOTE: Cards with Boot ROM 9.15 or greater automatically do a
PeerWay boot after three failures to boot from disk. This is done even if
HD3 is set to Disk Boot.
HD3, 4, 5
HD1
HD2
HD3
HD4
HD5
HD6
Figure 3.7.21. OI Processor 68020 Jumper Locations

Jumper
Position 1--2
Position 2--3
HD3
PeerWay Boot
Disk Boot (Normal)
HD4
Not used
Factory set
HD5
Not used
Factory set

There are no fuses on the OI Processor 68020.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-34
OI Processor 68000
The OI 68000 PWA can be marked:
D
OI PROCESSOR III
OI PROCESSOR 1 MEG
OI PROCESSOR
The OI Processor 68000 controls these functions:

D
EPROM Memory timing
Dynamic RAM timing
Motherboard bus buffering
Reading Power Regulator Status bits
Screen RAM update
PeerWay communications
Disk operations
Printer
Reading Real-Time Clock
NVRAM update
Keyboard operation
The OI Processor 68000 has five main circuits:

D
Microprocessor
RAM
ROM
Motherboard bus buffers
Keyboard buffers
Figure 3.7.22 shows a functional diagram of the card.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-35
Watch
Dog
Timer
LED
Latch
Keyboard
Buffers
RS-422
To Loop Operation Panel,

Data Entry Keyboard,
and Callup Panel
Reset
Address
Data
68000
Microprocessor
Control
Buffers
To
Motherboard
Bus
RAM
EPROM
MC = 1/2 Meg
(Boot ROM)
SCI = 1/2 Meg
BCC & CC = 1 Meg
MTCC = 1 Meg
The microprocessor is a Motorola 68000 running at a clock rate of 12

MHz, which is provided by the onboard clock. The watchdog circuit
provides two functions for the microprocessor: a low-level interrupt and
a hardware reset. The microprocessor has approximately 67
milliseconds to respond to the watchdog low-level interrupt before the
watchdog issues a reset signal to the microprocessor.
LEDs are driven on the card by a software latch to indicate good/bad
and card status.
The Programmable Array Logic chips (PAL) provide address decoding
for all individual circuits on the card.
The card contains the dynamic RAM and the Error Detection and
Correction (EDAC) control circuitry. The Dynamic Memory Controller
does the required address multiplexing for the RAM chips and handles
the refresh cycle. The dynamic RAM chips have separate pins for the
read and write functions. A separate Read/Write select function
provides the separation and data bus buffering. The EDAC Controller
decodes the check bits that are stored along with the data bits. A 22-bit
word is stored in dynamic RAM with 16 data bits and six check bits. If
any single bit error is indicated by the EDAC check bits, the EDAC
controller will automatically correct the error and rewrite the data into
the dynamic RAM location. If any multiple bit errors are found, the
EDAC will trigger a bus error, which causes the board to reset and
indicate problems to the operator.
One pair of EPROMs provides a program for power up diagnostics.
They contain information necessary for downloading the operating
program from a disk or tape.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-36
The first 20 pins in each card slot are dedicated to I/O for that slot. Pins
1 through 20 of the OI Processor 68000 edge connector are for
interface with the loop callup keyboard and remote callup panels using
the RS-422 protocol.
Fusing is provided for the +5 and +30 volt inputs. There are also
address and data bus buffers for the motherboard bus lines that
communicate to the cards in the card cage.

DS1
CARD GOOD. No faults are detected on the card.
D2S
CARD FAULT. A fault has been detected on the Processor Card.
DS3
EXT LOOP SEL 30V FUSE. Fuse F1 is bad.
DS4
FUSE BLOWN. 5V Keyboard fuse blown.
DS6
DISPLAY ACTIVE
DS7
KEYBOARD ACTIVE Processor is operating on an instruction

from a keyboard.
DS8
CONTROLLER I/O
Processor is updating Video Generator RAM.
Processor is working on a data upgrade

from a Controller.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-37

Figure 3.7.24 shows the location of the one movable OI Processor
68000 jumper. The 10P57140008/1984--2759--000x model has no
movable jumpers. Table 3.7.14 shows jumper positions and effects for
the OI Processor 68000.
HD2
F1
F2
Figure 3.7.24. OI Processor 68000 Fuse and Jumper Location

RS3: Consoles
Card
Jumper HD2
Position 2--3
Jumper HD2
Position 1--2
1984--2759--0008
No movable Jumpers
No movable Jumpers
1984--2137--0008
1984--2122--0007
1984--2120--0008
1984--2107--0005
1984--1061--0005
256K EPROM installed

(Normal)
128K EPROM installed
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-38

Figure 3.7.24 shows the fuse locations for the OI Processor 68000.
Table 3.7.15 shows fuse data.
NOTE: Fuses on the OI Processor 68000 III are in the same area, but
are oriented vertically.
Table 3.7.15. OI Processor 68000 Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G09140--0036
MDL--3
313003
3A 250 V Slow Blow
F2
G09140--0041
MDL--5
312005
5 A 250 V Regular
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-39
Pixel Graphics Video Generator

The Pixel Graphics Video Generator (10P58900001 or
1984--2503--0001) generates color video signals for the command
console CRT. It is marked OI GRAPHICS VIDEO GEN on the PWA. It
uses a 30.5 KHz horizontal scan rate. Figure 3.7.25 is a schematic
diagram of the card.
Memory
Input
Signals
from
Controller
Processor
Card
82786 Graphics Coprocessor

Buffer
Graphics
Processor
Display
Processor
Memory
Controller
Bus
Interface
Buffer
D/A Converter
Timer
Red, Blue
and Green
Output
Signals to
CRT
A/D Testing
Alarm
Output
Latch
Board Good
Board Fault
Alarm
Output
Figure 3.7.25. Pixel Graphics Video Generator Functional Diagram
The inputs to the Pixel Graphics Video Generator include address lines
and data lines from the Console Processor through the console
motherboard. The input signals include the DTACK signal for
synchronization, the SYSTEM CLOCK signal, and the RESET signal.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-40
The output signals of the Pixel Graphics Video Generator include red,
blue, and green color signals and alarm contact signals. The color
signals are sent to the CRT monitor. The alarm contact signals are sent
to the Alarm Output Panel. Video information goes out with the red,
blue, and green color signals. In addition, the sync signal is
superimposed on the green color signal.
There are three major parts of the Pixel Graphics Video Generator:
D
the 82786 graphics coprocessor
the memory
the video output section
The 82786 graphics coprocessor includes a graphics processor, a

display processor, a memory controller, 1 Meg video RAM, and a bus
interface unit. The 82786 graphics processor draws all geometric
objects and characters with attributes such as color, texture, path,
rotation, and proportional spacing. The display processor takes the
bitmaps generated by the graphics processor or external processor,
organizes the data, and displays the bitmaps as a window on the
screen. The display processor generates and synchronizes the
Horizontal Synch, Vertical Synch, and Blank signals to the CRT display.
The console processor loads a character set into memory on power up.
The bus interface unit controls communication between the 82786
coprocessor and the Console Processor.
The memory array has a 2 Meg capacity (currently stuffed to 1 Meg).
Sixteen bits of data can be accessed at one time, either by the
coprocessor or by the console processor.
The video output section includes three digital-to-analog converters
(DACs) that convert the digital signal from the display processor into
analog signals that drive the red, blue, and green electron guns. The
4-bit digital signal from the display processor defines the pixel color by
pointing to an address in an array. Each address has 24 bits divided into
3 sets of 8 bits each. Each set of 8 bits defines color intensity for the
red, blue, or green color signal.
In the output section, a parallel interface unit drives the blanking signal,
the LEDs, and the alarm contact; and tests the outputs. As part of the
testing, the parallel interface unit takes the voltage comparators output
and checks synch level, green level, red level, and blue level for
frequency and amplitude. Output of the voltage comparators appears as
horizontal red, blue, and green lines on the CRT during power up.
There are two clocks on the Pixel Graphics Video Generator: a 25 MHz
video clock and a 20 MHz processor clock.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-41
Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs

The Pixel Graphics Video Generator has LEDs to indicate status.
Figure 3.7.26 shows the LEDs.
G
R
DS1 (Green)
No faults are detected on the card. DS1 lights when the OI

Processor completes power up diagnostics.
DS2 (Red)
The Pixel Graphics Video Generator has a fault.
DS8 (Yellow)
The Graphics Processor on the Pixel Graphics Video Generator

is executing commands. DS8 lights when the CRT screen is
periodically updated.
DS9 (Yellow)
Y
Y
Y
DS10 (Yellow)
Y
Y
The specific area of memory where commands are stored is being

used. When the Graphics Processor is finished executing
commands, DS9 goes out and the command area can be accessed.
The memory bus is in use. DS10 lights when the OI Processor is
reading into or writing from the Pixel Graphics Video Generator
memory.
DS11 (Yellow)
Text fields on the CRT screen are being updated. DS11 goes out
after the fields are updated.
DS12 (Yellow)
Horizontal sync. Under normal operation, DS12 blinks at a regular

rate.
Figure 3.7.26. Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-42
Character Graphics Video Generator

The Character Graphics Video Generator card (1984--1064--0001)
generates color video signals for the command console CRT. It is
marked OI COLOR VIDEO on the PWA. It uses a 15.5 KHz horizontal
scan rate. Figure 3.7.27 shows a functional diagram of the card.
Control
Logic
CRT
Controller
B
U
F
F
E
R
Vertical and Horizontal Clock Signals
Latch
Character
Memory
Serial
Latch
Attribute
Memory
Latch
Refresh
Memory
Timer
Input
Signals
from
Controller
Processor
Card.
Alarm
Output
Alarm
&
LED
Latch
Board Good
Board Fault
Alarm
Output
D/A
Red, Blue and

Green signals
to CRT
Figure 3.7.27. Character Graphics Video Generator Card Functional Diagram
Inputs to the Character Graphics Video Generator card include address

lines and data lines from the Controller Processor card through the
console motherboard. The input signals include the DTACK signal for
synchronization, the SYSTEM CLOCK signal, and the RESET signal.
The output signals of the Character Graphics Video Generator card
include red, blue, and green color signals and alarm contact signals.
Color signals are sent to the CRT monitor and alarm contact signals are
sent to the alarm output panel. Video information goes out with the red,
blue, and green color signals. In addition, the sync signal is
superimposed on the green color signal.
The horizontal and vertical clock signals for the CRT are created by the
CRT controller, 68B45. The CRT controller sets horizontal and vertical
timing for output signals and refresh memory addressing.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-43
The RAM on the Character Graphics Video Generator card is divided

into three sections: Refresh, Character, and Attribute. Refresh RAM
output data is 16 bits wide, and gives data for each character location
on the screen. Attribute and Character data load into RAM on power up.
Attribute RAM provides a table for translations between color and pixel
information. Character RAM contains the character font. The 8-bit
output of the Character RAM is synchronized with the output from the
Refresh RAM. This output contains two bits for each color, allowing 4
color intensities for each color.
The video output section includes three digital-to-analog converters
(DACs) that convert digital signals into analog signals to drive the red,
blue, and green electron guns.
The card has a momentary contact switch to drive the CRT gun in order
to help determine if the CRT is working.
External alarm contacts are driven from this card.
This is the first board checked by the processor after it has run its own
diagnostics.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-44
Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs

The Character Graphics Video Generator card has LEDs to indicate the
card status. Figure 3.7.28 shows the LEDs.
G
R
DS1 (Green)
No faults are detected on the card. DS1 lights when the card
completes power up diagnostics.
DS2 (Red)
Card fault. DS2 lights if the Video Generator Card fails power up
diagnostics.
DS3 (Red)
Not used.
DS6 (Yellow)
Page 0 is active. Page 0 and page 1 store information for the CRT
display. Depending on the amount of screen information, either DS6
or DS7 lights, or both DS6 and DS7 light.
DS7 (Yellow)
Page 1 is active. Page 0 and page 1 store information for the CRT
display. Depending on the amount of screen information, either
DS6 or DS7 lights, or both DS6 and DS7 light.
DS8 (Yellow)
Hardware alarm contact. The signal sent to light DS8 has also been
sent to open or close the hardware alarm contact.
DS9 (Yellow)
Process alarm contact. The signal sent to light DS9 has also been
sent to open or close the process alarm contact.
DS10 (Yellow)
Diagnostic routine is in progress during a power up procedure.
DS11 (Yellow)
Screen blank is active. On a normally functioning Character

Graphics Video Generator Card, DS11 shows a slight but constant
flicker.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Figure 3.7.28. Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-45
Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse

Figure 3.7.29 shows the location of the fuse on the Character Graphics
Video Generator. Table 3.7.16 shows fuse data.
F1
Figure 3.7.29. Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse Location

Table 3.7.16. Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G09140--0032
MDL--2
312002
2A 250 V slow blow
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-46
Printer Interface
The Printer Interface card (1984--1011--0003) is marked
MINICONSOLE PRINTER INTERFACE on the PWA. It has these
functions:
D
D
D
Real Time Clock (RTC) which keeps time for the system and is
backed up by battery
Battery backed RAM
RS-232 Printer Interface which drives a printer capable of
handling standard ASCII text
RS-422 Interface for the Multitube Console
The card is used in these components:

D
Multitube Command Console
Command Console
Basic Command Console
MiniConsole
Table 3.7.17 shows parts replacement data.

Table 3.7.17. Printer Interface Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
1984--1011--0001
1984--1011--0002
1984--1011--0003
1984--1011--0004
Characteristics
No RS-422 Interface
1984--1011--0001
1984--1011--0002
RS-422 Interface for Multitube Consoles
Figure 3.7.30 shows the functional diagram for the Printer Interface
card.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-47
Printer
Serial
Interface
RS-422
to
Keyboard
+ 12 V
A
D
D
R
E
D
A
T
A
C
O
+12 V
RS-232 to
Printer
--12 V
OPTO-Isolator
LED
Latch
Keyboard
Interface
MTCC
+5 V (ISO)
+12 V ISO
Power
Regulator
Isolated
Supplies
NVRAM
--12 V ISO
+5 V (ISO.)
N
T
R
+5V
Battery
Comparator
Real Time
Clock
17 Jan. 1986
16:22:31
3.6 VDC
Battery
Charger
ON
Battery
Buffer
OFF
To Motherboard Bus
Figure 3.7.30. Printer Interface Functional Diagram
All operations of the Printer Interface card are handled by the Console
Processor, so all data exchange on the bus is handled by the processor.
LEDs are driven from a data latch to indicate card status. Another
output from the latch is a software battery charge enable.
The 8 MHz clock is divided down and distributed. The Programmable
Array Logic (PAL) decodes the addressing for the various addressable
devices on the card. A data buffer puts the battery status indications on
the data bus for the processor.
The card has 4 NVRAM chips to retain data if power is removed. Data
to and from the EEROM is buffered for read and write.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-48
NOTE: In current software revision levels, NVRAM is no longer used.

The Printer Interface card contains the serial interface, which transfers
the parallel data and the printer format RS-232 data. All data on and off
the card are isolated by optical isolators.
The consoles support any RS-232 serial communications printer that
uses X-On/X-Off or data terminal ready (DTR) signals to indicate when
the printer buffer is full. If the printer does not use X-On/X-Off or DTR,
select a slower baud rate. Compatible printers should have eight bits,
no parity, no automatic line feed and one stop bit.
The real time clock (RTC) generates:
D
Seconds
Minutes
Hours
Day of the Week
Day of the Month
Month
Year (including Leap Year)
The RTC is backed up by three Nicad battery cells. A jumper that

disables power during shipping must be repositioned before the card is
placed in service. While in service, the batteries are charged at a
constant 7 mA rate.
Data is buffered both in and out of the RTC.
There is a port for the Keyboard Interface board to communicate with
the console on this card. Only the Multitube consoles interface on this
card; all others interface on the OI processor.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-49
Printer Interface LEDs

Printer Interface cards --0001 and --0002 (those without the RS-422
interface) have seven LEDs to indicate card status. Figure 3.7.31 shows
the LEDs of cards --0001 and --0002.
DS1
DS2
Card fault. A fault has been detected in the communication link.
DS8
TXD. Indicates data being transmitted to the printer.
DS9
DS10
NV Write. The nonvolatile RAM is being written.
DS11
Clock. A one-second pulse that the RTC is running.
DS12
Card good. No faults are detected on the card.
CTS. Clear To Send. Printer is connected and ready to accept data.
Software Clock. The internal software clock of the console is running.
Figure 3.7.31. Printer Interface Card --0001, --0002 (Without RS-422 Interface) LEDs
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-50
Printer Interface cards --0003 and --0004 (those with the RS-422
interface) have nine LEDs to indicate card status. Figure 3.7.32 shows
the LEDs of cards --0003 and --0004.
DS1
Card good. No faults are detected on the card.

Card fault. A fault has been detected in the communication link.
DS2
DS6
DS7
DS8
DS9
DS10
DS11
DS12
TXD A.
Indicates data is being transmitted to the keyboard.
CTS A.
Clear To Send. Keyboard is connected and ready to

accept data.
TXD B.
Indicates data being transmitted to the printer.
CTS B.
Clear To Send. Printer is connected and ready to

accept data.
NV Write. The nonvolatile RAM is being written to.

Clock. A one-second pulse that the RTC is running.
Software Clock. Consoles internal software clock is running.
Figure 3.7.32. Printer Interface Card --0003, --0004 (With RS-422 interface) LEDs
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-51
Printer Interface Jumpers

Figure 3.7.33 shows the location of the battery jumper on the Printer
Interface. Table 3.7.18 gives the jumper values.
The Printer Interface battery jumper must be in the ON (1--2) position
when the card is installed in a console, and in the OFF (2--3) position
when the card is shipped or stored. The battery jumper is in the OFF
position when the card is shipped from stock. All other jumpers are
factory set and should not be moved.
Clock Battery Jumper

HD10
TEST CONFIGURATION
Figure 3.7.33. Printer Interface Jumper Locations

Table 3.7.18. Printer Interface Jumper Placement
RS3: Consoles
Jumper
Position
Function
HD10
1--2
Clock battery connected

(Operating position)
2--3
Clock battery disconnected

(Storage position)
HD1--HD6
Configured as Modem
(Normal position)
HD7--HD9
Test disabled
(Normal position)
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-52
SCSI (Small Computer System Interface)

The Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) card, in the OI Card
Cage, provides the interface to hard disks, magnetic tape drives, floppy
disks, optical disks, printers, and local area networks. These versions
are in use:
D
D
1984--3301--0001 marked SCSI BOARD 2 on the PWA.

1984--1140--0001 and --0004 marked OI SCSI HOST ADAPTER
on the PWA.
The SCSI card performs the following functions:

D
Allows alarm messages to be sent from console to console over

the SCSI interface bus.
Provides data transfer from mass storage devices (tapes and
disks) to the OI Processor Card.
Provides the host computer with peripheral device independence
by translating SCSI commands into disk or tape commands.

Table 3.7.19. SCSI Card Parts Replacement
Part Number
Replaces
Characteristics
1984--3301--000x
1984--1140--0001
NOTE: You cannot mix
--3301 and --1140 boards
in a Multitube console.
1984--1140--0004
1984--1140--0001
Cannot be used with a --3301

board in a Multitube console.
1984--1140--0001
Itself only
Cannot be used with a --3301

board in a Multitube console.
Requires OI 68040 Processor with

a minimum boot ROM of 10.08.
NOTE: See the Software Release
Notes for the current boot ROM to
be used with your version of
software.
NOTE: With a disk-only console, SCSI termination is required. Use

1984--3301--0001 with the proper termination jumper settings
(Table 3.7.21), or use 1984--1140--0003, which has termination
resistors.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-53
Figure 3.7.34 is the functional diagram of the SCSI Board 2.

RAM 1 RAM 1
32K x 8 32K x 8
Bus
Arbitration
DMA Bus
Buffers
Bus
Buffers
To O/I
Motherboard
DMA
Controller
SCSI
Controller
To Hard Disk,
Tape or Floppy
Figure 3.7.34. SCSI Board 2 Functional Diagram
Figure 3.7.35 shows a functional diagram of the OI SCSI Host Adapter.

RAM 1
8K x 8
RAM 2
8K x 8
RAM 3
8K x 8
RAM 4
8K x 8
RAM 1
8K x 8
RAM 2
8K x 8
RAM 3
8K x 8
RAM 4
8K x 8
Bus
Arbitration
To O/I
Motherboard
DMA Bus
Buffers
To Hard Disk,
Tape or Floppy
Bus
Buffers
DMA
Controller
SCSI
Controller
SCSI Bus
Buffers
Figure 3.7.35. OI SCSI Host Adapter Functional Diagram
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-54
In a Multitube console, one of the Multitube Card Cages acts as the

SCSI master. A 50-pin ribbon cable and a power cable with +5 VDC and
+12 VDC lines connect the SCSI card to devices such as a disk or a
tape drive.
The SCSI card has two controllers: a direct memory access controller
(DMAC) and a SCSI controller. Address, data, and timing lines are sent
across the motherboard under the direction of the OI Processor card.
The DMAC handles the data transfer between the SCSI card and static
RAM. The DMAC transfers bytes of memory to or from sequential
memory locations in 16-bit words.
Data from the SCSI card in the Console Card cage goes on the SCSI
bus. From the SCSI bus, information goes to a SCSI board mounted in
the tape or disk drive. Each device on the SCSI bus has its own SCSI
bus address. The disk and tape drives are considered separate from
the console hardware although disk and tape drives are powered by the
SCSI master. Each SCSI card has its own SCSI address and is to be
considered an equal device.
The synchronous bus has arbitration to assure that the two controllers,
DMAC and SCSI, cannot be enabled at the same time. Bus arbitration
occurs between the OI Processor card, SCSI controller and the DMAC.
Either the SCSI controller or the DMAC may request control of the
synchronous bus. When control is given to one device, another device
cannot access the bus until the current request is completed.
A decoder selects one of the static RAM chips used for buffer memory
storage of messages to and from the SCSI mass storage devices.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-55
SCSI LEDs
Figure 3.7.36 shows the LEDs for the SCSI card.
DS1
(Green)
G
R
DS2
(Red)
A fault has been detected on the card. DS2 lights when the card
has failed power up diagnostics.
DS6
(Yellow)
SCSI bus is busy. DS6 is a hardware driven LED and will flicker
under normal operation.
DS7
(Yellow)
Message or status information is being transferred on the SCSI

bus. DS7 is driven by the target device and will flicker under
normal operation. A steady ON indicates the bus is locked.
DS8
(Yellow)
Indicates data is being transferred to the tape or drive.

DS8 is driven by a target device and will flicker under normal
operation. A steady ON indicates the bus is locked.
DS9
(Yellow)
Indicates messages or commands are being transferred on the

SCSI bus. DS9 is driven by a target device and will flicker under
normal operation. A steady ON indicates the bus is locked.
DS10
(Yellow)
Direct memory access request. Indicates a data transfer between

the disk or tape and SCSI Interface card.
DS12
(Yellow)
Hard disk access. A command is being issued to the hard disk.
DS13
(Yellow)
Indicates a command is being issued to the tape drive.

DS13 will blink every second as the tape drive is monitored for
tape insertion or removal.
DS14
(Yellow)
Indicates cache memory on the SCSI board is being accessed.

The most recently used disk sectors are stored in cache memory.
Y
Y
No faults are detected on the card.

DS1 lights when the card has passed power up diagnostics.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Figure 3.7.36. SCSI Card LEDs
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-56
SCSI Jumpers
The boards differ in jumper usage.
NOTE: The SCSI address is independent of the PeerWay node address
of the console and card cage.
1984--3301--000x SCSI Board 2
This card has two sets of jumpers, one sets the SCSI ID and one
enables or disables the bus active terminators.
Figure 3.7.37 shows the jumper locations on the card.
Table 3.7.20 shows the SCSI ID jumper settings.
G
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
HD0 HD1 HD2
HD3
1
2
3
Y
Y
Figure 3.7.37. SCSI Board 2 (1984--3301--000x) Jumper Locations

Table 3.7.20. SCSI Board 2 (1984--3301--000x) ID Jumper Setting
RS3: Consoles
SCSI Device ID
Put Jumper On
Used For
HD0
Card Cage A
HD1
Card Cage B
HD2
Card Cage C
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-57
Bus termination is used only when the card is at the physical end of the
bus and there is only one other terminated device on the bus.
Table 3.7.21 shows the SCSI Bus Terminator jumper settings.
NOTE: With a disk-only console, the bus termination jumper on this
board must be enabled.
Table 3.7.21. SCSI Board 2 (1984--3301--000x) Bus Terminator Jumper Setting
RS3: Consoles
HD3
Action
1--2
Enabled (Disk-only Console)
2--3
Disabled (Normal setting)
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-58
1984--1140--0001 OI SCSI Host Adapter

This card has two sets of jumpers to select addressing. The SCSI
DEVICE ID jumpers set the data bus to communicate by using the
correct ID. SCSI BUS ID jumpers tell the SCSI controller
communications chip its address. Figure 3.7.38 shows the jumper
locations on the console SCSI card.
Set both jumpers at address 2 if the card is installed in a Pedestal
Command Console.
NOTE: Both sets of jumpers must be set to the same address.
G
R
SCSI BUS ID
HD9
HD10
RN3 -- RN4
HD11
SCSI DEVICE ID
RN5 -- RN6
HD1
HD2
0
1
HD3
HD4
2
3
HD5
HD6
HD7
HD8
5
6
7
3 2 1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Figure 3.7.38. OI SCSI Host Adapter (1984--1140--0001) Jumper Locations
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-59
Table 3.7.22 shows positions of the SCSI Device ID jumper. Note that
only one jumper is used to specify the device address.
Table 3.7.22. OI SCSI Host Adapter (1984--1140--000x) Device ID Jumper
SCSI Device ID
Put Jumper On
Used For
HD1
Card Cage A
HD2
Card Cage B or Command Console
HD3
Card Cage C
3--7
HD4--HD8
These device IDs are not used

in Console Card Cages
Table 3.7.23 shows positions of the three SCSI card Address jumpers.
Table 3.7.23. OI SCSI Host Adapter (1984--1140--000x) Address Jumpers
SCSI Bus
Address
HD9
HD10
HD11
Used For
2--3
2--3
2--3
Card Cage A
2--3
2--3
1--2
Card Cage B or Command Console
2--3
1--2
2--3
Card Cage C
2--3
1--2
1--2
Not used
1--2
2--3
2--3
Not used
1--2
2--3
1--2
Not used
1--2
1--2
2--3
Not used
1--2
1--2
1--2
Not used
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-60
OI Nonvolatile Memory
The OI Nonvolatile (NV) Memory is used in the Supervisory Computer
Interface (SCI), Highway Interface Adapter (HIA), Rosemount Factory
Interface (RFI), and the Diogenes Interface. There are two versions:
D
OI NV RAM using battery-backed RAM:
1984--1547--0001 marked OI NV RAM on the PWA.
OI Bubble Memory using bubble memory modules:
1984--1147--0001 marked OI BUBBLE MEMORY on the

PWA.
1984--1167--0002 marked OI BUBBLE MEMORY SC on the

PWA.
The card may be referred to by a name associated the unit using it,
such as HIA Bubble Memory, and SCI Bubble Memory. The term
bubble is often used for a RAM OI NV Memory.
The OI Nonvolatile Memory provides:
D
D
RS3: Consoles
NV memory for the OI Processor.

RS-232 communications interface to a host computer or other
device
RS-422 communications interface to a host computer or other
device
Real Time Clock (RTC)
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-61
Table 3.7.24 gives parts replacement data for the OI Nonvolatile

Memory. The OI NV RAM has much higher data transfer rates between
the OI Processor and the OI NV Memory, and may have a larger
memory. There may be system restrictions on replacing a RAM card
with a Bubble card.
Table 3.7.24. OI NV Memory Replacement Data
RS3: Consoles
Part No.
Replaces
1984--1547--0001
--0002
1984--1147--0001
1984--1167--0002
1984--1547--0003
--0004
1984--1147--0001
1984--1167--0002
1984--1167--0001
--0002
1984--1147--0001
1984--1147--0001
--
Characteristics
256K RAM
512K RAM
--0001 has X.25

--0002 has X.25 disabled
--0003 has X.25
256K Bubble Memory

--0001 has X.25
Original 256K Bubble Memory
Does not have X.25 capability
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-62
OI Bubble Memory
The OI Bubble Memory uses bubble memory modules for NV memory
service. There are two part numbers:
D
D
1984--1147--0001 marked OI BUBBLE MEMORY on the PWA.

1984--1167--0002 marked OI BUBBLE MEMORY SC on the
PWA.
See Table 3.7.24 (OI NV Memory Replacement Data) for OI Bubble

Memory replacement data.
The OI Bubble Memory card is composed of:
D
Bus Arbitration control
Direct Memory Address (DMA) Controller
8K x 8 Static RAM
Serial Communications Controller
Magnetic Bubble Memory
Real Time Clock
Read and Write Latches
Figure 3.7.39 is a block diagram of the OI Bubble Memory card.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-63
DMA
Controller
From
MotherBoard
Address
Buffers
Address
Decode
Synch Address Bus

Serial
Communication
Controller
Data
Buffers
and
Latch
RS-422
Interface
Address Decodes
Bus
Arbitration
Control
To/From
MotherBoard
RS-422
Interface
Memory
8K x 8
Static RAM
Bubble
Memory
Chips
LED
Latch
Write
Latch
Real Time Clock
Read
Latch
Synch Data Bus

Figure 3.7.39. OI Bubble Memory Block Diagram
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-64
Bus Arbitration Control arbitrates access between the OI Processor and

the DMAC. The DMAC always has first access to the bus. The DMAC is
used in data transfer with the Bubble Memory and the Serial
Communication Controller because of their high data transfer rates. The
Bubble Memory consists of bubble chips and control circuitry.
There are two serial communications channels:
D
Channel A is an RS-422 communications port.
Channel B is an RS-232 port.
Only one channel is used at a time. The choice is made by software

from the Operator Console.
Jumpers are used to configure the communications ports. The Baud
rate on the communications channel is set by software. Other jumpers
allow configuration as a terminal (clock supplied externally) or as a
modem (this card supplies the clock) and to select a loopback test. The
loopback jumpers connect transmit with receive data and
request-to-send with clear-to-send signals. Three LEDs monitor each
communications channel.
The Real Time Clock supplies real time clock services for the OI
Processor card. These include periodic interrupts, time and date
keeping, and 50 bytes of battery backed RAM. The clock is backed up
by a nicad battery and an associated charging circuit. The battery
provides for continuation of the clock readings over power failures and
for times when the card may be removed from the card cage. Jumpers
are provided to disable the battery when the card will be unused for a
period of more than a few hours.
The 8K x 8 Static RAM is accessible by both the OI Processor and the
DMA Controller. The Read Latch has a battery status line and provides
for software differentiation between the two generations of OI Bubble
Memory boards. The Write Latch is used for bubble memory testing.
The LED Latch drives the status LEDs.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-65
OI Bubble Memory LEDs

Figure 3.7.40 shows the LEDs on the OI Bubble NV Memory.
G
R
DS1
(Green)
has passed power up diagnostics.
DS2 (Red)
DS6 (Yellow)
TXD for RS-422 channel.
DS7 (Yellow)
RXD for RS-422 channel.
DS8 (Yellow)
CTS for RS-422 channel.
DS9 (Yellow)
DS10 (Yellow)
DS11 (Yellow)
DS12 (Yellow)
Status LED 1: Operation: Program Access

Power-up Test: Low order bit of test number.
DS13 (Yellow)
Status LED 2: Operation: Writing to the Bubble.

Power-up Test: Middle bit of test number.
DS14 (Yellow)
Status LED 3: Operation: Reading from the Bubble.

Power-up Test: High order bit of test number.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Figure 3.7.40. OI Bubble NV Memory LEDs
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-66
OI Bubble Memory LED Sequences

In normal operation, the green LED (DS1) is ON. DS6 through DS8
flash for RS-422 communications. DS9 through DS11 flash for RS-232
communications. DS12 through DS14 flash as reads and writes are
made to the RAM.
The boot sequence has the red LED (DS2) ON with the three yellow
status LEDs (DS12, DS13, DS14) flashing. At the end of a successful
power-up test, the green LED lights. If the power-up test fails, the red
LED stays ON and the failed test will be displayed in the status LEDs as
indicated in Table 3.7.25. Note that the status of DS12 is not usually
significant.
Table 3.7.25. OI Bubble LED Sequences
RS3: Consoles
Status LEDs
(DS12, 13, 14)
Failed Test
---OFF
OFF
Unable to initialize.
---OFF
ON
Write failure.
---ON
OFF
Read failure.
---ON
ON
Read or write failure.
ON
ON
ON
Both 30 VDC power supplies bad.
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-67
OI Bubble Memory Jumpers

Figure 3.7.41 shows jumper locations on the OI Bubble Memory card.
Table 3.7.26 gives jumper values. Set the jumper for the Real Time
Clock battery (HD1) to OFF (2--3) if you remove the card for more than
a few hours.
The Board Address Decode jumper (HD19) is used to distinguish
between two OI NV RAM cards inserted in the card cage at the same
time. You must jumper one as DOWNLOAD, the other as NORMAL
so data in the NORMAL card may be restored.
See Chapter 10: Troubleshooting Consoles for the detailed restoration
procedure.
HD1
HD2
3
2
1
3
2
1
OFF
ON
BATT
T
N
HD19
3
2
1
DOWNLOAD
NORMAL
HD13, 12, 11, 9, 8

HD17
3
2
1
T
M
T
N
HD10
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
HD7
HD21
HD6
HD5
HD15
T
M
1
2
3
M
T
1
2
3
HD16
HD18
321
CS2
SYNC
CS1
SYNC
HD4
HD3
HD20
Figure 3.7.41. OI Bubble Memory Jumpers
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-68
Table 3.7.26. OI Bubble Jumper Values

Jumper
Value
Purpose
HD1 (BATT)
ON
Real Time Clock battery connected
OFF
Real Time Clock battery disconnected
No longer used by software
No longer used by software
1--2
Bubble test (Factory use only)
2--3
Normal operation
1--2
2--3
Normal operation
1--2
2--3
Normal operation
1--2
2--3
Normal operation
Normal Communications (RS-232)
Communications Loopback Test (RS-232)
Function as a Modem (RS-232)
Function as a Terminal (RS-232)
HD14
--
Not Used
HD15, 16, 17, 18
Communications Loopback Test (RS-422)
Normal Communications (RS-422)
DOWNLOAD
Address this board as Secondary

(See text)
NORMAL
Address this board as Primary

(See text)
HD2 (BOOT SWAP)
HD3 (SYNC)
HD4 (CS1)
HD5 (SYNC)
HD6 (CS2)
HD7, HD10
HD8, 9, 11, 12, 13
HD19
HD20
HD21
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-69
OI NV RAM
The OI NV RAM uses battery backed RAM as the storage medium. This
allows much faster data transfer between the OI NV RAM and the OI
Processor and also provides an optional larger memory. The part
number is 1984--1547--000x. It is marked OI NV RAM on the PWA.
See Table 3.7.24 (OI NV Memory Replacement Data) for OI NV RAM
parts replacement data.
The OI NV RAM duplicates all OI Bubble Memory functions and is a
fully qualified replacement for the bubble card. A RAM card reads and
writes faster than the bubble card and may have twice the memory, so
in some cases a bubble card cannot replace a RAM card.
The OI NV RAM card consists of:
D
Bus Arbitration Control
DMA Controller
8K x 8 Communication Static RAM buffer
Serial Communication Controller
Battery Backed Static RAM
Real Time Clock
Diagnostic Latches
Figure 3.7.42 is a block diagram of the OI NV RAM.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-70
DMA
Controller
From
MotherBoard
Address
Buffers
Address
Decode
Synch Address Bus

Serial
Communication
Controller
RS-422
Interface
Address Decodes
Memory
8K x 8
Static RAM
Bus
Arbitration
Control
To/From
Mother
Board
RS-422
Interface
LED
Latch
Data
Buffers
and
Latch
Write
Latch
Real Time Clock
Read
Latch
Synch Data Bus
From
Mother
Board
To/From
Mother
Board
Power Monitoring
Circuit
NVM
Address
Buffers
NVM Address Bus
NVM
Data
Buffers
Battery Backed
Static RAM
256KB or 512KB
NVM Data Bus (16 bits)
Figure 3.7.42. OI NV RAM Memory Block Diagram
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-71
Bus Arbitration Control: Most addresses are the same for the bubble
and RAM cards. The OI processor senses the type of nonvolatile
memory in use and adjusts addresses as required. Bus Arbitration
Control arbitrates access between the OI processor and the DMAC.
DMAC: The DMAC always has first access to the bus. The DMAC is
used in data transfers between the Serial Communication Controller
and the Communication Static RAM. This frees the OI processor for
other tasks.
8K x 8 Communication Static RAM Buffer: The 8K x 8 Static RAM is
accessible by the OI Processor.
Diagnostic Latches: The Read Latch has battery status lines and
configuration information. The Write Latch changes pages of the NV
RAM and starts battery tests. The LED Latch drives the status LEDs.
Serial Communication Controller: There are two serial
communications channels:
D
Channel A is an RS-422 communications port.
Channel B is an RS-232 port.
Only one channel may be used at a time. The choice is made from the
Operators console (by software). Jumpers are used to configure the
communications ports. The Baud rate on the communications channel
is set by software. Other jumpers allow configuration as a terminal or as
a modem. Jumpers are also used to select a loopback test. The
loopback jumpers directly connect transmit with receive data and
request-to-send with clear-to-send signals. Three LEDs monitor the
activity of each communications channel.
Real Time Clock: The Real Time Clock supplies real time clock
services for the OI Processor card including time and date, periodic
interrupts, and 50 bytes of battery backed RAM. The clock is backed up
by the battery control circuit. The battery provides for continuation of the
clock readings over power failures and for times when the card may be
removed from the card cage.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-72
Battery Backed RAM: The battery backed RAM (BRAM) consists of

the RAM chips and required control and battery backup circuits. It is
accessed only by the OI processor over a dedicated NVRAM bus.
Figure 3.7.43 shows the battery control circuit.
Power
to BRAM
BRAM
Enable/Disable
Signal
Power Control
Circuits
+5 VDC
Current Monitoring
Signal
Battery
Voltage
Check
Battery Voltage
(Isolated Supply)
Diode
Isolation
Low
Battery
Test
Low Battery Alarm

to Read Latch
Battery
Test Points
Battery Test
Push Button
Battery 1
Battery 2
Figure 3.7.43. RAM NV Memory Battery Control Circuit
The battery control circuit monitors the +5 VDC supply and battery
voltages. If the +5 VDC supply falls below the threshold value, the
battery control circuit acts to preserve the contents of the BRAM:
RS3: Consoles
Disables the BRAM, to prevent further reads or writes.
Resets the OI processor.
Supplies the BRAM with power from the batteries.
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-73
When the +5 VDC supply rises to the threshold level, the battery control
circuit restores normal BRAM operation.
The battery control circuit continuously monitors the unloaded voltage of
each battery. If a battery voltage falls below the limit, a Low Battery
Alarm is sent to the Read Latch.
Once every 24 hours the OI Processor initiates a BRAM current draw
test. The current used by the BRAM is measured and reported by the
battery control circuit. This can be used to detect static electricity
damage to BRAM cells or other abnormal BRAM power conditions.
Damaged cells typically draw a much larger current than do normal
cells. If a battery fails the test, a Low Battery Alarm is sent to the Read
Latch.
The OI Processor periodically accesses the Read Latch. If the Low
Battery Alarm is active, the OI Processor lights the low battery LEDs.
You can start the battery voltage test by hand with the momentary
contact switch at the top of the card. The test points allow direct
measurement of battery voltage.
Two 3.6 V AA lithium batteries (chosen for long life and high reliability)
are used. New batteries can keep RAM in continuous data retention
mode for several years. Disable both batteries if OI NV Memory is not
used for data retention and normal +5 VDC is not available. This
prevents unnecessary battery discharge.
Since RAM cells that have been damaged by static electricity discharge
draw considerably more power than undamaged cells, it is possible that
battery drain in the standby condition can be much higher than normal,
with the resulting shortened battery life. An OI NV RAM that shows an
abnormal BRAM current draw should be returned to the factory for
repair.
If one battery requires replacement, replace both batteries. Backup
RAM data to disk before changing the batteries. Remove one battery at
a time to allow the other battery to power the RAM. Replace the lower
reading battery first. See Chapter 9, Maintenance , for the complete
battery replacement procedure.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-74
OI NV RAM LEDs and Test Points

Figure 3.7.44 shows the LEDs on the OI NV RAM card.
DS1 (Green)
has passed power up diagnostics.
DS2 (Red)
DS4 (Yellow)
Battery 1 is low. Replace both batteries (battery 1 first).
DS5 (Yellow)
Battery 2 is low. Replace both batteries (battery 2 first).
DS6 (Yellow)
DS7 (Yellow)
DS8 (Yellow)
DS9 (Yellow)
DS10 (Yellow) CTS for RS-232 channel.
DS11 (Yellow) TXD for RS-232 channel.
G
R
Y
Y
DS12 (Yellow)
Status LED 1: Operation: Program Access

Power-up Test: Low order bit of test number.
DS13 (Yellow) Status LED 2: Operation: Writing to the Bubble.

Power-up Test: Middle bit of test number.
DS14 (Yellow) Status LED 3: Operation: Reading from the Bubble.
Power-up Test: High order bit of test number.
Figure 3.7.44. OI NV RAM LEDs
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-75
Figure 3.7.45 shows test points and the Battery Load test switch on the
OI NV RAM card. You can start the battery load test by hand by closing
this switch momentarily. An alarm is issued if the battery fails the test.
TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7
TP 8
TP 9
Battery
Load Test Switch
Battery 1
ON OFF
Battery 2
TP 10
Figure 3.7.45. OI NV RAM Memory Test Points
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-76
Table 3.7.27 lists the name, color, and purpose of the test points.
Table 3.7.27. OI NV RAM Memory Test Points
RS3: Consoles
Test Point
Color
Purpose
TP1 +5V1
Yellow
RS-422 isolated +5 V supply
TP2 IG1
Gray
RS-422 isolated ground
TP3 +5V2
Yellow
RS-232 isolated +5 V supply
TP4 IG2
Gray
RS-232 isolated ground
TP5 +9V
Purple
Comparator supply
TP6 B1C
White
Battery 1 current
TP7 B2C
Green
Battery 2 current
TP8 B1V
White
Battery 1 voltage
TP9 B2V
Green
Battery 2 voltage
TP10 GND
Brown
Logic ground
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-77
OI NV RAM LED Sequences

In normal operation, the green LED is ON. DS6 through DS8 flash for
RS-422 communications. DS9 through DS11 flash for RS-232
communications. DS12 through DS14 flash as reads and writes are
made to the RAM.
The boot sequence has the red LED (DS2) ON with the three yellow
status LEDs (DS12, DS13, DS14) flashing. If a power-up test succeeds,
the green LED lights. If the power-up test fails, the red LED will stay ON
and the number of the failed test will be displayed in the status LEDs, as
indicated in Table 3.7.28.
Table 3.7.28. OI NV RAM LED Sequences
RS3: Consoles
Status LEDs
(DS12, 13, 14)
Failed Test
OFF
ON
ON
Failure in read/write tests of RAM.
ON
ON
ON
Bad program length, failed SCI image checksum, or

both 30 VDC power supplies bad.
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-78
OI NV RAM Jumpers
Figure 3.7.46 shows the location of the jumpers on the OI NV RAM
card. Table 3.7.29 lists jumper values.
PEERWAY
BOOT
BD ADDR
DECODE
PWAY
NORM
2NDARY
PRIMARY
HD5
HD19
RTC PWR
BATT&PS
PSONLY
NVM SIZE
HD3
HD13, 12, 11, 9, 8
RS-232 Modem/Terminal
(Remove for loopback test)
HD21
L
T
R
M
M
L
T
R
HD20
R
L
M
L
R
T
L
R
HD7, 10
RS-232
Run Normal
Loopback Test
512 KB
256 KB
HD4
Battery 1
ON OFF
HD1, 2
(Battery ON/OFF)
HD20, 21
RS-422 Synchronous
Modem/Terminal
(Note Reversal)
Battery 2
HD15, 16, 17, 18

RS-422
Loopback Test
Run Normal
Figure 3.7.46. OI NV RAM Memory Jumpers
Battery Jumpers: Set battery jumpers (HD1 and HD2) to OFF when
RAM battery is not needed.
Jumper HD3 (RTCPWR) selects battery backup for the Real Time
Clock. This jumper is hardwired.
Modem or Terminal Jumpers: Jumpers HD8, 9, 11, 12, and 13 select
RS-232 operation as either a Modem (M) or a Terminal (T). Set them all
to the same value.
NOTE: Remove jumpers HD8, 9, 11, 12, and 13 for the RS-232 local
loopback test. Be sure to replace them correctly when the test is
completed.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-79
Jumpers HD20 and HD21 select RS-422 operation as either a Modem

(M) or a Terminal (T). For X.25 (synchronous) operation both must be
set to the same value. These jumpers are hardwired in cards ordered
for non-X.25 (asynchronous) operation.
NOTE: The M and T positions of HD20 and HD21 are reversed.
Loopback Test Jumpers: Use jumpers marked L and R only for
local loopback tests. Set them on Run Normal (R) for operating the
card. HD7 and HD10 are used for RS-232. HD15, 16, 17, and 18 are
used for RS-422 operation.
NOTE: The Modem or Terminal jumpers must be removed for the
RS-232 local loopback test. Be sure to replace them correctly when the
test is completed.
Board Address Decode Jumpers: The Board Address Decode jumper
(HD19) distinguishes between two OI NV RAM cards inserted in the
card cage at the same time. One must be jumpered as PRIMARY, the
other as 2NDARY (secondary). This is needed to restore bad data in
the BRAM.
The bad card is jumpered PRIMARY, and the known good card is
jumpered 2NDARY. When the card cage is powered up, the OI
Processor boots from the secondary (good) card and begins operation.
The operator can copy data to the primary (bad) card.
PeerWay Boot Jumper: The PeerWay Boot jumper (HD5) is used to
force a PeerWay boot. Set it to NORM for normal operation.
To force a PeerWay boot, power down the card cage. Set the jumper to
PWAY and restore cage power. The OI Processor will boot from the
PeerWay. Power down again and return the jumper to NORM. Power up
for normal operation.
Table 3.7.29. OI NV RAM Jumper Values
Jumper
Value
Purpose
HD1 (BATT 1)
ON
Battery 1 Connected
OFF
Battery 1 Disconnected
ON
Battery 2 Connected
OFF
Battery 2 Disconnected
HD2 (BATT 2)
(continued on next page)
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-80
Table 3.7.29. OI NV RAM Jumper Values (continued)
Jumper
Value
Purpose
HD3 (RTCPWR)
BAT&PS
Hardwired
PS ONLY
----
512 KB
Hardwired for number of RAM chips

used
256 KB
Hardwired for number of RAM chips

used
PWAY
Force PeerWay boot
NORM
Normal operation
Run Normal Communications (RS-232)
Communications Loopback Test

(RS-232)

(Remove for Loopback Test)

(Remove for Loopback Test)
Communications Loopback Test

(RS-422)
Run Normal Communications (RS-422)
2NDARY
Address this board as Secondary

(See text)
PRIMARY
Address this board as Primary (See

text)

(Hardwired for non-X.25 operation)

(Hardwired for non-X.25 operation)
HD4 (NVM SIZE)
HD5 (PEERWAY
BOOT)
HD7, HD10
HD8, 9, 11, 12, 13
HD15, 16, 17, 18
HD19
(BD ADRR
DECODE)
HD20
HD21
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-81
OI NV RAM Battery Replacement

Replace the batteries at least once a year or if any Low Battery LEDs
light. Replace both batteries, but disable them one at a time to allow the
other to retain the RAM contents. Use only 3.6 volt lithium batteries
(C52932--0002).
NOTE: A disk backup should be made before the OI NV RAM card is
removed for battery replacement. Follow recommended procedures in
powering down the Operator Interface Card Cage. Use static protection
whenever handling the OI RAM NV card.
CAUTION
If one battery is low, replace the low battery first to ensure
data retention.
-
To replace the batteries:

1. Disable battery one by moving jumper HD1 to OFF.
2. Remove and replace battery one.
3. Enable battery one by moving jumper HD1 to ON.
4. Repeat for battery two, using jumper HD2.
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
SV: 3-7-82
RS3: Consoles
OI Card Cage
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 4:
ControlFiles
Section 1:
Section 2:
RS3: ControlFiles
ControlFile Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
ControlFile Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Data Bus Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Terminator II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Terminator Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3
4-1-5
4-1-5
4-1-7
ControlFile Support Section
.............................
4-2-1
PeerWay Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Buffer LEDs and Test Points
..............................
PeerWay Buffer Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Buffer Fuse
.............................................
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test Points
.
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Jumpers
.............
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses
...............
Coordinator Processor (CP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-IV Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-I and CP-II Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP (Coordinator Processor) Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP LEDs, Test Points, and Enable/Disable Switch
...................
CP LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-IV+ (10P50870004 and 1984--4164--0004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-IV (1984--4064--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-II (1984--1594--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-I (1984--1448--0001 or 1984--1240--0001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP Fuses
.......................................................
NV (Nonvolatile) Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory LEDs and Test Points
...........................
RAM NV Memory LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory Jumpers
........................................
4-2-2
4-2-4
4-2-5
4-2-6
4-2-7
4-2-9
4-2-11
4-2-12
4-2-13
4-2-16
4-2-18
4-2-19
4-2-20
4-2-21
4-2-24
4-2-27
4-2-29
4-2-31
4-2-34
4-2-34
4-2-35
4-2-36
4-2-37
4-2-38
4-2-39
4-2-41
4-2-44
4-2-46
4-2-48
Contents
SV: ii
Section 3:
RS3: ControlFiles
RAM NV Memory Battery Replacement

.............................
RAM NV Memory Fuse
...........................................
NV Memory and Powering Down the ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory: LEDs and Test Points
.........................
Bubble NV Memory Jumpers
......................................
Bubble NV Memory Fuses
........................................
4-2-49
4-2-49
4-2-49
4-2-50
4-2-52
4-2-53
4-2-53
Controller Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1
MPC (MultiPurpose Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MPC5 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC II Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC I Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC5 Jumpers
..................................................
MPC II Jumpers
.................................................
MPC I Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC Fuses
.....................................................
MLC (MultiLoop Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC (Single Strategy Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC (Contact Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC Fuse
........................................................
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX and PLC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX and PLC Fuse
.............................................
Controller Processor LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor LED Sequence on Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC, CC, MUX, and PLC Controller Processor LEDs
.............
MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor LEDs
...........
Controller Processor Enable/Disable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2
4-3-5
4-3-7
4-3-10
4-3-12
4-3-12
4-3-15
4-3-18
4-3-19
4-3-20
4-3-21
4-3-24
4-3-24
4-3-24
4-3-25
4-3-26
4-3-26
4-3-27
4-3-28
4-3-29
4-3-29
4-3-30
4-3-30
4-3-31
4-3-32
4-3-32
4-3-33
4-3-35
4-3-36
4-3-37
4-3-39
Contents
SV: iii
List of Figures
Figure
RS3: ControlFiles
Page
4.1.1.
ControlFile Card Cage (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
4.1.2.
ControlFile Motherboard Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3
4.1.3.
Setting the ControlFile Node Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-4
4.1.4.
Setting the CE ControlFile (10P52960001) Node Address Jumpers . .
4-1-4
4.1.5.
ControlFile Motherboard Terminator II Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-6
4.1.6.
ControlFile Motherboard Terminator Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-8
4.2.1.
4-2-1
4.2.2.
PeerWay Buffer Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2
4.2.3.
PeerWay Buffer LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-4
4.2.4.
PeerWay Buffer 1984--1502--000x Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . .
4-2-5
4.2.5.
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Functional Diagram . . . . . . .
4-2-8
4.2.6.
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points . . . . .
4-2-10
4.2.7.
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumper and Fuse Locations
4-2-11
4.2.8.
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Functional Diagram
4-2-15
4.2.9.
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and

Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-17
4.2.10.
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and

12 VDC 1984--1505--000x Jumper and Fuse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-18
4.2.11.
Coordinator Processor IV (CP-IV) Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-22
4.2.12.
CP-I and CP-II Coordinator Processor Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . .
4-2-25
4.2.13.
Coordinator Processor LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-30
4.2.14.
CP-IV and CP-IV+ Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-35
4.2.15.
CP-II Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-36
4.2.16.
CP-I Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-37
4.2.17.
RAM Nonvolatile Memory Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-42
4.2.18.
RAM NV Memory Battery Control Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-43
4.2.19.
RAM NV Memory LEDs, Test Points, and Enable/Disable Switch . . . .
4-2-45
4.2.20.
RAM NV Memory Fuse, Jumper, and Test Point Locations . . . . . . . . .
4-2-48
4.2.21.
Bubble NV Memory Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-50
4.2.22.
Bubble NV Memory LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-52
4.2.23.
Bubble NV Memory Fuse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-53
4.3.1.
4-3-1
4.3.2.
MPC5 Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-5
Contents
SV: iv
RS3: ControlFiles
4.3.3.
MPC II Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-7
4.3.4.
MPC I Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-10
4.3.5.
MPC5 Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-12
4.3.6.
MPC II Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-15
4.3.7.
MPC I Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-19
4.3.8.
MultiLoop Controller Processor Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-23
4.3.9.
MLC Fuse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-24
4.3.10.
SSC Fuse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-27
4.3.11.
Contact Controller Processor Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-29
4.3.12.
MUX and PLC Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-31
4.3.13.
MPC, CC , MUX, and PLC Controller Processor LEDs and

Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-34
4.3.14.
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy Controller Processor LEDs and

Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-35
4.3.15. Controller Processor Software and Communication Rate Jumper

Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-37
Contents
SV: v
List of Tables
Table
RS3: ControlFiles
Page
4.1.1.
Parts Replacement for the ControlFile Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2
4.1.2.
ControlFile Motherboard Jumper Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3
4.2.1.
Parts Replacement for PeerWay Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-3
4.2.2.
PeerWay Buffer 1984--1502--000x Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-5
4.2.3.
PeerWay Buffer Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-6
4.2.4.
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Parts Replacement . . . . . . .
4-2-7
4.2.5.
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumper Positions . . . . . . . .
4-2-11
4.2.6.
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-12
4.2.7.
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Parts Replacement
4-2-13
4.2.8.
ControlFile Power Regulator 1984--1505--000x Jumper Positions . . .
4-2-19
4.2.9.
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-19
4.2.10. Coordinator Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-20
4.2.11.
Coordinator Processor Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-21
4.2.12. CP Fault Indications: Green LED OFF, Red LED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-32
4.2.13. CP Fault Indications: Green LED ON Then OFF, Red LED ON . . . . .
4-2-33
4.2.14. CP-IV+ Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-34
4.2.15. CP-IV Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-35
4.2.16. CP-II Software Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-36
4.2.17. CP-II Factory Set Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-36
4.2.18. CP-I Factory Set Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-37
4.2.19. CP Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-38
4.2.20. Nonvolatile Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-39
4.2.21. Nonvolatile Memory Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-40
4.2.22. RAM NV Memory Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-44
4.2.23. RAM NV Memory LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-47
4.2.24. RAM NV Memory Battery Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-48
4.2.25. RAM NV Memory Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-48
4.2.26. RAM NV Memory Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-49
4.2.27. Bubble NV Memory Fuses
....................................
4-2-53
4.3.1.
MPC Communication Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2
4.3.2.
Controller Images and Associated Card Cages or FlexTerms . . . . . . .
4-3-3
4.3.3.
MPC Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-3
Contents
SV: vi
RS3: ControlFiles
4.3.4.
MPC5 Jumper Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-13
4.3.5.
ControlFile Status Screen Jumper Code (MPC5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-14
4.3.6.
MPC II Jumper Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-16
4.3.7.
ControlFile Status Screen Jumper Code (MPC2+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-18
4.3.8.
MPC I, MPC II, and MPC5 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-19
4.3.9.
MLC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-24
4.3.10. SSC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-27
4.3.11.
Contact Controller Processor Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-28
4.3.12. Contact Controller Processor Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-29
4.3.13. MUX and PLC Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-30
4.3.14. MUX and PLC Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-31
4.3.15. Controller Processor Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-33
4.3.16. Image Jumper Positions (Not for MPC II or MPC5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-38
4.3.17. Image Jumper Positions for MLC and SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-38
4.3.18. Communications Jumper Positions (Not for MPC5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-38
Contents
SV: 4-1-1
Section 1:
ControlFile Card Cage

These versions of the ControlFile Card Cage are in service:
D
ControlFile Card Cage (EMC compliant)
10P52960001
D
ControlFile Card Cage (with blower)
1984--3048--000x
D
1984--0023--000x
NOTE: To retain EMC compliance in a 10P52960001 ControlFile, you
must use the MPC II (10P50400006) or MPC5 (10P57520007)
Controller Processor.
Support Section
CONTROLLER PROCESSOR
NONVOLATILE MEMORY
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR
POWER REGULATOR
POWER REGULATOR
PEERWAY B
PEERWAY A
The ControlFile Card Cage houses the PeerWay Buffer, Power Regulator,
Coordinator Processor, Nonvolatile Memory, and Controller Processor
cards. A redundant pair of PeerWay Buffer cards is standard. One Power
Regulator card and one Coordinator Processor card are standard, though
each can be made redundant with the addition of another card. One
Nonvolatile Memory card is standard. There is a slot for a second memory
card but only one card can be enabled at a time. Up to eight Controller
Processor cards can be configured, in any combination, including
standalone units or as redundant pairs. Figure 4.1.1 shows the front of a
ControlFile Card Cage.
Controller Processor Cards
Figure 4.1.1. ControlFile Card Cage (Front)
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-1-2
The ControlFile motherboard interconnects the power and signals of all

cards in the ControlFile Card Cage. Power and signal connections
include:
D
DC power A and B
PeerWay Tap Boxes A and B
Cage alarm contacts
I/O Card Cage connectors
Plenum Fan Power (except --0023)
The motherboard is a multilayer card. The inner layers carry power and
ground and the outer layers carry the data, address, and control signals
across the motherboard. The data, address, and control lines are fully
redundant. Each line extends from one Coordinator Processor (CP)
card to the Controllers.
Coordinator Processor, Controller Processor, and Nonvolatile Memory
cards have redundant buffering to isolate failures and prevent the
failures from affecting the other cards. Redundant PeerWay Buffer
cards each have their own bus. The dedicated Coordinator Processor
bus is a 32-bit parallel bus that allows data transfer between redundant
Coordinator Processor cards.
There are two rows of connectors across the backplane of the
motherboard: an upper and a lower. The upper row is used by the
MultiPurpose Controller. Each Controller slot has a corresponding
connector that allows connection to the Analog Card Cages and/or
FlexTerms. The lower row is used by MultiLoop and Single-Strategy
Controllers for the 1 to 5 V input signals, and the .5 to 2.5 V feedback
signals from MultiLoop FlexTerms.
Table 4.1.1 shows the parts replacement matrix.
Table 4.1.1. Parts Replacement for the ControlFile Card Cage
RS3: ControlFiles
Part No.
Replaces
Characteristics
10P5296000x
1984--3048--000x
1984--0023--000x
Provides EMC compliance

(when used with MPC II [10P50400006]
or MPC5 [10P57520007])
1984--3048--000x
1984--0023--000x
Has integral blower assembly
SV: 4-1-3
ControlFile Jumpers
Two groups of jumpers on the ControlFile indicate its node number
address. The jumpers must be set to the same address. If they differ,
the lowest node address will be used and a PeerWay Jumpers Bad
alarm message will be issued. Figure 4.1.2 shows the jumper locations.
The jumpers are on the back (solder side) of some motherboards and
on the front (connector side) of others. Jumpers on the back are
unmarked. Those on the front are marked HAA and HAB and are
numbered as shown in Figure 4.1.3 and Figure 4.1.4.
Table 4.1.2 gives jumper values. Figure 4.1.3 shows the Jumper setting
to give a node address of 29.
NOTE: The H and L positions are reversed when the jumpers are on
the back of the motherboard.
HAA
HAB
HL
HL
Figure 4.1.2. ControlFile Motherboard Jumper Locations

Table 4.1.2. ControlFile Motherboard Jumper Values
RS3: ControlFiles
Jumper
Value at H
Value at L
16
SV: 4-1-4
HAA
HD5 at H = 16
HD2 at H = 8
HD3 at H = 4
HD4 at L = 0
HD4 at L = 0
H
Sum of Jumpers
28
+ 1
Node Address
29
Figure 4.1.3. Setting the ControlFile Node Address Jumpers

HAB
HAA
HAB
HAA
H=16
H=8
H=16 5
H=8 4
H=4
H=4 3
H=2
H=2 2
H=1
+1
H L
H L
H L
16
8
4
0
-----+1
H=1 1
H L
+1
= 29
Figure 4.1.4. Setting the CE ControlFile (10P52960001) Node Address Jumpers
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-1-5
ControlFile Data Bus Terminators

The motherboard data bus is terminated with two Data Bus Terminators.
Non-EMC ControlFile Card Cages (1984--3048--000x and
1984--0023--000x) use removable terminators. These terminators
sometimes are dislodged when working with wiring. Replace them
exactly as shown in the appropriate figure.
NOTE: ControlFile 10P52960001 has the terminators built into the
motherboard.
The following versions are in use:
D
ControlFile Terminator II
(1984--3270--0001)
ControlFile Terminator Board (Top)
(1984--1231--0001)
ControlFile Terminator Board (Bottom)
(1984--1243--0001)
The ControlFile Terminator II (1984--3270--0001) is marked
CF TERMINATOR II on the PWA. This board is used in both top and
bottom positions. It must be installed as shown in Figure 4.1.5.
NOTE: The board is installed with the component side inward. The
holes in the board must be on the right side for both the top and the
bottom board. The solder side is marked UP and DOWN to assist in
orienting the board.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-1-6
J226
J224
SLOT H
UPPER
SLOT G
UPPER
Correctly installed terminators

must match this figure exactly
Must show 15 rows of pins here
1984--3270--0001
Must show 1 row of pins here
107
106
Figure 4.1.5. ControlFile Motherboard Terminator II Installation
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-1-7
ControlFile Terminator Boards

ControlFile Terminator Board (Top) (1984--1231--0001) is used in the
top position.
ControlFile Terminator Board (Bottom) (1984--1243--0001) goes in the
lower position. It is marked TERMINATOR CONTROLFILE BOTTOM
on the PWA.
NOTE: Install the board with the component side inward.
The pair of terminators must be installed as shown in Figure 4.1.6.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-1-8
J224
J226
SLOT H
SLOT G
UPPER
UPPER
Must show six rows

of pins here
Correctly installed terminators

must match this figure exactly
ControlFile Terminator
1984--1231--000x
ControlFile Terminator
1984--1243--000x
Must show 2 1/2 rows of

pins here
107
106
Figure 4.1.6. ControlFile Motherboard Terminator Board Installation
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-1
Section 2:

The ControlFile support section consists of:
D
PeerWay Buffer
5 VDC Only Power Regulator
5 VDC and 12 VDC Power Regulator
Coordinator Processor (CP)
Nonvolatile (NV) Memory
RAM Nonvolatile Memory
Bubble Nonvolatile Memory
Support Section
NONVOLITILE MEMORY
POWER REGULATOR
POWER REGULATOR
PEERWAY B
PEERWAY A
The ControlFile Card Cage is covered in section 1 of this chapter. The

Controller Processor cards are covered in section 3 of this chapter.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-2
PeerWay Buffer
PeerWay Buffer cards (1984--1502--000x and 1984--1402--000x)
communicate serial data and control signals between the Coordinator
Processor and the PeerWay tap for transmission on the PeerWay. Two
PeerWay Buffer cards are required for interface to the A and B
PeerWays and each can communicate its data with either of the two
Coordinator Processor cards. Figure 4.2.2 shows a functional diagram
for a PeerWay Buffer card.
+5 V
Voltage
Sense
+5 V
30 V (A)
Switching
Regulator
30 V (B)
+9 V Unregulated
Unreg Isolated
+5 V (ISO)
16MHz
OSC
T X Data
RX Data
To
Coordinator
Processor
Clock
RTS
Manchester
Encoder/
Decoder
Buffer
Local Loop Back
Coupler Status
Clear To Send
Isolated
Return
+5 V (ISO)
Optical Isolation
Return
TXD
RXD
To
PeerWay
Tap
RTS
LLB
CPLST
NoEnergy
Detect
Circuit
Figure 4.2.2. PeerWay Buffer Functional Diagram
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-3
Data is buffered through a single buffer chip for isolation. An onboard 16

MHz clock and clock divider generate the necessary timing signals for
data communication. A switching regulator provides +5 V with
overvoltage protection for the card and is checked by comparators for
voltage tolerance. The same transformer also generates isolated +9 V
for isolation circuitry necessary for the PeerWay interface devices and
tap card. A three-terminal +5 volt regulator supplies the proper isolated
voltage to the optical isolators and the RS-422 transmitters and
receivers.
Transmit (TX) data goes from the buffer chip to the Manchester
encoder/decoder. There, data is encoded with a 1 MHz clock signal,
optically isolated, and then transferred to the tap by an RS-422
transmitter. The local loop back (LLB) signal used to drive the tap relay
is transferred from the buffer to the tap through the optical isolators and
the RS-422 transmitter. The Ready To Send (RTS) signal is first
disabled by a power up reset flip-flop to ensure all circuitry is stable
before the card is enabled to transmit on the PeerWay.
Receive data is fed through an optical isolator to the Manchester
encoder/decoder where data is separated from the clock signal. An
internal phase locked loop synchronizes the cards internal clock with
the receive signal clock. Both the clock signal and the data are buffered
and sent to the Coordinator Processor card advanced data link
controller (ADLC). The Clear-To-Send (CTS) signal is asserted by a
counter to detect when data is present on the receive line. The CP line
status (CPLST) is received, isolated, and fed directly to the Coordinator
Processor card. CPLST provides several functions:
D
TAP
Watchdog time-out (RTS active for too long)
Cable disconnected
BUFFER
+5 VDC out of tolerance
Oscillator failed
Table 4.2.1 shows parts replacement data for the card.

Table 4.2.1. Parts Replacement for PeerWay Buffer
Part No.
Replaces
Characteristics
1984--1502--000x
1984--1402--000x
Marked PEERWAY BUFFER

on the PWA
1984--1402--000x
RS3: ControlFiles
No name marked on the PWA
SV: 4-2-4
PeerWay Buffer LEDs and Test Points

The PeerWay Buffer has LEDs to indicate card status. Figure 4.2.3
shows the LED indicators for the PeerWay Buffer.
The two test points are shown in Figure 4.2.3.
LEDS
Y
Y
RTS
(DS7)
Request-To-Send signal active; Enables

transmission on the PeerWay.
TXD
(DS6)
Transmitting to the PeerWay.
BUS ACTIVE
(DS5)
Card active: Data is being transmitted or

received through the Coordinator Processor.
+5 V FAULT
(DS4)
PeerWay buffer voltage comparators have sensed

that the main regulator is out of operating tolerance
(voltage is high or low).
FUSE BLOWN
(DS3)
Replace Fuse F1 (Supplies power to the PeerWay

Buffer Power Regulator).
Y
R
R
R
G
STATUS FAULT
(DS2)
STATUS GOOD
(DS1)
The status timer has timed out, indicating the RTS

Signal has been enabled too long and the jabber-halt
relay has opened. The RTS signal is forced OFF to
keep the node from interfering with the PeerWay. The
fault could be the status timer in the PeerWay Tap,
the RTS signal on the Coordinator Processor, the Tap
Board connection, or loss of the onboard clock, which
is a PeerWay Buffer or Coordinator Processor
problem.
The timer on the PeerWay Tap is in its normal
operating mode.
Test Points for +5 VDC
+5V
(Yellow)
5 VDC test point.
Return
(Brown)
5 VDC return.
Figure 4.2.3. PeerWay Buffer LEDs
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-5
PeerWay Buffer Jumpers

Figure 4.2.4 shows the jumper locations for PeerWay Buffer card
1984--1502--000x. Card 1984--1402--000x has no jumpers. Jumpers
should be moved only for a loop-back test. Table 4.2.2 shows the
jumper positions.
NOTE: The PeerWay node address of the ControlFile is set by jumpers
on the ControlFile motherboard.
HD2, HD3, HD4, HD5, HD8
HD6, HD7
F1
Figure 4.2.4. PeerWay Buffer 1984--1502--000x Fuse and Jumper Locations
Table 4.2.2. PeerWay Buffer 1984--1502--000x Jumper Positions
RS3: ControlFiles
Jumper
Signal
Normal
Loop Back Test
HD1
Not used
Not used
Not used
HD2
Receive Clock
2--3
1--2
HD3
Transmit Clock
2--3
1--2
HD4
Receive Data
2--3
1--2
HD5
Transmit Data
2--3
1--2
HD6
Ready to Send
2--3
1--2
HD7
BSL (Coupler Status)
2--3
1--2
HD8
Clear to Send
2--3
1--2
SV: 4-2-6
PeerWay Buffer Fuse

Figure 4.2.4 shows the PeerWay Buffer fuse location. Table 4.2.3 gives
fuse data.
Table 4.2.3. PeerWay Buffer Fuse
RS3: ControlFiles
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G09149--0022
AGC 1
312001
SV: 4-2-7
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator

The ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator (1984--3505--000x)
provides power to all cards in the ControlFile except the two PeerWay
Buffers. The card is marked CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR 5V
ONLY on the Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA).
The ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator is used only in
ControlFiles with RAM NV Memory (1984--2347--00xx). It does not
supply +12 VDC and --12 VDC required to support Bubble NV Memory
(1984--1598--000x, 1984--1483--000x, or 1984--1224--000x).
CAUTION
Disable the NV Memory and then the Coordinator
Processor cards before removing any card (other than a
PeerWay Buffer card) from the ControlFile. Failing to do so
may cause a corrupted data transfer.
A redundant Power Regulator is optional. If two Power Regulators are
used, the one in the left slot becomes the master and controls the
output of the one in the right slot (the slave). A ControlFile 5 VDC Only
Power Regulator may be paired with a 5 VDC and 12 VDC Power
Regulator in ControlFiles that use RAM NV Memory.
Table 4.2.4. ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Parts Replacement
Part No.
1984--3505--000x
Replaces
Characteristics
1984--1505--000x
Replaces these cards ONLY in

ControlFiles that use NVRAM
and MPC Processors.
1984--1432--000x
CAUTION
When inserting a Power Regulator card, push it partially in
and pause to allow the capacitors to charge. The LED will
blink once. Then seat the card firmly. Failure to allow the
capacitors to charge can result in burned edge connector
contacts.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-8
The ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator has one output:

D
+5 volts with over voltage and current protection.
Figure 4.2.5 is a functional diagram for the ControlFile 5 VDC Only

Power Regulator.
+5 V
Bus
Buffers
Voltage Sense Comparators

+12 V
--12 V
Input Voltage (B)
DC Input (A)
24 V or 30 V
Input Voltage (A)
DC Input (B)
24 V or 30 V
+5 V
Current
Sense
+15 V
Switching
Regulator
Master
Current
Over
Voltage
Sense
Slave Voltage Adjust Input
Slave Current Output
Slave Voltage Adjust Output
Slave Current Input
Figure 4.2.5. ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Functional Diagram
The 5 V output is used for all logic circuitry. The +5 volt power regulator
is a buck type regulator. The input voltage is turned on and off at a 25
KHz rate with a pulse width that varies with the input voltage. Four
parallel power field effect transistors (FET) are turned on by the
switching regulator as the output sense determines the need for added
current. To turn on the FETs, the gate voltage must be 10 volts above
the input voltage rail. A transformer and DC restoring circuit is used to
provide the required voltage. Power to the regulator is preregulated by a
zener transistor combination.
Load sharing is accomplished by the current sense from the regulator
being fed into an error amplifier. The output of the amplifier is then used
to raise or lower the output voltage of the slave card.
The +12 V and --12 V status lines are tied to ground in order to indicate
proper 12 VDC status to the Coordinator Processor.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-9
The 5 VDC voltage output and both buses are monitored through a
comparator for voltage tolerance. Each has a yellow LED to indicate
that the power is good. If the +5 volt regulator fails, a red LED lights. In
case of failure, all output lines are statused and buffered to the
Coordinator Processor through the motherboard bus to generate
alarms.
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points

The ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator has LEDs to indicate card
status. Figure 4.2.6 shows the LEDs and test points for the Power
Regulator. Test points are accessible from the top of the ControlFile.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-10
LEDs
+5 V POWER
CHARGE
(DS10)
R
Input capacitors are charging during card insertion with

card cage power on.
The proper procedure is to slowly insert the card into the
ControlFile Motherboard connector (the LED will blink on
briefly).
INPUT B STATUS
(DS9)
Bus B (24 VDC or 30 VDC) from the DC distribution

system is within operating tolerance.
Normally OFF if only one DC bus is used.
INPUT A STATUS
(DS8)
Bus A (24 VDC or 30 VDC) from the DC distribution

system is within operating tolerance.
+5 V STATUS
(DS5)
The +5 VDC regulator is within operating tolerance.
CARD FAULT
(DS4)
The +5 VDC regulator section is out of operating tolerance.

Replace the card.
5 V FUSE BLOWN
(DS2)
Replace Fuse F2 (Power to the +5 VDC Power Regulator).
CARD GOOD
(DS1)
+5 VDC Supply is within operating tolerance.

Does not include status of the DC buses.
Y
Y
Test Points
BROWN
Ground return
YELLOW
+5 VDC Regulator
WHITE
+5 V Relative current indication
Figure 4.2.6. ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-11
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumpers

The ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator may be jumpered for
30 VDC or 24 VDC input. It should be jumpered for 30 volt DC input
unless it is necessary to use 24 VDC input to allow a +24 volt
uninterruptible power supply source to tie in with a ControlFile.
Figure 4.2.7 shows the jumper locations for the ControlFile 5 VDC Only
Power Regulator. Table 4.2.5 shows the jumper positions.
F2
HD1
Figure 4.2.7. ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumper and Fuse Locations
Table 4.2.5. ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumper Positions
Jumper HD1
Position 1--2
30 V Input
24 V Input
RS3: ControlFiles
Position 2--3
ON
ON
SV: 4-2-12
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse

Figure 4.2.7 shows location of the ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power
Regulator fuse. Table 4.2.6 gives the fuse value and part number.
Table 4.2.6. ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse
RS3: ControlFiles
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F2
G09140--0061
ABC 20
314020
20 A 250 V Regular
SV: 4-2-13
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC

The ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC (1984--1505--000x
and 1984--1432--000x) provides power to all cards in the ControlFile
except the two PeerWay Buffer cards. The cards are marked
CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR on the PWA.
A redundant Power Regulator is optional. If two Power Regulators are
used, the one in the left slot becomes the master and controls the
output of the one in the right slot (the slave).
The ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC may be used in
ControlFiles with either RAM NV Memory or Bubble NV Memory. The
card may replace a 5 VDC Only Power Regulator in a ControlFile that
has only RAM NV Memory. It may be used as a redundant card in either
slot of a RAM NV Memory only ControlFile. Table 4.2.7 shows parts
replacement data.
Table 4.2.7. ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Parts
Replacement
Part No.
1984--1505--000x
Replaces
Characteristics
1984--1432--000x
1984--3505--000x
30 VDC or 24 VDC input selectable by

jumper.
3 or 6 amp 12 VDC output selectable by
jumper.
ONLY in a ControlFile with NVRAM.
CAUTION
PeerWay Buffer card) from the ControlFile. Failure to do so
may result in a corrupted data transfer.
The ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC has three outputs:
D
+5 volts at 42 amps with over voltage and current protection.
+12 volts at 3 or 6 amps with over voltage and current protection.
--12 volts at 3 or 6 amps. Voltage regulation follows the +12 volt

supply.
CAUTION
When inserting a Power Regulator card, push it in part way

and pause to allow the capacitors to charge. The LED will
blink once. Then seat the card firmly. Failure to allow the
capacitors to charge can result in burned edge connector
contacts.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-14
Figure 4.2.8 is the functional diagram for the ControlFile Power

Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC.
The 5 V output is used for all logic circuitry and the +12 volt and --12 volt
outputs are used for the analog circuits on the Single-Strategy and
MultiLoop Controller Processor cards. The +12 volt output is also used
for the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory.
The +5 volt power regulator is a buck type regulator. The input voltage
is turned on and off at a 25 kHz rate with a pulse width that varies with
the input voltage. Four parallel power field effect transistors (FETs) are
turned on by the switching regulator as the output sense determines the
need for added current. To turn on the FETs, the gate voltage must be
10 volts above the input voltage rail. A transformer and DC restoring
circuit is used to provide the required voltage. Power to the regulator is
preregulated by a zener-transistor combination.
Load sharing is accomplished by feeding the current sense from both
regulators into an error amplifier. The output of the amplifier is then
used to raise or lower the output voltage of the slave card.
The +12 and --12 volt supplies are derived from the same transformer
through a combination push-pull and flyback switching supply. The
primary of the transformer has a pair of switching FETs on each leg that
are driven 180 degrees out of phase. A voltage regulator produces an
alternating current in the primary at 40 kHz. The regulator has power
supplied through a pre-regulator circuit. The secondary of the
transformer has a grounded center tap and a set of rectifiers to produce
the +12 volt and --12 volt outputs. The output of the +12 volt is sensed
and the input pulse width to the transformer is varied to control the
output voltage. The card may be jumpered to provide either 3 amps or 6
amps at 12 volts.
The current outputs of the +12 volt and --12 volt supplies are combined
through an error amplifier and this output is compared to the current
output of the supplies on the slave card. The voltage of the slave card is
then adjusted to ensure that both Power Regulator cards share the load
in the card cage.
All voltage outputs and both buses are monitored through a comparator
for voltage tolerance. Each has a yellow LED to indicate that the power
is good. If the +5 volt, +12 volt, or --12 volt regulator fails, a red LED
lights. In case of failure, all output lines are statused and buffered to the
Coordinator Processor card through the motherboard bus to generate
alarms.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-15
+5 V
Bus
Buffers
Voltage Sense Comparators

+12 V
--12 V
Input Voltage (B)
DC Input (A)
Input Voltage (A)
24 or 30 V
DC Input (B)
+5 V
24 or 30 V
Current
Sense
+15 V
Switching
Regulator
Master
Current
Over
Voltage
Sense
Slave Current Output
Slave Voltage Adjust Output
Slave Current Input
+12 V Output
+15 V
+12 V
Current
Sense
--12 V
Current
Sense
Over
Voltage
Sense
Slave Voltage
Adjust Input
Slave Current
Output
Slave Voltage
Adjust Output
Slave Current
Output
--12 V Output
Switching
Regulator
Voltage Sense
Slave Voltage
Adjust Input
Figure 4.2.8. ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Functional Diagram
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-16
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test Points
The ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC has LEDs to
indicate card status. Figure 4.2.9 shows the LEDs and test points. Test
points are accessible from the top of the ControlFile.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-17
LEDs
+12 V POWER
CHARGE
(DS11)
R
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
R
R
R
G
+ 5 V POWER
CHARGE (DS10)
Input capacitors are charging during card insertion with

card cage power on. The proper procedure is to slowly
insert the card into the ControlFile Motherboard connector
(+12 AND +5 V Power Charge LEDs will blink on briefly).
Same as + 12 V Power Charge above.
INPUT B STATUS
(DS9)
Bus B (24 VDC or 30 VDC) from the DC distribution

system is within operating tolerance. Normally OFF if only
one DC bus is used.
INPUT A STATUS
(DS8)
Bus A (24 VDC or 30 VDC) from the DC distribution system

is within operating tolerance.
--12 V STATUS
(DS7)
The --12 VDC regulator is within operating tolerance. If

HD2 is jumpered, DS7 is forced ON and --12 VDC is
disabled.
+12 V STATUS
(DS6)
+5 V STATUS
(DS5)
CARD FAULT (DS4)
One of the regulator sections (+5, +12, --12 VDC) is out

of operating tolerance. Replace the card.
12 V FUSE BLOWN
(DS3)
Replace Fuse F1 ( 12 VDC supply sections of the Power

Regulator).
5 V FUSE BLOWN
(DS2)
Replace Fuse F2 (Power to the +5 VDC Power Regulator).
CARD GOOD
(DS1)
+5, +12, and --12 VDC Supplies are within operating

tolerance. Does not include status of the DC buses.
BROWN
Test Points
Ground return
BLUE
--12 VDC Regulator
YELLOW
+5 VDC Regulator
RED
+12 VDC Regulator
WHITE
GREEN
Figure 4.2.9. ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test Points
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-18
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Jumpers

Model 1984--1505--000x can be jumpered for 30 volt or 24 volt DC
input. This Power Regulator card should be jumpered for the 30 volt DC
input unless it is necessary to use the 24 volt DC input to allow a +24
volt uninterruptible power supply source to tie in with a ControlFile.
The card can be jumpered to supply either 3 or 6 amps at 12 volts.
Supplying 6 amps may put the --12 volt supply out of spec.
Figure 4.2.10 shows the jumper locations for the 1984--1505--000x
Power Regulator card. Table 4.2.8 shows the jumper positions. Jumpers
HD2 and HD3 use a bar that connects all pins. The bar should be on
HD2 for 6 amp output and on HD3 for 3 amp output.
F2
HD5
HD1
HD2
HD3
F1
HD4
Figure 4.2.10. ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC 1984--1505--000x Jumper and Fuse
Locations
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-19
Table 4.2.8. ControlFile Power Regulator 1984--1505--000x Jumper

Positions
Jumper
30 V Input
24 V Input
HD1
2--3
1--2
3 Amp Output 6 Amp Output
HD2
Open
Bar
HD3
Bar
Open
HD4
1--2
2--3
HD5
1--2
2--3
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses

Figure 4.2.10 shows the 5 VDC and 12 VDC ControlFile Power
Regulator fuse locations. Table 4.2.9 gives the fuse values and part
numbers.
Table 4.2.9. ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses
RS3: ControlFiles
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
(12 VDC)
G09140--0044
AGC 7--1/2
31107.5
7.5 A 32 V Regular
F2
(5 VDC)
G09140--0061
ABC 20
314020
20 A 250 V Regular
SV: 4-2-20
Coordinator Processor (CP)

The Coordinator Processor (CP) governs communications between
Controller Processor cards and between the ControlFile and the
PeerWay. The Coordinator Processor updates the nonvolatile memory
database with current operating data and manages the downloading of
program and operating data from nonvolatile memory to individual
Controller Processors. When redundant Controller Processors are used,
the Coordinator Processor determines which of the two is active and
executes the actual exchange of control from one to another. The
Coordinator Processor monitors status bits, PeerWay protocol, and
communication with the (optional) redundant Coordinator Processor.
The Coordinator Processor is responsible for:
D
Backing up Controller Processors
Loading Controller Processors
Controlling nonvolatile memory
Communications on the PeerWay
Communications between Controller Processors in the

ControlFile
Maintaining Links
Running Batch
Coordinator Processor models are shown in Table 4.2.10.

Table 4.2.10. Coordinator Processors
Model
Part Number
Name
PWA Legend
Comment
CP5
10P57360007
Coordinator Processor 5
COORDINATOR
PROCESSOR 5
EMC compliant
CP-IV+
10P5087000x
Coordinator Processor IV+
COORDINATOR
PROCESSOR IV+
EMC compliant
CP-IV+
1984--4164--000x
Coordinator Processor IV+
COORDINATOR
PROCESSOR IV+
CP-IV
1984--4064--000x
Coordinator Processor IV
COORDINATOR
PROCESSOR IV
CP-II
1984--1594--000x
Coordinator Processor II
COORDINATOR
PROCESSOR II
CP-I
1984--1448--000x
1984--1240--000x
Coordinator Processor I
COORDINATOR
PROCESSOR
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-21
WARNING
Table 4.2.11. Coordinator Processor Parts Replacement
Name
Part No.
CP5
10P57360007
CP-IV+
CP-IV+
10P50870004
Replaces
NOTE: For use with MPCII, MPC5, or a
combination of MPCII and MPC5
1984--4164--000x
1984--4064--000x
NOTE: For use with MPCI, MPCII, MPC5,
or a combination of MPCI and MPCII
10P50870004 (except where EMC
compliance is required)
1984--4064--000x
1984--4164--000x
NOTE: For use with MPCI, MPCII, MPC5,

or a combination of MPCI and MPCII
1984--4164--000x
NOTE: For use with MPC II only
Characteristics
EMC compliant
EMC compliant
64 MHz oscillator; 4 Meg RAM;


CP-IV
1984--4064--000x
CP-II
1984--1594--000x
1984--1448--000x
1984--1240--000x
48 MHz oscillator; 512K RAM
CP-I
1984--1448--000x
1984--1240--000x
40 MHz Oscillator; 128K RAM
CP-I
1984--1240--000x
40 MHz Oscillator; 128K RAM
CP5 Circuit Description

The versions of the CP5 perform all the functions of the CP-IV and CP-II
but have increased processor speed. A MC68EC040 microprocessor is
used. CP5 will work with MPC5 or MPC II processors.
Figure 4.2.12 shows the functional diagram of a CP5 Coordinator
Processor.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-22
A
PeerWay
Buffers
ADLC
To PeerWay
Buffer Board
B
PTM1
(S/W)
Support
Circuits
128 kB
EPROM
PTM2
(PeerWay)
Synch
ARB
DMA
32 kB
SRAM
Synch
Bus
Address Bus
68EC040
Micro
Processor
ControlFile
Motherboard
Bus
Buffers
Data Bus
Control Bus
4 Mbyte
SRAM
DUART
512 kB
Fast SRAM
ADLC = Advanced Data Link Controller

ARB = Arbitration
DMA = Direct Memory Access
DUART = Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
EPROM = Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
SRAM = Static Random Access memory
S/W = Software
Synch = Synchronous
Figure 4.2.11. Coordinator Processor 5 (CP5) Block Diagram
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-23
The MC68EC040 microprocessor has a 32-bit architecture and a

48 MHz clock rate. The microprocessor support circuits provide a
watchdog timer, clock generation circuitry, and an interrupt encoder. The
microprocessor can interface with devices from 8 bits to 32 bits wide. It
has an internal 4 kB instruction and data caches that speed up tight
loops. The clock generation circuits provide 48, 24, and 2 MHz clocks
for timing.
The 128 kB erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM)
provides the microprocessor boot program, power-up diagnostics,
PeerWay boot program, and a debugger.
The 512 kB zero wait state fast static random access memory (SRAM)
is organized into 32-bit words to hold programs, such as interrupt
routines, that must run as fast as possible.
Four megabytes of static random access memory provides one
megabyte of 32-bit working storage for the microprocessor.
The synchronous bus provides a compatible interface between the
microprocessor and the PeerWay for standard PeerWay
communications. It also serves to interface the programmable timers
(PTM), DMA controller, advanced data link controller (ADLC), and
SRAM. Bus A arbitration circuit (ARB) controls access to the
synchronous bus by either the DMA or the MC68EC040
microprocessor.
Buffers provide an interface with the standard ControlFile motherboard
bus. This allows communications between the MC68EC040 processor
on the CP5 and the processors that are on other cards in the
ControlFile. There is also a 16-bit data path for communication between
two redundant CP boards. This interface is identical to that used on
CP-I, CP-II, and CP-IV.
CP-IV Circuit Description

The versions of the CP-IV perform all the functions of the CP-II but have
increased memory and processor speed. A MC68020 microprocessor is
used. CP-IV+ will work with MPC I processors, MPC5 processors, or
MPC II processors. CP-IV works only with MPC II processors.
Figure 4.2.12 shows the functional diagram of a CP-IV Coordinator
Processor.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-24
A
PeerWay
Buffers
ADLC
To PeerWay
Buffer Board
B
PTM1
(S/W)
Support
Circuits
128 kB
EPROM
PTM2
(PeerWay)
Synch
ARB
DMA
32 kB
SRAM
Synch
Bus
Address Bus
68020
Micro
Processor
ControlFile
Motherboard
Bus
Buffers
Data Bus
Control Bus
RAMCON
ASIC
4 Mbyte
DRAM
Buffers
DUART
128 kB
Fast SRAM
32-Bit
EDAC
ARB = Arbitration
ASIC = Application Specific Integrated Circuit
DMA = Direct Memory Access
DRAM -- Dynamic Random Access Memory
DUART = Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
EDAC = Error Detection and Correction
EPROM = Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
SRAM = Static Random Access memory
S/W = Software
Synch = Synchronous
Figure 4.2.12. Coordinator Processor IV (CP-IV) Block Diagram
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-25
The MC68020 microprocessor has a 32-bit architecture and a 16 MHz

clock rate. The microprocessor support circuits provide a watchdog
timer, clock generation circuitry, and an interrupt encoder. The
microprocessor can interface with devices from 8 bits to 32 bits wide. It
has an internal 256 byte instruction cache that speeds up tight loops.
The clock generation circuits provide 32, 16, 8, 4, and 2 MHz clocks for
timing. The 8 MHz clock is used for the PeerWay interface.
The 128 kB erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM)
provides the microprocessor boot program, power-up diagnostics,
PeerWay boot program, and a debugger.
The 128 kB zero wait state fast static random access memory (SRAM)
is organized into 32-bit words to hold programs, such as interrupt
routines, that must run as fast as possible.
Four megabytes of dynamic random access memory (DRAM) provides
one megabyte of 32-bit working storage for the microprocessor.
Thirty-nine bits are used, thirty-two for data and seven for the EDAC
check bits. The Error Detection And Correction (EDAC) scheme
corrects single bit errors and detects multiple bit errors. The RAMCON
ASIC provides for all of the timing requirements of the dynamic RAM
chips and the EDAC circuitry.
The synchronous bus provides a compatible interface between the
microprocessor and the PeerWay for standard PeerWay
communications. It also serves to interface the programmable timers
(PTM), DMA controller, advanced data link controller (ADLC), and
SRAM. Bus A arbitration circuit (ARB) controls access to the
synchronous bus by either the DMA or the MC68020 microprocessor.
Buffers provide an interface with the standard ControlFile motherboard
bus. This allows communications between the MC68020 processor on
the CP-IV and the processors that are on other cards in the ControlFile.
There is also a 16-bit data path for communication between two
redundant CP boards. This interface is identical to that used on CP-I
and CP-II.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-26
CP-I and CP-II Circuit Description

Figure 4.2.13 shows the functional diagram of a CP-I and CP-II
Coordinator Processor. An on-card oscillator generates all timing
required for card functions. The oscillator runs at either 40 MHz or 48
MHz, depending on the model used, and is divided down to various
clock outputs distributed throughout the card.
The processor is a 68000 series (16-bit) microprocessor. Interrupts are
prioritized according to importance so the tasks are handled in a
reasonable order. A watchdog timer requires periodic resetting by the
healthy processor or it will reset the micro. Buffering is provided on the
card to the ControlFile motherboard for either the left or right
motherboard bus, depending on which slot is selected.
An on-card bootstrap EPROM is provided that consists of two EPROMs
arranged in 16-bit words. EPROMs store power-up diagnostics and the
boot program required to download the operating program from
nonvolatile memory to RAM or from the PeerWay by a PeerWay Boot
procedure.
NOTE: The PeerWay Boot procedure may not be supported by all
combinations of hardware and software.
The CP-I and CP-II Coordinator Processor contains dynamic RAM
memory and error detection and correction (EDAC) control circuitry. The
dynamic memory controller performs the required address multiplexing
for the RAM chips and handles the refresh cycle. The dynamic RAM
chips have separate pins for the read and write functions. A separate
read/write select provides the separation and data bus buffering. The
EDAC controller decodes the check bits that are stored along with the
data bits. There are 16 data bits and six check bits. If any single bit is
not as indicated by the EDAC check bits, the EDAC controller will
automatically correct for the error and rewrite the data into the RAM
location correctly. An alarm message is annunciated at the console to
indicate a weak RAM bit.
If multiple bit errors are found, the EDAC triggers a bus error also
annunciated at the console. Each dynamic RAM (2600) chip is arranged
in a 64K x 1 bit pattern. A word in memory is 16 bits (8 bits to a byte, 2
bytes to a word) and 128K bytes are mapped to a 64K x (16 + 6) bits
EDAC.
The positions of the node address jumpers are read into a buffer that
stores the addresses. A second set of jumpers is configured identically
for redundancy.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-27
Cage
Alarm
Contacts
Cage
Alarm
Watch
Dog
Timer
Left
Motherboard
Bus Buffer
Bootstrap
ROM 8K
Asynch Bus 16-Bit Data Bus
LED
Latch
Reset
68000
Micro
Processor
ASYNC
Bus
Buffers
Right
Motherboard
Bus Buffer
Error
Detection
Correction
Control
Dynamic
Refresh
and Control
RAM
+ 6 Bits EDC
128K
or
512K
Board
Enable/Disable
OSC DIV
40MHz
or
48MHz
To Bus A
or B (Slot
Selective)
Buffer
Buffer
Motherboard
Address
Jumpers
1 MHz Reference
SYNC
Bus
Buffer
SYNC
Arbitration
Write
Latch
To
Redundant
CP Board
Read
Buffer
From
Redundant
CP Board
SYNC Bus (8 Data Bits)
2K x 8
(2)
PTM
DMAC
ADLC

ASYNC = Asynchronous
DMAC = Direct Memory Access Controller
LED = Light Emitting Diode
OSC = Oscillation
PTM = Programmable Timer Module
RAM = Random Access Memory
ROM = Read Only Memory
SEL = Select
SYNC = Synchronous
A
Buffer
To PeerWay Buffer A
B
Buffer
To PeerWay Buffer B
SEL
Figure 4.2.13. CP-I and CP-II Coordinator Processor Functional Diagram
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-28
The 68000 series microprocessor is an asynchronous device, operating

on a 10 or 12MHz clock. The peripheral chips used on the Coordinator
Processor, including the PTM, DMAC, and ADLC are synchronous
devices, operating at a maximum of 2 MHz. These synchronous devices
interface to the asynchronous bus through a separate internal
synchronous bus. The synchronous bus is 8 bits wide, and interfaces to
the processors lower 8 bits for the PeerWay buffer. Address and
bidirectional data bus buffers transfer information to be communicated
on the PeerWay into special buffer RAM. This RAM size is 4K x 8. Data
is then transferred through the direct memory access controller (DMAC)
to the advanced data link controller (ADLC) where the information is
transformed to NRZ serial data. Data is then transferred to either the A
or B PeerWay Buffer. The programmable timer modules (PTMs) are
used for the bus access scheme that performs time-out functions. This
allows other devices to access the bus at given times.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-29
CP (Coordinator Processor) Redundancy

Coordinator Processors (CP) are made redundant simply by adding a
second unit. The CPs must be of the same type.
One CP will become the primary processor; the other will be the
secondary. Many events can cause a switch in roles between the
primary and secondary CP. When a switch occurs, the secondary CP
becomes primary and the primary becomes the secondary CP.
The primary CP will allow the secondary CP access to the controllers
once every minute to allow it to talk to all controllers.
If the error statistics on the primary CP are worse than the secondary,
the secondary CP will switch to the primary and an appropriate alarm
will be generated.
All errors and conditions that cause a CP switchover are prioritized. If
both CPs have active error conditions, the one with the lowest priority
error will act as primary. For instance, if the primary CP develops a
weak RAM chip, the secondary will switch in as primary. If the new
primary then develops a higher priority error, the CP with the weak RAM
chip will take over again.
Each CP has its own dedicated data bus to communicate with power
supplies, nonvolatile memory, and all controllers. All cards, other than
the CP and the PeerWay Buffers, have two sets of buffers for addresses
and data. Thus, should an open or short happen on any card, the
redundant CP can still operate unaffected.
Although the two Coordinator Processor boards operate on different
buses, they must still communicate with each other. A dedicated
communications bus is provided to allow redundant Coordinator
Processors to communicate directly with each other. Each Coordinator
Processor has dedicated 16-bit wide read and write buffers that are
used to transfer data between Coordinator Processors. The redundant
Coordinator Processors also use the static RAM area in the NV Memory
to exchange information.
Messages from the primary CP are deposited in the nonvolatile
memory. Then, while the primary CP is communicating with the
controllers, the secondary CP accesses the nonvolatile memory, reads
the message, and leaves its message for the primary CP.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-30
The conditions that cause a CP switch are:

D
D
D
The operator performs a manual switch from the ControlFile

Status screen.
The primary CP no longer communicates with the backup CP.
The primary CP communicates with the backup CP but has a
higher priority error condition than the backup CP. CP error
conditions, listed in decreasing priority, are:
Backplane data integrity error
PeerWay health
Primary CP cannot see all controllers
ROM checksum error
RAM EDAC error
Error in the watchdog timer circuit
To prevent endless switching between CPs, no more than two

nonmanual CP switches are allowed in a 5.5 minute period.
The PeerWay Node screen will display the PeerWay statistics and
errors for the primary CP. Pressing the [EXCHG] key will display the
statistics and errors of the Redundant CP.
A CP can be disabled by use of the Enable/Disable Switch.
In order to troubleshoot, you may need to remove the cards from the
ControlFile one at a time or move the other CP to the suspected faulty
slot.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-31
CP LEDs, Test Points, and Enable/Disable Switch

The Coordinator Processor has LEDs to indicate card status.
Figure 4.2.14 shows the CP LEDs and test points.
The Enable/Disable Switch turns the CP on and off. The Enable/Disable
Switch can be used as follows during operation:
D
If a primary CP (with redundant backup) is disabled, the primary

CP goes out of service. The backup CP assumes control. If the
Nonvolatile Memory is not present and enabled, some
information will be lost when the primary CP goes out of service.
Loss of information is critical with enhanced CP images such as
$$CPBATxx or $$CPMAXxx.
If a primary CP (with no backup) is disabled, all communications
between CPs in the ControlFile and between the ControlFile and
the PeerWay will halt. Processing will resume when the switch is
enabled, but only after the CP passes power-up diagnostic tests
and data is downloaded from the Nonvolatile Memory.
If a redundant backup CP is disabled, the backup ceases to
perform background tests and tells the primary CP that it is out of
service. It can return to backup status after it passes power-up
diagnostic tests and after data is downloaded from the
Nonvolatile Memory.
NOTE: If the CP switch is disabled and then quickly enabled, the CP

may refuse to boot up. Wait for the red LED to come on before throwing
the switch again.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-32
LEDs
TIC
(DS10)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
CONT
(DS9)
Flashes at the beginning of a new time interval counter

period (one tic is 1/4 second). The system operates on
a 1/4 second data transfer rate for all PeerWay nodes
(electrical drops).
The Coordinator Processor is communicating with a
Controller via the Motherboard. With redundant
Coordinator Processors, this LED indicates which
one is active.
BUS A
(DS8)
The Coordinator Processor is using PeerWay A to

transmit or receive data.
BUS B
(DS7)
The Coordinator Processor is using PeerWay B to

transmit or receive data.
RTS PEERWAY
(DS6)
The Ready-To-Send signal is active and data

should be transmitting on one of the two PeerWays.
5 V FUSE BLOWN
(DS3)
Replace Fuse F1 (supplies 5 VDC to the Coordinator

Processor).
CARD FAULT
(DS2)
A fault has been detected on the Coordinator

Processor, or the Enable/Disable Switch is in the
DISABLE position. If the switch is ENABLED and this
LED is on, replace the Coordinator Processor.
R
R
G
ENABLE
DISABLE
CARD ENABLE
(DS1)
The Enable/Disable Switch is ENABLED and no

hardware faults are detected on the Coordinator
Processor.
Enable/Disable Switch
Test Points
Yellow
5 V ( 0.1 V)
Brown
Ground Return
Figure 4.2.14. Coordinator Processor LEDs and Test Points
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-33
CP LED Sequences
Normal operation of the CP card is signified by the green LED being ON
and the yellow LEDs flashing.
The red LED will be ON when the Enable/Disable switch is in the
Disable position or if a fault has been detected.
The Coordinator Processor Power Up Sequence begins when the
Enable/Disable switch is placed in the ENABLE position. For a
successful power up test the red LED comes ON, the yellow LEDs
cycle, the red LED goes OFF, and the green LED comes ON.
A power up fault is indicated by the green LED lighting briefly, followed
by the red LED turning ON. The yellow LEDs will cycle, stop briefly, and
cycle again. The top four yellow LEDs are counting in hex from 1 to 15.
The fault condition can be found by comparing the yellow LED pattern
at the pause with those shown in Table 4.2.12 and Table 4.2.13.
When the Coordinator Processor passes the power up diagnostics, it
then requests a program load from the Nonvolatile Memory. If it cannot
access the nonvolatile memory, all of the yellow LEDs will flash
simultaneously approximately once per second. This indicates that the
Coordinator Processor is waiting for a disk PeerWay boot. Check to see
that the Nonvolatile Memory is enabled and properly seated.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-34
Table 4.2.12. CP Fault Indications: Green LED OFF, Red LED ON
Yellow LED
Conditions
RS3: ControlFiles
Fault Condition
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
1. CPU Test fault
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
2. Boot ROM Checksum fault
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
3. Vector Test fault
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4. Watchdog Timer fault
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
5. Nondestructive RAM
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
6. Destructive RAM Test or EDAC fault
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
7. Synch Bus Test Level 1 & 2 and checks on

interrupts
SV: 4-2-35
Table 4.2.13. CP Fault Indications: Green LED ON Then OFF, Red LED ON
RS3: ControlFiles
Yellow LED
Conditions
Fault Condition
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1. Nonvolatile Memory write test failed before the

PeerWay boot procedure was performed. The
Nonvolatile Memory card should be replaced.
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
2. No Nonvolatile Memory card is present or the

Nonvolatile Memory card switch is in the
DISABLE position.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
3. Checksum invalid after load. If the problem

persists, a nonvolatile memory reload from disk
may be necessary.
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
4. Uncorrectable error detected in CP card

communications. The CP card should be
replaced.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
5. Nonvolatile memory initialize failed. Nonvolatile

Memory card problem. See Chapter 10,
Troubleshooting.
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
6. Nonvolatile memory table checksum bad.

Nonvolatile Memory card problem. See Chapter
10, Troubleshooting.
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
7. No program image stored in the nonvolatile

memory. See Chapter 10, Troubleshooting.
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
8. Nonvolatile Memory card hardware error on

read. If the Nonvolatile Memory card was
enabled, the card should be replaced.
SV: 4-2-36
CP Jumpers
The Coordinator Processor variations are:
D
CP5
CP-IV+
CP-IV
CP-II
CP-I
CP5 (10P57360007)
CP5 may be used with MPC II and MPC5 Controller Processors. It does
not have any jumpers.
CP-IV+ (10P50870004 and 1984-- 4164-- 0004)
CP-IV+ may be used with MPC I, MPC II, MPC5, CC, MLC, MUX, SSC,
and PLC Controller Processors. It has one moveable jumper.
Table 4.2.14 shows the jumper positions for CP-IV+.
Table 4.2.14. CP-IV+ Jumper Positions
RS3: ControlFiles
Jumper
Position
Function
HD3 to
HD6
1--2
HD7
MPC II or
MPC5
(1--2)
Working with MPC II or MPC5 Controller Processors

only (Factory Setting)
OTHER
(2--3)
Working with a mix of MPC I, CC, MLC, MUX, SSC,

and PLC Controller Processors.
Factory set -- do not move
SV: 4-2-37
Figure 4.2.15 shows fuse and jumper locations.
TP1, 2
HD 7
F1
Figure 4.2.15. CP-IV and CP-IV+ Fuse and Jumper Locations
CP-IV (1984-- 4064-- 000x)

CP-IV may be used only with MPC II Controller Processors. It has no
field adjustable jumpers.
Figure 4.2.15 shows fuse and jumper locations. Table 4.2.15 shows the
jumper positions for CP-IV. HD1, HD2, and HD8 are hardwired. HD3
through HD6 are factory set to 1--2 and should not be moved.
Table 4.2.15. CP-IV Jumper Positions
RS3: ControlFiles
Jumper
Position
HD3 to
HD6
1--2
Function
Factory set -- do not move
SV: 4-2-38
CP-II (1984--1594-- 000x)

CP-II has Jumpers HD8 and HD16, which are adjustable for the basic
$$CPxxxx operating program being loaded. The remainder of the
jumpers are factory set and should not be moved. Figure 4.2.16 shows
the jumper positions for CP-II. Table 4.2.16 shows the software jumper
positions. Set the other jumpers as shown in Table 4.2.17.
HD10 --15
HD2
TP1, 2
HD16
HD7
HD8
F1
HD5
Figure 4.2.16. CP-II Fuse and Jumper Locations

Table 4.2.16. CP-II Software Jumper Positions
Software
Jumper HD8
Jumper HD16
$$CPBATxx
2--3
2--3
$$CPxx V9
1--2
1--2
$$CPMAXXxx V9 and above

$$CPxx V11 and above
2--3
1--2
Table 4.2.17. CP-II Factory Set Jumpers
RS3: ControlFiles
Jumper
Position
HD2
2--3
HD5
1--2
HD7
1--2
HD10 through HD15
Open
SV: 4-2-39
CP-I (1984-- 1448-- 0001 or 1984-- 1240-- 0001)

CP-I has no field adjustable jumpers. The jumpers are factory set and
should not be moved. Jumpers HD2 and HD5 are set to 2--3. Jumper
HD7 is set to 1--2. Figure 4.2.17 shows fuse and jumper locations.
Table 4.2.18 shows the jumper positions.
HD2
TP1, 2
HD7
F1
HD5
Figure 4.2.17. CP-I Fuse and Jumper Locations

Table 4.2.18. CP-I Factory Set Jumpers
RS3: ControlFiles
Jumper
Position
HD2
2--3
HD5
2--3
HD7
1--2
SV: 4-2-40
CP Fuses
Figure 4.2.17 shows the fuse location. Table 4.2.19 gives fuse values
for the Coordinator Processors.
Table 4.2.19. CP Fuses
Card
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
CP5
10P57360007
F1
G09140--0037
AGC 4
311004
4 A 32 V
Regular
CP-IV+
10P50870004
1984--4164--0004
F1
G09140--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250 V
Regular
CP-IV
1984--4064--0004
F1
G09140--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250 V
Regular
CP-II
1984--1594--0001
F1
G09140--0039
AGC 5
311005
5 A 32 V
Regular
CP-I
1984--1448--0001
F1
G09140--0037
AGC 4
311004
4 A 32 V
Regular
CP-I
1984--1240--0001
F1
G09140--0037
AGC 4
311004
4 A 32 V
Regular
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-41
NV (Nonvolatile) Memory
The Nonvolatile Memory is available in two forms:
Table 4.2.20. Nonvolatile Memory Cards
Type
Name
Part No.
RAM
RAM Nonvolatile Memory
1984--2347--00xx
NV MEMORY
1984--1598--0001
NV BUBBLE MEMORY
1984--1483--0001
NV BUBBLE MEMORY
1984--1224--000x
NV BUBBLE MEMORY
Bubble
Bubble Nonvolatile Memory
PWA Legend
The two forms differ in speed, available memory size, and in the
mechanism used to provide the nonvolatile memory. The RAM
Nonvolatile Memory card uses battery-backed SRAM whereas the
Bubble Nonvolatile Memory card uses Magnetic Bubble Memory (MBM)
modules.
The Nonvolatile Memory card is responsible for:
D
Storing the CP operating program.
Storing operating programs for each Controller.
Providing backup storage for the Plant Configuration.

CAUTION

The Nonvolatile Memory is an extension of the memory on the
Coordinator Processor. Nonvolatile memory is capable of storing data
without power being applied, yet can be readily changed when power is
applied. It stores the operating program and configuration data for the
Coordinator Processor(s). There is also space for the configuration data
of nine Controller Processors. This space consists of configurations for
up to eight Controller Processors and one extra working file so that the
last file is not deleted until a new one is completed. The data can be
downloaded through the PeerWay from a disk or the card may be
shipped with configuration data already loaded. A memory map for all
data is stored in the nonvolatile memory header table in the nonvolatile
memory.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-42
Once the Coordinator Processor is through its startup diagnostics, it

uses its boot ROM to download (read) the operating program from the
Nonvolatile Memory. The Coordinator Processor then accesses the
RAM on each Controller Processor in turn and downloads (writes) the
operating and configuration program to each.
Periodically the Coordinator Processor takes a snapshot of the
configuration and dynamic data in each Controller Processor and
transfers it to nonvolatile memory. As a result, if a power loss occurs,
the Controller Processor can be restarted with accurate data. The
Nonvolatile Memory has dual port buffers so it can be controlled by
either Coordinator Processor card (if redundant Coordinator Processor
cards are used).
The card cage has two slots for nonvolatile memory cards. These are
not intended for redundancy but are useful during troubleshooting and
recovery from a Nonvolatile Memory or Bubble Memory fault.
There are several versions of the Nonvolatile Memory card.
Table 4.2.21 covers parts replacement data.
NOTE: Only RAM NV Memory cards may be used in a ControlFile that
uses the 5 V Only Power Regulator.
Table 4.2.21. Nonvolatile Memory Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
Memory
Board Marked
1984--2347--0041
----
4 Megabyte
RAM
NV MEMORY
1984--2347--0021
Any card below
2 Megabyte
RAM
NV MEMORY
1984--2347--0011
Any card below
1 Megabyte
RAM
NV MEMORY
1984--1598--0001
Any card below
1 Megabyte
Bubble
NV BUBBLE MEMORY
1984--1483--000x
1984--1224--000x
1/2 Megabyte
Bubble
NV BUBBLE MEMORY
1984--1224--000x
----
1/2 Megabyte
Bubble
NV BUBBLE MEMORY
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-43
RAM NV Memory
The RAM Nonvolatile memory uses a 16 MHz MC68000
microprocessor. All functions of the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory are
duplicated by the microprocessor, which makes the RAM card a fully
qualified replacement for the bubble card. The RAM card reads and
writes at approximately twice the speed of the bubble card.
Figure 4.2.18 shows a functional diagram of the RAM Nonvolatile
Memory.
Bus arbitration circuitry controls which ControlFile bus will be used for
each transaction. Addresses sent by the Coordinator Processor are
translated from those used with the bubble memory to those used with
the RAM. This allows a RAM card to replace a bubble memory card.
The MC68000 microprocessor simulates the actions of the bubble card.
A 64K EPROM is used to hold the microprocessor boot and power-up
diagnostic programs and holds the operating program of the NV
Memory. A 64K program RAM supplies the microprocessor with
program memory and working storage. A watchdog timer is provided to
ensure against hangups of the microprocessor.
CAUTION
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-44
ControlFile Motherboard
Bus A
Bus B
Dual Port
Buffers
Address
Translation
64K
Dual Port Memory
Bus Arbitration
Dual Port
Buffers
64K EPROM
(Boot & Power-Up
Diagnostics)
MC68000
Microprocessor
64K Program RAM

(Microprocessor Memory)
Programmable
Interface/Timer
BRAM
Buffers
BRAM
Microprocessor
Reset
(From Battery Control
Circuit)
LEDs
Enable/Disable
Switch
BRAM Power
(From Battery Control Circuit)
BRAM Enable/Disable Signal

(From Battery Control Circuit)
Figure 4.2.18. RAM Nonvolatile Memory Block Diagram
Figure 4.2.19 shows the battery control circuit. The battery control
circuit monitors the +5 VDC supply and the battery voltages. If the +5
VDC supply falls below the threshold value, the battery control circuit
preserves the contents of the battery backed random access memory
(BRAM):
D
RS3: ControlFiles
Causes the microprocessor to issue an alarm to the Coordinator

Processor.
Signals the microprocessor to halt reads and writes to the BRAM.
Disables the BRAM, to prevent further reads or writes.
Supplies the BRAM with power from the batteries.

SV: 4-2-45
Microprocessor
Reset Signal
+5 VDC
(From ControlFile)
Power
to BRAM
Power Control
Circuits
Current Monitoring
Signal
to Microprocessor
Low Battery Alarm
BRAM
Enable/Disable
Signal
Battery Voltage
(Isolated Supply)
Diode
Isolation
Battery Voltage
Check
Low Battery LEDs
Battery
Test Points
Battery 1
Battery 2
Figure 4.2.19. RAM NV Memory Battery Control Circuit
When the +5 VDC supply raises to the threshold level, the battery
control circuit acts to restore normal BRAM operation.
The battery control circuit continuously monitors the voltage of each
battery. If a battery voltage falls below the limit, a Low Battery Alarm is
generated to the Coordinator Processor and the proper Low Battery
LED is lighted. Test points are provided to allow direct measurement of
battery voltage.
The microprocessor initiates a BRAM current draw test once every 24
hours. The current used by the BRAM is measured and reported by the
battery control circuit. This can be used to detect static electricity
damage to BRAM cells or other abnormal BRAM power conditions.
Damaged cells typically draw a much larger current than do normal
cells.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-46
Two 3.6 V AA size lithium batteries are used. The batteries were
selected for their reliability and long life. New batteries can maintain the
RAM in continuous data retention mode for approximately the times
listed in Table 4.2.22. The batteries should be disabled if the RAM NV
Memory is not being used for data retention and normal +5 VDC is not
available. This prevents unnecessary discharge of the batteries.
Table 4.2.22. RAM NV Memory Retention
RAM Size
Data Retention
1 Meg
4 years
2 Meg
2.5 years
4 Meg
1.25 years
Because RAM cells that have been damaged by static electricity

discharge draw considerably more power than undamaged cells, it is
possible that battery drain in the standby condition can be much higher
than normal. This can result in shortened battery life. A RAM NV
Memory card that shows an abnormal BRAM current draw should be
returned to the factory for repair.
If a battery requires replacement, both batteries should be replaced and
the battery manufacture date entered on the label area provided on the
board. Remove one battery at a time to allow the other battery to power
the RAM. It is recommended that a disk backup be made of the
ControlFile static data prior to changing the batteries.
A PeerWay boot of the Coordinator Processor will be required when a
RAM NV Memory card is installed unless the RAM already contains the
required software. A PeerWay boot will also be required if the RAM is
somehow erased.
RAM NV Memory LEDs and Test Points

Figure 4.2.20 shows the LEDs Test Points, and the Enable/Disable
Switch on the RAM Nonvolatile Memory. LED sequences are shown in
the next paragraph.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-47
Test Points
Brown
Ground Return
Yellow
+5 VDC
Green
Voltage of Battery # 2
White
Voltage of Battery # 1
LEDS
BATTERY 2 LOW
(DS10)
Battery 2 voltage is low.

Replace both batteries. (One at a time)
BATTERY 1 LOW
(DS9)
Battery 1 voltage is low.

Replace both batteries. (One at a time)
R
PROGRAM ACCESS
(DS8)
Y
Y
Y
The Coordinator Processor is accessing the main

operating programs of a Controller Processor or
itself. The CP is reading from Nonvolatile Memory to
download data to a card, or is writing to the
Nonvolatile Memory from the ControlFile.
WRITE
(DS7)
The Nonvolatile Memory is being written to by the

Coordinator Processor.
READ
(DS6)
The Nonvolatile Memory is being read by the

R
G
+5 VDC BAD
(DS3)
ENABLE
DISABLE
CARD BAD
(DS2)
CARD GOOD
(DS1)
Replace Fuse F1.

Enable/Disable switch is at DISABLE
or the card failed power-up diagnostics.
Card passed power-up diagnostics.
The Enable/Disable Switch is read by the Coordinator Processor during operation.
The result is that it knows when it can or cannot access the Nonvolatile Memory.
Nonvolatile memory functions resume when the switch is enabled and the card has
successfully passed power-up diagnostic tests.
Figure 4.2.20. RAM NV Memory LEDs, Test Points, and Enable/Disable Switch
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-48
RAM NV Memory LED Sequences

Normal operation of the RAM NV Memory is signified by the green LED
being ON and the yellow LEDs flashing.
The red Card Bad LED will be on when the Enable/Disable Switch is in
the DISABLE position or if the card has failed power-up diagnostics.
The RAM NV Memory power-up sequence begins when the battery
control circuit detects restoration of +5 VDC. A power-up test sequence
may take up to 1 minute and 40 seconds, depending on the memory
size and the condition of the RAM. First the power-up diagnostics are
performed and then a memory check is run.
The red Card Bad LED will be ON during the power-up diagnostics.
The yellow LEDs will flash as the tests are run.
If the power-up tests fail, the red Card Bad LED will stay ON. The
yellow status LEDs will flash as the power-up tests are run. A pattern
will hold in the yellow LEDs for a second or two and then the sequence
will repeat. The pattern indicates which power-up test failed.
Table 4.2.23 shows the pattern and its meaning.
The RAM is checked next. The red and green LEDs will flash alternately
and all of the other LEDs will blink. A Cyclical Redundancy Check
(CRC) is made on each block of RAM and the result is compared with a
stored value. If the CRC check fails, the block of memory is cleared.
When this memory scrubbing operation is completed, the red Card
Bad LED will go OFF, the green LED will go ON, and the yellow LEDs
will flash as the card performs its normal functions.
If the red LED goes off and the yellow LEDs do not flash, the card has
no images. Download new images. The yellow LEDs will flash and the
card will run normally when the download is completed.
A low battery is indicated by either of the two red Battery Low LEDs
being ON.
If the red Card Bad LED and the green LED are flashing alternately:
D
One battery is low.
BRAM chips have been swapped out due to a bad SRAM chip.
The current draw of the battery backed RAM is too high.
Replace the batteries or the card as soon as is practical.

RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-49
Table 4.2.23. RAM NV Memory LED Sequences
Yellow LED
Pattern
OFF
OFF
Fault Condition:
Red Card Bad LED ON
Green LED OFF
0. MC68000 Microprocessor test
OFF
OFF
OFF
1. EPROM checksum test
ON
OFF
ON
2. Program & Dual Port ROM test
OFF
OFF
ON
3. Watchdog Timeout test
ON
ON
OFF
4. Not used
OFF
ON
OFF
5. Interrupt test
ON
ON
ON
6. Parallel Interface test
OFF
ON
ON
7. Not used
ON
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-50
RAM NV Memory Jumpers

Figure 4.2.21 shows the location of the jumpers on the NV RAM card.
Table 4.2.24 gives the battery jumper settings. The batteries should be
disabled only if memory backup is not desired. Table 4.2.25 shows the
other jumper locations. Jumper HD3 is factory set at 1--2 but is not
presently used by the software.
Test Points
HD3
HD2
HD5
Battery Jumpers
HD6 & HD7
HD4
F1
Batteries
Figure 4.2.21. RAM NV Memory Fuse, Jumper, and Test Point Locations
Table 4.2.24. RAM NV Memory Battery Jumper Positions
Jumper
Position
Action
HD6
1--2
Battery 2 enabled
2--3
Battery 2 disabled
1--2
Battery 1 enabled
2--3
Battery 1 disabled
HD7
Table 4.2.25. RAM NV Memory Jumper Positions
RS3: ControlFiles
Card
HD3
HD4
HD5
Characteristic
1984--2347--0011
1--2
1--2
1--2
Hard wired
1 Meg RAM
1984--2347--0021
1--2
2--3
1--2
Hard wired
2 Meg RAM
1984--2347--0041
Hard wired
2--3
Hard wired
2--3
Hard wired
4 Meg RAM
SV: 4-2-51
RAM NV Memory Battery Replacement

The batteries should be replaced periodically or whenever one of the
Low Battery LEDs lights. Replace both batteries but disable them one at
a time to allow the other to retain the RAM contents. Use only 3.6 volt
lithium batteries (G52932--0002).
-
To replace the batteries:
NOTE: Backup to disk before you remove the NV memory card for
battery replacement. Follow recommended procedures in powering
down the ControlFile (see below). Use static protection whenever
handling the NV RAM.
CAUTION
If one battery is low, replace the low battery first to ensure
data retention.
1. Disable the battery by moving the jumper to 2--3 (OFF). Jumper
HD7 is for battery one, HD6 is for battery two.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Mark the date of battery
manufacture on the BT1 DATECODE label area.
3. Enable the battery by moving the jumper back to 1--2 (ON).
4. Repeat for battery two, using the other jumper.
RAM NV Memory Fuse

Figure 4.2.21 shows the location of the fuse on the RAM Nonvolatile
Memory card. Table 4.2.26 gives fuse data.
Table 4.2.26. RAM NV Memory Fuse Data
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G09140--0037
AGC 4
311004
4 A 32 V Regular
NV Memory and Powering Down the ControlFile

Perform the Disk Shutdown (DS) command before powering down the
console. This will purge the cache and prevent possible loss of data.
First disable the NV Memory card and then the primary and secondary
Coordinator Processor cards by placing the ENABLE/DISABLE switches
to the DISABLE position. The ControlFile cards can now be pulled.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-52
When powering up the ControlFile, first enable the NV Memory card

and then enable the primary and secondary Coordinator Processor
cards.
Bubble NV Memory
The Bubble NV Memory uses Magnetic Bubble Memory (MBM)
modules for data storage. Figure 4.2.22 shows the function diagram for
a Bubble Nonvolatile Memory card.
Nonvolatile Data & Control
1/2 Megabyte Capacity
Upper
8 Bits
16K x 16
Static
RAM
Buffer
Lower
8 Bits
Buffer
Buffer
LED
Latch
Buffer
DMAC
Non
Volatile
Controller
1 Megabit
128K
Bytes
Control
Circuit
1 Megabit
128K
Bytes
Control 1 Megabit
128K
Circuit
Bytes
SYNC
Bus
Buffers
Enable/Disable
Switch
8
Bits
Control
Circuit
Control 1 Megabit
128K
Circuit
Bytes
1 Megabyte Capacity
ASYNC
Bus
Buffer A
ASYNC
Bus
Buffer B
Control
Circuit
4 Megabit
512K
Bytes
Control
Circuit
4 Megabit
512K
Bytes
Figure 4.2.22. Bubble NV Memory Functional Diagram
The card is fused for +5 volts and +12 volts. The +12 volts is used for
the magnetic bubble memory and control circuitry. Bus A arbitration
circuit on the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory card determines which
redundant motherboard port is accessing the card. The proper buffers
are then enabled to transfer asynchronous data on the card.
A LED latch is driven by the bus through a software driven latch to light
the green, red, or yellow status LEDs. There is also a read buffer on the
card that determines the state of the ENABLE/DISABLE toggle switch.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-53
The data bus operating off the motherboard asynchronous bus is then
buffered to a synchronous bus for data transfer to those devices that
are used to transfer the data to and from the nonvolatile memory. There
are four RAM chips used for buffering data to and from the nonvolatile
memory. The buffer RAM size is 16K x 16. The direct memory access
controller (DMAC) and Bubble Memory Controller circuitry are designed
for 8 bit words so that a set of buffers multiplexes the 16-bit words into
two successive 8 bit words for transfer to the DMAC. The DMAC
transfers data between the Bubble Memory Controller and RAM. The
bubble memory controller changes the parallel data to serial data and
provides the needed timing for operation of the bubble memory support
circuitry. The serial data is then transferred to the selected magnetic
bubble memory (MBM) modules for storage.
Each MBM module contains 5 support chips for the MBM. These chips
format data, drive currents for the X and Y coils that move the magnetic
bubbles within the MBM, and move the bubbles to storage. For the read
cycle, the circuitry detects the bubbles, and formats and transfers the
data back to the nonvolatile controller memory for serial to parallel data
conversion.
The ControlFile motherboard has two slots for Nonvolatile Memory
cards. These are not intended for redundancy but are useful during
troubleshooting and recovery from a nonvolatile memory fault.
The MBM modules also contain error detection and correction (EDAC)
circuitry for all data stored in the MBM. This EDAC circuitry is in the
Formatter/Sense Amplifier (FSA). The error detection code used by the
FSA is a 14 bit Fire code that is appended to each 256-bit block of data.
The code is capable of correcting all single error bursts up to and
including 5 bits in length.
It takes four times as much current to write a bubble as it does to copy a
bubble. Each MBM has a seed bubble that is used to copy from. Any
time an address is to be written to it is copied from the seed bubble. If
this seed bubble is corrupted through a card fault or an improper
insertion or removal procedure, the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory must be
returned. Contact your local FRSI service center for more information.
Current bubble technology cannot produce perfect bubble matrices. To
map around the faulty areas of the bubble the manufacturer has a boot
program that identifies the bad areas of of each bubble in hexadecimal
code. This information is stored in several locations in the MBM. If these
locations should become corrupted, the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory
card must be returned to the factory to be restored.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-54
Bubble NV Memory: LEDs and Test Points

Figure 4.2.23 shows the LEDs, Enable/Disable Switch, and test points
for the Bubble Nonvolatile Memory cards.
LEDS
PROGRAM ACCESS
(DS8)
Y
Y
Y
R
R
R
G
ENABLE
DISABLE
The Coordinator Processor is accessing the main

operating programs of a Controller Processor or itself. The
card is reading from Nonvolatile Memory to download data
to a card, or is writing to the memory card from the disk
drive.
WRITE
(DS7)
The Nonvolatile Memory Card is being written to by the

READ
(DS6)
The Nonvolatile Memory Card is being read by the

12 V FUSE BLOWN
(DS4)
Replace Fuse F2 (Supplies 12 VDC to the card).
5 V FUSE BLOWN
(DS3)
Replace Fuse F1 (Supplies 5 VDC to the card).

A fault is detected on the Nonvolatile Memory or the
Enable/Disable Switch is DISABLED. If the switch is
ENABLED and this LED is ON, replace the card.
CARD FAULT
(DS2)
CARD ENABLED
(DS1)
The Enable/Disable Switch is ENABLED and no hardware

faults are detected on the NV Memory.
The Enable/Disable Switch is read by the Coordinator Processor during operation.

The result is that it knows when it can or cannot access the Nonvolatile Memory.
Nonvolatile memory functions resume when the switch is enabled and the card has
successfully passed power-up diagnostic tests.
Test Points at Top of Card (Not on 1984--1224--000X)
Yellow
+5 V ( 0.1 V)
Red
+12 V ( 0.1 V)
Brown
Ground Return
Figure 4.2.23. Bubble NV Memory LEDs and Test Points
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-55
Bubble NV Memory Jumpers

Bubble Nonvolatile Memory jumpers are only for factory use and should
not be changed. Changing the jumpers could cause the bubbles to
become corrupted.
Bubble NV Memory Fuses

Figure 4.2.24 shows fuse locations. Table 4.2.27 gives fuse values for
the Bubble NV Memory card.
Test Points
F1
F2
Figure 4.2.24. Bubble NV Memory Fuse Locations

Table 4.2.27. Bubble NV Memory Fuses
Card
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
1984--1598--0001
F1
G09140--0060
MTH 4
312004
4 A 250 V Regular
F2
G09140--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250 V Regular
F1
G09140--0060
MTH 4
312004
4 A 250 V Regular
F2
G09140--0030
AGC 2
312002
F1
G09140--0038
MDL 4
313004
4 A 250 V Slow Blow
F2
G09140--0030
AGC 2
312002
1984--1483--000x
1984--1224--000x
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-2-56
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-1
Section 3:
Controller Processors
Controller Processors include:
D
MultiPurpose (MPC)
MultiLoop (MLC)
Single-Strategy (SSC)
Contact (CC)
Multiplexer (MUX)
PLC Interface (PLC).

CAUTION
Support Section
NONVOLITILE MEMORY
POWER REGULATOR
POWER REGULATOR
PEERWAY B
PEERWAY A

RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-2
MPC (MultiPurpose Controller Processor)

The MultiPurpose Controller (MPC) Processor card replaces the
Contact Controller Processor (CCP), Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC), Controller Processor, and Multiplexer (MUX) Controller
Processors. The current versions of the MPC follow:
D
MultiPurpose Controller Processor 5,

(MPC5)
10P57520007
Labeled MPC5 on the printed wiring assembly (PWA).
MultiPurpose Controller Processor II,
(MPC II)
10P50400006
1984--4068--000x
Labeled MULTIPURPOSE CONTROLLER II on the PWA.
MultiPurpose Controller Processor

(MPC or MPC I)
1984--2500--000x
Labeled SERIAL PROCESSOR on the PWA.
The MPC5 has a 68020, 256-byte instruction cache, 24 MHz, 32-bit

databus while the MPC II has a 68000, no cache, 16 MHz, 16-bit
databus. The MPC5 also has hardware support for higher performance
I/O communications including PLC connectivity.
The MPC II performs all of the functions of the original MPC but has a
faster clock and more memory.
The MPC II Processor can be jumpered to accept different software
images so that it can replace a Contact, a Multiplexer (MUX), or a PLC
Controller Processor. It cannot replace a MultiLoop or a Single-Strategy
Controller Processor. The MPC II can be configured with 1024 I/O
points. They can be a mixture of analog and discrete points.
An MPC can communicate with a variety of I/O or other interface
devices via eight digital RS-422 communications lines. The
communication rates are listed in Table 4.3.1. The Baud rate is set by a
jumper for all MPCs except the MPC5 where it is set by software.
Table 4.3.1. MPC Communication Rates
MPC, MPC I, or MPC II
MPC5
RS3 I/O
10.4K Baud
10.4K Baud
MUX
9600 Baud
9600 Baud
PLC
300--9600 Baud
300--19.2K Baud
Interface Device
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-3
The MPC supports the Controller images and associated Card Cages or
FlexTerms listed in Table 4.3.2.
The MPC cannot fully support these images or associated FlexTerms:
D
Single Strategy
MultiLoop
AutoTuning MultiLoop Controller
Table 4.3.2. Controller Images and Associated Card Cages or FlexTerms

MPC or MPC I
MPC II
MPC5
Analog I/O (Serial I/O, MAIO)
Contact
Multiplexer
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
Rosemount Basic Language (RBLC)
Smart
Pulse
RTD/Thermocouple
Discrete
Table 4.3.3 shows parts replacement data. A change of MPC may

require a software change.
Table 4.3.3. MPC Parts Replacement
Name
Part No.
Replaces
MPC5
10P57520007
-- --
10P50400006
1984--4068--000x
1984--2500--000x
1984--1494--000x
1984--1445--000x
1984--1374--000x
Replaces MPC II, MPC, CC, PLC, and MUX

Controller Processors.
(Requires jumper setting)
MPC II
1984--4068--000x
1984--2500--000x
1984--1494--000x
1984--1445--000x
1984--1374--000x
Replaces MPC as well as CC, PLC, and MUX

(Requires jumper setting)
MPC
1984--2500--000x
1984--1494--000x
Multiplexer (MUX) Controller Processor

Controller Processor
1984--1445--000x
Contact Controller (CC) Controller Processor
1984--1374--000x
Contact Controller (CC) Controller Processor
MPC II
RS3: ControlFiles
Characteristics
SV: 4-3-4
The MultiPurpose Controller can be installed in any slot A through H.

When a MultiPurpose Controller is used in a redundant pair
configuration, only slots AB, CD, EF, and GH can be used as redundant
pairs. MultiPurpose Controllers can be used in redundant pairs if the
image being run supports redundancy and the controllers are identical.
Flat redundancy cables have two connectors at one end. These two
connectors connect to the corresponding controller connectors on the
ControlFile Motherboard. A redundant flat cable cannot be used on a
nonredundant controller. Should a redundant flat cable be used on a
nonredundant controller, the controller assumes it is redundant and
clears the configuration for the adjacent slot. (This is true of MPC
Controller Processors that are running the CC image.)
Redundancy on Serial I/O card cages (both Analog and Contact) is
handled differently. The redundant controllers are connected to the I/O
cage by separate cables and redundancy jumpering is done at the I/O
card cage(s).
If the Controller Processor loses RS-485 communications with the Field
Interface Card, the redundant controller will take over. Note that this will
happen any time a Field Interface Card (FIC) is removed from a
FlexTerm or I/O Card Cage. Hardware alarm code #19 will be generated
when this occurs. Hardware alarms from the controllers are prioritized. If
both controllers have active alarms, the controller with the lowest priority
alarm will operate as primary.
There are two rows of connectors across the backplane of the
ControlFile motherboard, an upper and a lower. Only the upper row is
used by the MultiPurpose Controller. Each Controller slot has a
corresponding connector on the top row of connectors. This connector
allows connection to the serial I/O Analog Card Cages and/or
FlexTerms.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-5
MPC5 Function
Figure 4.3.2 shows a functional diagram of the MultiPurpose Controller
Processor 5 (MPC5).
Dual Port
and
Memory
Control
Memory Control
A and B
Drivers
Address
2 Megabyte
Dual Port RAM
CP Interface
32-Bit to
16-Bit Data
Transceiver
A and B
Transceiver
Data
Dual Port Address

Dual Port Data
Driver
Transceiver
8 Serial
I/O
Channels
MC68EC020
(24 MHz)
Address
Programmable
Timer
Data
Field
Interface
Debug
DUART
128K x 8
Boot
Flash
Figure 4.3.2. MPC5 Functional Diagram
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-6
The data from two redundant Coordinator Processors on separate

redundant buses are selected and buffered on the card to isolate the
two in case of a failure of either bus. These two buffers come together
at the dual port bus that has 2 Megabytes of RAM. The remainder of the
card is separated from the dual port bus. The Coordinator Processor
must have unrestricted access to the RAM on the controller in order to
permit it to download the operation and configuration data. After the
data is downloaded, the Controller Processor limits the memory access
of the Coordinator Processor to the area containing the dynamic and
configuration data.
The MC68HC020 microprocessor controls all the functions on the card
and is monitored by the watchdog timer. If it is not reset periodically by
the microprocessor, the watchdog timer toggles the reset line to the
microprocessor, which forces a restart.
All the LEDs are controlled by the LED latch, which includes the Card
Enable (green), Card Fault (red), and three yellow status LEDs.
The card ENABLE/DISABLE switch is read through a buffer to indicate
to the processor when it should disable processing.
During initial power up of the card, the microprocessor does diagnostics
from data stored in programs loaded in the 128K x 8 FLASH. After the
MPC5 has successfully completed the diagnostic tests, it informs the
Coordinator Processor which IMAGE it is jumpered for and requests the
operating program. The Controller, now executing its own internal
program, will then request the Coordinator Processor to download any
configuration data stored in the Nonvolatile Memory.
Communication with up to eight Field Interface Cards is handled by the
eight serial communication converters that transfer the parallel data
from the card data bus to serial NRZ data. Each communication
converter is capable of supporting one Field Interface Card
communication line. The serial data from the communication chip at
transistor to transistor logic (TTL) level is then converted to RS-422 and
sent to the Field Interface Cards through the cables. Receive data is in
a similar format.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-7
MPC II Function
Figure 4.3.3 shows a functional diagram of the MultiPurpose Controller
Processor II (MPC II).
Dual Port
and
Memory
Control
A&B Drivers
Driver
RAS & CAS
MUX
Address
2 Megabyte
Dual Port RAM
CP Interface
Read
Driver
A&B
Transceiver
Data In
Data Out
Driver
Write
Latch
Memory Data
Dual Port Address

Dual Port Data
EDAC
Mode
Reg
Driver
29C60
EDAC
Transceiver
8 Serial
I/O
Channels
MC68HC000
(12 or 16 MHz)
Address
Programmable
Timer
Data
Field
Interface
Debug
DUART
64 k x 16
Boot
EPROM
Figure 4.3.3. MPC II Functional Diagram
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-8
The MPC II can operate either as an MPC I or as an MPC II. The data
from two redundant Coordinator Processors on separate redundant
buses are selected and buffered on the card to isolate the two in case of
a failure of either bus. These two buffers come together at the dual port
bus that also has the 2 Megabyte dynamic RAM with EDAC. The
remainder of the card is separated from the dual port bus because the
Coordinator Processor must have restricted access to the dynamic
RAM on the controller in order to permit it to download the operation
and configuration data. After the data is downloaded, the Controller
Processor limits the memory access of the Coordinator Processor to the
area containing the dynamic and configuration data.
The MPC II card contains dynamic RAM and EDAC control circuitry. The
dynamic memory controller does the required address multiplexing for
the RAM chips and handles the refresh cycle. The dynamic RAM chips
have separate pins for the read and write function. A separate
read/write select provides separation and data bus buffering. The EDAC
controller decodes the check bits that are stored along with the data
bits. A 16-bit word is used in conjunction with the 16-bit microprocessor.
Six additional bits are used to store a pattern that can be decoded to
indicate the exact bit pattern in the data word. If any single bit is not as
indicated by the EDAC check bits, the EDAC Controller automatically
corrects for the error and rewrites the data into the RAM location
correctly. If any multiple bit errors are found, the EDAC will trigger a bus
error to indicate problems to the operators station. RAM capacity is 2
Megabytes with 8 bits per byte and 2 bytes per word. An additional six
bits associated with each word are the check bits.
The clock oscillator is divided down to provide all the timing
requirements of the microprocessor and the remainder of the support
devices on the card. The system clock rate is selected by jumper as
either 12 MHz (MPC I operation) or 16 MHz (MPC II operation). The
MC68HC000 microprocessor controls all the functions on the card and
is monitored by the watchdog timer. If it is not reset periodically by the
microprocessor, the watchdog timer toggles the reset line to the
microprocessor which forces a restart.
All the LEDs are controlled by the LED latch, which includes the Card
Enable (green), Card Fault (red), and three yellow status LEDs.
from data stored in programs loaded in the 64K x 16 EPROM. After the
MultiPurpose Controller II has successfully completed the diagnostic
tests, it informs the Coordinator Processor which IMAGE it is jumpered
for and requests the operating program. The Controller, now executing
its own internal program, will then request the Coordinator Processor to
download any configuration data stored in the Nonvolatile Memory.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-9
Communication with up to eight Field Interface Card communication

lines is handled by the four dual port serial communication converters
that transfer the parallel data from the card data bus to serial NRZ data.
Each communication converter is capable of supporting two Field
Interface Card communication lines. The serial data from the
communication chip at TTL level is then converted to RS-422 and sent
to the Field Interface Cards through the cables. Receive data is in a
similar format.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-10
MPC I Function
Figure 4.3.4 shows a functional diagram for the MultiPurpose Controller
Processor (MPC I).
40 MHz
Osc Div
Left
Mother
Board
Bus
Buffer
Dual
To
Port
Mother
Bus
Board
Buses Control
Right
Mother
Board
Bus
Buffer
68000
Microprocessor
Watchdog
Timer
LED
Latch
Reset
Dual Port
Address Data
Control Bus
Error
Detection
Correction
Control
Buffer
Address Data Control Bus
Buffer
Dynamic
RAM
Refresh &
Control
(Boot ROM)
EPROM
8K x 16
NVRAM
2K x 8
Image Selection Jumpers

128K Dynamic
RAM +6 BITS
EDAC
Dual Port Serial Comm Controllers
Comm OSC
(MUX & PLC)
RS-422 Comm Lines to FlexTerms

Figure 4.3.4. MPC I Functional Diagram
The data from two Coordinator Processors on separate redundant

buses is selected and buffered on the card to isolate the two in case of
a failure of either bus. These two buffers come together at the dual port
bus that also has the 64K x 22 dynamic RAM with Error Detection and
Correction (EDAC). The remainder of the card is separated from the
dual port bus because the Coordinator Processor card must have
access to the dynamic RAM on the controller to permit it to download
the operation and configuration data. After the data is downloaded, the
Controller Processor limits the memory access of the Coordinator
Processor to the area containing the dynamic and configuration data.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-11
The MPC card contains dynamic RAM and EDAC control circuitry. The
dynamic memory controller does the required address multiplexing for
the RAM chips and handles the refresh cycle. The dynamic RAM chips
have separate pins for the read and write function. A separate
read/write select provides separation and data bus buffering. The EDAC
controller decodes the check bits that are stored along with the data
bits. A 16-bit word is used in conjunction with the 16-bit microprocessor.
Six additional bits are used to store a pattern that can be decoded to
indicate the exact bit pattern in the data word. If any single bit is not as
indicated by the EDAC check bits, the EDAC Controller automatically
corrects for the error and rewrites the data into the RAM location
correctly. If any multiple bit errors are found, the EDAC will trigger a bus
error to indicate problems to the operators station. Each dynamic RAM
chip is arranged in a 64K x 1 bit pattern. RAM capacity is 128K bytes, or
64K words, with 8 bits per byte and 2 bytes per word. There are six
additional bits with each word as check bits.
The 40 MHz clock oscillator is divided down to provide the timing
requirements of the microprocessor and the remainder of the support
devices on the card. The 68000 series microprocessor controls all the
functions on the card and is monitored by the watchdog timer. If it is not
reset periodically by the microprocessor, the watchdog timer toggles the
reset line to the microprocessor which forces a restart.
All the LEDs are controlled by the software driven LED latch, which
includes the Card Enable (green), Card Fault (red), and three yellow
status LEDs.
from data stored in programs loaded in the 8K x 16 EPROM. After the
MultiPurpose Controller has successfully completed the diagnostic
tests, it informs the Coordinator Processor which IMAGE it is jumpered
for and requests the operating program. The controller, now executing
its own internal program, will then request the Coordinator Processor to
download any configuration data stored in the Nonvolatile Memory.
Communication with up to eight Field Interface Cards is handled by the
four dual port serial communication converters that transfer the parallel
data from the card data bus to serial NRZ data. Each communication
converter is capable of supporting two Field Interface Card
communication lines. The serial data from the communication chip at
TTL level is then converted to RS-485 and sent to the Field Interface
Cards through the cables. Receive data is in a similar format.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-12
MPC LEDs
The LEDs of all Controller Processor cards are essentially identical. See
the LED description later in this section.
MPC5 Jumpers
MPC5 jumpers differ from those on the other Controller Processor
cards. Figure 4.3.5 shows MPC5 jumper locations. Table 4.3.4 shows
the MPC5 jumper label.
HD8
HD7
HD6
HD9
HD5
HD4
F1
Figure 4.3.5. MPC5 Fuse and Jumper Locations
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-13
Table 4.3.4. MPC5 Jumper Label
10P57520007
MPC5 JUMPER SETTINGS
PROCESSOR FUNCTIONALITY
IMAGE
SELECT
HD6
HD7
HD8
ADDITIONAL IMAGE
#1
1--2
1--2
1--2
ADDITIONAL IMAGE
#2
1--2
2--3
2--3
ADDITIONAL IMAGE
#3
1--2
2--3
1--2
ADDITIONAL IMAGE
#4
1--2
1--2
2--3
MPC5 IMAGE
FUNCTIONALITY
HD4
HD5
HD9
MPC+
1--2
1--2
1--2
PLC+
1--2
1--2
2--3
MUX+
1--2
2--3
1--2
Image Select (HD6-- HD8): These jumpers select one of the images
shown on the label under Processor Type. Four images are listed for
MPC5 functionality. The actual image loaded depends on the system
configuration.
CAUTION
No mixing of MPC IIs with MPC5s in a ControlFile is
allowed.
The ControlFile Status screen has a three-digit Jumper Code field that
shows the placement of all jumpers. This code is shown when using an
MPC5 image. Jumper position 1--2 is 1, and 2--3 is 0. The first digit is
always 1. The second digit reports the positions of HD6, HD7, and
HD8 as an octal number (0--7), with HD6 as the high order bit. The third
digit reports on HD4, HD5, and HD9.
NOTE: With the MPC5, the I/O communication baud rate is set by
software instead of by a hardware jumper (as done by the MPC II and
MPC). The baud rate is set automatically when either the PLC+ or
MUX+ image is selected.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-14
Table 4.3.5. ControlFile Status Screen Jumper Code (MPC5)

Jumper
Code
Image Selection
MPC5
Image Functionality
145
Additional Image #2
MUX5
146
Additional Image #2
PLC5
147
Additional Image #2
MPC5
155
Additional Image #3
MUX5
156
Additional Image #3
PLC5
157
Additional Image #3
MPC5
165
Additional Image #4
MUX5
166
Additional Image #4
PLC5
167
Additional Image #4
MPC5
175
Additional Image #1
MUX5
176
Additional Image #1
PLC5
177
Additional Image #1
MPC5
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-15
MPC II Jumpers
MPC II jumpers differ from those on the other Controller Processor
cards. Figure 4.3.6 shows MPC II jumper locations. Table 4.3.6 shows
the MPC II jumper label.
HD1
HD2
HD4
HD5
HD9
HD21
HD22
HD6
HD7
HD8
HD23
HD24
F1
Figure 4.3.6. MPC II Fuse and Jumper Locations
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-16
Table 4.3.6. MPC II Jumper Label
01984-- 4086-- 0006

CONTROL PROCESSOR II JUMPER SETTINGS
COMMUNICATION
RATE
HD21
HD22
HD23
HD24
FISHER-ROSEMOUNT
10.4K BAUD
2--3
2--3
2--3
2--3
1--2
1--2
1--2
1--2
INDUSTRY
STANDARD
PROCESSOR FUNCTIONALITY
HD2
MPC
HD2
MPC II
2--3
1--2
PROCESSOR TYPE
PROCESSOR TYPE
IMAGE
SELECT
HD6
HD7
HD8
IMAGE
SELECT
HD6
HD7
HD8
CONTACT
2--3
2--3
1--2
ADDITIONAL
IMAGE #1
1--2
1--2
1--2
MULTIPLEXER
2--3
1--2
1--2
ADDITIONAL
IMAGE #2
1--2
2--3
2--3
ADDITIONAL
IMAGE #1
1--2
1--2
1--2
ADDITIONAL
IMAGE #3
1--2
2--3
1--2
ADDITIONAL
IMAGE #2
1--2
2--3
2--3
ADDITIONAL
IMAGE #4
1--2
1--2
2--3
ADDITIONAL
IMAGE #3
1--2
2--3
1--2
MPC2+ IMAGE
FUNCTIONALITY
HD4
HD5
HD9
ADDITIONAL
IMAGE #4
1--2
1--2
2--3
MPC+
1--2
1--2
1--2
PLC+
1--2
1--2
2--3
MUX+
1--2
2--3
1--2
01984--2572--0002 REV C
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-17
Communication Rate (HD21--HD24): Select 10.4 K Baud speed for

use with most FICs or the Industry Standard (9600 Baud) speed for
special applications, specifically MUX and PLC.
Processor functionality (HD2): This jumper controls the clock speed
of the on-board computer chip.
CAUTION
HD2 must be set to agree with the image being loaded.
Setting it for MPC functionality with an MPC II image (or
vice versa) may result in operating problems.
When MPC functionality is selected (HD2 set to 2--3), the clock runs at
the MPC I card speed of 12 MHz.
When MPC II functionality is selected (HD2 set to 1--2), the clock runs at
the MPC II card speed of 16 MHz.
Image Select (HD6-- HD8): These jumpers select one of the images
shown on the label under Processor Type. Six images are listed for
MPC I functionality and four for MPC II functionality. The actual image
loaded depends on the system configuration.
CAUTION
Selecting an MPC I image with HD2 set for MPC II
functionality (or the reverse) may result in operating
problems.
MPC2+ Image Functionality (HD4, HD5, HD9): These jumpers are
read by an MPC II image to select one of the three MPC II functions.
Normally a combination of Image Select and MPC2+ Image
Functionality jumpers will be specified for MPC II operation.
The ControlFile Status screen has a three-digit Jumper Code field that
shows the placement of all jumpers except the Communication Rate
jumpers (HD21--HD24). This code is shown when using an MPC II
image. Jumper position 1--2 is 1 and 2--3 is 0. The first digit reports
the position of HD2. The second digit reports the positions of HD6, HD7,
and HD8 as an octal number (0--7), with HD6 as the high order bit. The
third digit reports on HD4, HD5, and HD9.
If HD2 is set incorrectly for an MPC II Image, the code will start with 0
and be in red. Table 4.3.5 translates the Jumper Code.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-18
Table 4.3.7. ControlFile Status Screen Jumper Code (MPC2+)

Jumper
Code
Processor
Functionality
Image Selection
MPC2+
Image Functionality
0xx
(Red)
MPC I
Jumper HD2 is set for MPC I functionality

with an MPC II Image
145
MPC II
Additional Image #2
MUX+
146
MPC II
Additional Image #2
PLC+
147
MPC II
Additional Image #2
MPC+
155
MPC II
Additional Image #3
MUX+
156
MPC II
Additional Image #3
PLC+
157
MPC II
Additional Image #3
MPC+
165
MPC II
Additional Image #4
MUX+
166
MPC II
Additional Image #4
PLC+
167
MPC II
Additional Image #4
MPC+
175
MPC II
Additional Image #1
MUX+
176
MPC II
Additional Image #1
PLC+
177
MPC II
Additional Image #1
MPC+
MPC I Jumpers
MPC I jumpers are essentially identical to the other CP cards. See the
jumper description at the end of this section for MPC I jumpers.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-19
MPC Fuses
Table 4.3.8 gives fuse data for the MPC, MPC II, and the MPC5. Fuse
locations are shown in Figure 4.3.5 (MPC5), Figure 4.3.6 (MPC II),and
Figure 4.3.7 (MPC I).
Table 4.3.8. MPC I, MPC II, and MPC5 Fuses
Card
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
MPC5
10P57520007
F1
G09140--0034
AGC 3
312003
3 A 250 V Regular
MPC II
10P50400006
1984--4068--000x
F1
G09140--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250 V Regular
MPC I
1984--2500--000x
F4
G09140--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250 V Regular
F4
Figure 4.3.7. MPC I Fuse Location
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-20
MLC (MultiLoop Controller Processor)

There are two MultiLoop Controller Processor (MLC) versions:
D
MLC (1984--1439--000x)
Marked MULTILOOP PROCESSOR on the PWA
D
MLC (1984--1249--000x)
Marked MULTISTRATEGY PROCESSOR on the PWA
The MLC has eight RS-422 communication ports and 16 analog inputs.
One MultiLoop FlexTerm is connected to the Controller Processor
through two cables. The upper cable (connected from the top connector
of the ControlFile card cage to the upper connector of the FlexTerm)
carries the communications lines and analog feedback for eight output
Field Interface Cards (FIC). The lower cable carries the analog inputs
for the eight input ICs.
Each output FIC requires one communication port and one analog
input. Each input FIC requires one analog input. Any or all of the output
FICs can be removed and input FICs can be put in their place to provide
added flexibility in the FlexTerm. Output FICs cannot be placed in the
lower eight dedicated input slots of the FlexTerm.
Redundancy: The MultiLoop Controller can be installed in any slot A
through H. When a MultiLoop Controller is used as a redundant pair,
only slots AB, CD, EF, and GH can be used as redundant pairs.
Flat and round cables are used for redundancy. Flat cables have two
connectors at one end. These two connectors connect to the adjacent
controller slots. For the round cable version, two short cables are
connected from the two adjacent controller slots to a special connection
board. The third connector on this board is used to connect to the
FlexTerm. This connector board also has a jumper between pins 7 and
8 to indicate to the controller that it is redundant.
It is important to note that a redundant flat cable cannot be used on a
nonredundant controller for the upper connectors. Should a redundant
flat cable be used on a nonredundant controller, the controller assumes
it is redundant and clears out the configuration for the adjacent slot,
because a redundancy indication for one controller is assumed for both.
If the controller processor loses RS-422 communications with the FIC,
the redundant controller will take over. Note that this will happen any
time an FIC is removed from the FlexTerm. Also, if an Instrument High
or Low alarm is generated on a redundant controller pair, the redundant
controller will also take over, assuming that the A/D on the primary
controller has failed. If the controller switchover was for one of these
reasons, the alarm indication on the ControlFile Status Screen can be
cleared by rebooting the redundant controller.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-21
Instrument HIGH and LOW alarms must be configured to ensure that

the redundant controllers will switchover in case of a controller A/D fault.
Hardware alarms from the controllers are prioritized. If both controllers
have active alarms, the controller with the lowest priority alarm will take
over as primary controller.
MLC Function
This circuit description refers only to the MultiLoop Controller and Single
Strategy cards as shown in Figure 4.3.8.
Nonvolatile RAM: The MultiLoop Processor and Single-Strategy cards
contain a Nonvolatile RAM (2K X 8) that can be altered electrically and
does not lose its data when power is lost. The NVRAM is used to store
calibration data for the analog inputs and outputs. There are no
calibration pots on the FICs. To calibrate the FICs, current is monitored
at the FIC and the proper value is entered into the operators station.
This value is compared with the current output or input and the
calibration value is corrected. Each time the controller writes a new
output or reads a new input, the controller automatically adjusts the
value stored in the NVRAM. See Chapter 8, Calibration, for details.
Because Multiplexer calibration constants are stored in an area of
nonvolatile memory, contents should be reentered when the Nonvolatile
Memory is replaced or changed. Calibration data for serial I/O points is
stored in memory on the FICs.
Analog Input: The MultiLoop Processor and Single-Strategy cards
have an analog input section that performs the analog to digital (A/D)
conversion. The analog input section is used for two purposes. The first
is to bring in the 4--20 mA input and drop it across a precision 250 ohm
resistor on the Input FIC. This voltage is then fed to the analog input of
the MLC Card and digitized through the A/D section. The second is on a
4--20 mA output loop, which is dropped across a 125 ohm resistor on
the output FIC. This voltage is fed to the MLC Card to be digitized and
used as a verification that the output current is of the correct value. The
MLC Card can correct the digital value communicated to the output FIC
for up to a 5% error and will generate an alarm on any error greater.
This can also indicate that no field current is going through the circuit
(open loop).
A precision zener is multiplexed into each A/D converter to check
conversion accuracy.
A programmable timer module (PTM) is used to measure the time
periods required for the A/D conversion. A clock for these time periods
is derived from the clock/divider circuit. A set of synchronous buffers is
used to isolate the data bus for the PTM. The PTM is a synchronous
device from the 68000 system asynchronous bus.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-22
Hybrids: There are four different hybrids used to process the analog
input signals into the MLC Card.
The first hybrid has input voltages fed in for differential buffering and
filtering. The filtering is in two stages. The first filter only allows voltage
ramp changes of less than an 18 Hz rate change through a single pole
op-amp filter. This output is then fed into a two pole op-amp filter for
further limiting to a 3.75 Hz rate change. A circuit gain of 1 to 1 is used
and close tolerance resistors (laser trimmed) are specified to avoid
losing accuracy in the system. This hybrid contains two identical
isolated circuits that use +12 V and --12 V for power.
The second hybrid is a multiplexer circuit that selects one of four inputs
or the self check reference voltage to be routed to the A/D converter.
Each hybrid contains two identical circuits to route signals to two A/D
converters. Both use common control lines for switching. The signal
switching is done by FET ICs that have a high off resistance and low on
resistance.
The third hybrid is the A/D converter integrator. The circuit makes up a
dual slope integrator A/D that has a sample rate of 16 samples per
second. Control signals from the Programmable Timer Module (PTM)
turn on the input voltage to ramp up the charge on a capacitor to
discharge to zero volts using the precision 5.5 V reference into the
minus input of the op-amp. This type of A/D converter is unaffected by
resistor and capacitor tolerances and value changes because of
temperature variation.
The fourth hybrid is the precision 5.5 volt reference generated by a
special temperature-compensated IC with buffered output.
Power Up Diagnostics: During initial power up of the card, the
microprocessor does its primitive diagnostics from data stored in
programs loaded in the EPROM. Once the Coordinator Processor has
downloaded the operating program from the bubble memory, the
operating system stored in RAM takes over.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-23
40 MHz
Osc Div
To Mother Board
Buses
Left
Mother
Board
Bus
Buffer
Dual
Port Bus
Control
Right
Mother
Board
Bus
Buffer
Dual Port Address

Data Control Bus
68000
MicroProcessor
Reset
Boot
ROM
EPROM
8K x 16
Buffer
Address Data
Control Bus
Error
Detection
Correction
Control
LED
Latch
WatchDog
Timer
Dynamic
RAM
Refresh &
Control
SYNC
Data
Bus
Buffer
NVRAM
2K x 8
Control Address Bus

Programmable
Timer
128K Dynamic
RAM +6 BITS
EDAC
Dual Port Serial Comm Controllers
Programmable
Timer
SelfCheck
Ref
MUX
Control
5.5 V
Ref
RS-422 Comm Lines to FlexTerms
AD
AD
Multiplexer
AD
AD
Multiplexer
Filtering
--+ --+
From FlexTerms: 1--5 Volt Analog Inputs

or
5--2.5 Volt Feedback from Analog Outputs
--+ --+
--+ --+
Figure 4.3.8. MultiLoop Controller Processor Functional Diagram
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-24
MLC LEDs
MLC Jumpers
The jumpers of all Controller Processor cards (except MPC II) are
essentially identical. See the jumper description later in this section.
MLC Fuses
Figure 4.3.9 shows the MLC fuse locations. Table 4.3.9 gives fuse data.
F4
F2
F1
Figure 4.3.9. MLC Fuse Locations

Table 4.3.9. MLC Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part
No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
F2
G09140--0016
AGC 1/2
312.500
1/2 A 250 V Quick Acting
F4
G09140--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250V Regular
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-25
SSC (Single Strategy Controller Processor)

The Single-Strategy Controller Processor (SSC) is similar in function to
the MultiLoop Controller discussed earlier in this section. See the MLC
functional description for a summary of SSC processing.
There are two models of SSC (1984--1442--000x and
1984--1371--000x). They are both marked SINGLE STRATEGY
PROCESSOR on the PWA.
One Single-Strategy FlexTerm is connected to the SSC through one
cable. One Single-Strategy FlexTerm can contain FICs for two SSCs.
The Single-Strategy Processor has three RS-422 communication ports
and 6 analog inputs. Each Output FIC requires one communication port
and one analog input. Each Input FIC requires one analog input. Each
Contact FIC requires one communication port.
The SSC can control four 4--20 mA inputs, two outputs, and six contact
points. Three RS-422 communications ports are provided: two for the
output FICs; and one for the contact FIC. Six analog inputs are also
provided; two for the Output FICs, and four for the input FICs. Any or
both of the output FICs can be removed and input FICs can be placed
in the slots to provide added flexibility in the FlexTerm. Output FICs
cannot be placed in the dedicated input slots.
Communication to the two Output FICs and the Contact FIC is handled
by the three dual port serial communication converters that transfer the
parallel data from the data bus to serial RS-422 data.
Analog Input: The Single-Strategy Processors have an analog input
section that performs the analog to digital (A/D) conversion. The analog
input section is used for two purposes. The first is to bring in the 4--20
mA input and drop it across a precision 250 ohm resistor on the Input
FIC. This voltage is then fed to the analog input of the controller card
and digitized through the A/D section. The second is on a 4--20 mA
output loop. The loop current is dropped across a 125 ohm resistor on
the Analog Output Field Interface card. This voltage is fed to the
controller card to be digitized and used as a verification that the output
current is of the correct value. The controller can correct the digital
value communicated to the Analog Output FIC for up to a 5% error and
will alarm on any error greater. This can also indicate that no field
current is going through the circuit (open loop).
Calibration: To calibrate the FICs, current is monitored at the FIC with
an accurate device and the proper current is entered into the operators
station. This current is compared with the current output or input and
the calibration value is corrected. Each time the controller writes a new
output or reads a new input, the controller automatically adjusts with the
value stored in the NVRAM.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-26
Redundancy: The Single-Strategy Controller can be installed in any

slot A through H. When a Single-Strategy Controller is used as a
redundant pair, only slots AB, CD, EF, and GH can be used as
redundant pairs. Flat and round cables are used for redundancy. Flat
cables have two connectors at one end. These two connectors connect
to the adjacent controller slots. For the round cable version, two short
cables are connected from the two adjacent controller slots to a special
connection board. The third connector on this board is used to connect
to the FlexTerm. This connector board also has a jumper between pins
7 and 8 to indicate to the controller that it is redundant.
time an FIC is removed from the FlexTerm. Also, if an Instrument High
or Low alarm is generated on a redundant controller pair, the redundant
controller will take over, assuming that the A/D on the primary controller
has failed. If the controller switchover was for one of these reasons, the
alarm indication on the ControlFile Status Screen can be cleared by
rebooting the redundant controller.
Instrument HIGH and LOW alarms must be configured before the
redundant controllers will switchover in case of a controller A/D fault.
Hardware alarms from the controllers are prioritized. If both controllers
have active alarms, the controller with the lowest priority alarm will take
over as primary controller.
SSC LEDs
SSC Jumpers
The jumpers of all Controller Processor cards (except MPC II) are
essentially identical. See the jumper description later in this section.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-27
SSC Fuses
Figure 4.3.10 shows SSC fuse locations. Table 4.3.10 gives fuse data.
F4
F2
F1
Figure 4.3.10. SSC Fuse Locations

Table 4.3.10. SSC Fuses
Card
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
1984--1371--000x
1984--1442--000x
F1
F2
G09140--0016
AGC 1/2
312.500
1/2 A 250 V Quick Acting
F4
G09140--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250V Regular
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-28
CC (Contact Controller Processor)

The Contact Controller Processor (CC) is superseded by the
MultiPurpose (MPC) Controller Processor (1984--2500--000x). There
are two CC models:
D
1984--1445--000x marked CONTACT I/O PROCESSOR on the

PWA
1984--1374--000x marked CONTACT PROCESSOR on the
PWA

Table 4.3.11. Contact Controller Processor Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
Characteristics
1984--2500--000x
1984--1445--000x
CONTACT PROCESSOR
1984--2500--000x
1984--1374--000x
CONTACT I/O PROCESSOR
The Contact Controller Processor has no analog circuitry, but it does

have eight RS-422 communications ports communicating to two contact
FICs in parallel. The Contact Processor can control two Contact
FlexTerms, thus having a total of 96 contact modules with eight Contact
FICs on each. Contact FICs monitor and control up to six optical isolator
modules each. These modules can be AC or DC, in various voltage
ranges.
NOTE: This card and image will only work with a standard I/O contact
FlexTerm.
Communication: Communication with up to 16 Contact FICs is
handled by the four dual port serial communication converters that
transfer the parallel data from the data bus to serial RS-422 data.
Redundancy: The Contact Controller can be installed in any slot A
through H. When a Contact Controller is used as a Redundant pair, only
slots AB, CD, EF, and GH can be used as redundant pairs. Flat and
round cables are used for redundancy. Flat cables have two connectors
at one end. These two connectors attach to the adjacent controller slots.
For the round cable version, two short cables are connected from the
two adjacent controller slots to a special connection board. The third
connector on this board is used to attach to the FlexTerm. This
connector board also has a jumper between pins 7 and 8 to indicate to
the controller that it is redundant.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-29

time an FIC is removed from the FlexTerm. The alarm indication on the
ControlFile Status Screen can be cleared by rebooting the redundant
controller. Hardware alarms from the controllers are prioritized. If both
controllers have active alarms, the controller with the lowest priority
alarm will take over as primary controller.
CC LEDs
CC Fuse
Figure 4.3.11 shows the location of the fuse on the Contact Controller
Processor. Table 4.3.12 gives fuse data.
F4
Figure 4.3.11. Contact Controller Processor Fuse Location

Table 4.3.12. Contact Controller Processor Fuse
Card
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
1984--1374--000x
1984--1445--000x
F4
G09140--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250V Regular
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-30

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller Processor)
The Multiplexer Controller Processor (MUX) and the Programmable
Logic Controller Processor (PLC) use the same card:
D
1984--1494--0001 marked MULTIPLEXER PROCESSOR on the

PWA.
It is superseded by the MultiPurpose Controller Processor (MPC)

(1984--2500--0005).
Table 4.3.13. MUX and PLC Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
Characteristics
1984--2500--0005
1984--1494--000x1
Multiplexer (MUX) or
The card has two full duplex RS-422 communications ports and no
analog circuitry.
MUX: As a MUX, the RS-422 ports are used to communicate with the
Multiplexer FlexTerm. Each Multiplexer FlexTerm accommodates 100
inputs. An additional oscillator is used exclusively on the Multiplexer
Processor to set up the 9600 Baud communication rate to the FlexTerm.
The field inputs may be TCs, RTDs ,Voltage, and 4--20 mA. The
Controller can scan all 100 inputs from the FlexTerm approximately
once every 7 seconds.
PLC: As a PLC, the RS-422 ports are used to communicate with the
PLC FlexTerm. The PLC FlexTerm changes the RS-422 protocol to
RS-232. The FlexTerm can support RS-422 communications to the PLC
bus as well. The PLC communicates at 9600 baud with the FlexTerm.
Redundancy: The MUX or PLC can be installed in any slot A through
H. It cannot be made redundant either as a MUX or as a PLC.
MUX and PLC LEDs

RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-31
MUX and PLC Fuse

Figure 4.3.12 shows the location of the fuse on the card. Table 4.3.14
gives fuse data.
F4
Figure 4.3.12. MUX and PLC Fuse Location

Table 4.3.14. MUX and PLC Fuse
Card
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
1984--1494--000x
F4
G09140--0041
MTH 5
312005
5 A 250V Regular
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-32
Controller Processor LEDs

The LED function of all Controller Processor cards is essentially
identical. Some of the cards have two red LEDs at the top to indicate
the condition of the + and -- 12 volt fuses.
Controller Processor LED Sequence on Power Up

When the Controller Processor switch is placed in the ENABLE position,
the Power Up Diagnostics sequence begins. In case of a failure of any
of the tests, the sequence stops and begins again. The sequence stops
at the fault indication. The red LED (card fault) will remain on, and the
green LED will not come on at all. This process will continue until the
controller is replaced or the test finally passes.
If the Controller Processor green LED (card enabled) lights and then
goes out and the red LED comes back on, this indicates that the
Controller Processor has passed the power-up diagnostics but the
operating program has not been downloaded to the Coordinator
Processor from the NV Memory. There may be a problem with the
Coordinator Processor, NV Memory, configuration data, or else there
may be no image present to be downloaded.
If the green and the yellow LEDs come on for about one second and
then the diagnostic cycle starts again, the Controller Processor is
waiting for the image from the Coordinator Processor. There may be a
problem with the Coordinator Processor or the NV Memory.
If the alarm Saved Configuration for Different Node is generated, this
indicates that the Controller Processor configuration image stored in the
NV Memory is for a different node number and the Coordinator
Processor will not allow the Controller Processor to start up with an
incorrect image.
A Wipe Bubble or Kill Controller command must be used to clear the
configuration from the NV Memory before the controller will operate. If
you wish to start up the Controller Processor, it is first necessary to
clear the NV Memory image by using the Wipe Bubble command. This
is done on the command console screen by typing:
[W] [B] [=] [X] [Y] [ENTER]
(X=Node, and Y=controller slot).
Place the Controller Processor switch to DISABLE to clear the NV
Memory. Place the Controller Processor switch to ENABLE to start
properly with 100% free space.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-33
Table 4.3.15 shows the LED status for Controller Processor Faults.
Table 4.3.15. Controller Processor Fault Indications
Yellow LED
Conditions
OFF
OFF
Fault Condition
CPU Test Fault
ON
OFF
ON
Boot ROM Checksum Fault
OFF
OFF
ON
Vector Test Fault
ON
ON
OFF
Watchdog Timer
OFF
ON
OFF
Nondestructive RAM
ON
ON
ON
Destructive RAM Test or EDAC Fault
OFF
ON
ON
Sync Bus Test Levels 1 & 2 and Checks on Interrupts
ON
MPC, CC, MUX, and PLC Controller Processor LEDs

Figure 4.3.13 shows the LEDs, Enable Disable Switch, and test points
for the MultiPurpose, Contact, Multiplexer, and PLC Controller
Processor cards.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-34
LEDs
Block Evaluation
(DS8)
CP Access
(DS7)
Y
Y
Interrupt
(DS6)
5 V Fuse Blown
(DS3)
R
R
G
The Coordinator Processor is accessing the Contact

Processors RAM memory and transferring configuration
and dynamic data to the NV Memory. If the Contact
Processor loses memory, current data is quickly reloaded
from NV Memory.
The Contact Processor is resetting its watchdog timer to
prevent timing out or to acknowledge the synchronizing
clock pulse.
Replace Fuse F4 (Supplies 5 VDC to the Contact
Processor).
Card Fault
(DS2)
A fault has been detected on the Contact Processor, or

the ENABLE/DISABLE Switch is in the DISABLE
position.
If the switch is enabled and this LED is on, replace the
Contact Processor.
Card Enable
(DS1)
The ENABLE/DISABLE Switch is enabled and no

hardware faults are detected on the Contact Processor.
ENABLE
DISABLE
The microprocessor is evaluating an input or output block.

With redundant Contact Processors, this LED indicates
which card is active.
ENABLE/DISABLE Switch
Test Points
Yellow
Brown
+5 V ( 0.1 V)
Ground Return
Figure 4.3.13. MPC, CC , MUX, and PLC Controller Processor LEDs and Test Points
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-35
MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor LEDs

Figure 4.3.14 shows LEDs, Enable/Disable switch, and test points for
the MultiLoop and Single-Strategy Controller Processor cards.
LEDs
12 V Fuse Blown
(DS10)
Replace Fuse F1 (supplies --12 VDC to the card).
+12 V Fuse Blown

(DS9)
Replace Fuse F2 (supplies +12 VDC to the card).
Block Evaluation
(DS8)
The microprocessor is evaluating an input or output block.

With redundant MultiLoop processors, this LED indicates
which one is active.
CP Access
(DS7)
The Coordinator Processor is accessing the MultiLoop

Processor RAM Memory and transferring configuration
and dynamic data to the NV Memory. If the MultiLoop
Processor loses memory, current data is quickly reloaded
from Nonvolatile Memory.
Interrupt
(DS6)
The MultiLoop Processor is resetting its watchdog timer

either to prevent timing out or to acknowledge the
synchronizing clock pulse.
R
Y
Y
Y
R
R
G
5 V Fuse Blown
(DS3)
Card Fault
(DS2)
ENABLE
DISABLE
Card Enable
(DS1)
Replace Fuse F4 (Supplies 5 VDC to the MultiLoop

Processor).
A fault has been detected on the MultiLoop Processor or
the ENABLE/DISABLE Switch is in the disable position.
If the switch is enabled and this LED is on, replace the
MultiLoop Processor.
The ENABLE/DISABLE Switch is enabled and no
hardware faults are detected on the MultiLoop Processor.
ENABLE/DISABLE Switch
Test Points
Yellow
5 V ( 0.1 V)
Red
12 V ( 0.1 V)
Brown
Ground Return
Figure 4.3.14. MultiLoop and Single-Strategy Controller Processor LEDs and Test Points
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-36
Controller Processor Enable/Disable Switch

The ENABLE/DISABLE switch can be used as follows during operation:
D
If the switch is disabled on the primary card with a redundant

backup present, the primary card goes out of service. The
backup card takes over processing, at which time the primary
card can be removed.
NOTE: Before removing the primary CP card, first disable the
Nonvolatile Memory card and the secondary CP card. For more
information on removing and installing cards, see SV: 9-1.
RS3: ControlFiles
If the switch is disabled on a redundant backup, the backup

ceases to perform background tests and tells the Coordinator
Processor that it is out of service. It can return to backup status
after it passes power-up diagnostic tests and data is downloaded
from the NV Memory.
If the switch is disabled on a primary card with no backup
present, all communication between this Controller Processor
and the Coordinator Processor halts. Any links from this
Controller Processor to another Controller Processor will not be
serviced. Processing resumes when the switch is returned to
ENABLE, but only after the card passes power-up diagnostic
tests and data is downloaded from the NV Memory. Failure on
one Controller Processor does not affect other Controller
Processors or PeerWay communications.
SV: 4-3-37
Controller Processor Jumpers

Each Controller Processor has jumpers to determine hardware and
software functions. Most jumpers are hardwired and should not be
adjusted. Other jumpers can be adjusted.
NOTE: MPC II and MPC5 jumpers differ from those used on the other
Controller Processor cards. See pages 4-3-15 through 4-3-14 for more
jumper information on MPC II and MPC5 cards.
A Controller Processor must have the correct software image to
communicate with the desired I/O, or to utilize special software
programs. Software images are downloaded from the NV memory to the
MPC card. The Controller Processor card is jumpered to receive
specific images. Figure 4.3.15 shows the locations of the software
Image and communication rate jumpers. Table 4.3.16 and Table 4.3.17
show the jumper positions.
HD24
HD23
HD22
HD21
HD8
HD7
HD6
Figure 4.3.15. Controller Processor Software and Communication Rate Jumper Locations
Standard images are included with the $$CPxxxx Plant Program file.
Additional images are loaded from the console into the CP separately
from the $$CPxxxx file. The first file loaded into the CP after the
$$CPxxxx file is called additional image 1. The second file loaded into
the CP after the $$CPxxxx field is additional image 2, and so on. The
number of additional images available for a CP depends on the system
configuration.
The ControlFile Status screen shows the images loaded into a CP. The
Jumper Code field is always blank for an MPC I or an MPC II operating
as an MPC I.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-38
Table 4.3.16. Image Jumper Positions (Not for MPC II or MPC5)
Image
Jumper HD6
Jumper HD7
Jumper HD8
Contact
2--3
2--3
1--2
Multiplexer
2--3
1--2
1--2
Additional Image #1
1--2
1--2
1--2
Additional Image #2
1--2
2--3
2--3
Additional Image #3
1--2
2--3
1--2
Additional Image #4
1--2
1--2
2--3
Table 4.3.17. Image Jumper Positions for MLC and SS

Image
Jumper HD6
Jumper HD7
Jumper HD8
MLC (MultiLoop Controller)
2--3
2--3
2--3
SS (Single Strategy)
2--3
2--3
2--3
NOTE: A Controller Processor must be set to the proper

communications (Baud) rate for the I/O in use. Table 4.3.18 shows the
jumper settings for 10.4K baud communications and for industry
standard communications.
Table 4.3.18. Communications Jumper Positions (Not for MPC5)
Jumper
HD21
Jumper
HD22
Jumper
HD23
Jumper
HD24
Fisher-Rosemount
10.4K Baud
2--3
2--3
2--3
2--3
Industry Standard
(9600 Baud)
1--2
1--2
1--2
1--2
Communication Rate
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-39
Controller Processor Redundancy

Controller Processors may be used in redundant pairs with one being
the primary, and the other the backup. A controller switch causes the
roles to reverse: the primary takes up the backup function and the
backup takes on the primary function.
A controller switch can occur when:
D
The user performs a manual switch from the ControlFile Status

screen.
The primary Controller Processor no longer communicates with
the backup Controller Processor.
The primary Controller Processor communicates with the backup
Controller Processor but has a higher priority error condition than
the backup Controller Processor. Controller Processor error
conditions, in priority order, are:
ROM checksum error
A/D problems (MLC and SS only)
FIC communication channel failure
FIC communication error
NVRAM write error
RAM EDAC error (MPC and MPC II only)
Image error (MPC5 only)
Analog high/low alarms (MLC and SS only)
To prevent continuous Controller Processor switching, a mechanism

limits switches to no more than three in a 5.5 minute period. Another
mechanism limits switching due to consecutive instances of the same
alarm. If a specific block alarm causes a controller switch, another
instance of the same alarm during the next 10 seconds cannot cause
another controller switch.
The use of redundant Controller Processors requires the use of an
additional cable and the setting of jumpers on the Comm Connect card,
Contact FlexTerms, and the comm termination panels.
NOTE: When a redundancy switch occurs with an MPC5 Controller
Processor, the controller that was formerly primary will reboot and the
Control File Status (CFS) screen will momentarily display the message
Redun Cont Missing and a 1025 hardware alarm will be
generated. This is an intentional change in system operation for the
MPC5.
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: 4-3-40
RS3: ControlFiles
SV: Index-1
RS3t
Service Manual
Index
Numbers
1012 V0 0444 AA, 6-6-11
1022 A0 0242 AA, 6-6-11
1026 A0 0242 AA, 6-6-11
1032 H0 0242 AA, 6-6-11
1034 H0 0242 AA, 6-6-11
1072 D3 0510 AA, 6-6-11
1072 F3 0510 AA, 6-6-11
10P
5037000x, 6-6-14
50400006, 4-3-2
50450001, 3-7-10
5049000x, 6-6-14
50660002, 3-1-27
50840004, 3-1-14, 3-1-16, 3-1-17
50842004, 3-1-14, 3-1-15
5087000x, 4-2-20
50930001, 2-3-2
50960001, 2-3-2
5270 0001, 6-3-1, 6-3-3, 6-3-4
52790001, 2-1-3
5280000x, 3-5-2
52820001, 3-7-7, 3-7-10
5285000x, 3-1-13
52960001, 4-1-1
53190004, 6-4-48
5319000x, 6-4-29
5320000x, 5-4-2
5324000x, 3-1-8
5349000x, 6-4-29
5352 0006, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
53520006, 6-6-7
5355 0006, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
53910001, 7-6-7
54040004, 6-4-44, 6-6-10
5408 0004, 6-4-46
54080004, 6-6-10
5409000x, 1-2-32
54340xxx, 7-2-3
54440002, 5-1-24, 5-1-35
54470002, 5-1-41
54500005, 5-1-35
54530001, 5-1-4
54560001, 5-1-4
5477000x, 6-4-4
RS3: Service Manual
54850001, 5-4-20
5488 0001, 5-4-13
5503000x, 1-2-28
55270010, 3-7-27
55270011, 3-7-27
5590 xxxx, 5-1-4
56120001, 3-1-26
56450002, 1-2-28
5645000x, 1-2-18
5658000x, 1-2-2
5662000x, 1-1-1
5664000x, 1-2-13
5665000x, 3-5-2
56700015, 3-4-7
5685000x, 3-5-23
57070001, 6-4-39
57240002, 5-1-35
57520007, 4-3-2
57560001, 1-2-32
57700005, 6-4-44, 6-6-10
58050001, 3-5-2
58570001, 3-5-2
1166-0505--0021, 3-6-23
0524--0010, 3-1-31
0524--00xx, 3-2-10
1167-0016--0002, 2-1-12
0016--0006, 9-3-3
0016--0007, 2-1-12
0016--000x, 2-1-12
1216/CW--ROS4, 6-6-3
12P, 0373x032, 3-1-26, 3-4-3
1301/PZ, 6-6-3
16--Point Input FIMs, 6-4-44
16--Point Output FIMs, 6-4-46
1822 C0 0030 CC, 6-6-8
1842 C0 0030 CC, 6-6-8
1862 L0 0060 CC, 6-6-8
1872 L0 0060 WW, 6-6-8
1882 L0 0060 UU, 6-6-8
1882 L0 0060 WW, 6-6-8
1984-0023--000x, 4-1-1
0158--00xx, 1-4-9
0158--10xx, 1-4-9
0158--20xx, 1-4-7
Index
SV: Index-2
0283--000x, 1-4-3
0298--000x, 1-2-2
0303--000x, 1-1-1
0317--000x, 3-6-20
0359--000X, 9-1-3
0360--000x, 5-2-22
0361--00xx, 5-2-22
0373--00xx, 1-4-3
0373--xxxx, 1-3-9
0390--000x, 1-2-13
0393--000x, 1-2-23
0484--0002, 2-1-3, 2-3-2
0488--000x, 2-1-3
0489--000x, 2-1-3
0498--0005, 6-3-28
0510--000x, 3-6-16
0514--000x, 2-2-8
0533--000x, 3-6-9
0543--000x, 3-6-6
0605--000x, 5-3-4
0607-0003, 5-3-16
0009, 5-3-16
000x, 5-3-14, 8-4-9
0620--000x, 5-3-2
0628--000x, 5-3-5
0657--000x, 3-2-5
0660--000x, 3-7-7, 3-7-14
0672--000x, 3-3-11
0744--000x, 3-7-5
1002--000x, 3-3-7
1011--000x, 3-7-46
1017--000x, 3-7-20
1045--000x, 3-7-15
1046--000x, 1-2-20
1050--000x, 3-3-14
1053--000x, 3-3-12
1064--000x, 3-7-42
1089--000x, 1-2-26
1129--000x, 5-5-34
1137--000x, 3-7-20
1140--000x, 3-7-52
1144--000x, 1-4-3
1147--000x, 3-7-60, 3-7-62
1161--000x, 3-7-30
1167--000x, 3-7-60, 3-7-62
1175--000x, 5-2-2, 5-2-7
1176--000x, 5-5-2
1189--0001, 2-2-13
1191--0001, 2-2-3
1192--0001, 2-2-3
1193--0002, 2-2-6
1194--0002, 2-2-6
1195--000x, 2-2-7
1195--xxxx, 2-2-5
1196--000x, 2-2-7
1196--xxxx, 2-2-5
1198--000x, 2-2-9
1224--000x, 4-2-39
1231--0001, 4-1-7
1240--000x, 4-2-20
RS3: Service Manual
1243--0001,
1249--000x,
1273--000x,
1274--000x,
1283--000x,
1288--000x,
1300--000x,
1304--000x,
1321--000x,
1325--000x,
1334--000x,
1336--000x,
1356--000x,
1362--000x,
1364--000x,
1371--000x,
1374--000x,
1394--000x,
1402--000x,
1432--000x,
1439--000x,
1442--000x,
1445--000x,
1448--000x,
1460--000x,
1463--000x,
1469--000x,
1483--000x,
1490--000x,
1494--000x,
1502--000x,
1505--000x,
1525--000x,
1540--000x,
1543--000x,
1547--000x,
1587--000x,
1594--000x,
1598--000x,
1631--000x,
1632--000x,
1634--000x,
1651--0006,
1651--0013,
1651--0027,
1651--00xx,
1653--000x,
1654--000x,
1693--000x,
1694--000x,
1695--000x,
1731--000x,
1754--000x,
1776--000x,
1779--000x,
1782--000x,
1803--000x,
1825--000x,
1872--000x,
1915--000x,
1921--000x,
4-1-7
4-3-20
5-5-21
1-4-5
1-2-9
5-2-13
5-5-4
5-2-23
5-2-12
5-5-15
5-5-27
5-2-2
5-5-5
5-5-33
5-2-28
4-3-25
4-3-28
5-5-8
4-2-2
4-2-13
4-3-20
4-3-25
4-3-28
4-2-20
5-2-23
5-5-8
5-5-27
4-2-39
5-5-21
4-3-30
4-2-2
4-2-13
5-5-27
3-7-30
5-1-57
3-7-60, 3-7-69
8-3-1
4-2-20
4-2-39
3-1-8
3-1-9
3-1-6
3-1-30
3-1-30
3-1-30
3-1-31
3-1-8, 9-1-5
3-1-6
3-1-8
3-1-9
3-1-7
3-2-4
3-5-18
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-6
3-5-18
3-2-5
3-2-8
3-2-4
3-2-6
Index
SV: Index-3
1927--000x,
1928--000x,
1934--000x,
1970--000x,
1975--000x,
1978--0004,
1978--000x,
1981--000x,
1989--000x,
2154--000x,
2171--000x,
2231--0001,
2307--000x,
2321--000x,
2347--00xx,
2350--000x,
2372--000x,
2386--000x,
2402--000x,
2409--000x,
2412--000x,
2415--0001,
2441--000x,
2448--000x,
2456--000x,
2457--000x,
2458--000x,
2459--000x,
2461--000x,
2462--0001,
2466--000x,
2483--000x,
2491--000x,
2494--0001,
2497--000x,
2500--000x,
2503--000x,
2504--9002,
2507--0002,
2507--000x,
2510--0001,
2510--000x,
2512--000x,
2518--000x,
2519--000x,
2526--000x,
2530--0001,
2533--0001,
2533--000x,
2535--9901,
2543--000x,
2546--000x,
2551--000x,
2552--000x,
2576--000x,
2597--000x,
2616--000x,
2618--000x,
2622--0001,
2624--0001,
2627--0001,
3-5-23
3-5-2, 3-5-15
3-2-4
3-1-12
3-1-13
3-1-19
3-1-14, 3-1-16
3-1-13
3-5-23
9-1-4, 9-3-2
7-3-3
2-2-3, 2-3-2
3-5-2, 3-5-13
3-1-10
4-2-39
2-2-8
3-1-6
3-1-6
5-4-13
5-4-2
5-5-13
5-1-54
5-4-20
5-1-54
5-3-10
5-3-7
5-3-9
5-2-16
5-1-53
7-4-5
5-3-10
5-1-35
5-1-4
5-1-13
5-1-2
4-3-2
3-7-39
7-4-3, 7-4-5
7-4-3
7-4-8
7-4-3, 7-4-5
7-4-8
5-1-54
5-1-24
5-1-35
5-1-2
7-4-1
7-4-3
7-4-4
7-4-3, 7-4-5
5-1-4
5-1-41
5-1-18
6-2-2, 6-2-9
5-2-2, 5-2-4
5-1-2
5-1-57
5-1-57
7-4-5, 7-4-6
7-4-6
7-4-1
RS3: Service Manual
2628--x006,
2633--000x,
2662--000x,
2731--000x,
2780--000x,
2783--9045,
2837--000x,
2844--000x,
2859--00xx,
2871--000x,
2889--0004,
2889--1004,
2891--000x,
3004--000x,
3005--9030,
3017--000x,
3023--000x,
3028--000x,
3038--000x,
3040--000x,
3062--00xx,
3065--00xx,
3067--xxxx,
3100--000x,
3202--0010,
3211--0001,
3211--0002,
3214--0002,
3222--0004,
3222--1004,
3222--2004,
3223--xxxx,
3245--0001,
3246--000x,
3261--0002,
3267--xxxx,
3270--0001,
3278--000x,
3286--000x,
3287--9500,
3289--000x,
3301--000x,
3318--000x,
3389--000x,
3442--0003,
3500--000x,
3505--000x,
4064--000x,
4068--000x,
4080--000x,
4121--000x,
4124--000x,
4127--000x,
4164--000x,
4167--000x,
4186--00xx,
4195--000x,
4195--00xx,
4196--0001,
4196--000x,
4205--000x,
7-4-3, 7-4-5
3-1-27
3-1-13
5-1-46, 8-2-1
3-5-2, 3-5-11
5-1-4
3-5-16
3-1-10
7-3-6
3-1-12
3-1-14, 3-1-16, 3-1-18, 3-1-21
3-1-14, 3-1-22
9-1-4
1-2-18
3-1-27
3-1-6
1-2-18
4-1-1
3-1-11
3-1-11
5-3-3
3-1-35
3-1-22
3-5-2, 3-5-10
3-7-27
2-2-3
2-2-6
2-2-6
3-1-14, 3-1-16, 3-1-17
3-1-14, 3-1-20
3-1-14, 3-1-15
3-1-17
3-1-27
3-1-27
7-4-3, 7-4-5, 7-4-8
3-1-20
4-1-5
6-2-11
3-1-27
3-1-27
3-5-23
3-7-52
3-6-2
3-5-23
1-2-14
3-5-2
4-2-7
4-2-20
4-3-2
6-3-1, 6-3-46, 6-6-7
6-3-1, 6-3-28
6-3-1, 6-3-28
6-3-1, 6-3-3, 6-3-14
4-2-20
6-3-1, 6-3-41
6-3-28
6-3-18, 6-3-33
6-4-25
6-3-18
6-3-33
6-2-2, 6-2-6
Index
SV: Index-4
4282--000x, 6-3-1, 6-3-23
4302--000x, 1-2-28
4309--0004, 1-2-28
4329--000x, 1-2-28
4344--000x, 6-3-1, 6-5-2
4350--000x, 1-2-28
4383--000x, 6-4-17
4398--000x, 6-4-39
4409--000x, 6-2-2, 6-2-9
4414--000x, 6-4-44
4418--000x, 6-4-46
4433--000x, 1-2-28
4438--000x, 7-6-3
3.5--inch floppy disk drive, 3-5-16
32--Point Input FIM, 6-4-48
3M Static Pad, 9-3-2
4--20 mA ANALOG INPUT FIELD INTERFACE
MODULE, 6-4-44, 6-4-46
4--20 MA FEM, calibrating, 8-4-7
4--20 MUX MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-3-9
5 1/4--inch floppy disk drive, 3-5-18
50P, 0589 0103, 6-2-6, 6-2-15
551 Barco CRT, 3-1-35
55P
0144x022, 3-1-26, 3-4-3
0416X012, 9-1-3
601077, 6-6-3
68020 OI Processor, 3-7-30
68040 OI Processor, 3-7-27
70983--, 0039, 9-3-2
7122 Conrac CRT, 3-1-30
7211 Conrac CRT, 3-2-8
7241 Conrac CRT, 3-1-30
7900-0317--0023, 3-2-8
408--0001, 7-5-6
A
A Bus DC Power Distribution Cable, 1-4-9
AC Distribution Block, 1-2-28
fuse, 1-2-37
AC distribution switch assembly, 1-2-18
AC Entrance Panel, 1-1-1
dual feed, 1-1-4
single feed, 1-1-3
AC input, 1-1-1
AC/DC Power Supply, 1-3-1
(with battery backup), 1-2-2
fuses, 1-2-8
LEDs, 1-2-7
(without battery backup), 1-2-13
measuring output current, 1-2-15
battery and charger replacement, 9-2-2
checking battery, 9-1-27
installing, 1-3-1
with battery backup, alarm contacts, 1-2-6
without battery backup
alarm contacts, 1-2-16
RS3: Service Manual
LEDs, 1-2-16
AC/DC Power Supply to DC Bus Cable, 1-4-3
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply, 1-2-26
fuses, 1-2-27
active hardware alarms, checking, 9-1-13
alarm contacts, AC/DC Power Supply
with battery backup, 1-2-6
without battery backup, 1-2-16
Alarm Output Board, 3-7-5
Alarm Output Panel, 3-7-5
alphanumeric keyboard, 3-1-6
Pedestal Command Console, 3-2-5
Analog Card Cage, 5-1-2
address label, 5-1-3
FICs, 5-1-23
hardware, 5-1-1
Analog Extender Card, 5-1-53
Analog FIC, 5-1-24
fuses, 5-1-34
jumpers, 5-1-31
LEDs, 5-1-30
redundancy, 5-1-28
Analog FIC Extender Card, 5-5-33
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard,
5-1-35
fuses, 5-1-37
jumpers, 5-1-37
LEDs, 5-1-36
Analog I/O, troubleshooting procedures, 10-5-8
ANALOG I/O CAGE MOTHERBOARD, 5-1-2
Analog I/O FIC, calibrating, 8-5-1
Analog Input FIC, 5-5-7
ANALOG INPUT NON--ISOLATED, 5-5-8
ANALOG MARSHALING PANEL, 5-3-7
Analog Marshaling Panel, 5-1-54
ANALOG MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-1-54
Analog Output FIC, 5-5-20
ANALOG OUTPUT ISOLATED, 5-5-27
ANALOG TRANSFER, 5-1-13
Analog Transfer Card, 5-1-13
fuse, 5-1-17
LEDs and test points, 5-1-16
Analog FIM, redundancy, 6-4-43
automatic, memory dump, 10-3-12
Auxiliary Terminal Block, 5-1-57
B
B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable, 1-4-9
Balance Mode, 5-1-19
Barco CD 551
Service Manual, 3-1-35
User Manual, 3-1-35
Basic Command Console, 3-2-1, 3-2-2
parts replacement, 9-2-5
BATTERY CHARGER AND DISPLAY
DRIVER/ALARM, 1-2-9
Battery Charger Card, 1-2-9
fuse, 1-2-12
jumpers and test points, 1-2-11
Index
SV: Index-5
Battery Replacement, battery charger card, 1-2-12
battery replacement
OI NV RAM, 3-7-81
OI NV RAM Card, 9-2-4
RAM NV Memory, 4-2-49
Black Box
Cable Assembly, 7-3-5
Data Converter, 7-3-5
BLOCK CONFIGURATOR SWITCH MATRIX, 3-2-4
broadcast messages, 10-2-14
bubble. See NV Memory
Bubble Nonvolatile Memory. See NV Memory,
bubble
Bubble NV Memory. See NV Memory, bubble
Bus A/B DC Power Distribution Cable, 1-4-7
Bypass Mode, 5-1-19
C
C
12243, 5-2-20, 6-3-38

1285, 2-1-12
12918, 9-1-3
52932--0002, 4-2-49
C--1404S, 3-1-27
C52932, --0002, 3-7-81
C53394--, 0250--0005, 5-1-55
cabinet, electronics, 3-7-2
cabinet door filter, cleaning, 9-1-9
cabinet fan screen, cleaning, 9-1-9
cabinet filter, cleaning, 9-1-8
cabinet surface, cleaning, 9-1-11
cable
A Bus DC Power Distribution, 1-4-9
AC/DC Power Supply to DC Bus, 1-4-3
B Bus DC Power Distribution, 1-4-9
Bus A/B DC Power Distribution, 1-4-7
DC Bus to DC Bus, 1-4-3
DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper, 1-3-9
fiber optic, 2-2-13
Keyboard Interface to Dual Keyswitch, 3-1-17
Keyboard Interface to Keyswitch, 3-1-21
Keyboard Interface to Remote Keylock, 3-1-20,
3-1-22
Opto/Electric, 2-2-7
QBUS Board 1 to Board 2, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
QBUS Boards to MP, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
twinax PeerWay, 2-1-9
calibrating
4--20 MA FEM, 8-4-7
Analog I/O FIC, 8-5-1
Input Points, 8-5-8
Isolated Output Points, 8-5-7
Non--Isolated Output Points, 8-5-6
Output Points, 8-5-3, 8-6-1, 8-6-4
Multiplexer FEMs, 8-4-2
MUX FEM, 8-4-1
Pulse Input FIC, 8-3-1
RS3: Service Manual
Serial I/O FIC, 8-1-1

Analog Input Points, 8-1-5
Analog Output Points, 8-1-2
Temperature Input FIC, 8-2-1
Thermocouple FEM, 8-4-3
Voltage Input FEM, 8-4-3
calibration, checking, 9-1-18
CC, 4-3-28
LEDs, 4-3-33
fuse, 4-3-29
CF TERMINATOR II, 4-1-5
Character Graphics Video Generator, 3-7-42
fuse, 3-7-45
LEDs, 3-7-44
checking
4--20 MA FEM, 8-4-8
AC/DC Power Supply battery, 9-1-27
active hardware alarms, 9-1-13
Analog I/O FIC
Input Points, 8-5-9
Output Points, 8-5-4
Console Power Regulator Card voltages, 9-1-24
I/O calibration, 9-1-18
LEDs, 9-1-12
RTD FEM calibration, 8-4-9
Serial I/O FIC
Analog Input Points, 8-1-6
Analog Output Points, 8-1-3
System Power Supply voltages, 9-1-26
Thermocouple FEM, 8-4-5
Thermocouple Sensor calibration, 8-2-6
Voltage Input FEM, 8-4-5
voltages, 9-1-19
cleaner kit, tape drive, 9-1-4
cleaning
cabinet door filter, 9-1-9
cabinet fan screen, 9-1-9
cabinet filters and screens, 9-1-8
cabinet surfaces, 9-1-11
Command Console Fan filter, 9-1-6
Command Console glare filter, 9-1-14
console fan filter, 9-1-6
ControlFile Fan Filter, 9-1-9
floppy disk drives, 9-1-4
OI Card Cage filter, 9-1-10
tape drives, 9-1-4
trackball, 9-1-5
Cold Junction Compensator, 5-1-57
color codes, DC wiring, 1-4-10
COMM TERM PNL II, 6-2-2
COMM TERMINATION PNL, 6-2-2
Command Console
cleaning CRT, 9-1-14
degaussing CRT, 9-1-15
fan filter, 9-1-6
hard disk drive removal, 9-2-6
keyboard, tape, or floppy disk removal, 9-2-9
Command Entry Keyboard, Pedestal Command
Console, 3-2-4
Index
SV: Index-6
COMMAND ENTRY SWITCH MATRIX, 3-2-4
Communication Card, MUX, 5-3-5
communication wiring, Multipoint I/O, 6-1-10
Communications Connect Card, 5-1-4
Communications Connect Card II, 5-1-4, 5-1-10
jumpers, 5-1-10
Communications Connect Card III, 5-1-4
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V, 5-1-6
communication wiring, 5-1-7
jumpers, 5-1-8
Communications Connect Card IV, 5-1-4
Communications Connect Card V, 5-1-4
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT III, 5-1-4
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT IV, 5-1-4
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT V, 5-1-4
Communications FlexTerm, 5-4-2
Communications Register Unit, 7-5-6
Communications Termination Panel, 6-2-2
Configuration Keyboard, 3-1-6
Configure HIA Screen, 7-3-9
connector
fiber optic PeerWay, 2-2-13
twinaxial PeerWay, 2-1-12
Connector Crimp Tool, 2-1-12
Conrac 7122, 3-1-30
Conrac 7211
maintenance manual, 3-2-8
spare parts, 3-2-10
Conrac 7241, 3-1-30
components, 3-1-31
Installation and Operation Manual, 3-1-30
User Guide, 3-1-30
Conrac 7241 CRT
black video or black bars, 3-1-34
power--up diagnostics failures, 3-1-34
Scan Board adjustments, 3-1-33
Scan Board failures, 3-1-32
Console, CRT, 3-1-26
console
Basic Command, 3-2-1
diagnostic programs, 9-1-16
Hardened Command, 3-1-1
Memory Dump screen, 10-3-12
Multitube, 3-1-1
Off--Line Diagnostic screen, 10-3-8
off--line diagnostics, 9-1-17, 10-3-8
Pedestal, 3-2-1
power--up diagnostics, 10-3-3
troubleshooting procedures, 10-3-1
Console Card Cage. See OI Card Cage
console node address, 3-7-18
Console Off--Line Diagnostics screen, 10-3-8
Contact Card Cage, 5-2-1, 5-2-2, 5-2-4
FIC addressing, 5-2-5
fuse, 5-2-12
jumpers, 5-2-10
wiring, 5-2-6
Contact Card Cage Extender Card, 5-2-28
Contact Controller Processor. See CC
Contact FIC, 5-2-23
RS3: Service Manual
fuses, 5-2-27
jumpers, 5-2-26
LEDs, 5-2-25
Contact Field Interface Card, 5-2-23
CONTACT FIELD TERMINATION, 5-2-13
Contact FlexTerm, 5-2-2, 5-2-7
FIC addressing, 5-2-8
fuse, 5-2-12
jumpers, 5-2-10
Motherboard, 5-2-7
replacement, 9-2-13
wiring, 5-2-8
Contact FlexTerm Extender Card, 5-2-28
Contact FlexTerm II, 5-2-7
CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD, 5-2-7
CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD II, 5-2-7
Contact I/O, 5-2-23
CONTACT I/O PROCESSOR, 4-3-28
Contact Marshaling Panel, 5-2-16
fuse, 5-2-19
wiring, 5-2-17
CONTACT PROCESSOR, 4-3-28
Contact Termination Board, 5-2-13
fuse, 5-2-15
wiring, 5-2-14
Contact Termination Panel, 5-5-5
fuses, 5-5-6
ControlFile, 4-2-1
5 V DC Only Power Regulator, 4-2-7
fuse, 4-2-12
jumpers, 4-2-11
Card Cage, 4-1-1
jumpers, 4-1-3
Motherboard, Data Bus Terminators, 4-1-5
Power Regulator 5 and 12 V DC, 4-2-13
fuses, 4-2-19
jumpers, 4-2-18
Support Section, 4-2-1
troubleshooting, 10-4-1
ControlFile fan filter, cleaning, 9-1-9
CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR, 4-2-13
CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR 5V ONLY,
4-2-7
ControlFile Power Regulator Card
adjustment, 9-1-21
checking voltages, 9-1-19
ControlFile Status screen, 10-4-7
ControlFile Terminator Board, 4-1-7
ControlFile Terminator II, 4-1-5
Controller Processor, 4-3-1
Contact, 4-3-28
Enable/Disable Switch, 4-3-36
jumpers, 4-3-37
LED sequence on power up, 4-3-32
LEDs, 4-3-32
Multi--Loop, 4-3-20
MultiPurpose, 4-3-2
Single--Strategy, 4-3-25
MPC, 4-3-2
Index
SV: Index-7
Multiplexer, 4-3-30
Programmable Logic Controller, 4-3-30
redundancy, 4-3-39
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR, 4-2-20
Coordinator Processor. See CP
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR EXTENDER,
5-2-28
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR II, 4-2-20
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR IV, 4-2-20
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR IV+, 4-2-20
Cover Plate, DEC, 7-4-5
CP, 4-2-20
enable/disable switch, 4-2-29
fuses, 4-2-38
jumpers, 4-2-34
LED sequences, 4-2-31
LEDs, 4-2-29
redundancy, 4-2-27
test points, 4-2-29
CPI, 4-2-20
II, 4-2-20
IV, 4-2-20
IV+, 4-2-20
CP-I, 4-2-20
circuit description, 4-2-24
CP-II, 4-2-20
CP-IV, 4-2-20
CP-IV+, 4-2-20
CPD-1304, 3-1-27
1304S, 3-1-27
1430, 3-1-27
CPU Card, QBI, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
Crimp Tool Kit, 2-1-12
CRT
Barco 20, 3-1-35
Conrac 19, 3-1-30
Console, 3-1-26
Hitachi 21, 3-1-26
Iiama Vision Master 17, 3-1-26
Mag Innovision 15, 3-1-27
maintaining, 9-1-14
problems, 10-3-22
Sony 14, 3-1-27
ViewSonic 17, 3-1-26
Current MUX Marshaling Panel, 5-3-9
D
Data Bus Terminators, 4-1-5
DATAWAY TAP A, 2-1-3
DATAWAY TAP B, 2-1-3
daughterboard, 5-1-36
DC
color codes, 1-4-10
distribution cabling, 1-4-7
RS3: Service Manual
output card, 1-4-5

power distribution, 1-4-1
power distribution bus, 1-4-3
DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper Cable, 1-4-3
DC Distribution Block, 1-2-28
fuse, 1-2-37
DC OUTPUT, 1-4-5
DC Output Card, 1-4-5
fuses, 1-4-6
DC Power Distribution Bus, 1-4-3
DC/DC Power Supply, 1-2-23
fuses, 1-2-25
degaussing, Command Console CRT, 9-1-15
Degaussing Coil, 9-3-2
diagnosing
Console PeerWay problem, 10-2-36
ControlFile PeerWay problem, 10-2-37
multiple ControlFiles, 10-2-39
one ControlFile, 10-2-37
SCI PeerWay problem, 10-2-36
diagnostic programs, console, 9-1-16
Diogenes
Communication Converter Box, 7-5-7
Interface, 7-5-1
Interface Software, 7-5-5
TI Communications Card, 7-5-6
Direct Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-1, 6-3-3,
6-3-14
field wiring, 6-3-16
fuses, 6-3-22
input points, 6-3-20
installation, 6-3-16
jumpers, 6-3-21
labels, 6-3-18
output points, 6-3-20
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II, 6-3-1, 6-3-3,
6-3-4
field wiring, 6-3-9
fuse, 6-3-13
installation, 6-3-8
jumpers, 6-3-10
DIRECT DISCRETE TERMINATION PNL, 6-3-14
DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE, 6-3-46
Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM), 6-3-1,
6-3-46
DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE: HIGH
SIDE SWITCH, 6-3-46
DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE: LOW
SIDE SWITCH, 6-3-46
Discrete FIM
LED patterns, 6-3-51
LEDs, 6-3-50
online replacement, 6-3-48
precision, 6-3-49
redundancy, 6-3-48
Discrete I/O, 6-3-1, 6-3-2
Discrete Switch Panel, 5-2-22
Discrete Termination Panel
Direct, 6-3-14
Direct II, 6-3-4
High Density Isolated, 6-3-41
Index
SV: Index-8
Isolated, 6-3-28
Multi--FIM, 6-3-23
disk--only SCSI, 3-7-52, 3-7-57
distribution block
AC, 1-2-28
DC, 1-2-28
Distribution Blocks, 1-2-37
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel, 1-1-4
fuses, 1-1-5
dump
memory, 10-3-12
automatic, 10-3-12
viewing, 10-3-16
DVM, 9-3-2
E
EIA Options, SCI, 7-2-15
EIGHT LINE COMM CONNECT, 5-1-4
Elcon Intrinsically Safe Termination Panel, 6-6-3
Analog Applications, 6-6-9
Discrete Applications, 6-6-6
electrical PeerWay, 2-1-1
grounding, 2-1-7
termination, 2-1-11
Electrical Tap Box, 2-2-6
Electronics Cabinet, 3-7-2
Engineering Keyboard, 3-1-6
Enhanced Engineering Keyboard, 3-1-6
Ethernet
cable, 3-4-8
hubs, 3-4-11
Extender Card
Analog, 5-1-53
Analog FIC, 5-5-33
Contact Card Cage, 5-2-28
Contact FlexTerm, 5-2-28
MPC, 5-1-53
SIO, 5-1-53
F
FEM, 5-3-14
Thermocouple, 5-3-16
Universal Voltage, 5-3-16
Voltage, 5-3-16
fiber optic
cable and accessories, 2-2-13
Cable Tie Panel Assembly, 2-2-3
connector kit, 2-2-13
I/O Converter, 6-2-11
installing connectors, 2-2-13
Fiber Optic Cable Tie Panel Assembly, 2-2-3
Fiber Optic I/O Converter, 6-2-11
fiber optic PeerWay, troubleshooting cables,
10-2-42
Fiber Optic Power Meter, 9-3-3
RS3: Service Manual
FIBER OPTIC REPEATER, 2-2-8

Fiber Optic Source meter, 9-3-3
FIC, 5-1-23, 5-5-1
4--20 MA, 5-1-24
4--20 mA W/Smart Daughterboard, 5-1-35
Analog, 5-1-24
Analog Input, 5-5-7
Analog Output, 5-5-20
Detail screen, 10-5-18
Field I/O Status screen, 10-5-13
Isolated Analog Input, 5-5-15
Isolated Analog Output, 5-5-27
Non--Isolated Analog Input, 5-5-8
Non--Isolated Analog Output, 5-5-21
Pulse I/O, 5-1-41
restoring redundant, 10-5-2
RTD/TC, 5-1-46
Smart Transmitter, 5-5-13
Status screen, 10-5-13
TC/RTD, 5-1-46
Temperature Input, 5-1-46
FIC 2--IN 1--OUT/COMM EXTENDER BD, 5-1-53
FIC 4--20 MA, 5-1-24
FIC Detail screen, 10-5-18
field definitions, 10-5-18
FIC NON--ISOLATED INPUT, 5-5-8
Field I/O Status screen, 10-5-13
Field Interface Card. See FIC
Field Interface cards, 5-1-23
field wiring
Direct Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-16
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel, 6-3-43
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-31
Remote Communications Termination Panel I,
6-2-9
Remote Communications Termination Panel II,
6-2-6
filter
console fan, 9-1-6
replacement, 9-1-3
FIM, Discrete, 6-3-46
FIM Detail screen, 10-5-18
FIM Status screen, 10-5-13
FlexTerm
MUX, 5-3-2
replacement, 9-2-11
floppy disk drive, 3-5-16
3 1/2 inch, 3-5-16
5 1/4--inch, 3-5-18
cleaning, 9-1-4
Floppy Disk Power Supply, 3-3-14
fuses, 3-3-16
Floppy Drive Cleaner Kit, 9-1-4
FMS II Hubs, 3-4-12
Front End Modules (FEMs), 5-3-14
Fujitsu
DL2600, 3-6-9
DL3800, 3-6-2
DL4600, 3-6-6
DPL24C, 3-6-16
Index
SV: Index-9
fuse
CC, 4-3-29
MLC, 4-3-24
MPCI, 4-3-19
PLC, 4-3-31
SSC, 4-3-27
AC Distribution Block, 1-2-37
AC input, 1-1-5
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply, 1-2-27
Analog FIC, 5-1-34
5-1-37
Contact FIC, 5-2-27
Contact Marshaling Panel, 5-2-19
Contact Termination Board, 5-2-15
Contact Termination Panel, 5-5-6
ControlFile
CP, 4-2-38
DC Distribution Block, 1-2-37
DC/DC Power Supply, 1-2-25
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II, 6-3-13
Floppy Disk Power Supply, 3-3-16
Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-18
Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-32
Keyboard Interface, 3-1-25
MARK 1 Remote Power Supply, 1-2-31, 1-2-34
Monochrome Video Generator, 3-3-10
MPC, 4-3-19
MPCII, 4-3-19
MTCC Remote Power Supply, 1-2-19
MUX, 4-3-31
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-12
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-26
NV Memory
bubble, 4-2-53
RAM, 4-2-49
OI Power Supply, 3-7-24
OI Processor 68000, 3-7-38
OI Remote Power Supply, 1-2-20
Output Bypass Card, 5-1-22
PeerWay Buffer, 4-2-6
PeerWay Tap, 2-1-6
Pulse I/O FIC, 5-1-45
PX, 2-3-9
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card, 5-4-19
Smart Transmitter FIC, 5-5-14
fuse label, Remote I/O Power Supply, 1-2-28
RS3: Service Manual
fuses
AC/DC Power Supply, (with battery backup),
1-2-8
used in RS3 (list), A-1
G
G, 53373--0103, 6-2-6, 6-2-15
Grant Continuity Card, 7-4-8
grounding
electrical PeerWay, 2-1-7
Optical PeerWay, 2-2-10
tape drive, 3-5-24
H
hard disk, hardware, 3-5-2
Hardened Command Console, 3-1-1
HIA
Configure HIA Screen, 7-3-9
direct connection of PeerWays, 7-3-3
hardware, 7-3-1
HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly, 7-3-5
Link Cable, 7-3-3
modem, 7-3-5
OI NV Memory jumpering, 7-3-7
Status screen, 7-3-11
HIA Bubble Memory, 3-7-60
HIA Link Cable, 7-3-3
HIA Modem, 7-3-5
HIA Status screen, 7-3-11
HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly, 7-3-6
HIGH DENSITY ISOLATED DISCRETE
TERMINATION PANEL, 6-3-41
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel,
6-3-1, 6-3-41
jumpers, 6-3-44
label, 6-3-43
solid state relays, 6-3-45
Highway Interface Adapter. See HIA
host, 10-2-14
hubs, 3-4-11
Hybrid PeerWay, 2-3-1, 2-3-2
I
IAC5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
IAC5A, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
IBM Deskstar, 3-5-2
IC454--187, 7-3-5
IDC5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
IDC5-B, 6-3-38
F, 6-3-38
IDC5B, 5-2-20
Index
SV: Index-10
CP, 4-2-34
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II, 6-3-10
floppy disk drive 3.5--inch, 3-5-16
Panel, 6-3-44
Keyboard Electronics Board, 3-1-12
MiniConsole 5 1/4 inch floppy disk drive, 3-5-20
MPCII, 4-3-12, 4-3-15
Multi--FIM Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-26
NV Memory
bubble, 4-2-53
RAM, 4-2-48
OI Bubble Memory, 3-7-67
OI NV RAM, 3-7-78
Optical Repeater/Attenuator, 2-2-8
PeerWay Interface, 3-7-18
PLC FlexTerm, 5-4-8
Printer Interface, 3-7-51
6-2-10
6-2-8
SCSI, 3-7-56
tape drive, 3-5-25
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1, 7-4-10
IDC5F, 5-2-20
IDC5G, 6-3-38
IDC5N, 6-3-38
installing
Remote Communications Terminal Panel II,
6-2-6
6-2-9
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard, 5-1-37
INTERFACE RS422--RS232, 5-4-13
INTERFACE RS422--RS422, 5-4-20
Intrinsic Safety, 6-6-1, 6-6-2
Elcon IS Termination Panel, 6-6-3
MTL IS Termination Panels, 6-6-14, 6-6-25
IS. See Intrinsic Safety
fuses, 5-5-18
jumpers, 5-5-17
Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-27, 5-5-30
fuses, 5-5-32
LEDs and Test Points, 5-5-29
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-1, 6-3-28
fuses, 6-3-40
input points, 6-3-37
jumpers, 6-3-39
labels, 6-3-33
output points, 6-3-36
solid state relays, 6-3-38
ISOLATED DISCRETE TERMINATION PANEL A,
6-3-28
ISOLATED DISCRETE TERMINATION PANEL B,
6-3-28
ISOLATED INPUT, 5-5-15
ISOLATED OUTPUT FIC, 5-5-27
ISOLATED OUTPUT FIC 0--20 MA, 5-5-27
J
Joystick, 3-1-11
Upgrade Kit, 3-1-11
JU475-2AEG, 3-5-18
3AEG, 3-5-18
4AEG, 3-5-18
jumpers
Analog FIC, 5-1-31
5-1-37
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V, 5-1-8
Contact FIC, 5-2-26
ControlFile, 4-1-3
RS3: Service Manual
K
KEYBD INT./ VIDEO ISOLATOR, 3-1-15
KEYBD INTERFACE/VIDEO ISOLATOR, 3-1-15
keyboard, problems, 10-3-21
KEYBOARD ELECTRONICS, 3-1-12
Keyboard Electronics Board, 3-1-12
jumpers, 3-1-12
Touchpad, 3-1-13
trackball, 3-1-13
Keyboard Interface
access, 3-1-23
fuses, 3-1-25
jumper, 3-1-24
Index
SV: Index-11
LEDs, 3-1-24
Multitube Command Console, 3-1-14
Keycap Puller, 3-1-6
Keyswitch Assembly, Pedestal Command Console,
3-2-5
L
LEDs
MPC, 4-3-33
MUX, 4-3-33
PLC, 4-3-33
AC/DC Power Supply
(with battery backup), 1-2-7
without battery backup, 1-2-16
Analog FIC, 5-1-30
5-1-36
CC, 4-3-33
checking, 9-1-12
Contact FIC, 5-2-25
ControlFile 5 and 12 V DC Power Regulator,
4-2-16
ControlFile 5V DC Power Regulator, 4-2-9
CP, 4-2-29
Discrete FIM, 6-3-50
Fiber Optic I/O Converter, 6-2-16
LPM, 6-4-41
MAIO FIM, 6-4-49
Mark 1 Remote Power Supply, 1-2-31, 1-2-34
MiniConsole Floppy Interface, 3-3-13
MLC, 4-3-35
MUX Power Regulator, 5-3-5
NV Memory
bubble, 4-2-52
RAM, 4-2-44
OI NV RAM, 3-7-74
OI Power supply, 3-7-22
Output Bypass Card, 5-1-21
Pixel Graphics Video Generator, 3-7-41
RS3: Service Manual
PX, 2-3-7
SCSI, 3-7-55
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard, 5-1-40
SSC, 4-3-35
VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel, 7-4-7
LFD. See Line Fault Detection
Line Fault Detection, 6-6-20
Local Field Termination Board, 5-2-13
LOOP CALLUP (32 SWITCHES), 3-2-4
Loop Callup Keyboard, Pedestal Command
Console, 3-2-4
Loop Power Module. See LPM
LPM, 6-4-39
fuses, 6-4-41
LEDs, 6-4-41
LPS 105S, 3-5-2
LPS 170S, 3-5-2
LPS 270S, 3-5-2
M
M9047, 7-4-8
Mag Innovision CRT, 3-1-27
magnetic tape drive, 3-5-23
cleaner kit, 9-1-4
MAI32 Termination Panel, 6-4-29
Main Keyboard, 3-1-7
jumpers, 3-1-7
Replacement Subassembly, 3-1-7
Main Keyboard/Trackball, 3-1-6
Main Keyboard/Trackball/Option, 3-1-6
maintaining, CRT, 9-1-14
maintenance, scheduled, 9-1-1
MAIO, 6-4-1
FIM LEDs, 6-4-49
FIMs, 6-4-42
termination panels, 6-4-2
MAIO TERMINATION PANEL, 6-4-17
MAIO Termination Panel, 6-4-17
MAIO16 TERMINATION PANEL, 6-4-4
MAIO16 Termination Panel, 6-4-4
MARK 1 Remote Power Supply, fuses, 1-2-31,
1-2-34
Marshaling Panel
Analog, 5-1-54
Contact, 5-2-16
Current MUX, 5-3-9
MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface, 7-4-4
MPC, 5-1-54
RTD MUX, 5-3-10
Serial, 5-1-54
VAX 3xxx/VAX4xxx PeerWay, 7-4-6
Voltage MUX, 5-3-7
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block, 5-1-57
MC PEERWAY, 3-7-15
Index
SV: Index-12
MC VIDEO GENERATOR, 3-3-7
MDIO, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel, 6-6-14
MDIO--MTL I.S. ISOLATOR BARRIERS
TERMINATION PANEL A, 6-6-14
MDIO--MTL I.S.. ISOLATOR BARRIERS
TERMINATION PANEL B, 6-6-14
MDIOH, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
MDIOL, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
memory, dump, 10-3-12
automatic, 10-3-12
Memory Dump screen, 10-3-12
Memory View screen, 10-3-16
Menu Confidence screen, 10-3-20
messages
broadcast, 10-2-14
point--to--point, 10-2-14
MicroVAX II, QBI Hardware Kit, 7-4-3
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel, 7-4-3
MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel,
7-4-4, 7-4-6
mini--floppy interface card, 3-5-18
MINICON POWER REGULATOR, 3-7-20
MiniConsole, 3-3-1
CRT, 3-3-11
Floppy Disk Drive, 3-3-11
floppy disk drive, jumpers, 3-5-20
Floppy Interface (SCSI), 3-3-12
keyboards, 3-3-4
OI Processor Card, 3-3-6
PeerWay Interface Card, 3-3-6
Power Regulator Card, 3-3-6
Remote Power Supply, 3-3-16
MINICONSOLE PRINTER INTERFACE, 3-7-46
MLC, 4-3-20
function, 4-3-21
LEDs, 4-3-32
fuses, 4-3-24
LEDs, 4-3-35
MODE Pushbutton, 5-1-19
fuse, 3-3-10
LEDs, 3-3-9
Raster Test Button, 3-3-9
MPC, 4-3-2
fuses, 4-3-19
LEDs, 4-3-33
MPC Analog Card Cage, 5-1-2
MPC Analog FIC, 5-1-24
MPC Contact Card Cage, 5-2-2
MPC Contact FlexTerm, 5-2-2
MPC CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD,
5-2-4
MPC Marshaling Panel, 5-1-54
MPC5, 4-3-2
MPCI, 4-3-2
function, 4-3-10
MPCII, 4-3-2
function, 4-3-5, 4-3-7
RS3: Service Manual
jumpers, 4-3-12, 4-3-15

fuse, 1-2-19
jumper, 1-2-18
MTL
4014, 6-6-22
4021, 6-6-22
4023, 6-6-22
4025, 6-6-22
4041B, 6-6-29
4041P, 6-6-29
4045B, 6-6-29
4046P, 6-6-29
MTL IS Termination Panels, 6-6-14, 6-6-25
MULTI LOOP PROCESSOR, 4-3-20
MULTI STRATEGY PROCESSOR, 4-3-20
Multi--FIM Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-1,
6-3-23
jumpers, 6-3-26
label, 6-3-25
MULTI--FIM TERMINATION PANEL, 6-3-23
Multi--Loop Controller Processor. See MLC
Multi--Loop FlexTerm, 5-5-1
replacement, 9-2-11
MULTI--PURPOSE CONTROLLER II, 4-3-2
MULTI--STRATEGY MARSHALLING PANEL,
5-1-54, 5-3-10
MultiLoop FlexTerm, 5-5-2
Multiplexer Controller Processor. See MUX
Multiplexer FEM, calibrating, 8-4-2
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware, 5-3-1
MULTIPLEXER PROCESSOR, 4-3-30
Multipoint Analog I/O. See MAIO
Multipoint Discrete I/O. See MDIO
Multipoint I/O
address jumpers, 6-1-4
addressing, 6-1-4
communication wiring, 6-1-10
grounding, 6-1-8
installation, 6-1-1, 6-1-8
online replacement, 6-1-6
power wiring, 6-1-8
redundancy, 6-1-6
scanning rate, 6-1-5
system cabling, 6-1-1
MultiPurpose Controller Processor. See MPC
MultiPurpose Controller Processor II, 4-3-2
Multitube Command Console, 3-1-1
CRT
Barco CD 551 and ICD 551, 3-1-35
Hitachi 21, 3-1-26
Iiyama 17, 3-1-26
Mag Innovision, 3-1-27
Sony, 3-1-27
ViewSonic 17, 3-1-26
keyboard assembly, 3-1-4
keyboard electronics, 3-1-12
keyboard error reporting, 3-1-5
Multitube Electronics Cabinet, 3-7-2
MUX, 4-3-30
Index
SV: Index-13
Communication Card, 5-3-5
fuse, 4-3-31
LEDs, 4-3-33
Power Regulator, 5-3-4
MUX Cable Assembly, 200 Points, 5-3-3
MUX FEM, calibrating, 8-4-1
MUX FlexTerm, 5-3-2
MUX Front End Modules (FEMs), 5-3-14
MUX MARSH PANEL, 5-3-9
MUX Marshaling Panels, 5-3-7
MUX Power Regulator, 5-3-4
LEDs, 5-3-5
N
node address, 3-7-18
Node Dump screen, 10-3-19
NON--ISO & ISO ANALOG OUTPUT/INPUT CARD
EXTENDER, 5-5-33
NON--ISO ANALOG OUTPUT, 5-5-21
fuses, 5-5-12
jumpers, 5-5-11
fuses, 5-5-26
jumpers, 5-5-25
NON--ISOLATED OUTPUT, 5-5-21
Nonvolatile Memory. See NV Memory
NV BUBBLE MEMORY, 4-2-39
NV MEMORY, 4-2-39
NV Memory, 4-2-39
bubble, 3-7-62, 4-2-50
fuses, 4-2-53
jumpers, 4-2-53
LEDs, 4-2-52
problems, 10-6-1
test points, 4-2-52
RAM, 3-7-69, 4-2-41
battery replacement, 4-2-49
fuse, 4-2-49
jumpers, 4-2-48
LED sequences, 4-2-46
LEDs, 4-2-44
test points, 4-2-44
NV RAM, OI, 3-7-69
O
OAC5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
OAC5-1, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
A, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
OAC5A5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
OBC, 5-1-18
OBU, 5-5-34
RS3: Service Manual
ODC5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38

ODC5A, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
ODC5RM , 6-3-38
OI BUBBLE MEMORY, 3-7-60, 3-7-62
jumpers, 3-7-67
LED Sequences, 3-7-66
LEDs, 3-7-65
OI BUBBLE MEMORY SC, 3-7-60, 3-7-62
OI Card Cage, 3-7-1, 3-7-7, 3-7-14
cleaning filter, 9-1-10
EMC Compliant, 3-7-7, 3-7-10
troubleshooting, 10-3-24
OI COLOR VIDEO, 3-7-42
OI GRAPHICS VIDEO GEN, 3-7-39
OI KEYBOARD INTERFACE, 3-2-6
OI MINI FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER, 3-3-12
OI Nonvolatile Memory, 3-7-60
OI NV RAM, 3-7-60, 3-7-69, 3-7-74
battery replacement, 3-7-81, 9-2-4
jumpers, 3-7-78
LED Sequences, 3-7-77
OI POWER SUPPLY, 3-7-20
fuses, 3-7-24
jumpers, 3-7-23
OI Processor, 3-7-25
fuses, 3-7-38
jumpers, 3-7-37
LEDs, 3-7-36
OI PROCESSOR 68020, 3-7-30
fuses, 3-7-33
jumpers, 3-7-33
LEDs, 3-7-32
OI PROCESSOR 68020 W/ASIC, 3-7-30
fuses, 3-7-29
jumpers, 3-7-29
LEDs, 3-7-29
OI PROCESSOR V, 3-7-27
OI Remote Power Supply, 1-2-20
fuse, 1-2-22
OI SCSI HOST ADAPTER, 3-7-52
online replacement
Multipoint I/O, 6-1-6
Operator Interface Card Cage. See OI Card Cage
operator keyboard, 3-1-6
jumpers, 3-1-7
Optical Isolator Module
Contact I/O, 5-2-20
Discrete I/O, 6-3-38
Panel, 6-3-45
Optical PeerWay, 2-2-1, 2-2-2
grounding, 2-2-10
jumpers and LEDs, 2-2-8
Index
SV: Index-14
Optical Tap Box, 2-2-3
connecting cables, 2-2-5
Option Keyboard, 3-1-9
jumpers, 3-1-9
Replacement Subassembly, 3-1-9
OPTO Isolator, 5-2-20
Opto/Electric cable, 2-2-5 2-2-7
ORR5--1, 6-3-38
OS KEYBOARD INTERFACE, 3-2-6
Output Bypass Card, 5-1-18, 5-1-19
fuses, 5-1-22
LEDs, 5-1-21
operating instructions, 5-1-21
Output Bypass Unit, 5-5-34
P
Pansonic
JU474--2AEG, 3-5-18
JU475--3AEG, 3-5-18
JU475--4AEG, 3-5-18
Password Keyboard Interface , 3-1-15
PC compatible keyboard, 3-1-6
Alphanumeric Keyboard (Rotating), 3-2-5
Command Entry Keyboard, 3-2-4
Configuration Keyboard, 3-2-4
CRT, 3-2-8
Disk Interface Card (SCSI), 3-2-11
keyboards, 3-2-3
Keyswitch Assembly, 3-2-5
Loop Callup Keyboard, 3-2-4
Power Supply, 3-2-11
Printer Interface Card, 3-2-11
Trackball Keyboard, 3-2-4
PeerWay
Backup Node screen, 10-2-12
cable fault diagnostics, 10-2-40
electrical, 2-1-1
fault conditions, 10-2-30
fault detection, 10-2-31
fault diagnostics, 10-2-35
hybrid, 2-3-1, 2-3-2
Node screen, 10-2-12
optical, 2-2-1
Overview screen, 10-2-9
Performance screen, 10-2-3
sample problems, 10-2-29
screens, 10-2-1
twinax, 2-1-1
PeerWay Backup Node screen, 10-2-12
fuse, 4-2-6
jumpers, 4-2-5
PeerWay Drop Cables, MicroVAX, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
RS3: Service Manual
PeerWay Extender. See PX

PeerWay Field Termination Kit, 9-3-3
PeerWay Interface, 3-7-15
jumpers, 3-7-18
PeerWay Interface Card, QBI, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
PeerWay Interface Devices, troubleshooting, 10-6-1
PeerWay Node screen, 10-2-12
PeerWay Overview screen, 10-2-9
use in fault detection, 10-2-33
PeerWay Performance screen, 10-2-3
PeerWay Tap
fuses, 2-1-6
test points, 2-1-6
Peripheral Devices, disk drives, 3-5-1
Pixel Graphics Video Generator, 3-7-39
LEDs, 3-7-41
Plant Status screen, 10-2-2
PLC, 4-3-30, 5-4-1
Fuse, 4-3-31
FlexTerm, 5-4-2
hardware, 5-4-1
Port I/O Card Redundancy, 5-4-11
redundancy, 5-4-9
PLC FlexTerm, 5-4-2
jumpers, 5-4-8
point--to--point messages, 10-2-14
Port I/O Card, 5-4-13
redundancy, 5-4-11
RS422/RS232, 5-4-13
RS422/RS422, 5-4-20
power, redundancy, 1-5-1
power regulator
MUX, 5-3-4
OI, 3-7-20
Power Regulator Card
5 and 12 Volt DC, 4-2-13
5V DC Only, 4-2-7
checking voltages, 9-1-24
ControlFile, checking voltages, 9-1-19
Inserting, 4-2-7, 4-2-13
power supplies, 1-2-1
POWER SUPPLY DISPLAY III, 1-2-14
power wiring, Multipoint I/O, 6-1-8
printer, 3-6-1
DL2600 (Fujitsu), 3-6-9
DL3800 (Fujitsu), 3-6-2
DL4600 (Fujitsu), 3-6-6
DPL24C (Fujitsu), 3-6-16
TI 810, 3-6-20
printer interface, 3-7-46
jumpers, 3-7-51
LEDs, 3-7-49
ProDrive. See Quantum
Programmable Logic Controller. See PLC
PULSE I/O, 5-1-41
Pulse I/O FIC
fuses, 5-1-45
Index
SV: Index-15
jumpers, 5-1-44
LEDs, 5-1-43
Pulse Input FIC, calibrating, 8-3-1
PX, 2-3-2
Q
QBI, 7-4-1, 7-4-2, 7-4-3
Hardware Kit, 7-4-1
QBUS Board 1, 7-4-3, 7-4-5, 7-4-8
QBUS Board 2, 7-4-3, 7-4-5, 7-4-8
QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE I, 7-4-8
QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE I+, 7-4-8
QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE II, 7-4-8
Quantum
80S, 3-5-2, 3-5-11
LPS 105S, 3-5-10
Q250, 3-5-2
Q280, 3-5-2, 3-5-13
Q540, 3-5-15
Quantum QM32100, 3-5-2
Quantum Thunderbolt, 3-5-2
R
RAM Nonvolatile Memory. See NV Memory, RAM
RAM NV Memory. See NV Memory, RAM
Raster Test Button, Monochrome Video Generator,
3-3-9
RBLC FlexTerm, 5-4-2
reactivity coupon, use, 1-3-5, 1-3-16, 1-3-18,
1-3-19, 1-3-20, 1-3-21
Recommended Resistance, 6-3-4
redundancy
Analog FIC, 5-1-28
Analog FIM, 6-4-43
CP, 4-2-27
Multipoint I/O, 6-1-6
PLC, 5-4-9
PLC Port I/O Card, 5-4-11
power, 1-5-1
Thermocouple Sensor, 8-2-7
Remote Communications Termination Panel, 6-2-2
6-2-2, 6-2-9
installing, 6-2-9
jumpers, 6-2-10
6-2-2 6-2-4
field wiring, 6-2-6
installing, 6-2-6
jumpers, 6-2-8
Remote I/O Power Supply, 1-2-28
Remote Keyswitch, 3-1-20
Remote Power Supply, 1-2-32
RS3: Service Manual
remote power supply

I/O, 1-2-28
MTCC, 1-2-18
OI, 1-2-20
remote termination panel, standard, 6-5-2
Repeater/Attenuator, optical, 2-2-8
Resistance Temperature Detector, 5-3-16
restore operations, redundant FICs, 10-5-2
RNI, 3-4-9, 7-6-1, 7-6-2
Fan Assembly, 7-6-7
PeerWay Node Label, 7-6-3
ROS CRT
Hitachi 21, 3-4-3
Iiama Vision Master 17, 3-4-3
ROS Hardware, 3-4-1
Rotating (Alphanumeric) Keyboard, Pedestal
Command Console, 3-2-5
router, 3-4-15
RPQNA, 7-4-5
RS--232C
pin assignments, 7-2-4
SCI cabling, 7-2-3
signal names, 7-2-3
RS--422
pin assignments, 7-2-7
SCI
cabling, 7-2-6
X.25 cabling, 7-2-11
X.25 clocking, 7-2-13
X.25 protocol, 7-2-9
signal names, 7-2-6
RS3
Network Interface (RNI), 3-4-9
Operator Station, 3-4-2
RS3 Network Interface, 7-6-1, 7-6-2
fuse, 5-4-19
jumpers, 5-4-17
LEDs, 5-4-16
RS232 pin assignments, 5-4-15
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card
fuse, 5-4-24
jumpers, 5-4-23
LEDs, 5-4-22
RS422 pin assignments, 5-4-22
RTD, 5-3-16
RTD FEM, checking calibration, 8-4-9
RTD MUX MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-3-10
Rush Brush, 9-3-2
S
scheduled maintenance, 9-1-1
SCI (Supervisory Computer Interface)
EIA options, 7-2-15
hardware, 7-2-1
SCI Bubble Memory, 3-7-60
Scorpion
5945C, 3-5-23
5945S, 3-5-23
Index
SV: Index-16
Scratchpad, 3-1-10
screen
Configure HIA, 7-3-9
ControlFile Status, 10-4-7
FIC Detail, 10-5-18
FIC Status, 10-5-13
Field I/O Status, 10-5-13
FIM Detail, 10-5-18
FIM Status, 10-5-13
HIA Status, 7-3-11
Memory Dump, 10-3-12
Memory View, 10-3-16
Menu Confidence, 10-3-20
Node Dump, 10-3-19
Off--Line Diagnostics, 10-3-8
PeerWay Backup Node, 10-2-12
PeerWay Node, 10-2-12
PeerWay Overview, 10-2-9
PeerWay Performance, 10-2-3
Plant Status, 10-2-2
Screwdrivers, 9-3-1
SCSI, 3-7-52
jumpers, 3-7-56
LEDs, 3-7-55
SCSI BOARD 2, 3-7-52
Serial I/O, troubleshooting procedures, 10-5-3
Serial I/O FIC, calibrating, 8-1-1
SERIAL MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-1-54
SERIAL PROCESSOR, 4-3-2
Server, 10-2-14
Single Feed AC Entrance Panel, 1-1-3
SINGLE STRATEGY PROCESSOR, 4-3-25
Single--Strategy Controller Processor. See SSC
Single--Strategy FlexTerm, 5-5-1, 5-5-4
analog wiring, 5-5-5
contact wiring, 5-5-5
replacement, 9-2-11
SIO, RTD/TC, 5-1-46
Small Computer System Interface. See SCSI
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard
Analog FIC, 5-1-35
installation, 5-1-38
Kit, 5-1-37
LEDs, 5-1-40
fuses, 5-5-14
jumpers, 5-5-14
SMART TRANSMITTER OPTION, 5-1-37
SMART XMTR FIC, 5-5-13
Socket, 10-2-14
solid state relay
Panel, 6-3-45
Sony 14 CRT, 3-1-27
SRU, hardware, 7-1-1
SSC, 4-3-25
fuses, 4-3-27
LEDs, 4-3-35
Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface , 3-1-16
RS3: Service Manual
STANDARD REMOTE TERMINATION PANEL,

6-5-2
Standard Remote Termination Panel, 6-3-1, 6-5-2
Star Coupler, 2-2-9
static pad, 9-3-2
status bits
analog, 10-5-13
contact, 10-5-13
discrete I/O, 10-5-13, 10-5-18
pulse, 10-5-13
Supervisory Computer Interface. See SCI
System Manager Station, 3-1-1
electronics cabinet, 3-7-4
System Power Supply, checking voltages, 9-1-26
System Resource Unit. See SRU
T
Tandberg, 5623, 3-5-23
tape drive, 3-5-1, 3-5-23
cleaning, 9-1-4
grounding, 3-5-24
jumpers, 3-5-25
switches, 3-5-25
Tape Drive Head Cleaner, Refill Kit, 9-1-4
Tape Drive Head Cleaning Kit, 9-3-2
TC/RTD FIC, 5-1-46
calibrating, 8-2-1
fuse, 5-1-53
jumpers, 5-1-52
LEDs, 5-1-51
Terminal Block, Marshaling Panel Auxiliary, 5-1-57
termination panel
Direct Discrete, 6-3-14
Direct Discrete II, 6-3-4
Discrete High Density Isolated, 6-3-41
Discrete Multi--FIM, 6-3-23
Isolated Discrete, 6-3-28
Standard Remote, 6-5-2
TERMINATOR CONTROLFILE BOTTOM, 4-1-7
test points
ControlFile
5 and 12 V DC Power Regulator, 4-2-16
CP, 4-2-29
Isolated Analog Output, 5-5-29
NV Memory
bubble, 4-2-52
RAM, 4-2-44 4-2-46
OI NV RAM, 3-7-74
Thermocouple and Voltage FEM, 5-3-16
Thermocouple FEM, calibrating, 8-4-3
Index
SV: Index-17
thermocouple sensor, redundancy, 8-2-7
TI 810 printer, 3-6-20
TI 960B, 7-5-6
TI Communications Card, 7-5-6
TIC, definition, 10-2-13
TIC Master, 10-2-13
Time Interval Controller. See TIC
tool kit, 9-3-1
tools, recommended, 9-3-1
TOUCH PANEL, 3-1-10
Touchpad, 3-1-10
TOUCHPAD KEYBOARD, 3-1-13
Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board, 3-1-13
tower electronics cabinet, 3-7-2
TP/8 Hub, 3-4-11
TRACKBALL 68HC05, 3-1-13
Trackball Assembly, 3-1-8
TRACKBALL KEYBOARD, 3-1-13
Trackball Keyboard, 3-1-8
Assembly, 3-1-8
cleaning, 9-1-5
replacement subassembly, 3-1-8
replacing trackball, 9-1-5
Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board, 3-1-13
TRACKBALL SW MATRIX, 3-2-4
troubleshooting
Analog I/O, 10-5-8
consoles, 10-3-1
ControlFiles, 10-4-1
fiber optic PeerWay cables, 10-2-42
Input/Output, 10-5-1
OI Card Cage problems, 10-3-24
PeerWay, 10-2-1
PeerWay Interface Devices, 10-6-1
power system, 10-1-1
Serial I/O, 10-5-3
Twinax PeerWay cables, 10-2-41
Twinax PeerWay, 2-1-1
cable, 2-1-9
termination, 2-1-11
troubleshooting cables, 10-2-41
Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes, 2-1-3
twinaxial connector
crimp type, 2-1-12
solder type, 2-1-12
Universal Voltage FEM, 5-3-16

UPS, 3-4-16
V
Vacuum Cleaner, 9-3-2
VAX QBUS Interface, 7-4-1
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1, jumpers, 7-4-10
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2
jumpers, 7-4-13
LEDs, 7-4-15
VAX QBUS Interface Marshalling Panel, LEDs,
7-4-7
Video Generator
Character Graphics, 3-7-42
Monochrome, 3-3-7
Pixel Graphics, 3-7-39
Viper
2060S, 3-5-23
2150S, 3-5-23
Voltage Input FEM, calibrating, 8-4-3
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel, 5-3-7
VOLTAGE MUX MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-3-7
W
Winchester disk drive. See hard disk drive
Wipe Bubble procedure, 10-4-9
wiring color codes, 1-4-10
X
X.25 protocol, 7-2-9
SCI, 7-2-9
cabling, 7-2-11
clocking, 7-2-13
uninterruptible power supply, 3-4-16
Y cable, 5-3-3
RS3: Service Manual
Index
SV: Index-18
RS3: Service Manual
Index

SV1P1 Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SV1P1 Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SV1P1 Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RS3t

U.S. Manual PN: 10P56980201

EFisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc., 1987--1998.

Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.

Please give us your feedback to help improve this manual.

operating the system

1. Do you actually use this manual when

2. Does this manual answer your questions?

3. What could be changed in this manual to make it more useful?

May we contact you about your comments?

Fisher-Rosemount FAX #: (612) 895-2044

Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.

Seal with tape.

Factory Repair Items

Changes for This Release

RS3: Service Manual

Numerous corrections and minor revisions have been made

About This Manual

Revision Level for This Manual

NOTE: The x in the part number is 0 for US size (8-1/2 x 11 inches) or

References to Other Manuals

For ..., see CC: 1-1.

Abbreviations of Manual Titles

RS3: Service Manual

About This Manual

Alarm Messages Manual

ABC Batch Quick Reference Guide

Configuration Quick Reference Guide

Console Configuration Manual

ControlBlock Configuration Manual

I/O Block Configuration Manual

PeerWay Interfaces Manual

Rosemount Basic Language Manual

RNI Programmers Reference Manual

RNI Installation Guide

RNI Release Notes

Site Preparation and Installation Manual

Service Quick Reference Guide

Software Discrepancies for Performance Series 1

Software Loading and Upgrade Procedure,

User Manual Master Index

RS3: Service Manual

About This Manual

RS3: Service Manual

About This Manual

AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS3: Service Manual

System Power Supply Units

DC Power Distribution Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS3: Service Manual

PeerWay Tap Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PeerWay Extender (PX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multitube Command Console Keyboard Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS3: Service Manual

Multitube Command Console Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console .

Pedestal Command Console Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .